3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description(07)(pdf)-en.pdf
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description(07)(pdf)-en.pdf as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 168,173
- Pages: 877
3900 Series Base Station
Hardware Description Issue
07
Date
2016-09-02
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Overview This document describes cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, and the components (including their configurations, functions, and specifications) and cables used in the cabinets. This document serves as a reference for 3900 series base station planning and deployment. The exteriors of components or cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different. NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, LTE refers to either LTE FDD or LTE TDD, and eNodeB refers to either an LTE FDD eNodeB or an LTE TDD eNodeB in this document. The "L" and "T" in RAT acronyms refer to LTE FDD and LTE TDD, respectively. For details about the LampSite solution, see DBS3900 LampSite Hardware Description.
Product Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Solution Version
Product Version
BTS3900
l SRAN8.0 and later versions l GBSS15.0 and later versions l RAN15.0 and later versions l eRAN6.0 and later versions
V100R008C00 and later versions
BTS3900A BTS3900L BTS3900AL
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Product Name
Solution Version
DBS3900
l SRAN8.0 and later versions
Product Version
l GBSS15.0 and later versions l RAN15.0 and later versions l eRAN6.0 and later versions l eRAN TDD 7.0 and later versions l SRAN8.0 and later versions
BTS3900C
l RAN15.0 and later versions
Cabinets, components, and RATs described in this document are supported by V100R008C00 and later versions, except the special cases listed in the following table. Item
Solution Version
Product Version
l Quadruple-Mode Base Station
Since SRAN8.1/GBSS15.1/ RAN15.1/eRAN6.1
V100R008C01
Since SRAN9.0/GBSS16/ RAN16.0/eRAN7.0/eRAN TDD 7.0
V100R009C00
Since SRAN10.0/ GBSS17.0/RAN17.0/ eRAN8.0
V100R010C00
Since SRAN11.0/ GBSS18.0/RAN18.0/ eRAN11.0/eRAN TDD 11.0
V100R011C00
l IBC10 l BBU3910 l Second-Level USU l APM30H(Ver.E) l TMC11H(Ver.E) l RFC(Ver.E) l IBBS200D(Ver.E) l IBBS200T(Ver.E) l BBU3910A l OPM50M l OPM15M l IBBS20D l IBBS300D(Ver.A) l IBBS300T(Ver.A) l USU3910 l IBBS20L l eBAT l WIUA Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Item
Solution Version
Product Version
l IBBS20L-E
Since SRAN11.1/ GBSS18.1/RAN18.1/ eRAN11.1/eRAN TDD 11.1
V100R011C10
Since SRAN12.0/ GBSS19.0/RAN19.0/ eRAN12.0/eRAN TDD 12.0
V100R012C00
l OPM30M l UMPTe l UBBPei l RMU3900A
Intended Audience This document is intended for: l
System engineers
l
Base station installation personnel
l
Site maintenance personnel
Organization 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description This section describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of each version. 2 3900 Series Base Stations 3900 series base stations include BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, DBS3900, and BTS3900C. 3 Cabinet Description This chapter describes information about cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, including components and engineering specifications of the cabinets. 4 Component Description Components in a cabinet can be classified into BBU, RF modules, power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, temperature control devices, environment monitoring devices, and other devices, in terms of function. 5 Cable Description For cable description in 3900 series base stations, see 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Convention
Description
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl +Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
About This Document
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description................................................ 1 2 3900 Series Base Stations............................................................................................................14 2.1 BTS3900....................................................................................................................................................................... 16 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900............................................................................................................ 16 2.1.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900........................................................................................................19 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900................................................. 41 2.1.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900.............................................................................................................. 57 2.1.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900........................................................................................................... 66 2.2 BTS3900L.................................................................................................................................................................... 67 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations............................................................................... 68 2.2.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900L..................................................................................................... 69 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L...............................................81 2.2.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L............................................................................................................97 2.2.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900L.......................................................................................................104 2.3 BTS3900A.................................................................................................................................................................. 105 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A.......................................................................................................................105 2.3.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900A................................................................................................... 113 2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A............................................ 176 2.3.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900A......................................................................................................... 198 2.3.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900A...................................................................................................... 218 2.4 BTS3900AL................................................................................................................................................................219 2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL.................................................................................................................... 219 2.4.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900AL................................................................................................ 221 2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A)............................. 240 2.4.4 Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A)........................................................................................ 243 2.4.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900AL....................................................................................................246 2.5 DBS3900.................................................................................................................................................................... 246 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900........................................................................................................246 2.5.2 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 (Using a BBU3900 or BBU3910)............................................................ 256 2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A.................................................................................... 307 2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910.......................................................................................................................................................................... 310 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A.............................................................................................. 344 2.5.6 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910....................................... 348 2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A..........................................................378 2.5.8 Cable Connections in a DBS3900........................................................................................................................... 380 2.6 BTS3900C.................................................................................................................................................................. 382 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C....................................................................................................................... 382 2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C............................................ 383 2.6.3 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C..........................................................................................................385 2.6.4 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900C...................................................................................................... 389
3 Cabinet Description.................................................................................................................. 391 3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description....................................................................................................................................393 3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s............................................................................................................................................ 393 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets..........................................................................................................................394 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................400 3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description................................................................................................................................. 406 3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls.......................................................................................................................................... 406 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets....................................................................................................................... 408 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 415 3.3 RFC Description......................................................................................................................................................... 421 3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC................................................................................................................................................. 421 3.3.2 Components in RFCs...............................................................................................................................................422 3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications............................................................................................................................. 429 3.4 APM30H Description................................................................................................................................................. 431 3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs............................................................................................................................................ 431 3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs.......................................................................................................................................432 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications..................................................................................................................... 445 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet..............................................................449 3.5 TMC11H Description................................................................................................................................................. 453 3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs............................................................................................................................................ 453 3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs....................................................................................................................................... 454 3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................467 3.5.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a TMC11H............................................................................................470 3.6 IBBS200D Description...............................................................................................................................................470 3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds.......................................................................................................................................... 470 3.6.2 Components in IBBS200Ds.....................................................................................................................................471 3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 479 3.7 IBBS200T Description............................................................................................................................................... 481 3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts...........................................................................................................................................481 3.7.2 Components in IBBS200Ts..................................................................................................................................... 482 3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................489 3.8 IBBS300D Description...............................................................................................................................................491 3.8.1 Exterior of an IBBS300D........................................................................................................................................ 491 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds.....................................................................................................................................492 3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 495 3.9 IBBS300T Description............................................................................................................................................... 497 3.9.1 Exterior of an IBBS300T.........................................................................................................................................497 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts..................................................................................................................................... 498 3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................501 3.10 IBBS20D Description...............................................................................................................................................502 3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D........................................................................................................................................ 502 3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D................................................................................................................................. 503 3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 505 3.11 IBBS20L Description............................................................................................................................................... 507 3.11.1 Exterior of an IBBS20L.........................................................................................................................................507 3.11.2 Ports and Indicators on an IBBS20L..................................................................................................................... 508 3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................510 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual..........................................................................................................................................511 3.12.1 Exterior.................................................................................................................................................................. 511 3.12.2 Ports and Indicators............................................................................................................................................... 512 3.12.3 Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 515 3.13 IBBS700D Description.............................................................................................................................................516 3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D...................................................................................................................................... 517 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D............................................................................................................................... 518 3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D........................................................................................................ 521 3.14 IBBS700T Description............................................................................................................................................. 523 3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T.......................................................................................................................................523 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T................................................................................................................................525 3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T.........................................................................................................528 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description............................................................................................................................ 530 3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet.....................................................................................................................530 3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 531 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications.............................................................................................................. 537 3.15.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a BTS3900AL Cabinet....................................................................... 542 3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description............................................................................................................................... 542 3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet....................................................................................................................... 542 3.16.2 Components of BTS3900C Cabinets.....................................................................................................................543 3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................. 551 3.17 OMB Description..................................................................................................................................................... 557 3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB..............................................................................................................................................557 3.17.2 Components in OMBs........................................................................................................................................... 558 3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 561 3.18 IMB03 Description................................................................................................................................................... 563 3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03........................................................................................................................................... 563 3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets........................................................................................................................... 563 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................... 566 3.19 IFS06 Description.....................................................................................................................................................567 3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06............................................................................................................................................. 567 3.19.2 Components of an IFS06....................................................................................................................................... 568 3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................... 568 3.20 INS12 Description.................................................................................................................................................... 569 3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12............................................................................................................................................ 569 3.20.2 Components of an INS12...................................................................................................................................... 570 3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications.........................................................................................................................570 3.21 IMS06 Description................................................................................................................................................... 571 3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06............................................................................................................................................. 571 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06......................................................................................................................................572 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06...............................................................................................................574 3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06............................................................................................ 575 3.22 IBC10 Description.................................................................................................................................................... 576 3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10............................................................................................................................................ 576 3.22.2 Components in IBC10s..........................................................................................................................................578 3.22.3 Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 580
4 Component Description........................................................................................................... 583 4.1 BBU............................................................................................................................................................................ 584 4.2 RF Modules................................................................................................................................................................ 584 4.3 Power Equipment....................................................................................................................................................... 584 4.3.1 EPS 01..................................................................................................................................................................... 584 4.3.2 EPS30-4815AF........................................................................................................................................................ 596 4.3.3 EPS4890.................................................................................................................................................................. 598 4.3.4 EPS24S48100DC.....................................................................................................................................................600 4.3.5 EPU03A...................................................................................................................................................................602 4.3.6 EPU05A...................................................................................................................................................................614 4.3.7 ETP48150-A3.......................................................................................................................................................... 639 4.3.8 ETP48400................................................................................................................................................................ 641 4.3.9 ETP48100-A1.......................................................................................................................................................... 643 4.3.10 ETP48100-B1........................................................................................................................................................ 645 4.3.11 PMU.......................................................................................................................................................................647 4.3.12 PSU........................................................................................................................................................................ 658 4.3.13 DCDU.................................................................................................................................................................... 668 4.3.14 PDU....................................................................................................................................................................... 711 4.3.15 Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet........................................................................................................ 720 4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M...................................................................................................................... 732 4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC.................................................................................................................................. 732 4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL....................................................................................................................... 733 4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T................................................................................................ 734 4.3.20 AC Junction Box................................................................................................................................................... 735 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
4.3.21 Storage Battery...................................................................................................................................................... 737 4.4 Monitoring Devices.................................................................................................................................................... 739 4.4.1 CMUA..................................................................................................................................................................... 739 4.4.2 CMUE......................................................................................................................................................................744 4.4.3 CMUEA...................................................................................................................................................................748 4.4.4 CMUG..................................................................................................................................................................... 753 4.4.5 CMUH..................................................................................................................................................................... 755 4.4.6 HEUA...................................................................................................................................................................... 758 4.4.7 HEUB...................................................................................................................................................................... 760 4.4.8 CMUF...................................................................................................................................................................... 762 4.4.9 CCU......................................................................................................................................................................... 765 4.4.10 CCU01D-03...........................................................................................................................................................768 4.4.11 CCUB.....................................................................................................................................................................772 4.4.12 WIUA.................................................................................................................................................................... 776 4.4.13 eBat........................................................................................................................................................................ 780 4.5 Surge Protection Devices............................................................................................................................................782 4.5.1 SLPU....................................................................................................................................................................... 782 4.5.2 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals................................................................................................783 4.5.3 UELP....................................................................................................................................................................... 785 4.5.4 UFLP....................................................................................................................................................................... 786 4.5.5 USLP....................................................................................................................................................................... 788 4.5.6 GPS Surge Protector................................................................................................................................................ 790 4.5.7 SPD.......................................................................................................................................................................... 791 4.5.8 AC Surge Protection Box........................................................................................................................................ 792 4.6 Temperature Control Devices..................................................................................................................................... 793 4.6.1 Fan Assembly.......................................................................................................................................................... 793 4.6.2 (Optional) AC Heater.............................................................................................................................................. 819 4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film.......................................................................................................................................... 820 4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T........................................................................................................................... 823 4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T...................................................................................................................................824 4.6.6 HAU01A-01............................................................................................................................................................ 825 4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly..............................................................................................................................827 4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan........................................................................................................................................ 827 4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan........................................................................................................................................828 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame............................................................................................................................................. 829 4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core............................................................................................................................................. 833 4.7 Environment Monitoring Device................................................................................................................................834 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 834 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 837 4.7.3 (Optional) EMU.......................................................................................................................................................845 4.7.4 (Optional) EMUA/EMUB....................................................................................................................................... 846 4.8 Other Devices............................................................................................................................................................. 846 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
4.8.1 (Optional) GATM.................................................................................................................................................... 846 4.8.2 (Optional) WGRU................................................................................................................................................... 847 4.8.3 ELU......................................................................................................................................................................... 851 4.8.4 (Optional) SOU........................................................................................................................................................855 4.8.5 (Optional) DDF........................................................................................................................................................857 4.8.6 (Optional) Filler Module......................................................................................................................................... 858 4.8.7 ODM06D................................................................................................................................................................. 859 4.8.8 OFD06..................................................................................................................................................................... 860
5 Cable Description...................................................................................................................... 863
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
1
Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
This section describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of each version.
07 (2016-09-02) This is the seventh commercial release. Compared with Issue 06 (2016-07-30), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 06 (2016-07-30), this issue includes the following changes. Topic
Change Description
3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications
Added the heat dissipation capability of an OMB (Ver.C).
06 (2016-07-30) This is the sixth commercial release. Compared with Issue 05 (2016-06-25), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 05 (2016-06-25), this issue includes the following changes.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications
Changed cabinet weight.
l 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications l 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications l 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications
05 (2016-06-25) This is the fifth commercial release. Compared with Issue 04 (2016-04-20), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 04 (2016-04-20), this issue includes the following changes.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications
Changed descriptions of the storage environment.
l 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications l 3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications l 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications l 3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications l 3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications l 3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications l 3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications l 3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications l 3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications l 3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications l 3.12.3 Engineering Specifications l 3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D l 3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T l 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications l 3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications l 3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications l 3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications l 3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications l 3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications l 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 l 3.22.3 Engineering Specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
04 (2016-04-20) This is the fourth commercial release. Compared with Issue 03 (2016-03-07), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 03 (2016-03-07), this issue includes the following changes. Topic
Change Description
All sections
Changed some descriptions.
03 (2016-03-07) This is the third commercial release. Compared with Issue 02 (2015-12-30), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 02 (2015-12-30), this issue includes the following changes. Topic
Change Description
l 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 and its child topics
Added RRU types in notes.
l 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L and its child topics l 2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A and its child topics l 2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 and its child topics
02 (2015-12-30) This is the second commercial release. Compared with Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l
3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual
l
3.12.1 Exterior
l
3.12.2 Ports and Indicators
l
3.12.3 Engineering Specifications
Compared with Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following change. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M
Added the OPM30M.
Compared with Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
01 (2015-07-30) This is the first commercial release. This document incorporates 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of all SRAN versions and presents differential information among these versions. Versions corresponding to original 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description are as follows: l
SRAN8.0: V100R008C00
l
SRAN8.1: V100R008C01
l
SRAN9.0: V100R009C00
l
SRAN10.0: V100R010C00
l
SRAN10.1: V100R010C10
The information added before the combination of all versions is as follows: l
3.10 IBBS20D Description and its child topics
l
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS20D
l
4.4.4 CMUG
l
4.4.10 CCU01D-03
l
2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A and its child topics
l
2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A
l
2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A
l
3.8 IBBS300D Description and its child topics
l
3.9 IBBS300T Description and its child topics
l
4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T
l
4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL
l
4.8.7 ODM06D
l
4.8.8 OFD06
l
3.21 IMS06 Description
l
3.21.2 Components of an IMS06
l
3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06
l
When the BBU Is Installed in the IBC10
l
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IBC10
l
3.22 IBC10 Description and its child topics
l
Fan Assembly (FAU03D-02)
l
3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s
l
3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls
l
3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC
l
3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs
l
3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs
l
3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds
l
3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts
l
3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D
l
3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T
l
3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet
l
3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet
l
3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB
l
3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03
l
3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06
l
3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12
l
3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06
l
3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10
The modification made before the combination of all versions is as follows. Topic
Change Description
About This Document
l Modified the product versions supported by this document. l Added information about the product versions supported by each cabinet, component, and RAT.
Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
Added the application scenarios of an OMB (Ver.C) that is configured with an IBBS20D.
l 4.3.21 Storage Battery
Added information about these components used in an IBBS20D.
l 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame l 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor l 4.8.3 ELU l 4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l Outdoor AC Installation Scenario
Renamed BBU3910A BBU3910A3.
l Outdoor DC Installation Scenario l 2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A l 2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A l 2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A l 3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D Outdoor AC Installation Scenario Outdoor DC Installation Scenario l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Added RRU types that can be used in a DBS3900 (BBU3910A). Added descriptions of scenarios where the BTS3900A is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.
l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Added descriptions of scenarios where the BTS3900AL is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.
l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply l 4.3.20 AC Junction Box l 4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T
Added descriptions of scenarios where the DBS3900 is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.
Added information about these components used in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
l 4.6.6 HAU01A-01 l 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame l 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Added information about these components used in an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or IBBS20D.
l 4.8.3 ELU Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Added the application scenarios of an OMB (Ver.C) that is configured with an IBBS20D.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900
Added figures showing dimensions of cabinets.
l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D)
l Deleted descriptions of 110 V AC and 120 V AC scenarios. l Deleted descriptions of the EPU05A-04.
l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets l 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets l 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06 l 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900
Updated the description of the AC BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet.
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations
Added the description of AC scenarios for the BTS3900L (Ver.D).
l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.C)
Added the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC base station configured with RFUs and RRUs.
l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l 2.4 BTS3900AL and its child topics l 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description and its child topics l 3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs l 3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs
Updated the figure for the BTS3900AL cabinet.
l Replaced filler panels in the APM30H (Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D) with air baffles. l Added the descriptions that the APM30H and TMC11H are configured with EMUB modules.
All sections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Changed the names of all EPC6 connectors into EPC4 connectors.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Optimized the descriptions of cabinet application scenarios supported by a BTS3900.
l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900 l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Added the descriptions that the BTS3900 (Ver.D) and BTS3900L (Ver.D) are configured with IMS06 cabinets.
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 4.3.6 EPU05A l PMU 11A or PMU 11B l PSU (R4850G2) l DCDU-12B l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Deleted the descriptions of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a cabinet and the DCDU-12B is installed on a wall.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet
Deleted the description of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
l Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.C)
Deleted the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers, power cables, and power distribution schemes when DCDU-12B modules are installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C) 4.3.21 Storage Battery
Added precautions for using non-Huawei storage batteries.
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Modified the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables.
4.7.2 Temperature Sensor
Modified the exterior of the hole in rubber plug for a temperature sensor.
l 4.3.6 EPU05A
Added the description that components can be installed in the IMS06.
l PMU 11A or PMU 11B l PSU (R4850G2) l DCDU-12B l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet
Added the descriptions of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a cabinet and the DCDU-12B is installed on a wall.
l Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet
Added the description of scenarios in which DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B modules are installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply
Added descriptions of the scenario where the DBS3900 uses an IBC10.
DCDU-12C
Added descriptions of the IBC10.
4.8.3 ELU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900
Added figures showing dimensions of cabinets.
l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
Added the description of quadruple-mode base stations.
l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply l Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs About This Document
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Added descriptions of the LampSite solution.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
The information of base stations, cabinets, and components in the cabinets in hardware description for all 3900 series base stations is included in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
The following hardware descriptions for 3900 series base stations are included: l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900 (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900L (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900L (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900A (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900A (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description l BTS3900C (Ver.C) Hardware Description and BTS3900C WCDMA Hardware Description l DBS3900 Hardware Description
The information deleted before the combination of all versions is as follows: l
EPU03A-20
l
Components of an EPU03A-20
l
EPU03A-20 subrack
l
"Monitoring schemes" and "Customized alarm input principles for 3900 series base stations". For details about the monitoring schemes and customized alarm input principles, see chapter "Reference for Configuring the Monitoring Function" in Monitoring Management.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2
3900 Series Base Stations
About This Chapter 3900 series base stations include BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, DBS3900, and BTS3900C. 3900 series base stations are divided into the following categories: l
Indoor macro base stations: BTS3900 and BTS3900L
l
Outdoor macro base stations: BTS3900A and BTS3900AL
l
Outdoor compact mini base station: BTS3900C
l
Distributed base station: DBS3900
2.1 BTS3900 This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900. 2.2 BTS3900L This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900L. 2.3 BTS3900A This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900A. 2.4 BTS3900AL This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900AL. 2.5 DBS3900 This section describes cabinets/racks, cabinet/rack applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, and cable connections for a DBS3900. 2.6 BTS3900C Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
This section describes cabinets, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.1 BTS3900 This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900.
2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900 A BTS3900 is an indoor macro base station. Different types of base stations can be formed by BTS3900 cabinets of different versions. Huawei has enhanced cabinet design and developed various types of cabinets used for the BTS3900. For BTS3900 (Ver.D), an IMS06 can also be used to meet requirements in various aspects such as power distribution, module configuration, and user space. The following table lists the specific cabinets and subracks used by the BTS3900. Table 2-1 Cabinets and subrack used by the BTS3900 base stations Base Station
Cabinet/ Subrack
Cabinet/Subrack Description
Components of a Cabinet/Subrack
BTS3900 (Ver.B)
BTS3900 (Ver.B)
The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cabinet.
l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) l BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V) BTS3900 (Ver.C)
BTS3900 (Ver.C)
The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet.
l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), shortened to BTS3900 DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Base Station
Cabinet/ Subrack
Cabinet/Subrack Description
Components of a Cabinet/Subrack
BTS3900 (Ver.D)
BTS3900 (Ver.D)
The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cabinet.
l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), shortened to BTS3900 DC cabinet IMS06(1)
An IMS06 can be installed under a BTS3900 cabinet to provide space for storage batteries or transmission equipment.
For details, see 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06.
NOTE
(1) IMS06: Indoor Mini Subrack
The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D), and IMS06. NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet have the same exteriors as a BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet, respectively, whereas a BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet has a different exterior from a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet.
Figure 2-1 Cabinet/subrack exteriors
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D), and IMS06. NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.
Figure 2-2 Cabinet/subrack dimensions
In addition to the preceding cabinets, some other cabinets can be restructured to attain the same capabilities as the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. The following table lists the cabinets that are restructured from old versions. Table 2-2 Restructured cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Base Station
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900 (Ver.D_A)
BTS3900 (Ver.D_A)
The BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet.
For details, see Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the Cabinetin BTS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B)
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B)
The BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet.
For details, see Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the Cabinetin BTS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Base Station
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
The BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3012 cabinet.
For details, see Upgrade Scenarioin BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) Installation Guide.
2.1.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900 A BTS3900 supports different RF module configurations and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900 can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs A BTS3900 base station configured with RFUs but without RRUs is applicable to different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, and stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios of the BTS3900. Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Modul es
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
6 RFUs
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V)
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 2-3.
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (+24 V) l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V) l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets
2
Triple- and quadruple-mode base station
12 RFUs
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 2-4. The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 4, 5, and 6 in Figure 2-4.
19
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Modul es
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sta cke d cabi nets
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V)
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-5.
Triple-and quadruple-mode base station
12 RFUs
2
l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets(1) NOTE (1) It is recommended that two BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinets be stacked. If two BTS3900 AC cabinets are stacked, reduce the maximum working temperature of the cabinets to +50°C (+122°F). One of the following figures shows stacked BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V) as examples.
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-3 Single cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-4 Cabinets installed side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-5 Stacked cabinets
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs A BTS3900 base station configured with RFUs but without RRUs is applicable to different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, and stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios of the BTS3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s
Illustration
Applicable Cabinet
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
6 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-6.
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
22
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s
Illustration
Applicable Cabinet
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-7.
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 3 and 4 in Figure 2-7.
Stac ked cabi nets
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-8.
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
2
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-8.
l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets(1) NOTE (1) It is recommended that two BTS3900 DC cabinets be stacked. If two BTS3900 AC cabinets are stacked, reduce the maximum working temperature of the cabinets to +50°C (+122°F). One of the following figures shows stacked BTS3900 DC cabinets as examples.
NOTE
A BTS3900 cabinet is configured with one BBU by default and can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs whose power consumption cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-6 Single cabinet
Figure 2-7 Cabinets installed side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-8 Stacked cabinets
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the BTS3900 can have different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, stacked cabinets, or using the IMS06.
BTS3900 Configured with Only BTS3900 Cabinets The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s
Illustration
Applicable Cabinet
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
6 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-9.
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
6 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 3 and 4 in Figure 2-9.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-10.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 3 and 4 in Figure 2-10.
Stac ked cabi nets
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-11.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-11.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets l 1 BTS3900 AC cabinet +1 BTS3900 DC cabinet
Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
26
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l A BTS3900 cabinet is configured with one BBU by default and can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs whose power consumption cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion. l When cabinets are installed side by side or stacked, it is recommended that BBU 1 and BBU 0 be installed in the same cabinet. l One BTS3900 AC cabinet consists of one BTS3900 DC cabinet and one IMS06.
Figure 2-9 Single cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-10 Cabinets installed side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-11 Stacked cabinets
BTS3900 Configured with BTS3900 Cabinets and an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Scenario
Num ber of BBUs
Applic ation Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
Description
1 BTS3900 AC cabinet+1 BTS3900 DC cabinet+1 IMS06
2
Triplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-12.
The IMS06 is used to house 100 Ah storage batteries, which provides lowcapacity backup power.
1 BTS3900 AC cabinet+1 IMS06
2
Triplemode base station
6 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-12.
The IMS06 is used to house transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked on the BTS3900 cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900 cabinet will be blocked. NOTE
When an IMS06 is configured with storage batteries, the power consumption of a BTS3900 cannot exceed 10,000 W. If the power consumption exceeds 10,000 W, large-capacity battery packs need to be added.
Figure 2-12 BTS3900 configured with BTS3900 cabinets and an IMS06
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs A BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs is applicable to various scenarios such as a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+6 RRUs
One BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V)
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-13.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V)
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-14.
Stac ked cabi nets
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-15.
For a BTS3900 (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-03B can be configured to provide power for RRUs and the DCDU-03B must be installed on a wall outside the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Figure 2-13 Single cabinet (one BBU)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-14 Cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)
Figure 2-15 Stacked cabinets (two BBUs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs A BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs is applicable to various scenarios such as a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs. Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Applicable Cabinet
Illustratio n
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+6 RRUs
One BTS3900 DC cabinet
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-16.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-17.
Stac ked cabi nets
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-18.
For a BTS3900 (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11B can be configured to provide power for RRUs and the DCDU-11B must be installed on a wall outside the BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-16 Single cabinet (one BBU)
Figure 2-17 Cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-18 Stacked cabinets (two BBUs)
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the BTS3900 can have different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, stacked cabinets, or using an IMS06.
BTS3900 Not Configured with an IMS06 The following table describes the application scenarios for a BTS3900 base station that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and is configured with RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+6 RRUs
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet
Figure 2-19 shows the application scenario.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+9 RRUs
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
Figure 2-23 shows the application scenario.
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
Figure 2-24 shows the application scenario.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
Figure 2-25 shows the application scenario.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
Stac ked cabi nets
l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21. Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
Figure 2-22 shows the application scenario.
When a BTS3900 (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed in the BTS3900 cabinet to distribute power to RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-19 One BTS3900 DC cabinet (one BBU)
Figure 2-20 One BTS3900 DC cabinet (two BBUs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-21 One BTS3900 AC cabinet (two BBUs)
Figure 2-22 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets installed side by side (one BBU)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-23 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)
Figure 2-24 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets stacked together (one BBU)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-25 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets stacked together (two BBUs)
BTS3900 Configured with an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios where a BTS3900 base station uses an BTS3900 cabinet and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Scenario
Num ber of BBUs
Applic ation Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
Description
1 BTS3900 AC+1 IMS06
2
Tripleand quadrupl e-mode base stations
6 RFUs+9 RRUs
Figure 2-26 shows the application scenario.
An IMS06 houses 100Ah storage batteries, which provide lowcapacity backup power.
NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked on the BTS3900 cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900 cabinet will be blocked. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
When an IMS06 is configured with storage batteries, the power consumption of a BTS3900 cannot exceed 10,000 W. If the power consumption exceeds 10,000 W, large-capacity battery packs need to be added.
Figure 2-26 BTS3900 configured with an IMS06 (1 BTS3900 AC+1 IMS06)
2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.B), a BTS3900 (Ver.C), and a BTS3900 (Ver.D). Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), or BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) are the same as those in a BTS3900 (Ver.D).
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.B) which has the peak output power.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is supplied with AC power. Table 2-3 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x16 A/3 P (by default)
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x32 A/1 P (by default)
6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
110 V AC duallive-wire
1x32 A/2 P (by default)
NOTE
An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An insulation cable with two insulation layers and two wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs and is supplied with +24 V or -48 V DC power. Table 2-4 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply
Maximum Configuratio ns in a Cabinet(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)(3)
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
l 1 to 6 lowpower RFUs
2x100 A/1 P (by default)
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
l 1 BBU Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
1x160 A/1 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Maximum Configuratio ns in a Cabinet(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)(3)
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
l 4 to 6 lowpower RFUs
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 lowpower RFUs
1x63 A/1 P (by default)
l 1 BBU
NOTE
(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU. (2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides two -48 V DC power inputs to a DCDU-01 and a DCDU-03B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.B). l
The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-01 is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-4.
l
The DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-03B is powered by the external power equipment.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-5 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (99.21 lb)
(3)
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The maximum configurations in a cabinet are the full configuration of modules in the cabinet. l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.C) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is supplied with AC power.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-6 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x20 A/3 P (by default)
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P (by default)
NOTE
An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An insulation cable with two insulation layers and three wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-7 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
(3)(4)
l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2or 0.054 in.2(low smoke zero halogen)
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2or 0.054 in.2(low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 1 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
(3)(4)
l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power inputs to a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-11B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C). l
The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-11A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-7.
l
The DCDU-11B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-11B is powered by the external power equipment.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-8 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for theUpper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
(3)(4)
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for theUpper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
(3)(4)
l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
AC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-9 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
Four or five PSUs
1x40 A/3 P
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Two or three PSUs
1x25 A/3 P
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
Five PSUs
1x100 A/1 P (recommend ed)
Four PSUs
1x80 A/1 P
Three PSUs
1x63 A/1 P
220 V AC singlephase
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)
AC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs. Table 2-10 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Maximum Configurati ons in a Cabinet
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumpti
1x100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Maximum Configurati ons in a Cabinet
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
on of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumpti on of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x40 A/3 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-11 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirementsfor the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
(3)(4)
l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
l 2 BBUs
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2or 0.054 in. smoke zero halogen) 2(low
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirementsfor the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
(3)(4)
l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900 cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B, respectively. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D). l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. If the DCDU-12A obtains power from external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-11. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario when the DCDU-12B obtains power from external power equipment.
Table 2-12 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) 9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
55
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
If more than six RRUs are configured, a maximum of six power cables with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 560 W) and a maximum of three power cables with a cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 400 W) are configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.1.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900 This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900 (Ver.B), a BTS3900 (Ver.C), and a BTS3900 (Ver.D) supplied with different power. The power distribution scheme in a BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), or BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) is the same as that in a BTS3900 (Ver.D).
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.B) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.
Power Distribution Schemes in AC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V AC three-phase, or 110 V dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 AC cabinet. The EPS4890 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-27 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios
Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies +24 V DC power to a BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V). The EPS24S48100DC converts the DC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-28 Power distribution scheme in +24 V DC scenarios
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01 in a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. Figure 2-29 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-29.
l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-03B, and the DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Figure 2-30 Power distribution schemein -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.
Power Distribution Schemes in AC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC three-phase power, or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 cabinet. The ETP48150-A3 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-11A. The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to modules in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-31 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios
Power Distribution Schemes in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A in a BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to modules in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-32 Power distribution schemes in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A, and the DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-32.
l
Figure 2-33shows the power distribution schemes when the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC to a DCDU-11B that distribute the DC power to RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-33 Power distribution schemes in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.
Power Distribution Scheme in AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 2-34shows the distribution schemes in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario. The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. Figure 2-36shows the distribution schemes for the DCDU-12A. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-34 Power distribution scheme in AC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme in AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B. Figure 2-35shows the distribution schemes in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenarios. The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. Figure 2-36and Figure 2-37show the distribution schemes for the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B, respectively. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-35 Power distribution schemein AC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemein DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power for the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet and the DCDU-12A distributes the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900 cabinet. Figure 2-36 Power distribution schemein DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12A, and the DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A in this scenario is the same as that for a DCDU-12A used by a BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-36.
l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12B, and the DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Figure 2-37 Power distribution schemein DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
NOTE
Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 on a DCDU-12B feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 560 W, and ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 400 W.
2.1.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900 This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900, see the following sections: l
BTS3900 (Ver.B): BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cable List
l
BTS3900 (Ver.C): BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cable List
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900 (Ver.D): BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cable List
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-13 Cable connections Bas e Sta tio n
Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BT S39 00 (Ver .B)
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connection s
CPRI Cable Connection s
RF Cable Connection s
BT S39 00 (Ver .C)
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
BT S39 00 (Ver .D)
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
2.2 BTS3900L This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900L.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations The BTS3900L, an indoor macro base station, can be classified into BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D), in terms of cabinet versions. The BTS3900L cabinets can meet different site requirements for power distribution, module configuration, and space for customer equipment. The BTS3900L can use AC power when the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet is stacked upon an IMS06. The following table lists the cabinets and subrack that are used by the BTS3900L base stations. Table 2-14 Cabinets and subrack used by the BTS3900L base stations Base Station
Cabinet/ Subrack
Cabinet/Subrack Description
Components of a Cabinet/ Subrack
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cabinet.
BTS3900L (Ver.C)
BTS3900L (Ver.C)
This cabinet uses -48 V DC power only and provides space for the RFUs, BBU, fan assembly, power equipment, and customer equipment.
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
This cabinet provides space for the RFUs, BBU, fan assembly, power equipment, and customer equipment. This cabinet can be divided into the following types based on the configured power equipment:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cabinet.
For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet.
l BTS3900L DC cabinet l BTS3900L AC cabinet IMS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The IMS06 houses power equipment. The BTS3900L base station uses AC power when a BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet is stacked upon the IMS06.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For details, see 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06.
68
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), BTS3900L (Ver.D), and IMS06. Figure 2-38 Cabinet/subrack exteriors
The BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet can be restructured to have the same capability as the BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet, as listed in the following table. Table 2-15 Restructured cabinet Base Station
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900L (Ver.D_B)
BTS3900L (Ver.D_B)
It is restructured from a BTS3900L (Ver.B).
For details, see components of a cabinet in Information to Be Known Before the Cabinet Transformationof BTS3900L Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
2.2.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900L A BTS3900L cabinet can meet different requirements for RF module configurations and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900L can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.B) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-39.
2
Triple- ,quadruple- mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 BTS3900L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.C) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-39.
2
Triple- ,quadruple- mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-40 BTS3900L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.D) can be configured with one or two BBUs.
Scenarios Where the BTS3900L Uses BTS3900L Cabinets Only The following table lists the application scenarios where the BTS3900L uses one BTS3900L cabinet only and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Cabinet Type
Num ber of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
BTS3900L DC cabinet
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-41.
2
Triple-quadruple-, mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-41.
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-42.
2
Triple-quadruple-, mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-42.
BTS3900L AC cabinet
NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked upon the BTS3900L cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900L cabinet will be blocked.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-41 1 BTS3900L DC
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-42 1 BTS3900L AC (1 BTS3900L DC+1 IMS06)
Scenarios Where the BTS3900L Uses a BTS3900L Cabinet and an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios where the BTS3900L uses a BTS3900L DC cabinet and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Type
Nu mbe r of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximu m Number of RF Module s
Description
Illustration
1 BTS3900 L DC+1 IMS06
1
Single-, dual-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-42.
2
Triple-mode base station
12 RFUs
l A BTS3900L DC cabinet stacked on an IMS06 comprises an AC base station. l The IMS06 houses an EPU05A-02 that provides DC power for components in the BTS3900L cabinet stacked upon the IMS06.
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-42.
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.B) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-43.
2
Triple- and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-44.
When a BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-03B can be installed on a wall to distribute power to the RRUs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-43 BTS3900L with only one BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-44 BTS3900L with two BBUs
BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.C) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numb er of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-45.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-46.
When a BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11B can be installed on a wall to distribute power to the RRUs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-45 BTS3900L with only one BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-46 BTS3900L with two BBUs
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.D) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-47.
2
Triple- and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-48.
When a BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUS, a DCDU-12B is installed at the third 1 U space at the bottom of a cabinet to distribute power to RRUs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-47 BTS3900L with only one BBU
Figure 2-48 BTS3900L with two BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.B), a BTS3900L (Ver.C), and a BTS3900L (Ver.D). The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) are the same as those in a BTS3900L (Ver.D).
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.B) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table. Table 2-16 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-01s.
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-01s.
(3)(4)
l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs(1) l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU. (2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-01 and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-03B. For details about the power distribution scheme, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.B). l
The DCDU-01 provides power for the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. When the DCDU-01 is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-16.
l
The DCDU-03B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-03B is powered by the external power equipment.
Table 2-17 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (99.21 lb)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.C) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table. Table 2-18 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 7 to 12 highpower RFUs
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x160 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable of the smoke zero halogen (LSZH) type is connected to two DCDU-11As.
l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs
4x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
2x100 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in. 2),two groups of DC input power cables
3x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-11A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-11A is connected to one circuit breaker.
l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 2 BBUs l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)
2x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
3x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-11A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-11A is connected to one circuit breaker.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
86
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-11A and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-11B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C). l
The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-11A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-18.
l
The DCDU-11B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-11B is powered by the external power equipment.
Table 2-19 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input Scenario The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables when the BTS3900L uses AC input power and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-20 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
Four or five PSUs
1x40 A/3 P
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Two or three PSUs
1x25 A/3 P
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
Five PSUs
1x100 A/1 P (recommend ed)
Four PSUs
1x80 A/1 P
Three PSUs
1x63 A/1 P
220 V AC singlephase
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-21 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for base stations configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 x 160 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable of the smoke zero halogen (LSZH) type is connected to two DCDU-12As.
4x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
(4)
l 7 to 12 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
(4)
l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)
2x100 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
3x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-12A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-12A is connected to one circuit breaker.
2x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack) l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
(4)
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs
3x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As. One DCDU-12A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-12A is connected to one circuit breaker.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12A and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12B. For details about the power distribution scheme, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D). l
The DCDU-12A provides power for the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. When the DCDU-12A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-21.
l
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-12B is powered by the external power equipment.
Table 2-22 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) 9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
96
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
If more than six RRUs are configured, a maximum of six power cables with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 560 W) and a maximum of three power cables with a cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 400 W) are configured.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
2.2.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900L (Ver.B), a BTS3900L (Ver.C), and a BTS3900L (Ver.D). The power distribution scheme in a BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) is the same as that in a BTS3900L (Ver.D).
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.B) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01 in the BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Figure 2-49 Power distribution scheme for the BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The power distribution schemes are Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
the same for the DCDU-01 in a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs and a BTS3900L cabinet configured only with RFUs, as shown in Figure 2-49. l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-03B, and the DCDU-03B supplies the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Figure 2-50 Power distribution schemefor a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A in the BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-11A distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-51 Power distribution scheme for the BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A, and the DCDU-11A distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The power distribution schemes are the same for the DCDU-11A in a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs and a BTS3900L cabinet configured only with RFUs, as shown in Figure 2-51.
l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11B, and the DCDU-11B supplies the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-52 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Power Distribution Schemein AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02 in the IMS06. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 2-53shows the power distribution schemes for the BTS3900L when the 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied. The DCDU-12A supplies power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. Figure 2-54shows the power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A. NOTE
The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC single-phase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-53 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment provides -48 V DC power for the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900L cabinet and the DCDU-12A distributes the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-54 Power distribution scheme in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12A. The DCDU-12A supplies the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A in this scenario is the same as that in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as shown in Figure 2-54.
l
The external power equipment provides -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12B and the DCDU-12B distributes the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-55 Power distribution scheme in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
NOTE
Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 on a DCDU-12B feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 560 W, and ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 400 W.
2.2.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900L This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900L.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900L, see the following sections: l
BTS3900L (Ver.B): BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cable List
l
BTS3900L (Ver.C): BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cable List
l
BTS3900L (Ver.D): BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cable List
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900L, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-23 Cable connections Base Station
Power Cable Connection s
Monitori ng Signal Cable Connecti ons
Transmi ssion Cable Connecti ons
BBU Intercon nection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connecti ons
RF Cable Connecti ons
BTS3900 L (Ver.B)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.B)
Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.B)
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
InterBBU Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BTS3900 L (Ver.C)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.C)
Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.C)
BTS3900 L (Ver.D)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.D)
Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.D)
2.3 BTS3900A This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900A.
2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A The BTS3900A is an outdoor separated macro base station, and it can be constituted of cabinets with different functions. With the improvement in designing cabinets, Huawei has many types of cabinets applicable to a BTS3900A. These cabinets meet the requirements of power distribution, module configuration, and customer space. The following table describes the cabinets that constitute a BTS3900A. NOTE
BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), or BTS3900A (Ver.E) refer to the BTS3900A base station whose cabinets are all of Ver.B, Ver.C, Ver.D, or Ver.E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-24 Cabinets constituting a BTS3900A Base Statio n
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
BTS39 00A (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l The APM30H(1) cabinet provides power to components in it and to other cabinets in AC scenarios.
BTS39 00A (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.C), and IBBS200T (Ver.C)
BTS39 00A (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.D), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D), IBBS700D, IBBS700T, IBBS300D (Ver.A), and IBBS300T (Ver.A)
l The TMC11H(2) cabinet can serve as a power cabinet in DC scenarios or as a transmission cabinet based on the transmission space requirement.
BTS39 00A (Ver.E)
APM30H (Ver.E), TMC11H (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.E), IBBS200D (Ver.E), IBBS200T (Ver.E), IBBS300D (Ver.A), IBBS300T (Ver.A)
l The IBBS(3) cabinet is a battery cabinet that provides backup power to a site. l The RFC(4) houses RFUs.
NOTE
(1) APM30H: Advanced power module with heat exchanger (2) TMC11H: Transmission cabinet with heat exchanger (3) IBBS200T/IBBS300T/IBBS700T: Integrated battery backup system with TEC; IBBS200D/IBBS300D/ IBBS700D: Integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation (4) RFC: Radio frequency cabinet
Exteriors of Cabinets Figure 2-56and Figure 2-57list the common combinations of cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-56 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.B) or BTS3900As (Ver.C)
A: BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C) in AC scenarios B: BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C) in without backup power or in DC scenarios AC scenarios with backup power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-57 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.D)
A: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios without backup power or in DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
B: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS200D
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
C: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS300D
D: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS700D
Figure 2-58 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.E)
A: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios without backup power or in DC scenarios
B: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS200D
C: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS300D
-
Cabinets The following table lists cabinets applicable to the BTS3900A base station and the cabinet configuration for reference.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-25 APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS, and RFC series cabinets Cabinet Type
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Configuration
APM30H series cabinets
l APM30H (Ver.B)
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.B).
l APM30H (Ver.C) l APM30H (Ver.D) l APM30H(Ver.E)
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.E).
TMC11H series cabinets
l TMC11H (Ver.B) l TMC11H (Ver.C) l TMC11H (Ver.D) l TMC11H (Ver.E)
l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).
IBBS series cabinets
l IBBS700D or IBBS700T l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B) l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D) l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) l IBBS300D (Ver.A) or IBBS300T (Ver.A)
RFC series cabinets
l RFC (Ver.B) l RFC (Ver.C) l RFC (Ver.D) l RFC (Ver.E)
l For details, see 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700Dand 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T. l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E). l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Dsand 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts. l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Besides the preceding cabinets, some cabinets of earlier versions can be restructured to have the same capability as Ver.D or Ver.E cabinets, as described in the following table. Table 2-26 Reused cabinets Base Station
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Cabinet Configuration
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ C)
APM30H (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.C)
TMC11H (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.C)
IBBS200D (Ver.D_C) and IBBS200T (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.C) and IBBS200T(Ver.C)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.B)
TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.D_B) and IBBS200T (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.B) and IBBS200T(Ver.B)
RFC (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.D_A2)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet
For details, see APM30H (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
TMC11H (Ver.D_A2)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.A)
For details, see TMC11H (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2)
Restructured from the IBBS200T (Ver.A)
For details, see IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ B)
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ A2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
111
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Base Station
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ A1)
BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ B~D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Cabinet Configuration
RFC (Ver.D_A)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.A)
For details, see RFC (Ver.D_A) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
APM30 (Ver.D_A1)
Restructured from the APM30 (with breathable film)
For details, see APM30 (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
TMC (Ver.D_A1)
Restructured from the TMC (with breathable film)
For details, see TMC (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
BBC (Ver.D_A1)
Restructured from the BBC
For details, see BBC (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.D_A)
Restructured from the RFC
For details, see RFC (Ver.D_A) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D)
IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D) and IBBS200T(Ver.E _B~D)
Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D), Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D), and Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.E_B~D)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Base Station
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Cabinet Configuration
BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ A2)
APM30H (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.A)
TMC11H (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.A)
IBBS200T (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the IBBS200T (Ver.A)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_A2) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.A)
APM30 (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the APM30 (with breathable film)
TMC (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the TMC (with breathable film)
BBC (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the BBC
RFC (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the RFC
BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z)
Restructured from the BTS3012AE
BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ A1)
BTS30 12AE (Ver.D_ Z)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_A1) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
For details, see BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) Installation Guide.
2.3.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900A Various cabinets can be configured for a BTS3900A to meet different requirements for RF module configurations, backup power capacity, and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900A can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site: l
A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H/TMC11H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between them.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
An APM30H can be configured with an RFC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D or IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
l
An RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
Battery cabinets are selected base on the climatic conditions and power backup requirements of the site. A site must be configured with only one type of battery cabinets. Battery cabinets of different types or versions are not allowed at a site. For example, an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T cannot co-exist at a site, and an IBBS200D (Ver.B) and an IBBS200D (Ver.C) cannot co-exist at a site.
l
During initial site construction, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RFUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with of different requirements of spacefor customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-59 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-60 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-61 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-62 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
NOTE
As shown in the preceding figure, there are two installation modes of 2 TMC11Hs + 2 RFCs: (A) and (B). In mode (A), one RFC is installed during the initial site construction, and the other RFC is installed during capacity expansion. In mode (B), two RFCs are installed during the initial site construction.
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-27 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
-48 V DC
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is the same as the number of APM30Hs and only one battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is twice the number of APM30Hs and two battery cabinets are configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-63 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-64 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-65 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-66 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
-48 V DC
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site l
A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H/TMC11H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between them.
l
An APM30H can be configured with an RFC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D or IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is above the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
l
The RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During initial site construction, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets during capacity expansion. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RFUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-67 Cabinet configurations of a site with no backup power
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-68 Cabinet configurations of a site where the number of battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-69 Cabinet configurations of a site where the number of battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-70 Cabinet configurations of a site in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
As shown in the preceding figure, there are two installation modes of 2 TMC11Hs + 2 RFCs: (A) and (B). In mode (A), one RFC is installed during the initial site construction, and the other RFC is installed during capacity expansion. In mode (B), two RFCs are installed during the initial site construction.
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
-48 V DC
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is the same as the number of APM30Hs and only one battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is twice the number of APM30Hs and two battery cabinets are configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-71 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-72 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-73 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-74 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-30 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
-48 V DC
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between them.
l
When a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T, the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 100 Ah storage batteries to avoid over current of a single battery pack during the discharging.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An IBBS200D/IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Only two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS200D cannot stack with an IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
An IBBS300D/IBBS300T can be stacked only with an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS300D/IBBS300T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Only two IBBS300Ds or two IBBS300Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS300D cannot stack with an IBBS300T.
l
An IBBS200D/IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
l
An RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left side of basic cabinets. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.
l
A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion.
Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station A single-mode or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are required. When a site is supplied with the 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-75 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-76 and Figure 2-77. NOTE
IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-76 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-77 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-78 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario with the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-79 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario with the initial configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC expanded to 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs.
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-31 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤5U
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤5U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤5U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H + 1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode or Quadruple-mode Base Station The principles for configuring a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.
l
When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-80 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when no backup power is required
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When one battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. NOTE
IBBS in the follwing figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Figure 2-81 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-82 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruplemode base station are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-83 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-32 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤3U
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 14 U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤3U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
141
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
≤ 14 U
Cabinet Configuration
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤3U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 14 U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11 l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+2 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
-48 V DC
-
≤7U
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, different cabinet configurations can be used for the BTS3900A in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode scenario supplied with 110 V AC power, 220 V AC power, or -48 V DC power supply.
Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E) Maximum configuration principles for a single site l
A single BTS3900A supports a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
Cabinets in a BTS3900A must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between the cabinets.
l
If a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T, the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 100 Ah storage batteries to prevent overcurrent of a single battery pack during the discharging.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When being stacking with a TMC11H, an IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be placed under the TMC11H. Only two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS200D cannot stack with an IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
An IBBS300D or IBBS300T can be stacked only with an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or TMC11H. When being stacking with a TMC11H, an IBBS300D or IBBS300T must be placed under the TMC11H. Only two IBBS300Ds or two IBBS300Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS300D cannot stack with an IBBS300T.
l
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
l
An RFC can be stacked only below an APM30H or TMC11H.
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H, are required during initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left side of basic cabinets. If both a battery cabinet and a transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During initial site deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.
Configuration principles in a single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations l
In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the second.
l
A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed 1200 W.
l
If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H. NOTE
The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base station configured with two BBUs.
Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) NOTE
Cabinet configuration principles for a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) are the same as those for a base station (Ver.E+Ver.E). For details, see Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E).
Restrictions on the cabinet configurations in a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) l
If a Ver.E cabinet is installed on a Ver.D base, the cabling capability at the bottom of the Ver.E cabinet is the same as that of a Ver.D cabinet.
l
If an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a Ver.D battery cabinet, the power distribution capability of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
l
If an APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to a Ver.E battery cabinet, the power backup and monitoring capabilities of the Ver.E battery cabinet are the same as those of a Ver.D battery cabinet.
l
If an APM30H (Ver.E) is stacked on an RFC (Ver.D), the cabling capability at the bottom of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
If an APM30H (Ver.D) is stacked on an RFC (Ver.E), the cabling capability at the bottom of the RFC (Ver.E) is the same as that of an RFC (Ver.D).
Cabinet Configurations l
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-84 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by one battery cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-85 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by one battery cabinet
l
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by two battery cabinets. Figure 2-86 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-87 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power
The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different power inputs, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-33 Cabinet configurations Power Supply
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤3U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 12 RFUs
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 12 RFUs
Two BBUs: ≤3U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
147
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H ≤ 12 RFUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U -48 V DC
-
Single BBU: ≤ 9 U Two BBUs: ≤7U Single BBU: ≤ 20 U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
Two BBUs: ≤ 18 U
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and six RRUs.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-88 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-89 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-90 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-91 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. NOTE
APM30Hs listed in the "Cabinet Configuration" column of the following table include the APM30H used in the BTS3900A (AC) and the extension APM30H used in the distributed base station.
Table 2-34 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
-48 V DC
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
two battery cabinets
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 20 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
When a site is supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-92 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-93 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-94 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-95 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-35 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
-48 V DC
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and six RRUs.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-96 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-97 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-98 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-99 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. NOTE
APM30Hs listed in the "Cabinet Configuration" column of the following table include the APM30H used in the BTS3900A (AC) and the extension APM30H used in the distributed base station.
Table 2-36 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 20 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
-48 V DC
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-or Quadruple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-100 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-101 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-102 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with of different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-103 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-37 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
-48 V DC
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles l
A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
l
When a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2x60 W and three RRUs of 2x40 W.
Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station A single-mode or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. When a site is supplied with the 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-104 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-105. NOTE
IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-105 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-106 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-107 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-38 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs+9 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuratio n
≤5U
≤ 16 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets in the initial
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
≤5U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
164
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
configuratio n
≤ 16 U
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
-48 V DC
-
≤9U
1 TMC11H + 1 RFC
≤ 20 U
2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode or Quadruple-mode Base Station The principles for configuring a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.
l
When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-108 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when no backup power is required
When one battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-109and Figure 2-110. NOTE
IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-109 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Figure 2-110 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-111 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruplemode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-112 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-39 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤3U
≤ 6 RFUs+9 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤3U
≤ 14 U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
169
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
≤ 14 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤3U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 14 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H -48 V DC
-
≤7U
1 TMC11H + 1 RFC
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC
BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different cabinet configurations can be used for single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode BTS3900A base stations supplied with 110 V AC/220 V AC power and -48 V DC power.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E) l
A single BTS3900A supports a maximum of 6 RFUs+15 RRUs or 12 RFUs+9 RRUs.
l
If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRU specifications supported by the BTS3900A are shown in the following table.
Table 2-40 RRU specifications supported by a BTS3900A configured with RFUs and RRUs RF Module Configuration
RRU Specifications
6 RFUs+15 RRUs
6 RRUs (2x80 W)+ 9 RRUs (2x40 W)
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
9 RRUs (2x40 W)
Maximum configuration principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
If a Ver.D cabinet and a Ver.E cabinet are installed side by side or stacked in a base station, the base station supports a maximum of 6 RFUs+9 RRUs.
l
A maximum of six 2x60 W RRUs and three 2x40 W RRUs can be configured.
Configuration principles in a single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations l
In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the second.
l
A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed 1200 W.
l
If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H. NOTE
The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base station configured with two BBUs.
Cabinet Configurations l
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-113 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by one battery cabinet. Figure 2-114 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by one battery cabinet
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by two battery cabinets.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-115 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-116 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power
The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different power inputs, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-41 Cabinet configurations
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Two BBUs: ≤3U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤3U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
175
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H ≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U -48 V DC
-
Single BBU: ≤ 8 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
Two BBUs: ≤6U Single BBU: ≤ 9 U Two BBUs: ≤7U Single BBU: ≤ 19 U Two BBUs: ≤ 17 U Single BBU: ≤ 20 U Two BBUs: ≤ 18 U
2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B), a BTS3900A (Ver.C), a BTS3900A (Ver.D), Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
and a BTS3900A (Ver.E). The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and crosssectional areas of power cables in a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.D) are the same as those in the BTS3900A (Ver.D).The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.E) are the same as those in the BTS3900A (Ver.E).
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in base stations with different power supplies and configurations. NOTE
l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-42 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-43 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 0 to 6 RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
l 1 BBU l Power of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-01 and a DCDU-03B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-01 provides power for the DCDU-03C in the TMC11H (power cabinet) and RFUs and FAN 01A in the RFC. Table 2-43 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-01.
l
The DCDU-03B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-03B.
Table 2-44 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-45 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in base stations with different power supplies and configurations. NOTE
l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-46 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in AC input scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A/2 P
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-47 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU l Power of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-11B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-11A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01B in the RFC. Table 2-47 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-11A.
l
The DCDU-11B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-11B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-48 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-49 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900A (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-50 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
4 or 5 PSUs
1x40 A/3 P (by default)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 or 3 PSUs
1x25 A/3 P (by default)
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
5 PSUs
1x100 A/1 P (by default)
4 PSUs
1x80 A/1 P
3 PSUs
1x63 A/1 P
5 PSUs
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4 PSUs
1x80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V AC or 120 V AC duallive-wire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
3 PSUs
1x63 A/2 P
cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-51 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a groupof DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs
1x100 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
187
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12A and a DCDU-12B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-12A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01C in the RFC. Table 2-51describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12A.
l
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12B.
Table 2-52 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
9 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
9 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
189
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
190
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-53 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured base station that has the peak output power.
AC Input NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-54 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC input scenario Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
4 or 5
1x40 A/3 P (by default)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 or 3
1x32 A/3 P (by default)
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
5
1x100 A/1 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/1 P
3
1x63 A/1 P
5
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V/120 V AC dual-livewire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
3
1x63 A/2 P
layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-55 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs
1x100 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
194
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12A and a DCDU-12B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-12A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01D in the RFC. Table 2-55 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12A.
l
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12B.
Table 2-56 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
6 RRUs (power ≤ 640 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 640 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 650 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
9 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
196
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-57 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.3.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900A This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900A (Ver.B), a BTS3900A (Ver.C), a BTS3900A (Ver.D), and a BTS3900A (Ver.E) supplied with different power. The power distribution scheme of a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.D) is the same as that of the BTS3900A (Ver.D). The power distribution scheme of a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.E) is the same as that of the BTS3900A (Ver.E).
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.B) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power supply system (EPS) in the APM30H. The EPS converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-117 and Figure 2-118show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-58 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-117 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Figure 2-118 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-58 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS
Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x16 A (MCB(1))
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x100 A (MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x80 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live-wire
1x40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC 2: 1x80 A (MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2x15 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM(4): 4x5 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TM: Transmission equipment
When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-117 and Figure 2-118. The DCDU-01 distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-03C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. NOTE
If DRFUs are configured for RFCs, 12 DRFUs and two RFCs are required.
Figure 2-119 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-59 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-119 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A
Table 2-59 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB) l BBU (reserved): 1x12 A (MCB) l Reserved: 1x12 A (MCB)+1x25 A (MCB)
TMC11H
l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios -48 V DC power in a BTS3900A is directly supplied to the DCDU-01 in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet. The DCDU-01 can supply a 25 A DC input with the maximum power of 800 W to the DCDU-03C in the TMC11H, which then distributes the power to BBU, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet. Figure 2-120 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-60 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-120 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power
Table 2-60 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB) l BBU (reserved): 1x12 A (MCB) l Reserved: 1x12 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 6x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the APM30H. The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-121 and Figure 2-122 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-61 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-121 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Figure 2-122 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-61 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x20 A (MCB(1))
Heater and SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x160 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live-wire
1x63 A (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x125 A (MCB) l RFC 2: 1x125 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x15 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l TMC: 1x30 A (MCB) l BBU_0: 1x25 A (MCB) l BBU_1: 1x25 A (MCB) l TM(3): 2x5 A (FUSE(4)) l TM or TMC: 1x15 A (FUSE) l FAN or TEC(5): 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM or EMUA: 1x15 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) TM: Transmission equipment (4) FUSE: Fuse (5) TEC: Thermoelectric cooler
When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-121 and Figure 2-122. The DCDU-11A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-11C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. NOTE
If DRFUs are configured for RFCs, 12 DRFUs and two RFCs are required.
Figure 2-123 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-62 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-123 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A
Table 2-62 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB) l Reserved: 3x25 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
l TM: 2x25 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB)+2x6 A (MCB) l TM or BBU: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM or EMUA: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to the RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-11A in the RFC and the DCDU-11C in the TMC. The DCDU-11A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-11C distributes power to the BBU, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. Figure 2-124 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-62 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and AC inputs in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-124 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.D) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the APM30H. The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-125 and Figure 2-126 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-63 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-125 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Figure 2-126 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-63 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase
2x40 A+1x25 A (MCB(1))
Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P(MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x125 A/2 P (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live-wire
1x100 A/2 P (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x125 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC 2: 1x125 A (MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l BBU_0: 1x30 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU_1: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM(4): 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC(5): 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS(6): 1x30 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TM: Transmission equipment (5) TMC: TMC11H (6) IBBS: Fan in the IBBS200D/IBBS700D or TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS700T
When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125 and Figure 2-126. The DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-12C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-127 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A
Table 2-64 Specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l Reserved: 3x30 A (FUSE)
TMC11H
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to the RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-12A in the RFC and the DCDU-12C in the TMC. The DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-12C distributes power to the BBU, transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-64 lists the specifications of the fuses and AC inputs in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-128 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A cabinets supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC Scenarios If 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in an APM30H. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-129 and Figure 2-130 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-65lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario is the same as that in a 220 V AC single-phase scenario, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario.
Figure 2-129 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H in a BTS3900A supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-130 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H in a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Table 2-65 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H in an BTS3900A supplied with AC power Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
5x32 A/1 P (MCB(1))
Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x100 A (MCB) l RFC 2: 1x100 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l BBU_0: 1x30 A (FUSE(2)) l BBU_1: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM(3): 4x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
110 V AC dual-livewire
5x32 A/1 P (MCB)
Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P (MCB)
l TMC(4): 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS(5): 1x30 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) FUSE: Fuse (3) TM: Transmission equipment (4) TMC: TMC11H (5) IBBS: Fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS300D or TEC in an IBBS200T/IBBS300T
If AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, an APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and a TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-129 and Figure 2-130. A DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in an RFC. A DCDU-12B distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in a TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for an RFC and a TMC11H. The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in an RFC and a TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-131 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in a BTS3900A supplied with AC power
Table 2-66 Specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an BTS3900A supplied with AC power Cabinet Type
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l Reserved: 3x30 A (FUSE)
TMC11H
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in a -48 V DC Scenario If -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to an RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in an RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-12A in the RFC and the DCDU-12C in a TMC. A DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in an RFC. A DCDU-12C distributes power to the BBU, transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in a TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for an RFC and a TMC11H. Table 2-66 lists the specifications of the fuses and AC inputs in an RFC and a TMC11H. Figure 2-132 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.3.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900A This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900A.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900A, see the following sections: l
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.B)
l
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.C)
l
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.D)
l
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Cable List for BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900A, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. The following table lists the links to these topics. Table 2-67 Cable connections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Bas e Sta tio n
Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BT S39 00A (Ver .B)
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connection s
CPRI Cable Connection s
RF Cable Connection s
BT S39 00A (Ver .C)
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
BT S39 00A (Ver .D)
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Bas e Sta tio n
Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
BT S39 00A (Ver .E)
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
2.4 BTS3900AL This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900AL.
2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL A BTS3900AL, outdoor macro base station, supports the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, and TMC11H (Ver.D). The following table lists the cabinets supported by a BTS3900AL. Table 2-68 Cabinets supported by a BTS3900AL Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Components in a Cabinet
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, basic cabinet in a BTS3900AL, uses a heat exchanger to dissipate heat and houses the BBU, power equipment, RFUs, transmission equipment, and storage batteries. Different power equipment can be installed in BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinets to support the AC or DC power supply.
For details, see 3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets.
l The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with AC power is referred to as a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. l The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with DC power is referred to as a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Components in a Cabinet
l IBBS700D or IBBS700T
The battery cabinets provide backup power for a base station.
l For details, see 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D.
l IBBS300D or IBBS300T
l For details, see 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T. l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds. l For details, see 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
The TMC11H (Ver.D), transmission cabinet in a BTS3900AL, is installed when more transmission space is required to provide power supplies and installation space for transmission equipment.
For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D).
The following figure shows the exteriors of a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets. Figure 2-133 Exteriors of a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS300D (Ver.A) and an IBBS300T (Ver.A). IBBS300D (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300D and IBBS300T (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300T in this section. Figure 2-134 Exteriors of an IBBS300D and an IBBS300T
2.4.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900AL Various cabinets can be configured for a BTS3900AL to meet different requirements for RF module configurations, backup power capacity, and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900AL can be configured with RFUs or RFUs and RRUs.
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured as a single-, dual-, quadruple-, or triple-mode base station and supports different combinations of cabinets.
Cabinet Configuration Principles l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of 18 RFUs. If there are more than 18 RFUs, one or more sites need to be added.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and the two cabinets must be installed side by side with the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one TMC11H (Ver.D).
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS700D/IBBS700T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D), are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets should be positioned on the left, and the basic cabinet on the right.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station One BBU is configured in a single- or dual-mode base station. In a BTS3900AL configured with 6 to 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured and the BBU is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. In a BTS3900AL configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are configured and the BBU is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-135 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and backup power is not required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-136 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-137 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when short-term backup power is required
Figure 2-138 and Figure 2-139 show the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-138 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-139 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-69 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤ 11 U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 11 U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 22 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
Short-term backup power
≤4U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 15 U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤ 11 U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 22 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple- Mode Base Station A triple- or quadruple-mode base station can be configured with one or two BBUs. When a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with one BBU, cabinet configurations in the triple- or quadruple-mode base station are the same as those in a single- or dual-mode base station. When a triple- or quadruple- mode BTS3900AL is configured with two BBUs and 6 to 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured and the two BBUs are installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. When a triple- or quadruple- mode BTS3900AL is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are configured and the two BBUs are installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. In the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station are the same as those of a single- or dual-mode base station, which are listed in Table 2-70. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-140 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and backup power is not required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-141 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when backup power is not required
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-142 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when shortterm backup power is required
Figure 2-143 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-143 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-144 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-70 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤9U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤9U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 20 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
Short-term backup power
≤2U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 13 U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤9U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 20 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a 100 Ah pack of Northstar storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured as a single-, dual-, quadruple-, or triple-mode base station and supports different combinations of cabinets.
Cabinet Configuration Principles l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs and with a maximum of one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or one BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one TMC11H (Ver.D).
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS700D/IBBS700T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D), are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets should be positioned on the left, and the basic cabinet on the right.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-145 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and no backup power is required. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-146 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-147 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when short-term backup power is required
Figure 2-148 and Figure 2-149 show the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-148 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Figure 2-149 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-71 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤ 11 U
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 11 U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Short-term backup power
≤4U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 15 U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤ 11 U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple- Mode Base Station If a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with two BBUs, both of them are installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. If a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with one BBU, a filler panel should be installed in the position illustrated by BBU 1 in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
In the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station are the same as those of a single- or dual-mode base station, which are listed in Table 2-72. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-150 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and no backup power is required. Figure 2-151 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when no backup power is required
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-152 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when shortterm backup power is required
Figure 2-153 and Figure 2-154 show the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruplemode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-153 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Figure 2-154 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-72 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤9U
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤9U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Short-term backup power
≤2U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 13 U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤9U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.
2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900AL (Ver.A) which has the peak output power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900AL. Table 2-73 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirementsf or the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
7 PSUs+1 SOU
1x63 A/3 P (recommended)
10 mm2(0.015 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU
1x40 A/3 P
4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU
1x63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P (recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
1x100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
1x80 A/1 P
6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
1x100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/2 P (recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
1x100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
1x80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V AC dual-livewire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when DC power is supplied to a BTS3900AL. Table 2-74 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Power Equipme nt
Product Configurati on(1)
Minimum Requirement s for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
PDU03D01_INPUT 0
9 high-power RFUs
2x100 A/1 P (recommended )
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
6 high-power RFUs and 3 low-power RFUs
2x100 A/1 P
25 mm2or 0.039 in. 2(low smoke zero halogen)
3 high-power RFUs and 6 low-power RFUs
2x100 A/1 P
9 low-power RFUs
1x125 A/1 P
12 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
2x125 A/1 P
9 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
2x100 A/1 P
6 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P (recommended )
PDU03D01_INPUT 1
2x63 A/1 P
2x63 A/1 P
PDU03D01_INPUT 2
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
Transmission equipment and two BBUs
1x63 A/1 P (recommended )
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs or RRUs and low-power RFUs or RRUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
2.4.4 Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900AL cabinets.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL AC Cabinet When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is supplied with 220 V AC or 110 V AC power, the input AC power is distributed by the PDU05A-01 and converted into DC power by the ETP48400 in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The DC power is distributed by the DCDU-12C to components in the cabinet. After going through the PDU05A-01, the AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs: l
One AC output is connected to the junction box on the right side of the cabinet door, and divided into four AC outputs, which are then provided for the HAU01A-01.
l
Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs (R4850G2) and converted by the PSUs (R4850G2) into DC power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-12C and storage batteries.
l
One AC output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 2-155 shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL AC cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The power distribution scheme in a 220 V AC singlephase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario is the same as that in a 220 V AC three-phase power supply scenario. The difference among the power distribution schemes for the three types of power inputs resides in the configuration of short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 2-156. NOTE
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, LOAD3 and LOAD5 ports on the ETP48400 provide DC power for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-155 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
Table 2-75lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses. Table 2-75 Specifications of circuit breakers Power Distribution Device
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers or fuse
PDU05A-01
l PSU1/5: 1x40 A
-
l PSU2/6: 1x40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A l HEATER: 1x25 A l SOU: 1x10 A ETP48400
-
l DCDU-12C 0#: 1x100 A l DCDU-12C 1#: 1x200 A l Storage battery: 1x400 A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DCDU-12C 0#
-
10x30 A
DCDU-12C 1#
-
10x30 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-156 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL DC Cabinet A BTS3900AL DC cabinet is supplied with external DC power, which is distributed by the PDU03D-01 to the DCDU-12C. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. NOTE
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, INPUT1 terminals on the PDU03D-01 provide DC power for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
Figure 2-157 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Table 2-76lists the specifications of DC output fuse. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-76 Specifications of DC Output Fuse Power Distribution Device
Specifications of DC Output Fuse
DCDU-12C 0#
10x30 A
DCDU-12C 1#
10x30 A
2.4.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900AL This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900AL.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900AL, see BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Cable List.
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900AL, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-77 Cable connections Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
Transmissi on Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconne ction Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Power Cable Connections
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
Transmissio n Cable Connections
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections
CPRI Cable Connections
RF Cable Connections
2.5 DBS3900 This section describes cabinets/racks, cabinet/rack applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, and cable connections for a DBS3900.
2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 A DBS3900 is a distributed base station, which is composed of cabinets (such as IBC10, APM30H series cabinets, TMC11H series cabinets, IBBS series cabinets, OMB series cabinets, and IMB03) and racks (such as IFS06 and INS12). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinets and Racks Huawei provides various types of cabinets and racks to meet different requirements for power distribution, module configurations, and spaces for customer equipment in a DBS3900. The following table lists cabinets and racks supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910. Table 2-78 Cabinets and racks supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 Cabinet/ Rack Type
Cabinet/Rack Name
Cabinet/Rack Description
Cabinet/Rack Configuration
APM30H( 1) series cabinets
l APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H series cabinets supply AC power to components in the cabinet and other cabinets.
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.B).
l APM30H (Ver.C) l APM30H (Ver.D) l APM30H(Ver.E )
TMC11H( 2) series cabinets
l TMC11H (Ver.B) l TMC11H (Ver.C) l TMC11H (Ver.D) l TMC11H (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.E).
TMC11H series cabinets can be used as a power cabinet to supply DC power to components in the cabinet or can be used as a transmission cabinet to provide space for transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).
247
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet/ Rack Type
Cabinet/Rack Name
Cabinet/Rack Description
Cabinet/Rack Configuration
IBBS(3) series cabinets
l IBBS700D or IBBS700T
IBBS series cabinets are battery cabinets, providing backup power for a base station.
l For details, see 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700Dand 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T.
l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B).
l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C).
l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D).
l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).
l IBBS300D (Ver.A) or IBBS300T (Ver.A)
l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Dsand 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts.
l IBBS20D(9) (Ver.A) l IBBS20L(10)
l For details, see 3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D. l For details, see 3.11 IBBS20L Description.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
OMB(4) series cabinets
l OMB
IMB03(5)
IMB03
l OMB (Ver.C)
OMB series cabinets are used in outdoor distributed base stations to provide AC and DC power.
For details, see 3.17.2 Components in OMBs.
An IMB03 is a mini cabinet used in an indoor distributed base station to provide AC and DC power.
For details, see 3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet/ Rack Type
Cabinet/Rack Name
Cabinet/Rack Description
Cabinet/Rack Configuration
IFS06(6)
IFS06
l An IFS06 is indoor floormounted rack, which applies to centralized RRU installation scenarios.
l For details about the components in an IFS06, see 3.19.2 Components of an IFS06.
l The combination of an IMB03 and an IFS06, which is called indoor centralized rack (ICR), can support the centralized installation of a distributed base station. 19-inch rack
IBC10(8)
l INS12(7) l 19-inch rack provided by a customer
IBC10
l For details about the components and configurations of an ICR, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
An INS12 can provide an installation space of 12 U high for 19inch wide equipment.
For details, see 3.20.2 Components of an INS12.
An IBC10 supplies DC power to components in itself and other cabinets.
For details, see 3.22.2 Components in IBC10s.
The following table lists devices supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A. Table 2-79 Devices supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Device Type
Device Name
Device Introduction
Device Description
Battery cabinet
IBBS20D(9) (Ver.A) (shortened to IBBS20D in this section)
It is a directventilation battery cabinet, which provides backup power.
For details, see 3.10 IBBS20D Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Device Type
Device Name
Device Introduction
Device Description
Power backup module
l IBBS20L(10)
It is an integrated power backup module using a lithium battery, which provides backup power.
l For details about an IBBS20L, see 3.11 IBBS20L Description.
Power module
l IBBS20L-E
l OPM15M l OPM50M l OPM30M
It is an outdoor power module, which converts external input power into -48 V DC power and distributes the DC power to BBUs and RRUs.
l For details about an IBBS20L-E, see 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual. l For details about an OPM15M, see OPM15M User Guide. l For details about an OPM50M, see OPM50M User Guide. l For details about an OPM30M, see OPM30M User Guide.
NOTE
(1) APM30H: Advanced power module with heat exchanger (2) TMC11H: Transmission cabinet with heat exchanger (3) IBBS200T/IBBS300T/IBBS700T: Integrated battery backup system with TEC; IBBS200D/ IBBS300D/IBBS700D: Integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation (4) OMB is short for outdoor mini box. (5) IMB03 is short for indoor mini box 03. (6) IFS06 is short for indoor floor installation support 06. (7) INS12 is short for indoor normal support 12. (8) IBC10 is short for indoor BBU cabinet 10. (9) IBBS20D is short for integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation. (10) IBBS20L is short for integrated battery backup system with lithium batteries.
APM30H and TMC11H The following figure shows the exteriors of an APM30H series cabinet and a TMC11H series cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-158 Exteriors of an APM30H and a TMC11H
IBBS700D and IBBS700T The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS700D and an IBBS700T. Figure 2-159 Exteriors of an IBBS700D and an IBBS700T
IBBS200D and IBBS200T The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-160 Exteriors of an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T
IBBS300D and IBBS300T The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS300D (Ver.A) and an IBBS300T (Ver.A). IBBS300D (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300D and IBBS300T (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300T in this section. Figure 2-161 Exteriors of an IBBS300D and an IBBS300T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
IBBS20D The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20D. Figure 2-162 Exterior of an IBBS20D
IBBS20L and IBBS20L-E The following figures show the exteriors of an IBBS20L and an IBBS20L-E. Figure 2-163 Exterior of an IBBS20L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-164 Exterior of an IBBS20L-E
OMB and OMB (Ver.C) The following figure shows the exteriors of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C). Figure 2-165 Exteriors of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C)
IMB03, IFS06, and INS12 The following figure shows the exteriors of an IMB03, an IFS06, and an INS12.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-166 Exteriors of an IMB03, an IFS06, and an INS12
IBC10 The following figure shows the exterior of an IBC10. Figure 2-167 Exterior of an IBC10
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.5.2 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 (Using a BBU3900 or BBU3910) This section describes application scenarios of the DBS3900 that uses a BBU3900 or BBU3910 as well as different types of cabinets, including the outdoor installation scenarios with AC power supply, outdoor installation scenarios with DC power supply, indoor installation scenarios with AC power supply, and indoor installation scenarios with DC power supply.
Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where BBUs are installed outdoors and a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Table 2-80 BBU installation scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E)
BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to the RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E)
APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)
BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to the RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B)
The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The same configuration principles apply to the DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), which uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
TP48600A
The BBU is installed in a TP48600A, and RRUs are installed remotely. The TP48600A supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a TP48600A
OMB
The BBU is installed in an OMB, and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB
OMB (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C), and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
Cabinet Configuration Principles for a DBS3900 The general configuration principles for a DBS3900 are as follows: l
When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.E), a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 21 RRUs. When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.D), a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 15 RRUs. When being configured with Ver.D and Ver.E cabinets, a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 15 RRUs. When being configured with an OMB, a DBS3900 supports only one RRU. When being configured with an OMB (Ver.C), a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 6 RRUs. When being configured with other cabinets, a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 12 RRUs.
l
During initial deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and the auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet, if required, are positioned on the left. During capacity expansion, unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of the original cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The configuration principles for a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an APM30H are as follows: l
An APM30H can be installed side by side with only one TMC11H or stacked on a maximum of two IBBS200Ds, IBBS200Ts, IBBS300Ds, or IBBS300Ts. (An IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T can be stacked on another cabinet of the same type.)
l
An APM30H or TMC11H can be installed on the ground or stacked on an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
l
An APM30H (Ver.D) can be installed side by side with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
l
If both a battery cabinet and a transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
The configuration principles for a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A are as follows: l
A TP48600A can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) side by side.
l
A TP48600A can be installed together with an IBB300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T side by side.
Restrictions on the cabinet configurations in a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) l
If a Ver.E cabinet is installed on a Ver.D base, the cabling capability at the bottom of the Ver.E cabinet is the same as that of a Ver.D cabinet.
l
If an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a Ver.D battery cabinet, the power distribution capability of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
l
If an APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to a Ver.E battery cabinet, the power backup and monitoring capabilities of the Ver.E battery cabinet are the same as those of a Ver.D battery cabinet.
Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 l
When a DBS3900 is configured with an APM or TMC series cabinet and a TP48600A, the DBS3900 can be a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station. When a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB series cabinet, the DBS3900 can be only a singleor dual-mode base station.
l
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the basic cabinet.
l
When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with one BBU, the BBU is installed in the basic cabinet.
l
When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
–
If two BBUs are configured during initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H, and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
–
If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) An APM30H that is installed side by side with or stacked on a Ver.E cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 21 RRUs. The following table lists the mapping between the number of RRUs and power equipment. Table 2-81 Mapping between the number of RRUs and power equipment Number of RRUs
Power Equipment
Description
1st to 6th RRUs
EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 (LOAD9 to LOAD14 ports)
-
7th to 15th RRUs
3 PDU03D-02s
One PDU03D-02 can supply power to three RRUs.
16th to 21th RRUs
1 PDU01D-01+1 ODM
One PDU01D-01 and one ODM can be used together to supply power to six RRUs.
NOTE
For details about BBU installation in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station, see Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900. The following figures use a base station configured with two BBUs as an example.
If being installed together with a Ver.D cabinet, an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. For details about cabinet configurations, see BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D). When backup power is not required in a base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-168 Cabinet configurations when backup power is not required
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When backup power is required in a base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-169 Cabinet configurations when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-170 Cabinet configurations when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-82 Cabinet configurations Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 ODM
Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 6 U
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T +1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM
Two BBUs: ≤ 4 U APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U Single BBU: ≤ 6 U Two BBUs: ≤ 4 U
APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s/ IBBS300D s/ IBBS300T s initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) NOTE
APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.
Single- or dual-mode base station An APM30H can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H. When a base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM and an OFD must be configured. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When backup power is not required in a single- or dual-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-171 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-172 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-173 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-174 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-83 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Custom er Equipm ent
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
≤4U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Require ment
APM30H s and IBBS200 Ds/ IBBS200 Ts initially configure d on a 1:1 ratio
l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 200Ds / IBBS 200Ts / IBBS 300Ds / IBBS 300Ts initiall y config ured
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Space for Custom er Equipm ent
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 15 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤4U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤4U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 15 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤4U
≤ 12 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Custom er Equipm ent
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
on a 1:2 ratio l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 700Ds / IBBS 700Ts initiall y config ured on a 1:1 ratio
≤4U
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 15 U
≤ 12 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
NOTE
When APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio and more than six RRUs are configured, ensure that two or more 100 Ah battery packs are configured in each IBBS200D/ IBBS200T to avoid over current of a single battery pack.
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l
If two BBUs are configured during initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H, and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure. When backup power is not required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-175 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-176 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-177 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-178 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-84 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤2U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 13 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤2U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 13 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
l APM30 Hs and IBBS2 00Ds/ IBBS2 00Ts/ IBBS3 00Ds/ IBBS3 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:2 ratio
≤2U
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 13 U
l APM30 Hs and IBBS7 00Ds/ IBBS7 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:1 ratio
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) NOTE
APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.C) are shortened to TMC11H.
Single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When backup power is not required in a single- or dual-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-179 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-180 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-181 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can be connected to a maximum of 6 RRUs with 6 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 12 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-85 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Requir ement
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configurati on
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Ts initially configur ed on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Ts initially configur ed on a 1:2 ratio
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H on the left, and BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H on the right.
l
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When backup power is not required in a triple-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-182 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-183 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-184 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-86 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configuratio n
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
APM30Hs and IBBS200D
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configuratio n
Cabinet Configuration
s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
BBU Installed in a TP48600A Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with one BBU. A TP48600A provides power to a maximum of 12 RRUs. When no battery cabinet is configured initially in a single- or dual-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-185 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no battery cabinet is configured initially
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-186 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-187 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-188 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-87 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
TP48600As and IBBS700Ds /IBBS700Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment, and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under BBU 0.
l
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When no battery cabinet is configured initially in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-189 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with 48 V 300 Ah backup power
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-190 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-191 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-192 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-88 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
TP48600As and IBBS700Ds /IBBS700Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
BBU Installed in an OMB Each OMB configured in a DBS3900 can supply power only to one RRU. RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configurations of a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an OMB are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-193 Cabinet configurations of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) Each OMB configured in a DBS3900 can supply power to six RRUs. RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, U-steel, or angle steel. The cabinet configurations of a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-194 Cabinet configurations of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
If OMBs are configured and backup power is required in a DBS3900, each OMB can be configured together with one or two IBBS20Ds to supply power to three RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-195 Cabinet configurations of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and backup power is required
Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied with DC power. Table 2-89 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 2-89 BBU installation scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.E)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.E) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E)
TMC11H (Ver.D)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The same configuration principles are used for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.B)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), which uses a TMC11H (Ver.C) as an example.
APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power
The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power
OMB
The BBU is installed in an OMB and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB
OMB (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.E), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are shortened to TMC11H.
Configuration Principles of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 For details, see Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900.
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a base station are shown in the following figure. NOTE
For details about BBU installation in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station, see Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900. The following figures use a base station configured with two BBUs as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-196 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-90 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤6U
≤ 21 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
≤ 17 U
≤ 21 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs (with three DCDUs)
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-197 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A TMC11H can be connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are listed in the following table. Table 2-91 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤9U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
≤8U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l
In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
l
In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input). Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBU is shown by BBU 0 in the following figure. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-198 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are listed in the following table. Table 2-92 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤6U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
≤ 17 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs (with three DCDUs)
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-199 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A TMC11H can be connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are listed in the following table. Table 2-93 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤9U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
≤8U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured, BBU 0 is installed in the basic TMC11H, which is on the left; BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H, which is on the right.
l
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBU is shown by BBU 0 in the following figure.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure and are listed in the following table.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-200 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
Table 2-94 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤ 18 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station are shown in the following figure and table. Figure 2-201 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with +24 V DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-95 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configurati on
Cabinet Configuration
+24 V DC
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure and are listed in the following table. Figure 2-202 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with +24 V DC power
Table 2-96 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configurati on
Cabinet Configuration
+24 V DC
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power
BBU Installed in an OMB In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB, an OMB supplies power to three RRUs, and the RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-203 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB (Ver.C), an OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to six RRUs, and the RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure. Figure 2-204 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-97 Installation scenarios BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Reference
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an IMB03
IFS06
The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.
For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
BBU Installed in an IMB03 When external 110 V or 220 V AC power is provided, an AC/DC power device or ETP48100B1 is required to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-205 BBU installed in an IMB03 (without backup power)
The following table lists the cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 and there is no backup power. Table 2-98 Cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 (without backup power) Power Supply
Cabinet and Module Configuration
110 V/220 V
1 IMB03+1 AC/DC power device+1 RRU 1 IMB03+1 ETP48100-B1+3 RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 2-99 Installation scenario BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Reference
19-inch rack
19-inch racks consist of the INS12 rack provided by Huawei and the 19-inch rack provided by the customer.
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
The BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed in a 19-inch rack indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Wall
The BBU and DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed on a wall indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.
BBU Installed on a Wall
Indoor
The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power only to the RRUs and monitors only the RRUs.
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely outdoors. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.
For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Reference
IBC10
The BBU is installed in an IBC10. The DCDU-12C supplies power to the BBU.
BBU Installed in an IBC10
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station. Figure 2-206 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. A triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station can also be configured with one BBU, and the cabinet configurations in this scenario are the same as those in the preceding figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-207 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station
BBU Installed on a Wall When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-208 BBU installed on a wall
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H) When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H(Ver.E). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
(Ver.D), or APM30H(Ver.E) can be supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. The following figure shows the installation scenarios. Figure 2-209 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors
BBU Installed in an IMB03 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-210 BBU installed in an IMB03
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installed in an IBC10 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IBC10, which supplies power to the BBU and USU (Universal Switching Unit), as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-211 BBU installed in an IBC10
2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A This section describes outdoor AC and DC scenarios for a DBS3900 using a BBU3910A.
Outdoor AC Installation Scenario This section describes the outdoor AC installation scenario of a DBS3900. This following table describes the outdoor AC installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-100 Installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A BBU Installation Position
Scenario
On a pole or wall
The BBU and OPM50M are installed on a pole or wall, RRUs are remotely installed, and the OPM50M supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The following table describes the configurations of a base station with different requirements for backup power capacities and carrier configurations. Table 2-101 Configurations of a DBS3900 Power Supply
Back up Powe r Capac ity
Carrie r Config uratio n
Base Station Configuration
Illustration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backu p power
3 RRUs
1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs
Figure 2-212
6 RRUs
2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs
3 RRUs
1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs+1 IBBS20D
6 RRUs
2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs+2 IBBS20Ds
3 RRUs
1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs+2 IBBS20Ds
6 RRUs
2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs+4 IBBS20Ds
The numbe r of OPM5 0Ms must be the same as that of IBBS2 0Ds. The numbe r of IBBS2 0Ds is twice as that of OPM5 0Ms.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Figure 2-213
308
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the application scenario of a DBS3900 when no backup power is required. Figure 2-212 Application scenario of a DBS3900 (without backup power)
The following figure shows the application scenario of a DBS3900 when backup power is required. Figure 2-213 Application scenario of a DBS3900 (with backup power)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Outdoor DC Installation Scenario This section describes the outdoor DC installation scenario of a DBS3900. This following table describes the outdoor DC installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A. Table 2-102 Installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A BBU Installation Position
Scenario
On a pole or wall
The BBU and RRUs are installed on a pole or wall. The DCDU is installed in a thirdparty cabinet to supply DC power to the BBU and RRUs.
The following table describes the configurations of a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-103 Configurations of a DBS3900 Power Supply
Base Station Configuration
Illustration
-48 V DC
l 1 BBU3910A+3 RRUs
Figure 2-214
l 1 BBU3910A+6 RRUs
Figure 2-214 Application Scenario of a DBS3900
2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 configured with different types of cabinets using a BBU3900 or BBU3910. If the Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets used by a DBS3900. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets used by a DBS3900. The following table describe the configuration of the upper-level circuit breakers when the BBU is powered by the customer equipment. Table 2-104 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V
1 x 20 A/1 P
2 x 2.5 mm2
≤ 15 m
When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 2-105 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.C). Table 2-106 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.C) Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A/2 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with +24 V DC power and using the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 2-107 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
2x100A/1P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
1x160 A/1 P
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) and having the peak power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 2-108 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
When more than six RRUs are configured, a new DCDU-11B is required.
In an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power, a heater must be installed in a TMC11H, and one more AC input must be added. The following table describes the configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the heater. Table 2-109 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a heater
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.D). Table 2-110 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x40 A/3 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x100 A/2 P
When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) and having the peak output power.
AC Input NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-111 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
4 or 5
1x40 A/3 P (by default)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 or 3
1x25 A/3 P (by default)
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
5
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/2 P
3
1x63 A/2 P
5
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/2 P
3
1x63 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V/120 V AC dual-livewire
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) and having the peak power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 2-112 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 or 2 BBUs l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables 16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs l 12 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
2x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), four groups of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
324
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
When more than six RRUs are configured, a new DCDU-12B is required.
When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.E) and having the peak power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.E). Table 2-113 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.E) Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/2 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/2 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35mm2(0.054 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 2 BBUs
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W) l 0 or 1 BBU
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 0 or 1 BBU
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 2 BBUs l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W) l 0 or 1 BBU l 3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W) l 0 or 1 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
When the BBU Is Installed in the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input Table 2-114 and Table 2-115 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the OMB and OMB (Ver.C). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-114 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Table 2-115 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB (Ver.C) Power Supply
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC single-phase
1 PSU
20 A/1 P
2 PSUs
32 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC duallive-wire
1 PSU
20 A/2 P
2 PSUs
32 A/2 P
DC Input Table 2-116 and Table 2-117 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the OMB and OMB (Ver.C). Table 2-116 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A, maximum: 1x80 A (all using the level-1 magnetic blast breaker)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-117 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB (Ver.C) Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
50 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
80 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
63 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
125 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
80 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
When the BBU Is Installed in the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack, or Wall This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using an IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch rack, or wall and having the peak output power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input Table 2-118 and Table 2-119 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a DBS3900 that uses an IMB03 and is supplied with AC input power. Table 2-118 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and using an EPS30-4815AF Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Table 2-119 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and using an ETP48100-B1 Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 PSU
1x20 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
2 PSUs
1x32 A/1 P
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 PSU
1x20 A/2 P
2 PSUs
1x32 A/2 P
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the IMB03+IFS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-120 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06 and using an EPS4890 Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x16 A/3 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x32 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x32 A/2 P
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the BBU is powered by the customer equipment. Table 2-121 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the BBU is powered by the customer equipment Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x20A/1P
2.5mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤15m
Table 2-122, Table 2-123, and Table 2-124 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with the IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. Table 2-122 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-03B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A/1 P, maximum: 1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-123 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-11B Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-124 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-12B Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables 16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs l 12 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
2x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), four groups of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the IMB03+IFS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-125 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the IMB03+IFS06 Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
+24 V DC
2x100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
1x160 A/1 P
When the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TP48600A and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the AC-powered TP48600A. Table 2-126 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
7 PSUs+1 SOU
63 A/3 P (recommended)
10 mm2(0.016 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU
40 A/3 P
4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU
63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P (recommended)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/1 P
220 V AC single-phase
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
110 V AC duallive-wire
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P (recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/2 P
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
When the BBU Is Installed in the IBC10 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the IBC10 which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A This section describes configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.
AC Input In AC power scenarios, an OPM50M is configured to provide power for the BBU and RRUs. The following table lists configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-127 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC power scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Requirement for the Circuit Breaker on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x20 A
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
100 m (328.09 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
DC Input In DC power scenarios, a DCDU-12B is configured to provide power for the BBU and RRUs. The following table lists configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables. Table 2-128 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC power scenarios Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU
Length of the Input Power Cable
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The actual configurations are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
2.5.6 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 This section describes the power distribution scheme for the DBS3900 in different power supply scenarios when a BBU3900 or BBU3910 is used. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets, the power distribution scheme for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets used by a DBS3900 site. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets, the power distribution scheme for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets used by a DBS3900 site.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and +24 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPS (EPS 01B or EPS 01D) or EPU (EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05) in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPS or EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other equipment. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-215 and Figure 2-216 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-129 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-215 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-216 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios
Table 2-129 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x16 A (MCB(1))
l Heater and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x100 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RRU: 6x20 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2x15 A (FUSE) l TEC(4): 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM(5): 4x15 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TEC: Thermoelectric cooler in an IBBS200T (5) TM: Transmission equipment
Figure 2-217 and Figure 2-218 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-130 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-217 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-218 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios
Table 2-130 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x20 A (MCB)
l Heater and SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1x160 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x15 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l RRU: 6x25 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x30 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x25 A (FUSE) l TEC: 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x15 A (FUSE)
When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-219 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-131 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
Transmission cabinet
l TM: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-220 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-132 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
Transmission cabinet
l TM: 2x6 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB) +5x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses +24 V DC power supply, the EPS24S48100DC in the APM30H (Ver.B) converts the +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power, which is then provided to DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, transmission equipment, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-221 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios. Table 2-133 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-222 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-134 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
TMC11H (Ver.B)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB(1)) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM(2): 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) TM: Transmission equipment
When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-223 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-135 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
TMC11H (Ver.C)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l BBU or TM: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D) This section describes the power distribution scheme fora DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) in 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided forthe heater or heating film.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other equipment. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-224 and Figure 2-225 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-136 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-224 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-225 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 110 V AC dual-livewire scenarios
Table 2-136 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
2x40 A+1x25 A
Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1x125 A/2 P (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x100 A
Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC: 1x125 A (MCB) l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC: 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-226 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-137 Specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
TMC11H (Ver.D) serving as a transmission cabinet
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) in 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios If 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 in a cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the DC power to other components. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other devices. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-227 and Figure 2-228 show the power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-138 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-227 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-228 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.E) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-138 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H (Ver.E) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase power
2x40 A+1x25 A
Heater or SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l LOAD9 to LOAD14: 6x30 A (FUSE)
110 V AC dual-livewire power
1x100 A
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC: 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x30 A (FUSE) l RRU (slot7): 3x30 A (FUSE) l RRU (slot 8): 3x30 A (FUSE) l RRU (slot 9): 3x30 A (FUSE)
When An APM30H (Ver.E) uses an AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to a transmission cabinet. The DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-229 Power distribution scheme for a transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in a transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-139 Specifications of the fuses in a transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
TMC11H (Ver.E) serving as a transmission cabinet
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-12B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-230 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-140 Specifications of the fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
TMC11H (Ver.D)/ TMC11H (Ver.E) serving as a power cabinet
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power by the ETP48150-A3 and distributed to other components in the OMB. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-231 Power distribution scheme for the OMB in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-141 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU&HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A
When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power by the ETP48100-A1 power equipment and distributed to other components in the OMB (Ver.C). The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Figure 2-232 Power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-142 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB (Ver.C) Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB (Ver.C)
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE(1)) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) FUSE: Fuse
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power supply, the DC power distribution box distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-233 Power distribution scheme for the OMB in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-143 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB
-48 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios. Figure 2-234 Power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-144 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB (Ver.C) Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB (Ver.C)
-48 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-Inch Rack, or Wall This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch rack, or wall in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply is used, the EPS30-4815AF in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in a DBS3900 using only the IMB03 in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios. Figure 2-235 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 configured with an EPS30-4815AF in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-145 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A
When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply is used, the ETP48100-B1 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in a DBS3900 using only the IMB03 in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios. Figure 2-236 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 configured with an ETP48100-B1 in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-146 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l RRU: 1x30 A l SPARE: 2x30 A l BBU: 1x30 A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios When -48 V DC power supply is used, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in Figure 2-237, Figure 2-238, and Figure 2-239. Figure 2-237 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-03B is configured
Figure 2-238 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-11B is configured
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-239 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-12B is configured
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-147 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Power Equipment
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, wall, or 19-inch rack
-48 V DC
DCDU-03B
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
DCDU-11B
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l BBU or TM: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Application Scenario
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Power Equipment
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
DCDU-12B
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 configured with IMB03+IFS06 uses +24 V DC power supply, the EPS24S48100DC in the IMB03 converts the +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power, which is then provided to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03. Figure 2-240 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 in +24 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-148 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03 in +24 V DC scenarios Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
IMB03+IFS06
+24 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TP48600A in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. When the TP48600A uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the PDU05A-03 divides the AC power and the ETP converts the AC power into DC power. Then the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to the BBU, RRUs, transmission equipment, and other components. The PDU05A-03 divided one AC input into five AC outputs. l
One AC output is connected to the AC junction box on the right inner wall of the cabinet, and divided into four AC outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.
l
Three AC outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs to DC power outputs, which are then provided to the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B, storage batteries, and other components.
l
One AC output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 2-241 shows the power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 2-242 shows the power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-03B is used. Table 2-149 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios. To support different types of power supply, the power input terminals need to be connected to different short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 2-243.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-241 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-11B is used
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-242 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-03B is used
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-149 Specifications of the circuit breakers Power Distribution Device
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
PDU05A-03
l PSU1/5: 1x40 A
-
l PSU2/6: 1x40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A l HEATER: 1x25 A l SOU: 1x10 A ETP
-
l DCDU-11C: LOAD0 (1x100 A) l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B: LOAD3 (1x200 A) and LOAD5 (1x200 A) l TMC11H (Ver.C): LOAD1 (1x100 A) and LOAD2 (1x100 A) l Storage battery: LOAD6 (1x400 A) l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200 A)
DCDU-11C
-
l CCU: LOAD0 (1x6 A) l CMUF: LOAD1 (1x6 A) l TM(1): LOAD2 (1x12 A) l EMUA or TM: LOAD3 (1x12 A) l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7 (4x25 A) l CMUF: LOAD8 (1x25 A) l IBBS: LOAD9 (1x25 A)
DCDU-11B
-
l RRUs: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6x25 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD9 (4x25 A)
DCDU-03B
-
l RRUs: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6x20 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD8 (3x12 A)
NOTE
(1) TM: Transmission equipment
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-243 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IBC10 This section describes power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the IBC10 in -48 V DC scenarios.
2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.
AC Input When AC power is supplied, the power is fed into an SPM60A for surge protection and then into an OPM50M. The OPM50M converts AC power into DC power and then supplies it to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with AC power.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-244 Power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with AC power
The following table lists specifications of fuses in the OPM50M. Table 2-150 Specifications of fuses in the OPM50M Power Supply
Specifications of a Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC duallive-wire
l BBU3910A: 1x30 A (FUSE) l RRU: 3x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE)
DC Input When DC power is supplied, it is fed into the DCDU-12B, which then provides power for the BBU, RRUs, and other devices, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-245 Power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table lists specifications of fuses in the DCDU-12B. Table 2-151 Specifications of fuses in the DCDU-12B Power Supply
Specifications of a Fuse
-48 V DC
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
2.5.8 Cable Connections in a DBS3900 This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cable connections in a DBS3900. For cable connections in a DBS3900, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. The following table lists the links to these topics. Table 2-152 Cable connections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
APM30 H (Ver.B) or APM30 H (Ver.C)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Transmissio n Cable Connections
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connection s
APM30 H (Ver.D)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
APM30 H (Ver.E)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E)
TMC11 H (Ver.B) or TMC11 H (Ver.C)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)
TMC11 H (Ver.D)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D)
Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11 H (Ver.E)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.E)
Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.E)
OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using an OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using an OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
381
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
TP4860 0A
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
IBC10
Power Cable Connections in an IBC10 Used by a DBS3900
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in an IBC10 Used by a DBS3900
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
2.6 BTS3900C This section describes cabinets, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900C.
2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C The BTS3900C, an outdoor compact mini base station, is classified into BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C), in terms of cabinet versions. The following table lists cabinets supported by a BTS3900C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet
This cabinet is used in UMTS scenarios and consists of an OMB and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet can be supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.
For specific components of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet, see components of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet in Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC Cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet
This cabinet is used in UMTS or multimode scenarios and consists of an OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C cabinet can be supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.
For specific components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, see components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet in Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC Cabinet.
The following figure shows the exteriors of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. Figure 2-246 Exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets
2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900C WCDMA and a BTS3900C (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C WCDMA This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900C WCDMA which has the peak output power. NOTE
l Power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900C is supplied with AC power. Table 2-153 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
10 A/1 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
DC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900C is supplied with DC power. Table 2-154 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
16 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (590.55 ft)
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured base station which has the peak output power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Scenario The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for an AC-powered BTS3900C. Table 2-155 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers
Cross-sectional Area of an Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x20 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x20 A/2 P
DC Scenario The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a DC-powered BTS3900C. Table 2-156 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers
Cross-sectional Area of an Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x32 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
2.6.3 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900C WCDMA and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) supplied with different power.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C WCDMA This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the EPS30-4815AF in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. Figure 2-247 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power. Table 2-157 Specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC duallive-wire
l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied, the DC power distribution box in the cabinet distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-248 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-158 Specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
-48 V DC
l RRU: 1x20 A l BBU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x12 A l FAN: 1x12 A
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900C (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900C supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in a 110 V or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When a BTS3900C is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC, the ETP48100-A1 in the OMB converts the one AC input into two DC outputs. Figure 2-249 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power, and Table 2-159 lists the specifications of fuses in it. NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is used, the live wire must be connected to a circuit breaker.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-249 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with 220 V or 110 V AC power
Table 2-159 The specifications of fuses for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power. Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Fuses
220 V AC single-phase
l RRU:1x30 A
110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU:1x30 A l FAN:1x30 A l SPARE:1x30 A
Power Distribution Scheme in a -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario When a BTS3900C cabinet is supplied with -48 V DC power, the PDU10D-01 in the OMB converts the one DC input into several DC outputs and distributes the DC power to modules such as the BBU, HEUB, and RRU. Figure 2-249 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power, and Table 2-160 lists the specifications of fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-250 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power
Table 2-160 Fuse specifications for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Fuses
-48 V DC
l RRU:1x30 A l BBU:1x30 A l FAN:1x30 A l SPARE:1x30 A
2.6.4 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900C This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900C.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900C, see the following sections: l
BTS3900C WCDMA: BTS3900C WCDMA Cable List
l
BTS3900C (Ver.C): BTS3900C (Ver.C) Cable List
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900C, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-161 Cable connections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Base Station
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
Transmission Cable Connections
BTS3900C WCDMA
Power cable connections in a BTS3900C WCDMA
Monitoring signal cable connections in a BTS3900C WCDMA
Transmission cable connections
BTS3900C (Ver.C)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900C (Ver.C)
Monitoring signal cable connections in a BTS3900C (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3
Cabinet Description
About This Chapter This chapter describes information about cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, including components and engineering specifications of the cabinets. 3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description The BTS3900 cabinet applies to a BTS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900 cabinets. 3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description The BTS3900L cabinet applies to a BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900L cabinets. 3.3 RFC Description The RFC applies to a BTS3900A. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of RFCs. 3.4 APM30H Description The APM30H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of APM30Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.5 TMC11H Description The TMC11H applies to a BTS3900A, DBS3900, or BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.6 IBBS200D Description The IBBS200D applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds. 3.7 IBBS200T Description The IBBS200T applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts. 3.8 IBBS300D Description The IBBS300D applies to a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300D. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.9 IBBS300T Description An IBBS300T applies to the BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300T. 3.10 IBBS20D Description An IBBS20D applies to the DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, configuration, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20D. 3.11 IBBS20L Description An IBBS20L can be used in a DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20L. 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual IBBS20L-E provides power backup for communications devices so that power can be supplied to communications devices when no power inputs to power modules are available. This ensures normal service running and stable power supply. This manual describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of IBBS20L-E. 3.13 IBBS700D Description The IBBS700D applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700D. 3.14 IBBS700T Description The IBBSIBBS700T applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700T. 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description The BTS3900AL cabinet applies to a BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of BTS3900AL cabinets, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description There are two types of BTS3900C cabinets: BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet and BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of two types of BTS3900C cabinets. 3.17 OMB Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of OMBs. 3.18 IMB03 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IMB03s. 3.19 IFS06 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an IFS06. 3.20 INS12 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an INS12. 3.21 IMS06 Description The IMS06 applies to a BTS3900 or BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IMS06. 3.22 IBC10 Description This section describes the cabinet configuration and engineering specifications of an IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description The BTS3900 cabinet applies to a BTS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900 cabinets.
3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s The BTS3900 cabinets are vertical cabinets, which are designed in compliance with the IEC297 standard.
Exteriors The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D). NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet have the same exteriors as a BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet, respectively, whereas a BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet has a different exterior from a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Cabinet exteriors
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D). NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-2 Cabinet dimensions
3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900 cabinets.
Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Figure 3-3 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-1 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Filler panel (RFU)
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandatory
6
A radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..
3
FAN
Mandatory
1
A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the fan monitoring unit type C (FMUC), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel (air intake vent)
Mandatory
1
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
DCDU01
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-01 distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
7
Transmi ssion equipme nt
Optional
-
A 2 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.
8
EPS24S 48100D C
Mandatory
1
An EPS24S48100DC converts external +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
9
EPS489 0
Mandatory
1
An EPS4890 converts 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC threephase power, or 110 V AC dual-livewire power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01.
NOTE
The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.
Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet. Figure 3-4 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-2 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Filler panel (RFU)
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandatory
6
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
3
FAN 03B
Mandatory
1
A FAN 03B dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03B is configured with the fan monitoring unit type E (FMUE), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel (air intake vent)
Mandatory
1
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
DCDU11A
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-11A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
7
Transmi ssion equipme nt
Optional
-
A 3 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
8
ETP481 50-A3
Mandatory
1
An ETP48150-A3 converts 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC threephase power, or 110 V AC dual-livewire power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A.
NOTE
The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.
Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. Figure 3-5 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-3 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Filler panel (RFU)
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandatory
6
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
3
FAN 03C
Mandatory
1
A FAN 03C dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03C is configured with the fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel (air intake vent)
Mandatory
1
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
BBU
Mandatory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. If there are two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space below the DCDU-12A. The BTS3900 (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
DCDU12A
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-12A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
7
BBU
Optional
-
A 2 U customer space is reserved for a BBU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
8
DCDU12B
Optional
1
If a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed in the 1 U space to feed DC power to RRUs.
9
Transmi ssion equipme nt
Optional
-
A 1 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.
10
Filler panel
Optional
-
A filler panel is installed in each vacant slot for a PSU (R4850G2).
11
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandatory
5
A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
12
PMU 11A
Mandatory
1
A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
13
EPU05 A-02 subrack
Mandatory
1
An EPU05A-02 converts 220 V AC single-phase power or 220 V AC threephase power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12A or DCDU-12B.
NOTE
The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.
3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications BTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standard.
Input Power Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have different power input specifications. Table 3-4, Table 3-5,and Table 3-6 describe the input power specifications of the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, respectively.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 cabinet, see 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-4 Input power specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
+24 V DC
+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC
120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC dual-livewire
105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC dual-livewire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Table 3-5 Input power specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC dual-livewire
105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC dual-livewire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Table 3-6 Input power specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the dimensions and weight of BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. Table 3-7 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Cabinet
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)
900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm
≤ 138 kg (including 1 BBU and 6 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment)
BTS3900 (Ver.D)
l DC: 900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm
l DC: ≤ 138 kg (including 1 BBU and 6 RFUs and excluding the AC power supply)
l AC: 1250 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (including the IMS06; base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm)
l AC: ≤ 183 kg (including 1 BBU, 6 RFUs, and the AC power supply)
Environmental Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same environmental specifications, as provided in the following table.The following table provides the environmental specifications of BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. Table 3-8 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Specifications/Standard
Operating temperature
-20°C to +55°C Short-term operation: +50°C to +55°C NOTE Short term indicates that a base station does not work for over 15 days within a year or that a base station does not continuously work for over 72 hours.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
ETS 300 753 3.1 ≤ 7.2 bels
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications/Standard
Biological environment
l The equipment room must be well-sealed and dustproof to prevent the growth of fungus or mildew. l Ensure that animals such as rodents (rats for example), ants, winged insects, or snakes cannot enter the equipment room.
Surge Protection Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 3-9.Table 3-9 provides the surge protection specifications of BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-9 Surge protection specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
DC power supply port
Surge
4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
AC power supply port
Surge current
5 kA
Compliance Standards The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table.The following table provides the compliance standards for the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-10 Compliance standards for a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Ingress Protectio n (IP) rating
IP20
Operatin g environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protectio n
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff: Vibration Time-history method
Antiearthqua ke performa nce
ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"
YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900 complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900 is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 An eNodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10
Surge protectio n
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description The BTS3900L cabinet applies to a BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900L cabinets.
3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls The BTS3900L cabinets is vertical cabinets, which are designed in compliance with the IEC297 standard.
Exteriors The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-6 Cabinet exteriors
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D). NOTE
A BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-7 Cabinet dimensions
3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900L cabinets.
Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-8 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet. Table 3-11 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
1
Filler panel
Manda tory
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Manda tory
12
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
3
FAN
Manda tory
2
A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the FMUC, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel
Manda tory
2
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
DCDU-01
Manda tory
2
A DCDU-01 distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
6
BBU
Manda tory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
7
Cable trough
Manda tory
1
-
8
BBU
Option al
1
This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.
9
Space for customer equipment
Option al
-
This 2 U space can house the GATM or transmission equipment. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-01. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.
NOTE
The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-01 cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.
Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-9 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet. Table 3-12 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet No .
Mod ule
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
1
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandat ory
12
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Mod ule
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
3
FAN 03B
Mandat ory
2
A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the FMUE, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel
Mandat ory
2
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
DCD U-11 A
Mandat ory
2
A DCDU-11A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
6
BBU
Mandat ory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
7
Cable trough
Mandat ory
1
-
8
BBU
Option al
1
This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.
9
Space for custo mer equip ment
Option al
-
This 2 U space can house the GATM or transmission equipment. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-11A. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.
NOTE
The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-11A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.
Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-10 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. Table 3-13 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
1
Filler panel
Optio nal
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
2
RFUs
Mand atory
12
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
3
FAN 03C
Mand atory
2
A FAN 03C dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03C is configured with the FMUEA, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel
Mand atory
2
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
DCDU-12A
Mand atory
2
A DCDU-12A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet. If the cabinet is configured with more than six RFUs, two DCDU-12A modules are required.
6
BBU
Mand atory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
7
Cable trough
Mand atory
1
-
8
BBU
Optio nal
1
This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.
9
DCDU-12B
Optio nal
1
The 1 U space can house a DCDU-12B when the BTS3900L uses DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs. This DCDU-12B distributes DC power to RRUs.
10
Space for customer equipment
Optio nal
-
The 1 U space can house a GATM or a transmission device in DC input scenarios. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-12A. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.
11
IMS06
Mand atory
1
An IMS06 is used to house an EPU05A-02.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
12
Filler panel
Optio nal
-
A filler panel is installed in each vacant slot for a PSU (R4850G2).
13
PSU (R4850G2)
Mand atory
5
A PSU (R4850G2) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
14
PMU 11A
Mand atory
1
A PMU 11A manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
15
EPU05A-02 subrack
Mand atory
1
EPU05A-02 subracks are used in separated macro base station with different AC inputs to distribute DC power into components in a cabinet.
NOTE
The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-12A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.
3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications BTS3900L engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standards.
Input Power Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided in Table 3-14. Table 3-15 provides the input power specifications of the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L cabinet, see 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-14 Input power specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-15 Input power specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Equipment Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets have the same dimensions and weight. Table 3-16 lists the equipment specifications of BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets. Table 3-17 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. Table 3-16 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (HxWxD)
1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm
Weight
≤ 235 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs and 12 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment)
Table 3-17 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
l DC: 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm l AC: 1950 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (with IMS06; Base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm)
Weight
l DC: ≤ 241 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs and 12 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment) l AC: ≤ 286 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs, 12 RFUs, and the AC power supply, and excluding the transmission equipment)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Environmental Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same environmental specifications, as provided in the following table. Table 3-18 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C)/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Specifications/Standard
Operating temperature
-20°C to +55°C Short-term operation: +50°C to +55°C NOTE Short term indicates that a base station does not work for over 15 days within a year or that a base station does not continuously work for over 72 hours.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
ETS 300 753 3.1 ≤ 7.2 bels l The equipment room must be wellsealed and dustproof to prevent the growth of fungus or mildew.
Biological environment
l Ensure that animals such as rodents (rats for example), ants, winged insects, or snakes cannot enter the equipment room.
Surge Protection Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 3-19. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-19 Surge protection specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C)/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Specifications
DC power supply port
Surge
4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Compliance Standards The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table. Table 3-20 Compliance standards for a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C)/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Ingress Protection (IP) rating
IP20
Operating environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protection
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
Antiearthquak e performan ce
ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900L complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900L is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 An eNodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10
Surge protection
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.3 RFC Description The RFC applies to a BTS3900A. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of RFCs.
3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RFC. The following figure shows the exterior of an RFC.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-11 Exterior of an RFC
The following figure shows the dimensions of an RFC. Figure 3-12 Dimensions of an RFC
3.3.2 Components in RFCs This section describes module and board configurations in RFCs.
Components in an RFC (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.B).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-13 Components in an RFC (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.B). Table 3-21 Components in an RFC (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
DCDU-01
Mandatory
1
A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01) distributes DC power to components in an RFC.
2
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
3
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
4
FAN 01A
Mandatory
1
A FAN 01A is configured with the fans and CMUA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
5
RFU
Mandatory
6
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..
6
Filler panel
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
Components in an RFC (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-14 Components in an RFC (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-22 Components in an RFC (Ver.C) No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
DCDU-1 1A
Mandat ory
1
A DCDU-11A distributes ten DC power outputs to components in an RFC.
2
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
3
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
4
FAN 01B
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 01B is configured with the fans and CMUE. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUE controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
5
RFU
Mandat ory
6
RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
6
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
7
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC
Mandat ory
1
A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Components in an RFC (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-15 Components in an RFC (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.D). Table 3-23 Components in an RFC (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
DCDU-1 2B
Option al
1
A DCDU-12B provides ten DC power outputs for RRUs.
2
FAN 01C
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 01C is configured with the fans and CMUEA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
4
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
5
DCDU-1 2A
Mandat ory
1
A DCDU-12A provides ten DC power outputs for all components in an RFC.
6
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
7
RFU
Mandat ory
6
RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct VSWR detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
8
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC
Mandat ory
1
A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Components in an RFC (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-16 Components in an RFC (Ver.E)
The following table describes the components in an RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-24 Components in an RFC (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
DCDU-1 2B
Option al
1
A DCDU-12B provides ten DC power outputs for RRUs in a DC scenario.
2
FAN 01D
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 01D is configured with the fans and CMUH. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUH controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
5
DCDU-1 2A
Mandat ory
1
A DCDU-12A provides ten DC power outputs for all components in an RFC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
6
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
7
RFU
Mandat ory
6
RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct VSWR detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.E) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
8
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC
Mandat ory
1
A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of RFCs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an RFC. Table 3-25 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an RFC. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-26 Equipment specifications of an RFC Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E)
≤ 107 kg (235.89 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Including six RFUs
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-27 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in an RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-28 Surge protection specifications of the ports Port
-48 V DC input power port
Specifications Surge
Surge Current
l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 us)
l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 us)
3.4 APM30H Description The APM30H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of APM30Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. NOTE
l APM30H cabinets are classified into two types: APM30H AC cabinets and APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinets. An APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinet is a TMC11H cabinet, which is described in 3.5 TMC11H Description. This section only describes an APM30H AC cabinet. l Unless otherwise specified, an APM30H cabinet mentioned in this document is an APM30H AC cabinet and a TMC11H cabinet mentioned in this document is an APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinet.
3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs The advanced power module with heat exchanger (APM30H) is used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. It is small and easy to transport. The following figure shows the exteriors of APM30Hs. Figure 3-17 Exteriors of APM30Hs
The following figure shows the dimensions of an APM30H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-18 Dimensions of an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.E), or APM30H (Ver.D)
3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs This section describes module and board configurations in APM30Hs. An APM30H houses a BBU and also provides 5 U installation space for customer equipment such as the EMUA or EMUB, AC heater, and service outlet unit (SOU), which are optional.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.B). Figure 3-19 Components in an APM30H (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.B). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-29 Components in an APM30H (Ver.B) No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
FAN 02A
Mandatory
1
A FAN 02A is configured with the fans, Hert power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), and central monitoring unit type A (CMUA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandatory
2
To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP). To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
PSU (EPW30-48 A)
Mandatory
3
A power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
6
EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrackor EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack
Mandatory
1
The EPS 01 subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet. l The EPS 01A applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPS 01B applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPS 01C applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPS 01D applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.
7
BBU
Optional
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
8
GATM
Optional
2
A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.
9
EMUA/ EMUB
Optional
1
An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) or environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
10
AC Heater
Optional
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
11
SOU
Optional
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
12
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly
Mandatory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
13
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandatory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
14
PMU 01B
Mandatory
1
A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-20 Components in an APM30H (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-30 Components in an APM30H (Ver.C) No .
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02B
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02B is configured with the fans, HPMI, and central monitoring unit type E (CMUE). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
PSU (PSU485 0A)
Mandat ory
3
A PSU converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
EPU03A -02 or EPU03A -04 Subrack or EPU03A -03 or EPU03A -05 Subrack
Mandat ory
1
The EPU subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet.
BBU
Option al
7
l The EPU03A-02 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU03A-03 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU03A-04 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU03A-05 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power. 1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
8
GATM
Option al
2
A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to the RET, and monitors the feeder current.
9
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
10
Filler module
Option al
3
A filler module is a standard plastic component with a height of 1 U. A filler module is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet. Before installing other modules, remove the filler module.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
11
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
12
SOU
Option al
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
13
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
14
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
15
PMU 01B
Mandat ory
1
A PMU 01B manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-21 Components in an APM30H (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.D). Table 3-31 Components in an APM30H (Ver.D) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulatio n Assembly
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
3
FAN 02D
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02D is configured with the fans and central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
4
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
5
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
EPU05A-0 2 or EPU05A-0 4 Subrackor EPU05A-0 3 or EPU05A-0 5 Subrack
Mandat ory
1
An EPU05A subrack distributes AC and DC power to other components in a cabinet. l The EPU05A-02 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-03 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-04 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU05A-05 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.
8
BBU
Mandat ory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
9
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
GATM
Option al
2
A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
10
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. When a GATM is configured, an EMUA or EMUB is installed below the GATM.
11
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
12
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
13
SOU
Option al
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-22 Components in an APM30H (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.E). Table 3-32 Components in an APM30H (Ver.E) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
Outer Air Circulatio n Assembly
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
2
AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
3
FAN 02E
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02E is configured with fans and a cabinet control unit type B (CCUB). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
4
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
5
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
6
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
EPU05A-0 6/08 Subrackor EPU05A-0 7/09 Subrack
Mandat ory
1
An EPU05A subrack distributes AC and DC power to other components in a cabinet. l The EPU05A-06 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-07 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-08 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU05A-09 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.
8
BBU
Mandat ory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.E) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
9
GATM
Option al
2
A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.
10
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. When a GATM is configured, an EMUA or EMUB is installed below the GATM.
11
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
12
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
13
SOU
Option al
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
14
PDU03D-0 2
Option al
3
A PDU03D-02 can supply power to three RRUs. l In a BTS3900A (Ver.E) where RFUs and RRUs are configured and the number of RRUs is less than or equal to 9, PDU03D-02s are configured to supply power to the RRUs. l In a DBS3900 where an APM30H (Ver.E) is configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 7 to 15, PDU03D-02s are configured to supply power to the RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
15
PDU01D-0 1
Option al
1
A PDU01D-01 can be used together with an ODM to supply power to a maximum of 6 RRUs. l In a BTS3900A (Ver.E) where RFUs and RRUs are configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 10 to 15, PDU01D-01s are configured to supply power to the RRUs. l In a DBS3900 where an APM30H (Ver.E) is configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 16 to 21, PDU01D-01s are configured to supply power to the RRUs.
3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of APM30Hs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications An APM30H can be supplied with different power. Power equipment in the APM30H converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC input power specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-33 AC input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
Operating Voltage
220 V AC singlephase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220 V AC threephase
l Line to neutral voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 176 V AC to 290 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 346 V AC to 415 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 304 V AC to 500 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 100 V AC to 120 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 90 V AC to 135 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 180 V AC to 270 V AC
110 V AC duallive-wire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
Operating Voltage
120 V AC duallive-wirea
l Line to neutral voltage: 120 V AC to 127 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 105 V AC to 150 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 208 V AC to 220 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 176 V AC to 260 V AC
a: APM30Hs (Ver.E), APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), APM30s (Ver.D_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.E_B~D), APM30Hs (Ver.E_A2), and APM30s (Ver.E_A1) can be supplied with 120 V AC dual-live-wire power, but APM30Hs (Ver.B) and APM30Hs (Ver.C) cannot.
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-34 Equipment specifications of an APM30H Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
≤ 68 kg (149.91 lb)
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)
≤ 90 kg (198.41 lb)
Weight
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation component (heat exchanger core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, and EPU l Excluding the BBU, customer transmission equipment, PMU, or PSU
Weight with the typical configurations l Including the cabinet, one PMU, three PSUs, and one BBU l Excluding transmission equipment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.E)
≤ 90 kg (198.41 lb)
Weight with the typical configurations l Including the cabinet, two PSUs, and one BBU l Excluding transmission equipment
Heat dissipatio n capability of a cabinet
APM30H (Ver.B)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 700 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.
-
APM30H (Ver.C)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1050 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.
-
APM30H (Ver.D)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1500 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.
-
APM30H (Ver.E)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1800 W when the ambient temperature is 50°C.
-
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-35 Environmental specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Operating temperature
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation). If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F), a heater is required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Relative humidity
APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
5% RH to 100% RH
APM30H (Ver.B)
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W
Atmospheric pressure Noise power level
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) APM30H (Ver.C)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1050 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
APM30H (Ver.D)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1500 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
APM30H (Ver.E)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 1800 W or between 700 W and 1800 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Storage
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E). Table 3-36 Surge protection specifications of the ports Specifications
Port
AC power port
Surge
Surge Current
l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Differential mode: 30 kA (8/20 us)
l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Common mode: 30 kA (8/20 us)
3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet The equipment in a Huawei cabinet must meet the requirements for engineering specifications. The following conditions must be met when the customer equipment is installed in the following cabinets: APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/ APM30H (Ver.D_B)/APM30H (Ver.D_A2)/APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.D_B)/TMC11H (Ver.D_A2)/TMC (Ver.D_A1), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z), and BTS3900AL (Ver.A): l
Dimension requirements Figure 3-23 shows the dimension requirements.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
–
The width is 19 inch.
–
The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right is less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 250 mm (9.84 in.).
–
The cabling space in front of the front panel is less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
l
3 Cabinet Description
Heat dissipation requirements –
If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.
–
If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.
Temperature requirements Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common areas and high-temperature areas. Figure 3-24 lists the detailed requirements.
Figure 3-23 Dimension requirements and heat dissipation requirements
(1) Equipment using natural ventilation
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out from (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from left to right front to rear
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-24 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment
NOTE
l Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows: l
Common areas: The highest ambient temperature is equal to or less than 40oC.
l
High-temperature areas: The highest ambient temperature exceeds 40oC.
l The following description illustrates the preceding figure using common areas as an example. If the operating temperature of the customer equipment ranges from -15oC to 60oC, the customer equipment meets requirements; if the operating temperature ranges from -5oC to 60oC, the customer equipment does not meet requirements.
The customer equipment to be installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, or TMC11H (Ver.A) must meet the following requirements: l
Dimension requirements Figure 3-25 shows the dimension requirements.
l
l Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
–
The width is 19 inch.
–
The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right is less than or equal to 310 mm (12.20 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 280 mm (11.02 in.).
–
The cabling space in front of the front panel is less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.).
Heat dissipation requirements –
If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.
–
If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.
Temperature requirements Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common areas and high-temperature areas. Figure 3-26 lists the detailed requirements. Figure 3-25 Dimension requirements and heat dissipation requirements
(1) Equipment using natural ventilation
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out from (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from left to right front to rear
Figure 3-26 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
l Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows: l
Common areas: The highest ambient temperature is equal to or less than 40oC.
l
High-temperature areas: The highest ambient temperature exceeds 40oC.
l The following description illustrates the preceding figure using common areas as an example. If the operating temperature of the customer equipment ranges from -15oC to 60oC, the customer equipment meets requirements; if the operating temperature ranges from -5oC to 60oC, the customer equipment does not meet requirements.
3.5 TMC11H Description The TMC11H applies to a BTS3900A, DBS3900, or BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment.
3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs The transmission cabinet of 11 U high with heat exchanger (TMC11H) is used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. It supplies DC power to the distributed or separated macro base station in outdoor scenarios. The following figure shows the exteriors of TMC11Hs. Figure 3-27 Exteriors of TMC11Hs
The following figure shows the dimensions of an TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-28 Dimensions of an TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.E),or TMC11H (Ver.D)
3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs This section describes module and board configurations in TMC11Hs.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.B): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-29 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.B).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-37 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B) No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
FAN 02A
Mandatory
1
A FAN 02A is configured with the fans, HPMI, and CMUA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
4.5.1 SLPU
Mandatory
2
To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP). To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
3
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
456
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
DCDU-03Bo r DCDU-03C
Mandatory
1
A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) or direct current distribution unit-03C (DCDU-03C) distributes DC power to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03C.
5
BBU3900
Optional
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
EMUA/ EMUB
Optional
1
An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) or environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
8
AC Heater
Optional
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
9
4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core
Mandatory
1
A heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust.
10
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandatory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.C): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.C) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.C) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-30 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-38 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C) No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02B
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02B is configured with the fans, HPMI, and CMUE. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
DCDU-1 1Bor DCDU-1 1C
Mandat ory
1
A direct current distribution unit-11B (DCDU-11B) or direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-11B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-11C.
5
BBU390 0
Option al
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
7
4.7.4 (Optiona l) EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
8
Filler module
Option al
5
A filler module is a standard plastic component with a height of 1 U. A filler module is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
9
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
10
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
11
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.D): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.D) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.D) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-31 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-39 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02D
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02D is configured with the fans and central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
DCDU-1 2Bor DCDU-1 2C
Mandat ory
1
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) or direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12C.
5
BBU390 0
Option al
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
7
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
8
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
9
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
10
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
11
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.E): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.E) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.E) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-32 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-40 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02E
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02E is configured with fans and a cabinet control unit type B (CCUB). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
DCDU-1 2Bor DCDU-1 2C
Mandat ory
1
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) or direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12C.
5
BBU
Option al
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.E) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
7
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
8
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
9
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
10
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
11
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of a TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-41 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of a TMC11H. Table 3-42 Equipment specifications of a TMC11H Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
TMC11H (Ver.B)
≤ 57 kg (125.66 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation assembly (heat dissipation core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, DCDU, and cables l Excluding transmission equipment
TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
≤ 47 kg (103.62 lb)
Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation assembly (heat dissipation core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, DCDU, and cables l Excluding transmission equipment
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of a TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-43 Environmental specifications Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Operating temperatur e
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
-40°C to +50°C (-40°C to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation). If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F), a heater is required.
Relative humidity Atmospher ic pressure Noise power level
5% RH to 100% RH 70 kPa to 106 kPa
TMC11H (Ver.B)
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
TMC11H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.D)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1050 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
TMC11H (Ver.E)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 1800 W or between 700 W and 1800 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
Storage
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
469
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in a TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E). Table 3-44 Surge protection specifications of the ports Port
-48 V DC input power port
Specifications Surge
Surge Current
l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 us)
l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 us)
3.5.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a TMC11H Customer equipment in TMC11Hs must meet the specifications. Customer equipment in TMC11Hs must meet the same specifications with the customer equipment an APM30H. For details, see 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet.
3.6 IBBS200D Description The IBBS200D applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds.
3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds The integrated battery backup system with direct cooling (IBBS200D) applies to outdoor scenarios and uses fans to dissipate heat from the cabinet. The IBBS200D also can provide backup power for the APM30H. The following figure shows the exteriors of IBBS200Ds. Figure 3-33 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS200D. Figure 3-34 Dimensions of an IBBS200D
3.6.2 Components in IBBS200Ds This section describes module and board configurations in IBBS200Ds.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-35 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B). Table 3-45 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandatory
2
Fans are installed on the front door of a cabinet, dissipating heat from the cabinet.
2
4.4.1 CMUA
Mandatory
1
A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandatory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandatory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandatory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
8
Heating Film
Optional
2
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-36 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). Table 3-46 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame is installed on the front door of a cabinet, and configured with a fan and a CMUE.
2
4.4.2 CMUE
Mandat ory
1
A central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandat ory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
8
Heating Film
Optiona l
2
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
475
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-37 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D). Table 3-47 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.
2
4.4.3 CMUEA
Mandat ory
1
A CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
476
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
Power Distribution Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
Heating Film
Optiona l
2
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
8
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandat ory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
477
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-38 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E). Table 3-48 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.
2
CMUH
Mandat ory
1
A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
478
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
eBat
Optiona l
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandat ory
2
Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
8
Heating Film
Optiona l
1
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
9
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandat ory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
10
WIUA
Optiona l
1
A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.
3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
479
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an IBBS200D. Table 3-49 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS200D. Table 3-50 Equipment specifications of an IBBS200D Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
IBBS200 D (Ver.B), IBBS200 D (Ver.C), IBBS200 D (Ver.D), or IBBS200 D (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
IBBS200 D (Ver.B)
≤ 50 kg (110.23 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
IBBS200 D (Ver.C), IBBS200 D (Ver.D), or IBBS200 D (Ver.E)
≤ 40 kg (88.18 lb)
Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.E). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
480
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-51 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-40°C to +45°C (-40°F to 113°F) (1120 W/m2 solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise power level
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.7 IBBS200T Description The IBBS200T applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts.
3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts The integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T) applies to outdoor scenarios. The IBBS200T can provide backup power for the APM30H. The following figure shows the exteriors of IBBS200Ts. Figure 3-39 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
481
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS200T. Figure 3-40 Dimensions of an IBBS200T
3.7.2 Components in IBBS200Ts This section describes module and board configurations in IBBS200Ts.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). Figure 3-41 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
482
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). Table 3-52 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandatory
1
A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in hightemperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
4.4.1 CMUA
Mandatory
1
A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandatory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandatory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
483
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-42 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 3-53 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandat ory
1
A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
4.4.2 CMUE
Mandat ory
1
A CMUE controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
484
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distributi on Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and two storage battery packs in an IBBS200T.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.D). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
485
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-43 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). Table 3-54 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandat ory
1
A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
4.4.3 CMUEA
Mandat ory
1
A CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
486
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
Power Distributi on Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.E). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
487
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-44 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E). Table 3-55 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandat ory
1
A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
CMUH
Mandat ory
1
A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
488
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
eBat
Optiona l
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.
6
Power Distributi on Box
Mandat ory
2
Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
8
WIUA
Optiona l
1
A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.
3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an IBBS200T. Table 3-56 Input power specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
489
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS200T. Table 3-57 Equipment specifications of an IBBS200T Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
IBBS200 T (Ver.B), IBBS200 T (Ver.C), IBBS200 T (Ver.D), or IBBS200 T (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
Excluding the protective cover for the TEC
IBBS200 T (Ver.B)
≤ 70 kg (154.32 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
IBBS200 T (Ver.C), IBBS200 T (Ver.D), or IBBS200 T (Ver.E)
≤ 45 kg (99.21 lb)
Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.E). Table 3-58 Environmental specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
490
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Noise power level
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban areas) l ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 7.6 bels@+25°C (77°F)
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.8 IBBS300D Description The IBBS300D applies to a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300D.
3.8.1 Exterior of an IBBS300D An IBBS300D is a direct-ventilation outdoor battery cabinet using fans for forcible heat dissipation. It is used with an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power for the cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS300D. Figure 3-45 Exterior of an IBBS300D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
491
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS300D. Figure 3-46 Dimensions of an IBBS300D
3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS300D. The following figure shows the components in IBBS300Ds. NOTE
An IBBS300D can be configured with a BAU02D or with eBats and a WIUA to intelligently manage storage batteries, as shown by illustrations a and b in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
492
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-47 Components in IBBS300Ds
a: Scenario where a BAU02D is configured
b: Scenario where eBats and a WIUA are configured
The following table describes the components in an IBBS300D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
493
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-59 Components in an IBBS300D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
1
Fan mounting frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.
2
CCU01D-0 3
Mandat ory
1
A cabinet control unit type 01D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the temperature in a cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies an electronic label.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
An AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.
5
Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 150 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 x 22.09 in.).
6
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
DC Junction Box
Mandat ory
2
A DC junction box is installed on the inner left wall and a DC junction box is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. They transfer and distribute power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.
8
Circuit breaker
Mandat ory
1
A circuit breaker is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. It connects or disconnects the positive wire of the storage battery power cable.
9
HAU01A-0 1
Optional
1
The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) ensures that storage batteries in the cabinet stay and work within an acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. This allows the storage batteries to work properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
494
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
10
BAU02D
Optional
1
The battery alarm unit type 02D (BAU02D) checks whether all storage batteries are properly installed and connected. It is required if an IBBS300D is used together with Ver.D cabinets.
11
eBat
Optional
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a WIUA to intelligently manage the storage battery. It is required if an IBBS300D is used together with Ver.E cabinets.
12
WIUA
Optional
1
A WIUA is used with eBats together to intelligently manage storage batteries. It is required if an IBBS300D is used together with Ver.E cabinets.
NOTE
A battery temperature sensor is configured in a cabinet by default. For details about the position of a battery temperature sensor in a cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS300D, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS300D supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS300D. Table 3-60 Input power specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS300D. Table 3-61 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimension s (H x W x D)
l Cabinet (without a base): 700 mm x 600 mm x 750 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 29.53 in.)
-
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight
≤ 40 kg (88.18 lb)
Excluding the storage batteries and base
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS300D. Table 3-62 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperatur e
-40°C to +40°C (-40°F to 104°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F)a, a heater is required.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage/ transportati on temperatur e
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperaturecontrolled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
IP34
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
496
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Noise
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
a: The temperature at which a heater is required is specified as the local average lowest temperature of each day in the coldest month of the year.
3.9 IBBS300T Description An IBBS300T applies to the BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300T.
3.9.1 Exterior of an IBBS300T The IBBS300T is an outdoor battery cabinet with a Thermal Electric Cooler (TEC). It is used with an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power for the cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS300T. Figure 3-48 Exterior of an IBBS300T
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS300T. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
497
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-49 Dimensions of an IBBS300T
3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS300T. The following figure shows the components in an IBBS300T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
498
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-50 Components in an IBBS300T
a: Scenario where the BAU02D is configured
b: Scenario where the eBat and WIUA are configured
The following table describes the components in an IBBS300T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
499
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-63 Components in an IBBS300T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC
Mandat ory
1
A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) ensures the normal operation of an IBBS300T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
CCU01D03
Mandat ory
1
A cabinet control unit type 01D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the temperature in a cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies an electronic label.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 150 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 x 22.09 in.).
5
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
DC Junction Box
Mandat ory
2
A DC junction box is installed on the inner left wall and a DC junction box is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. They transfer and distribute power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.
7
Circuit breaker
Mandat ory
1
A circuit breaker is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. It connects or disconnects the positive wire of the storage battery power cable.
8
BAU02D
Optiona l
1
The battery alarm unit type 02D (BAU02D) checks whether all storage batteries are properly installed and connected.
9
eBat
Optiona l
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.
10
WIUA
Optiona l
1
A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
500
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
A battery temperature sensor is configured in a cabinet by default. For details about the position of a battery temperature sensor in a cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS300T, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS300T supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS300T. Table 3-64 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS300T. Table 3-65 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D)
l Cabinet (without a base): 700 mm x 600 mm x 750 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 29.53 in.)
Excluding the protective cover for the TEC
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight
≤ 50 kg (110.23 lb)
Excluding the storage batteries and base
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS300T. Table 3-66 Environmental specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperature
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
501
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage/ transportation temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class
IP55
-
Noise
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban areas) l ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 7.6 bels@+25°C (77°F)
3.10 IBBS20D Description An IBBS20D applies to the DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, configuration, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20D.
3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D An IBBS20D, an integrated battery backup system with direct cooling, uses fans to dissipate heat from the cabinet. It can be used together with the RRU, BBU3910A, OPM50M, OMB (Ver.C), and IMB03 to provide backup power.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
502
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-51 Exterior of an IBBS20D
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS20D. Figure 3-52 Dimensions of an IBBS20D
3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS20D. The following figure shows components in an IBBS20D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
503
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-53 Components in an IBBS20D
The following table describes the components in an IBBS20D. Table 3-67 Components in an IBBS20D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Compone nt
Option al/ Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
1
Fan
Mandat ory
1
The fan is located on the front door of the cabinet. It promotes the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet works within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly.
2
Storage battery
Mandat ory
4
12 V 20 Ah storage batteries provide shortduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 76 mm x 166 mm x 181 mm (2.99 in. x 6.58 x 7.13 in.).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
504
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Compone nt
Option al/ Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
3
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
4
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
5
CMUG
Mandat ory
1
The central monitoring unit type G (CMUG) monitors the temperature in the cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the electronic label.
6
Power Distributio n Box in an IBBS20D
Mandat ory
1
The power distribution box is installed in the lower part of the inner right wall of the cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the fan and storage batteries in the cabinet.
7
(Optional) Heating Film
Optional
1
The heating film ensures that the storage batteries in the cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the environmental temperature is low. This allows the batteries to work properly.
3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS20D, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS20D supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-68 Input power specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
505
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-69 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimension s (H x W x D)
400 mm x 240 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 9.45 in. x 11.81 in.)
-
Weight
≤ 15 kg (33.07 lb)
Excluding storage batteries
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-70 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperatur e
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
l If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F)a, a heater is required. l 16 Ah lead storage batteries are required when the temperature ranges from 40°C (104°F) to 50°C (122°F).
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperaturecontrolled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
IP34
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
506
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Noise
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
a: The temperature at which a heater is required is specified as the local average lowest temperature of each day in the coldest month of the year.
3.11 IBBS20L Description An IBBS20L can be used in a DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20L.
3.11.1 Exterior of an IBBS20L An IBBS20L is an integrated power backup module using a lithium battery. It is used together with the RRU, BBU3910A, and OPM50M and provides backup power for them.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20L. Figure 3-54 Exterior of an IBBS20L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
507
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS20L. Figure 3-55 Dimensions of an IBBS20L
3.11.2 Ports and Indicators on an IBBS20L This section describes ports and indicators on an IBBS20L. The ports include those at the bottom of the IBBS20L and those in the cabling cavity of the IBBS20L. The following figure shows the ports on an IBBS20L.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
508
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-56 Ports on an IBBS20L
The following table describes the ports and indicators on an IBBS20L. Table 3-71 Ports and indicators on an IBBS20L Item
Silkscreen
Description
(1) Indicato rs
RUN
l Steady off: There is no power supply. l Steady on: The module is powered on. The module is performing startup, self-check, loading, or activation, or no software is loaded. l Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s): The module is registered, or the communication is normal. l Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s): The module is not registered, or the communication is interrupted.
ALM
l Steady off: There is no fault. l Steady on: An alarm is generated, and the module needs to be replaced. l Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s): An alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the module.
(2) Ports in Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BAT
Circuit breaker controlling the power to an IBBS20L
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
509
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Silkscreen
Description
the cabling cavity
RTN(+) INPUT
DC power input ports connecting to upper-level power equipment (for example, OPM50M)
NEG(-) INPUT NEG(-) OUTPUT RTN(+) OUTPUT
DC power output ports connecting to a lower-level IBBS20L
COM_IN
RS485 signal port connecting to a PMU or OPM and reporting monitoring information
EXT_IN
Signal monitoring port monitoring one channel of CAN signals between IBBS20Ls. It communicates with and reports monitoring information to the upper-level IBBS20L.
EXT_OUT
Signal monitoring port monitoring one channel of CAN signals between IBBS20Ls. It communicates with and receives monitoring information from the lower-level IBBS20L.
3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS20L, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS20L supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-72 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-73 Equipment specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
400 mm x 120 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 4.72 in. x 11.81 in.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
510
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Weight
19 kg (41.90 lb)
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-74 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Storage
l -40°C to 40°C (-40°F to 104°F): An IBBS20L is charged every 12 months and has a lifespan of 3 years. l 40°C to 60°C (104°F to 140°F): An IBBS20L is charged every four months and has a lifespan of 1 year. ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class
IP65
Noise
An IBBS20L uses natural ventilation and does not generate noises.
3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual IBBS20L-E provides power backup for communications devices so that power can be supplied to communications devices when no power inputs to power modules are available. This ensures normal service running and stable power supply. This manual describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of IBBS20L-E.
3.12.1 Exterior IBBS20L-E is a power backup module integrated with lithium batteries. It provides power backup for RRUs, BBUs, and OPM30M. The following figure shows the IBBS20L-E exterior. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
511
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-57 IBBS20L-E exterior
3.12.2 Ports and Indicators This chapter describes the physical ports, communications ports, and indicators on IBBS20LE. The following figure shows the physical ports on IBBS20L-E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
512
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-58 Physical ports on IBBS20L-E
The following figure shows the communications ports on IBBS20L-E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
513
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-59 Communications ports on IBBS20L-E
Table 3-75 Communications ports on IBBS20L-E Communications Port
Communications Protocol
Function
COM_IN and COM_OUT
CAN2.0 protocol
Communicates with power modules or cascaded lithium battery modules.
Table 3-76 Pins of the COM_IN and COM_OUT ports Pin
Signal Name
Signal Description
1 to 4
None
None
5
BMS_ON+
In-position signal of lithium battery modules
6
None
None
7
BMS_ON-
In-position signal of lithium battery modules
8
CANH
CAN data transmission/ reception H
9
CANL
CAN data transmission/ reception L
The following table describes the indicators on IBBS20L-E. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
514
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-77 Indicators on IBBS20L-E Indicator Name
Color
Status
Description
Run indicator
Green
Steady off
There is no power supply, or IBBS20LE is faulty.
Blinking at 0.5 Hz
IBBS20L-E is communicating properly.
Blinking at 4 Hz
IBBS20L-E is communicating abnormally.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No fault occurs.
Steady on
The module is faulty.
Alarm indicator
Fault indicator
Yellow
Red
3.12.3 Engineering Specifications This chapter describes the power input specifications, physical specifications, and environmental specifications of IBBS20L-E.
Power Input Specifications IBBS20L-E supports - 48 V DC power input. The following table describes the power input specifications of IBBS20L-E. Table 3-78 Power input specifications Input Power
Rated Voltage
–48 V DC
–38.4 V DC to –57 V DC
Physical Specifications The following table provides the physical specifications of IBBS20L-E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
515
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-79 Physical specifications Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
400 mm x 120 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 4.72 in. x 11.81 in.)
Weight
18 kg (39.69 lb)
Environmental Specifications The following table provides the environmental specifications of IBBS20L-E. Table 3-80 Environmental Specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
–40°C to +50°C (–40°F to +113°F) (with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Altitude
0 m to 4,000 m (0 ft. to 13123.2 ft.)
Storage environment
l –40°C to +40°C (–40°F to +104°F): Recharge the module every 12 months. The total storage duration cannot exceed three years. l 40°C to 60°C (104°F to 140°F): Recharge the module every four months. The total storage duration cannot exceed one year. ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Ingress protection rating
IP65
Noise
Natural heat dissipation is adopted and no noise is generated.
3.13 IBBS700D Description The IBBS700D applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
516
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D The IBBS700D is an outdoor battery cabinet that uses fans to dissipate heat. It can be used with the APM30H (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS700D. Figure 3-60 Exterior of the IBBS700D
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the IBBS700D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
517
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-61 Dimensions of the IBBS700D
3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D This section describes module and board configurations in the IBBS700D cabinet. The following figure shows the interior of the IBBS700D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
518
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-62 Components of IBBS700D
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D. Table 3-81 Components in the IBBS700D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
The fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the lower middle part in the front door of the cabinet.
2
CMUEA
Mandat ory
1
The central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
519
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
3
ELU(1)
Mandat ory
1
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
5
CCU
-(2)
1
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages devices.
6
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
The AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.
7
HAU01A-0 1
Optional
1
The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) is a heater. It functions in the low-temperature environment to provide the suitable storage and operating temperature for the storage batteries.
8
Storage batteries(3)
Mandat ory
16
Storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.21 x 20.79 in.).
9
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
10
Power Distributio n Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Mandat ory
1
The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.
4
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
520
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
l (1) When a CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "4." When no CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "3." l (2) When the IBBS700D cabinet is used with an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet, no CCU is required. When the IBBS700D cabinet is used with a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) or TP48600A-H17B1 cabinet, a CCU is required. l (3) The storage batteries provide current of 300 Ah, 450 Ah, or 600 Ah for a single cabinet and provide current of 150 Ah or 300 Ah for each one in a cabinet combination. l A battery temperature sensor is configured in the cabinet by default. For details about the position of the battery temperature sensor in the cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS700D, including the electrical specifications, equipment specifications, and environment specifications.
Electrical Specifications The following table describes the electrical specifications of the IBBS700D. Table 3-82 Electrical specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Input voltage range
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Rated voltage: -48 V DC
Maximum capacity of the storage batteries
600 Ah
-
Equipment Specifications The following table describes the equipment specifications of the IBBS700D. Table 3-83 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Cabinet (without the base): 1725 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (67.91 in. x 30.31 in. x 29.53 in.)
-
Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 30.31 in. x 27.56 in.) Cabinet weight
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
≤ 110 kg (242.55 lb)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Not including the storage batteries and base
521
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Battery weight
12 V 150 Ah storage battery: 60 kg (132.30 lb)(1)
The total capacity can be expanded to 48 V 600 Ah (by connecting four 48 V 150 Ah battery packs in parallel)
Installation and maintenance
l Installation mode: installed on the ground
-
l Maintenance mode: maintained from the front l Cooling method: natural ventilation
NOTE
(1) Storage batteries from different manufacturers have different specifications. The preceding specifications are from the commonly used storage batteries.
Environment Specifications The following table describes the environment specifications of the IBBS700D that can be used outdoors. Table 3-84 Environment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperature
-40°C to +45°C (-40°F to +113°F)
When the cabinet works under -20°C (1), a heater needs to be configured.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.20 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.40 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage and transportation temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
522
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Protection class
IP34
-
Noise Sound Power Level
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) l ≤ 6.1bels@+25°C l ≤ 6.7bels@+45°C
NOTE
(1) The operating temperature for configuring a heater refers to the average of the local lowest temperatures for a month in a year.
3.14 IBBS700T Description The IBBSIBBS700T applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700T.
3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T The IBBS700T is an outdoor battery cabinet with a thermal electric cooler (TEC). It can be used with the APM30H (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
523
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-63 Exterior of the IBBS700T
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
524
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-64 Dimensions of the IBBS700T
3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T This section describes module and board configurations in the IBBS700T cabinet. The following figure shows the interior of the IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
525
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-65 Components of IBBS700T
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700T. Table 3-85 Components in the IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan
Mandat ory
1
The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper part of the front door. It dissipates heat for the storage batteries.
2
4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T
Mandat ory
1
The TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS700T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat for the storage batteries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
526
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
3
4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan
Mandat ory
1
The outer air circulation fan is installed in the lower part of the front door. It dissipates heat for the TEC.
4
CMUF
Mandat ory
1
The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
5
ELU(1)
Mandat ory
1
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
7
CCU
-(2)
1
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages devices.
8
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
The AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.
9
(3)
Mandat ory
16
Storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.21 x 20.79 in.).
10
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
11
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Mandat ory
1
The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
527
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
l (1) When a CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "6." When no CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "5." l (2) When the IBBS700T cabinet is used with an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet, no CCU is required. When the IBBS700T cabinet is used with a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) or TP48600A-H17B1 cabinet, a CCU is required. l (3) The storage batteries provide current of 300 Ah, 450 Ah, or 600 Ah for a single cabinet and provide current of 150 Ah or 300 Ah for each one in a cabinet combination. l A battery temperature sensor is configured in the cabinet by default. For details about the position of the battery temperature sensor in the cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS700T, including the electrical specifications, equipment specifications, and environment specifications.
Electrical Specifications The following table describes the electrical specifications of the IBBS700T. Table 3-86 Electrical specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Input voltage range
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Rated voltage: -48 V DC
Maximum capacity of the storage batteries
600 Ah
-
Equipment Specifications The following table describes the equipment specifications of the IBBS700T. Table 3-87 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Without the base: 1725 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (67.91 in. x 30.31 in. x 29.53 in.)
-
Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 30.31 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
≤ 150 kg (330.75 lb)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Not including the storage batteries and base
528
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Battery weight
12 V 150 Ah storage battery: 60 kg (132.30 lb)(1)
The total capacity can be expanded to 48 V 600 Ah (by connecting four 48 V 150 Ah battery packs in parallel)
Installation and maintenance
l Installation mode: installed on the ground
-
l Maintenance mode: maintained from the front l Cooling device: TEC
NOTE
(1) Storage batteries from different manufacturers have different specifications. The preceding specifications are from the commonly used storage batteries.
Environment Specifications The following table describes the environment specifications of the IBBS700T that can be used outdoors. Table 3-88 Environment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperature
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F)
When the cabinet works under -20°C (1), a heater needs to be configured.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.20 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.40 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage and transportation temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
529
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dustproof and waterproof
IP55
-
Noise Sound Power Level
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) l ≤ 6.6bels@+25°C l ≤ 7.6bels@+45°C
NOTE
(1) The operating temperature for configuring a heater refers to the average of the local lowest temperatures for a month in a year.
3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description The BTS3900AL cabinet applies to a BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of BTS3900AL cabinets, and specifications of configured customer equipment.
3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet This section describes the exterior and dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet. The following figure shows the exterior of a BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 3-66 Exterior of a BTS3900AL cabinet
The following figure shows the dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
530
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-67 Dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet
3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900AL cabinets.
Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
531
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-68 Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet
The following table lists the components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Table 3-89 Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ETP48 400
Mandato ry
1
The embedded telecommunication power 48400 (ETP48400) converts AC power into DC power and distributes the DC power to other components in the cabinet. The ETP48400 consists of the ETP48400 subrack, PMU, and PSUs.
2
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandato ry
7
The power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
3
CCU
Mandato ry
1
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment and manages other components in the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
532
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
ELU
Mandato ry
1
The electronic label unit (ELU) automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the inner right wall of the equipment compartment.
5
Surge protecti on area for transmi ssion signals
Mandato ry
1
The universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) can be installed in the surge protection area for transmission signals.
6
Door Status Sensor
Mandato ry
1
The door status sensor is installed on the cabinet door to monitor whether the cabinet door is open.
7 and 12
DCDU12C
Mandato ry
2
The direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) provides ten DC power outputs. The upper DCDU-12C provides power for components such as the BBU, CCU, and central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) in a cabinet. The lower DCDU-12C provides power for the RFUs and FAU.
8
PMU 11A
Mandato ry
1
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
9
BBU
Mandato ry
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
10
DCDU03B, DCDU11B, or DCDU12B
Optional
2
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. When only one DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is required, it is preferentially installed in the left slot.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
533
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
11
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Optional
4
When a base station requires short-term backup power, one storage battery pack (including four storage batteries) is configured. 12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 290 mm x 110 mm x 398 mm (11.42 in. x 4.33 x 15.67 in.).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
13
FAU03 D-01
Mandato ry
1
The fan assembly unit 03D-01 (FAU03D-01), a fan assembly in the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF controls the temperature and detects Boolean alarms.
14
RFU
Mandato ry
9
The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description.
15
PDU05 A-01
Mandato ry
1
The power distribution unit 05A-01 (PDU05A-01) distributes AC power to the ETP48400, AC service outlet unit (SOU), and HAU01A-01.
16
Temper ature sensor
Mandato ry
3
The temperature sensors are installed in the device compartment, RF compartment, and the front door of a cabinet to monitor the temperature in the cabinet.
17
AC SOU
Optional
1
The service outlet unit 01A-01 (SOU01A-01) transfers AC power to customer equipment. The SOU01A-01 is installed in the PDU05A-01 of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
18
CMUF
Mandato ry
1
The CMUF controls the heat exchanger, adjusts the fan speed, and controls the temperature in the cabinet.
19
HAU01 A-01
Optional
2
The heat assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. It can be installed in the cabinet door.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
534
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
20
GPS surge protect or
Optional
1
The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It can be installed in a designated position on the inner left wall of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.
21
HEX
Mandato ry
1
The heat exchanger (HEX) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range. It consists of the inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, and heat exchanger core.
Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet The BTS3900AL DC cabinet has the same type of door as the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Figure 3-69 Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet
The following table lists the components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
535
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-90 Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Nu mbe r
Compon ent
Option al or Manda tory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
Filler panel
Mandat ory
1
The filler panel is exclusively used for cabinets and cannot be disassembled or replaced.
2
CCU
Mandat ory
1
The CCU monitors the operating environment and manages other components in the cabinet.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
The ELU automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the inner right wall of the equipment compartment.
4
Surge protectio n area for transmiss ion signals
Mandat ory
1
The UELP or UFLP can be installed in the surge protection area for transmission signals.
5
Door status sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor is installed on the cabinet door to monitor whether the cabinet door is open.
6 and 9
DCDU-1 2C
Mandat ory
2
The DCDU-12C provides ten DC power outputs. The upper DCDU-12C provides power for components such as the BBU, CCU, and CMUF in a cabinet. The lower DCDU-12C provides power for the RFUs and FAU.
7
BBU
Mandat ory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
8
DCDU-0 3B, DCDU-11 B, or DCDU-1 2B
Optiona l
2
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. When only one DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is required, it is preferentially installed in the left slot.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mbe r
Compon ent
Option al or Manda tory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
10
FAU03D01
Mandat ory
1
The FAU, a fan assembly for the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF controls the temperature, detects the Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
11
RFU
Mandat ory
9
The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description.
12
PDU03D01
Mandat ory
1
The PDU03D-01 provides DC power for the DCDU-12C and BusBar.
13
Temperat ure sensor
Mandat ory
3
The temperature sensors are installed in the device compartment, RF compartment, and the front door of a cabinet to monitor the temperature in the cabinet.
14
GPS surge protector
Optiona l
1
The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It can be installed in a designated position on the inner left wall of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.
3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications BTS3900AL engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standards.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900AL cabinet, see 2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-91 Input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Input Power
Voltage Range
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
537
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Input Power
Voltage Range
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC three-phase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC duallive-wire
105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC duallive-wire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. Table 3-92 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
1925 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (with the base) Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm
Weight
≤ 556 kg (full configuration, with the base and full configuration of storage batteries, and without transmission devices)
Heat dissipation capability of the cabinet
2200 W @ 50°C
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. Table 3-93 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation and without storage batteries). If the operating temperature is below -20°C, an AC heater assembly unit (HAU) is required. l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation and storage batteries). If the operating temperature is below -20°C, an AC HAU is required.
Relative humidity
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
5% RH to 100% RH
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
538
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
l When the output power of an RF module is lower than or equal to 80 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) standard. – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C l When the output power of an RF module is higher than 80 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban) standard. – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C
Surge Protection Specifications Table 3-94 lists the surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-94 Surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
AC input power port
Surge current
30 kA
Compliance Standards The following table lists the compliance standards for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
539
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-95 Compliance standards for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Ingress Protectio n (IP) rating
IP55
Operating environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protection
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method
Antiearthquak e performa nce
ETSI EN 300019-1-4: "Earthquake"
YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
540
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900AL complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900AL is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 An eNodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
541
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10
Surge protection
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.15.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a BTS3900AL Cabinet Customer equipment in BTS3900AL cabinets must meet the specifications. Customer equipment in BTS3900AL cabinets must meet the same specifications with the customer equipment an APM30H. For details, see 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet.
3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description There are two types of BTS3900C cabinets: BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet and BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of two types of BTS3900C cabinets.
3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet This section describes the exteriors and dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets. The following figure shows the exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
542
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-70 Exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets
The following figure shows the dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets. Figure 3-71 Dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets
3.16.2 Components of BTS3900C Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900C AC cabinets and BTS3900C DC cabinets.
Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
543
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-72 Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Table 3-96 Components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ELU
Mandatory
1
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
2
PMU 11A
Mandatory
1
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
3
HEUB
Mandatory
1
The heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
4
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandatory
2
A PSU converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
544
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
6
FAU01D -01
Mandatory
2
An FAU dissipates heat from the cabinet. It includes an inner air circulation fan and an outer air circulation fan, which are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.
7
PDU10D -01
Mandatory
1
The PDU10D-01 is a DC power distribution unit, supplying -48 V DC power to components in a cabinet.
8
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
9
RRUa
Mandatory
1
A remote radio unit (RRU) processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
10
SPD
Mandatory
1
The surge protective device (SPD) provides surge protection for AC input power.
11
ETP481 00-A1
Mandatory
1
The embedded telecommunication power ETP48100-A1 system converts AC power into DC power.
a: A BTS3900C (Ver.C) supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3808, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3806, and RRU3926.
Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
545
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-73 Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet. Table 3-97 Components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ELU
Mandatory
1
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
2
HEUB
Mandatory
1
The HEUB provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
3
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
546
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
FAU01D -01
Mandatory
2
An FAU dissipates heat from the cabinet. It includes an inner air circulation fan and an outer air circulation fan, which are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.
5
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
6
RRUa
Mandatory
1
An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
7
PDU10D -01
Mandatory
1
The PDU10D-01 provides -48 V DC power for the components in a cabinet.
a: A BTS3900C (Ver.C) supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3808, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3806, and RRU3926.
Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet. Figure 3-74 Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
547
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet. Table 3-98 Components in a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
2
HEUA
Mandatory
1
The HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
3
EPS30-4815AF
Mandatory
1
AnEPS30-4815 AF converts AC power into DC power, and distributes the DC power.
4
AC OMB
Mandatory
1
-
5
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
548
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
6
RRUa
Mandatory
1
An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
7
AC surge protection box
Mandatory
1
The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for AC input power.
a: A BTS3900C WCDMA supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, and RRU3801C.
Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet. Figure 3-75 Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
549
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-99 Components in a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
2
HEUA
Mandatory
1
The HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
3
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
1
The DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC power outputs.
4
DC OMB
Mandatory
1
-
5
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
550
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
6
RRUa
Mandatory
1
An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
a: A BTS3900C WCDMA supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, and RRU3801C.
3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications BTS3900C engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standards.
Input Power Specifications The BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided in the following table. NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900C cabinet, see 2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-100 Input power specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA /BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC dual-livewire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Equipment Specifications Table 3-101 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. Table 3-102 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
551
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-101 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
600 mm x 400 mm x 390 mm l OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm l RRU subrack: 600 mm x 160 mm x 390 mm l AC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)
Weight
l DC cabinet: ≤ 26 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)
Table 3-102 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (HxWxD)
600 mm x 420 mm x 430 mm l OMB (Ver.C): 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm l RRU subrack: 600 mm x 180 mm x 430 mm l AC cabinet: ≤ 32 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)
Weight
l DC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU) Heat dissipation capability of the cabinet
650 W @ 50°C
Environmental Specifications Table 3-103 lists environment specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. Table 3-104 lists environment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. Table 3-103 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
l With solar radiation: -40°C to +45°C l Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
552
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Noise sound power level
ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C
Table 3-104 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-33°C to +50°C
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
l When the heat consumption of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) is lower than or equal to 300 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) standard. – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C l When the heat consumption of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) is higher than 300 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban) standard. – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C
Surge Protection Specifications Table 3-105 lists the surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. Table 3-106 lists the surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-105 Surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
DC power port
Surge current
15 kA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
553
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
AC power port
Surge current
30 kA
Table 3-106 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
DC power port
Surge current
20 kA
AC power port
Surge current
30 kA
Compliance Standards The BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table. Table 3-107 Compliance standards for a BTS3900C WCDMA/BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Ingress Protection (IP) rating
IP55
Operating environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
554
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protection
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method
Antiearthquak e performan ce
ETSI EN 300019-1-4: "Earthquake"
Noise
l ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural)
YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
l ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
555
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900C complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900C is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
556
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
Surge protection
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.17 OMB Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of OMBs.
3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB This section describes the exteriors and dimensions of outdoor mini boxes (OMBs). The following figure shows the exteriors of OMBs. Figure 3-76 Exteriors of OMBs
The following figure shows the dimensions of OMBs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
557
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-77 Dimensions of OMBs
3.17.2 Components in OMBs This section describes module and board configurations in OMBs.
Components in OMBs The following figure shows the components in OMBs, including an AC OMB and a DC OMB. Figure 3-78 Components in OMBs
The following table lists the components in an OMB.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
558
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-108 Components in an OMB No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximu m Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
HEUA
Mandatory
1
An HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The OMB supports the BBU3900.
3
AC surge protecti on box
Mandatory
1
An AC surge protection box provides surge protection for AC input power.
4
EPS304815AF
Mandatory
1
An EPS30-4815AF converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
5
DCDU03B
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-03B distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
Components in OMBs (Ver.C) The following shows the components in OMBs (Ver.C), including an AC OMB (Ver.C) and a DC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
559
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-79 Components in OMBs (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an OMB (Ver.C). Table 3-109 Components in an OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximu m Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ELU
Mandatory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
2
PMU 11A
Mandatory
1
A PMU 11A manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
3
HEUB
Mandatory
1
An HEUB provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
4
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandatory
2
A PSU converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
560
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximu m Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The OMB (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
6
FAU01 D-01
Mandatory
2
Fans dissipate heat from the cabinet. They are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.
7
PDU10 D-01
Mandatory
1
A PDU10D-01 is a DC power distribution unit, supplying -48 V DC power to other components in a cabinet.
8
SPD
Mandatory
1
An SPD provides surge protection for AC input power.
9
ETP48 100-A1
Mandatory
1
An embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external AC input power into DC power.
3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C), such as dimensions, weight, ambient temperature, and relative humidity.
Engineering Specifications of an OMB The following table lists the engineering specifications of an OMB. Table 3-110 Engineering specifications of an OMB Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 15.35 in.)
Weight
AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg (55.12 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 22.5 kg (49.60 lb)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
561
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature
Without solar radiation: -40oC to 50oC (-40oF to 122oF) Short-term operation: 50oC to 55oC (122oF to 131oF) NOTE Short-term operation indicates that the continuous operation time does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated operation time within a year does not exceed 15 days.
Dustproof and waterproof
IP55
Installation mode
On a pole or wall
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Engineering Specifications of an OMB (Ver.C) The following table lists the engineering specifications of an OMB (Ver.C). Table 3-111 Engineering specifications of an OMB (Ver.C) Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Cabinet: 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 16.93 in.)
Weight
AC OMB: ≤ 30 kg (66.14 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 21 kg (46.30 lb)
Ambient temperature
-33oC to 50oC (-27.4oF to 122oF) NOTE The lower temperature alarm threshold is -33oC (-27.4oF).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Heat dissipation capability
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 650 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC (122oF).
Dustproof and waterproof
IP55
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
562
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Installation mode
On a pole or wall
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.18 IMB03 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IMB03s.
3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor mini box 03 (IMB03). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an IMB03. Figure 3-80 Exterior and dimensions of an IMB03
3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets This section describes the configurations of modules or boards in an IMB03. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
563
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Independent IMB03 Cabinets When the IMB03 is installed independently, the IMB03 can be supplied with AC or DC power. The following figure shows the components in IMB03 cabinets. Figure 3-81 Components in IMB03 cabinets
The following table describes the components in IMB03 cabinets. Table 3-112 Components in IMB03 cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabinet
No.
Componen t
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
AC IMB03
1
EPS30-4815 AFor ETP48100B1
Mandatory
1
An EPS30-4815 AF or ETP48100B1 converts 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
564
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Cabinet
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Componen t
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IMB03 supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
DC IMB03
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
1
DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
Mandatory
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
A DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
565
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Cabinet
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Componen t
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IMB03 supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
IMB03+IFS06 When the IMB03 is installed on an IFS06, the components in an AC IMB03 or a DC IMB03 can be configured according to the instructions in DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IMB03, such as dimensions, weight, and ambient temperature. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an IMB03. Table 3-113 Engineering Specifications of an IMB03
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x 16.73 in. x 7.09 in.)
Weight
10 kg (22.05 lb)
Ambient temperature
-20oC to 50oC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
566
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.19 IFS06 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an IFS06.
3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor floor installation support 06 (IFS06). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an IFS06. Figure 3-82 Exterior and dimensions of an IFS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
567
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.19.2 Components of an IFS06 This section describes components of an IFS06. The following figure shows the exterior of an IFS06. Figure 3-83 Components of an IFS06
(1) Cable tray
(2) Ground bar 2
(3) Rear foot
(4) Front foot
(5) Adjustable beam
(6) Ground bar 1
(7) Main frame
-
3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IFS06, such as dimensions and weight. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an IFS06. Table 3-114 Engineering specifications of an IFS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
1730 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm (68.11 in. x 23.62 in. x 23.62 in.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Weight
45 kg (99.21 lb)
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.20 INS12 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an INS12.
3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor open rack 12 (INS12). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an INS12. Figure 3-84 Exterior and dimensions of an INS12
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
569
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.20.2 Components of an INS12 This section describes components of an INS12. The following figure shows the components of an INS12. Figure 3-85 Components of an INS12
(1) Left frame
(2) Bottom beam assembly
(3) Right frame
(4) Top beam
3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an INS12, such as dimensions, weight, and space for customer equipment. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an INS12. Table 3-115 Engineering specifications of an INS12
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
700 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)
Weight
12 kg (26.46 lb)
Space for customer equipment (H x W x D)
533.4 mm x 482.60 mm x 370 mm (21 in. x 19 in. x 14.57 in.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
570
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.21 IMS06 Description The IMS06 applies to a BTS3900 or BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IMS06.
3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06 An IMS06 is small and easy to transport. It applies to indoor scenarios and provides 6 U installation space.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IMS06. Figure 3-86 Exterior of an IMS06
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IMS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
571
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-87 Dimensions of an IMS06
3.21.2 Components of an IMS06 This section describes module and board configurations in an IMS06. Based on the cabinet stacked with an IMS06 and the function of the IMS06, there are four configuration types for an IMS06, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-88 IMS06 configurations
Configuration type a: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides power supply to RRUs installed remotely in the scenario where RFUs and RRUs are configured. Configuration type b: The IMS06 distributes DC power. Configuration type a+c: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides additional space for installing transmission equipment. Configuration type a+d: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides short-duration backup power for a base station.
The following table describes the configurations in an IMS06. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-116 IMS06 configurations No.
Module/ Board
Option al/ Mandat ory
Maxim um Quantit y Config ured in a Single Subrac k
Description
1
DCDU-12B
Optional
1
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) provides -48 V DC power for other components. When the site is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed to provide DC power to RRUs.
2
Filler panel
Optional
3
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots in an EPU05A-02 subrack.
3
PMU 11A
Mandato ry
1
A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU11A) manages the power system and battery, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
4
PSU (R4850G2)
Mandato ry
5
A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.
5
EPU05A-02 subrack
Mandato ry
1
An EPU05A-02 subrack is used in separated macro base stations with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power inputs. It distributes the DC power.
6
Storage battery
Optional
One pack (four)
Storage batteries must be configured for a site that requires short-term backup power. IMS06 support 48V 100Ah storage battery. The IMS06 provides the following dimensions (H x W x D) for installing storage batteries: 288.5 mm x 470 mm x 396 mm (11.36 in. x 18.50 in. x 15.59 in.).
7
Transmission equipment
Optional
2
The IMS06 provides additional space for installing the transmission equipment. The total power consumption of the transmission equipment in a single IMS06 must be less than or equal to 350 W. For the specifications of the transmission equipment, see 3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
573
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
If the storage batteries are installed, a temperature sensor is required to monitor the temperature of these storage batteries. For the installation position of a temperature sensor, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 This section describes the engineering specifications of an IMS06, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IMS06 can be supplied with different AC input power. Power equipment in the cabinet converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC input power specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-117 Input power specifications of an IMS06 Power Supply
Rated Voltage
Operating Voltage
220 V AC singlephase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220 V AC threephase
l Line to neutral voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 176 V AC to 290 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 346 V AC to 415 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 304 V AC to 500 V AC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-118 Equipment specifications of an IMS06 Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
350 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (13.78 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)
Weight
≤ 21 kg (empty subrack)
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-119 Environmental specifications of an IMS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Noise
Meeting the ETS 300 753 3.1 standard Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
574
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06 The customer equipment installed in Huawei cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering specifications.
Dimensions l
The width is 19 inch.
l
The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right cannot exceed 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 250 mm (9.84 in.).
l
When the front of the customer equipment aligns with the mounting bar of the IMS06, the routing space must not exceed 100 mm (3.94 in.). NOTE
When the front of the customer equipment exceeds the mounting bar of the IMS06, the routing space is reduced by the exceeding distance.
The following figure shows the dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for the customer equipment.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
575
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-89 Dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for the customer equipment
(1) Customer equipment using natural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment supporting heat dissipation from left to right
(3) Customer equipment supporting heat dissipation from front to rear
Heat Dissipation Requirements l
If the customer equipment houses built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.
l
If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.
Temperature Requirements The temperature requirements for the customer equipment in IMS06 is -20 °C to +55 °C.
3.22 IBC10 Description This section describes the cabinet configuration and engineering specifications of an IBC10.
3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor BBU cabinet 10 (IBC10). The following figure shows the exterior of an IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
576
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-90 Exterior of an IBC10
The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
577
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-91 Dimensions of an IBC10
3.22.2 Components in IBC10s This section describes module and board configurations in DC IBC10s.
Components in a DC IBC10 The following figure shows the components in a DC IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
578
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-92 Components in a DC IBC10
The following table describes the components in a DC IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
579
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-120 Components in a DC IBC10 No.
Modul e
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Firstlevel USU
Option al
2
A first-level USU connects multiple BBUs to exchange data among the BBUs. For details, see USU3900 Hardware Description or USU3910 Hardware Description.
2
Tempera ture sensor at the air intake vent of the BBU
Manda tory
2
A temperature sensor monitors the temperature at the air intake vent of the BBU.
3
ELU
Manda tory
1
An ELU automatically reports the cabinet type.
4
BBU
Option al
10
A BBU processes baseband signals. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IBC10 supports the BBU3900.
5
DCDU12C
Manda tory
3
A DCDU-12C provides DC power for other components in a cabinet. DCDU-12C modules are numbered 0#, 1#, and 2# from the top down.
6
FAU03 D
Manda tory
2
A DC cabinet can be configured with two fan assemblies. A fan assembly is configured with one FMUEA and three fans. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the FMUEA monitors the fans and reports alarms.
7
Secondlevel USU
Option al
1
A second-level USU manages first-level USUs. For details, see USU3900 Hardware Description or USU3910 Hardware Description.
3.22.3 Engineering Specifications IBC10 engineering specifications include power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that an IBC10 needs to comply with.
Power Supply The following table lists input power supported by an IBC10. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
580
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-121 Input power for an IBC10 Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists dimensions and the weight of an IBC10. Table 3-122 Equipment specifications of an IBC10 Cabinet Name
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
IBC10 DC
2,000 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm (78.74 in. x 23.62 in. x 23.62 in.)
≤ 105 kg (excluding USU and BBU)
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environment specifications of an IBC10. Table 3-123 Environment specifications of an IBC10 Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-5°C to +50°C
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of an IBC10. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications pertain to the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-124 Surge protection specifications of the ports on an IBC10
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Specifications
DC power port
Differential mode
2 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Common mode
4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
581
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Standards The following table lists the standards that an IBC10 needs to comply with. Table 3-125 Standards for an IBC10 Item
Standard
Security standard
l IEC 60950-1: 2005 (2nd Edition) + A1: 2009
Protectio n rating
IP20
Operatin g environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"
l EN 60950-1: 2006 + A11: 2009 + A1: 2010 + A12: 2011
NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Antiseismic protectio n
l IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff: Vibration -Time-history method
Earthqua ke
ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"
Noise
ETS 300 753 3.1
l YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
582
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4
Component Description
About This Chapter Components in a cabinet can be classified into BBU, RF modules, power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, temperature control devices, environment monitoring devices, and other devices, in terms of function. 4.1 BBU The BBU is used to process baseband signals in 3900 series base stations. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. 4.2 RF Modules In 3900 series base stations, an RFU or RRU can be configured to meet RF module configuration requirements in different scenarios. 4.3 Power Equipment This section describes all types of power equipment and types of cabinets supported by the power equipment. 4.4 Monitoring Devices This section describes monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the monitoring devices. For specific monitoring schemes in base stations, see Monitor Management. 4.5 Surge Protection Devices This section describes surge protection devices and types of cabinets supported by the surge protection devices. 4.6 Temperature Control Devices This section describes temperature control devices and types of cabinets supported by the temperature control devices. 4.7 Environment Monitoring Device This section describes environment monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the environment monitoring devices. 4.8 Other Devices This section describes other devices besides power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, and temperature control devices, and environment monitoring devices, and types of cabinets supported by the other devices. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
583
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.1 BBU The BBU is used to process baseband signals in 3900 series base stations. For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
4.2 RF Modules In 3900 series base stations, an RFU or RRU can be configured to meet RF module configuration requirements in different scenarios. l
For details about the RFU hardware, see RFU Hardware Description.
l
For details about the RRU hardware, see the related manual of RRU hardware description, such as RRU3926 Hardware Description.
4.3 Power Equipment This section describes all types of power equipment and types of cabinets supported by the power equipment.
4.3.1 EPS 01 An EPS 01 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power, it can be used in an APM30H(Ver.B) cabinet. The EPS 01 is classified into four types: EPS 01A, EPS 01B, EPS 01C, and EPS 01D. An EPS 01A or EPS 01C applies to a separated macro base station, and an EPS 01B or EPS 01D applies to a distributed base station.
Components of an EPS 01 An EPS 01 consists of an EPS 01 subrack, a PMU 01B, and PSUs (EPW30-48A).
Components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C The following figure shows the components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
584
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-1 Components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)
(3) EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrack
Components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D The following figure shows the components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D. Figure 4-2 Components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)
(3) EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack
EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrack An EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes AC or DC power to other components. An EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack applies to the separated macro base station in different AC input scenarios.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table lists the types and applications of EPS 01A and EPS 01C subracks.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
585
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-1 Types and applications of EPS 01A and EPS 01C subracks Subrack
Application
Remarks
EPS 01A
Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input
EPS 01C
Separated macro base station with external 110 V AC input
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (EPW30-48A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 show the exteriors of an EPS 01A subrack and an EPS 01C subrack, respectively. Figure 4-3 Exterior of an EPS 01A subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) Short-circuiting bara
(6) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(7) Circuit breaker (8) Circuit breaker for (9) Circuit breaker for storage batteries RFC 1 for RFC 2
(11) Fuses
(12) DC output ports
(13) Output port for RFC 1
(16) Circuit breaker (17) Spare fuse box (18) Extraction tool for lithium batteriesb
(4) AC surge protector
(5) Circuit breakers for PSUs (10) TMC circuit breaker
(14) Output port for (15) Output port RFC 2 for storage batteries -
-
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed. b: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
586
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-4 Exterior of an EPS 01C subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) AC surge protector
(6) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(7) Circuit breaker for (8) Circuit breaker RFC 1 for RFC 2
(4) Circuit breakers (5) AC OUTPUT for PSUs circuit breaker (9) TMC circuit breaker
(10) Fuses
(11) DC output ports (12) Output port for RFC 1
(13) Output port for (14) Output port (15) Circuit breaker RFC 2 for storage batteries for lithium batteriesa
(16) Spare fuse box
-
(17) Extraction tool
-
-
NOTE
a: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Functions The EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
The EPS 01A or EPS 01C provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
587
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The following figure shows the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack. Table 4-2and Table 4-3list the specifications of the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack. Figure 4-5 Input terminals and output terminals on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Table 4-2 AC input terminals and output terminals on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack AC Input Terminal or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Table 4-3 DC output terminals or ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
TMC
TMC
Breaker
1x25 A
LOAD0
Fan
Fuse
1x15 A
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
LOAD1 and LOAD2
BBU
2x15 A
LOAD3
IBBSa
1x15 A
One of the LOAD4 to LOAD7 ports
TMb
4x5 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
588
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
NAc
RFC 1
Breaker
1x80 A
NAc
RFC 2
Power series 120 connector
NAc
BAT
1x100 A
NOTE
l a: IBBS is the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. When an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD3 is the DC output port for the fan power cable in the IBBS200D. When an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD3 is the DC output port for the TEC power cable in the IBBS200T. l b: TM is the customer transmission equipment. The LOAD4 to LOAD7 ports are DC output ports for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. l c: Power ports for RFC 1, RFC 2, and storage batteries are the connectors from the EPS subrack, and there is no silkscreen for them on the panels.
Circuit Breaker There are multiple circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack to control DC outputs. Figure 4-6shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-4lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
589
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-6 Circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Table 4-4 Circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPS 01A
PSU
3x16 A
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPS 01C
PSU
1x40 A
AC output circuit breaker
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x100 A
RFC circuit breaker
RFC 1 and RFC 2
2x80 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
590
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x25 A
EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes AC and DC power. An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.
Applications of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack The following table lists the applications of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Table 4-5 Applications of the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack Type
Application
Description
EPS 01B
Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power
EPS 01D
Distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (EPW30-48A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.
Exteriors Figure 4-7and Figure 4-8show the exteriors of the EPS 01B and EPS 01D subracks, respectively.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
591
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-7 Exterior of the EPS 01B subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) Short-circuiting bar(1) (4) AC surge protector
(5) PSU circuit breaker
(6) AC OUTPUT circuit (7) TMC circuit breaker (8) Circuit breaker for breaker storage batteries
(9) Breakers
(10) Fuses
(11) DC output terminals (12) Output terminal for storage batteries
(13) Circuit breaker for lithium batteries(2)
(14) Spare fuse box
(15) Extraction tool
-
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed. b: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
592
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-8 Exterior of the EPS 01D subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) AC surge protector
(5) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(6) TMC circuit breaker (7) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(8) Breakers
(9) Fuses
(10) DC output terminals (11) Output terminal for storage batteries
(12) Circuit breaker for lithium batteriesa
(13) Spare fuse box
(14) Extraction tool
-
-
(4) PSU circuit breaker
NOTE
a: The circuit breaker for the lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Function An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
The EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack provides 16 DC outputs for a distributed base station.
Figure 4-9shows the input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Table 4-6and Table 4-7list the specifications of the input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
593
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-9 Input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Table 4-6 AC input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-7 DC output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
LOAD 8 to LOAD 13
RRU
Breaker
6x20 A
TMC
TMC
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
LOAD 0
FAN
LOAD 1 and LOAD 2
BBU
2x15 A
LOAD 3
IBBS
1x15 A
LOAD 4 to LOAD 7
TM
4x5 A
-
BAT
1x25 A Fuse
Breaker
1x15 A
1x100 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Power series 120 connector (gray)
594
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack to control the DC outputs. Figure 4-10shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-8lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 4-10 Circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Table 4-8 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPS 01B)
PSU
3x16 A
PSU circuit breaker (EPS 01D)
PSU
1x40 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
595
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
AC output circuit breaker
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x100 A
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x25 A
4.3.2 EPS30-4815AF An EPS30-4815AF converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in IMB03 and OMB cabinets.
Components of an EPS30-4815AF An EPS30-4815AF consists of the EPS30-4815AF subrack, DCDU-05, PMU (EPMU03), and PSUs (GERM4815T). The following figure shows the components of an EPS30-4815AF. Figure 4-11 Components of an EPS30-4815AF
(1) DCDU-05
(2) PSU (GERM4815T)
(3) PMU (EPMU03)
(4) EPS30-4815AF Subrack
EPS30-4815AF Subrack An EPS30-4815AF subrack houses the PMU (EPMU03), PSUs (GERM4815T), and DCDU-05 and distributes AC and DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Figure 4-12 Exterior of an EPS30-4815AF subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
596
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Figure 4-13 Ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack
The following table describes the ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Table 4-9 Ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1) AC input port
INPUT
C13 connector
AC power input port
(2) Power input port for the BBU and fan
LOAD1
H4 connector
Input port (10 A) for the BBU and HEUA
(3) Power input port for the DCDU-05
LOAD2
H4 connector
Input port (20 A) for the transmission equipment
(4) Power input port for the storage batteries
BATT
H4 connector
Input port (20 A) for the storage batteries
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an EPS30-4815AF.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
597
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-10 Technical specifications of an EPS30-4815AF Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC 110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Input voltage frequency
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode
4.3.3 EPS4890 An EPS4890 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B) and IMB03(ICR scenario) cabinets.
Components of an EPS4890 An EPS4890 consists of the EPS4890 subrack, PMU 01B, and PSUs (EPW30-48A). The following figure shows the components of an EPS4890. Figure 4-14 Components of an EPS4890
(1) PMU 01B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(3) EPS4890 Subrack
598
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
EPS4890 Subrack An EPS4890 subrack houses the PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS4890 subrack. Figure 4-15 Exterior of an EPS4890 subrack
Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack. Figure 4-16 Terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack
The following table describes the terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack. Table 4-11 Terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Terminal/Circuit Breaker
Remarks
(1) Power input terminals
Connects to the AC input power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
599
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Terminal/Circuit Breaker
Remarks
(2) Circuit breakers for the storage batteries
Controls power supply to the storage batteries.
(3) Power input terminal for the storage batteries
The BAT(-) terminal connects to the negative poles of the storage batteries, and the BAT(+) terminal connects to the positive poles of the storage batteries.
(4) Power output terminals
LOAD1(-) and LOAD2(-) wiring terminals connect to NEG(-) power cables, and RTN(+) wiring terminals connect to RTN(+) power cables.
4.3.4 EPS24S48100DC An EPS24S48100DC converts +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03(ICR scenario) cabinets.
Components of an EPS24S48100DC An EPS24S48100DC consists of the EPS24S48100DC subrack and PSUs (EPW25-24S48D). The following figure shows the components of an EPS24S48100DC. Figure 4-17 Components of an EPS24S48100DC
(1) PSU (EPW25-24S48D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) EPS24S48100DC Subrack
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
600
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
EPS24S48100DC Subrack An EPS24S48100DC subrack houses the PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS24S48100DC subrack. Figure 4-18 Exterior of an EPS24S48100DC subrack
Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack. Figure 4-19 Ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack
The following table describes the ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
601
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-12 Ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack Port or Terminal
Silkscre en
Conne ctor
Remarks
(1) Power input terminals
DC INPUT
OT terminal
The + wiring terminal connects to the +24 V power cable, and the - wiring terminal connects to the +24 V RTN cable.
(2) Alarm port
ALM
Cord end terminal
Connects to the PSU monitoring signal cable.
(3) In-position signal port
PRESEN T
RJ45 connect or
Connects to the PSU in-position signal cable.
(4) Power output terminals
DC OUTPU T
OT terminal
The LOAD(-) terminal connects to the -48 V power cable, and the RTN(+) terminal connects to the -48 V RTN cable.
4.3.5 EPU03A An EPU03A converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power, it can be used in an APM30H(Ver.C) cabinet. The EPU03A is classified into four types: EPU03A-02, EPU03A-03, EPU03A-04, and EPU03A-05. An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 applies to a separated macro base station, and an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 applies to a distributed base station.
Components of an EPU03A An EPU03A consists of an EPU03A subrack, a PMU 01B, and PSUs (PSU4850A).
Components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 The following figure shows the components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
602
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-20 Components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (PSU4850A)
(3) EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 Subrack
Components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 The following figure describes the components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05. Figure 4-21 Components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (PSU4850A)
(3) EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack
EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 Subrack An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes AC or DC power to other components. An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack applies to a separated macro base station in different AC input scenarios.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table lists the types and applications of EPU03A-02 and EPU03A-04 subracks. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
603
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-13 Types and applications of EPU03A-02 and EPU03A-04 subracks Subrack
Application
Remarks
EPU03A-02
Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input
EPU03A-04
Separated macro base station with external 110 V AC input
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (PSU4850A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-22 and Figure 4-23 show the exteriors of an EPU03A-02 subrack and an EPU03A-04 subrack, respectively. Figure 4-22 Exterior of an EPU03A-02 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT (3) Circuit breakers for (4) AC OUTPUT PSU 1 to PSU 3 circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(6) TMC circuit breaker
(7) BBU_0 circuit (8) BBU_1 circuit breaker breaker
(9) RFC 1 circuit breaker
(10) RFC 2 circuit breaker
(11) Extraction tool (12) Spare fuse box
(13) Output port for storage batteries
(14) Output port for RFC 2
(15) Output port for RFC 1
(16) DC output ports
(18) AC surge protector
(19) Short-circuiting bara
-
(17) Fuses
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU03A-02 subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPU03A-02 subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
604
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-23 Exterior of an EPU03A-04 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT
(3) Circuit breaker for the PSU
(4) AC OUTPUT1 circuit breaker
(5) AC OUTPUT2 circuit breaker
(6) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(7) TMC circuit breaker
(8) BBU_0 circuit (9) BBU_1 circuit breaker breaker
(10) RFC 1 circuit breaker
(11) RFC 2 circuit breaker
(12) Extraction tool (13) Spare fuse box
(16) Output port for (17) DC output RFC 1 ports
(18) Fuses
(14) Output port for storage batteries
(15) Output port for RFC 2
(19) AC surge protector
-
Functions An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.
Ports The following figure shows the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack. Table 4-14and Table 4-15list the specifications of the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
605
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-24 Input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Table 4-14 AC input terminals and output terminals on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack AC Input Terminal or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Table 4-15 DC output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specification s of the Protector
Connector
TMC
TMC
Breaker
1x30 A
BBU_0 and BBU_1
BBU
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
LOAD0 and LOAD1
TMa
LOAD2
TMa
LOAD3
Fan or TECb
LOAD4
TM or EMUA or EMUBc
LOAD5
Fand
2x25 A Fuse
2x5 A 4x15 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
606
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specification s of the Protector
Connector
NAe
RFC 1 and RFC 2
Breaker
2x125 A
Power series 120 connector (blue) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)
1x160 A
Power series 175 connector (gray) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in. 2)
BAT
NOTE
a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. The LOAD0, LOAD1, LOAD2, and LOAD4 ports are DC output ports for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When an IBBS200D is configured, the LOAD3 port is the DC output port for the fan power cable in the IBBS200D. When an IBBS200T is configured, the LOAD3 port is the DC output port for the TEC power cable in the IBBS200T. c: When an EMUA or EMUB is configured, the LOAD4 port is the DC output port for the EMUA or EMUB. When no EMUA or EMUB is configured, the LOAD4 port can supply power to the transmission equipment. d: The LOAD5 port is the DC output port for the fan assembly in the APM30H. e: Power ports for RFC 1, RFC 2, and storage batteries are the connectors from the EPU subrack, and there is no silkscreen for them on the panels.
Circuit Breaker There are multiple circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack to control DC outputs. Figure 4-25shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-16lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
607
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-25 Circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Table 4-16 Circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPU03A-02
PSU 1 to PSU 3
3x20 A
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPU03A-04
PSUs
1x63 A
AC output circuit breaker in the EPU03A-02
AC OUTPUT
1x15 A
AC output circuit breaker in the EPU03A-04
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x15 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
608
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x160 A
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x30 A
BBU circuit breaker
BBU_0 and BBU_1
2x25 A
RFC circuit breaker
RFC 1 and RFC 2
2x125 A
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack. Table 4-17 Technical specifications of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack Power Supply
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 150 A
EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes AC or DC power to components in the cabinet. An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.
Applications of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack The following table describes the applications of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. Table 4-18 Applications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Type
Application
Description
EPU03A-03
Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power
EPU03A-05
Distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (PSU4850A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
609
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exteriors Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27 show the exteriors of the EPU03A-03 and EPU03A-05 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-26 Exterior of the EPU03A-03 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT
(3) Circuit breakers for PSU 1 to PSU 3
(4) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(6) TMC circuit breaker
(7) BBU_0 circuit breaker (8) BBU_1 circuit breaker
(9) Circuit breakers for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(10) Extraction tool
(11) Spare fuse box
(12) Output terminal for storage batteries
(13) DC output terminals
(14) Fuses
(15) AC surge protector
(16) Short-circuiting bara
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
610
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-27 Exterior of the EPU03A-05 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT
(3) PSU circuit breaker
(4) AC OUTPUT 1 circuit breaker
(5) AC OUTPUT 2 circuit (6) Circuit breaker for (7) TMC circuit breaker breaker storage batteries
(8) BBU_0 circuit breaker
(9) BBU_1 circuit breaker (10) Circuit breakers for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(11) Extraction tool
(12) Spare fuse box
(13) Output terminal for storage batteries
(15) Fuses
(16) AC surge protector
(14) DC output terminals
Function An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack provides 16 DC outputs for a distributed base station.
Terminals The following figure shows the power input and output terminals on an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. For details, see Table 4-19 and Table 4-20.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
611
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-28 Power input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Table 4-19 AC input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-20 DC input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
RRU 0 to RRU 5
RRU
Breaker
6x25 A
TMC
TMC
1x30 A
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
BBU_0 and BBU_1
BBU
2x25 A
LOAD 0 and LOAD 1
TM
LOAD 2
TM
LOAD 3
TEC/FAN (battery cabinet)
Fusea
2x5 A 4x15 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
612
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
LOAD 4
EMUA or EMUB
LOAD 5
FAN
-
BAT
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
Breaker
1x160 A
Power series 175 connector (gray) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in. 2)
NOTE
a: The spare fuse box can provide 5 A and 15 A fuses, which can be used to replace broken ones onsite.
Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 4-29 Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
613
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPU03A-03)
PSU1 to PSU3
3x20 A
PSU circuit breaker (EPU03A-05)
PSU
1x63 A
AC output circuit breaker (EPU03A-03)
AC OUTPUT
1x15 A
AC output circuit breakers (EPU03A-05)
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x15 A
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x160 A
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x30 A
BBU circuit breakers
BBU_0 and BBU_1
2x25 A
RRU circuit breakers
RRU0 to RRU5
6x25 A
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. Table 4-22 Technical specifications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack Component
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 150 A
4.3.6 EPU05A An EPU05A converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. EPU05A types include EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, EPU05A-05, EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, and EPU05A-09. The EPU05A-02, EPU05A-04, EPU05A-06, and EPU05A-08 can be used in macro base stations, and the EPU05A-03, EPU05A-05, EPU05A-07, and EPU05A-09 can be used in distributed base stations. The EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, and EPU05A-05 can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets, APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, and BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, or IMS06s. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
614
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, and EPU05A-09 can be used in APM30Hs (Ver.E).
Components in an EPU05A An EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05 consists of an EPU05A subrack, a PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). An EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 consists of an EPU05A subrack, PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01.
Components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04. Figure 4-30 Components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PMU 11A
It is always installed in slot 0.
(2)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(3)
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots.
(4)
EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack
-
Components of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
615
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-31 Components of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PMU 11A
It is always installed in slot 0.
(2)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(3)
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots.
(4)
EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
-
Components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
616
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-32 Components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(2)
PDU01D-01
It is optional and can be installed in slot 6.
(3)
PDU03D-02
It is optional and can be installed in slot 7, 8, or 9.
(4)
EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 Subracks
-
-
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in any of vacant slots 1 to 9.
Components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
617
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-33 Components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(2)
PDU01D-01
It is optional and can be installed in slot 6.
(3)
PDU03D-02
It is optional and can be installed in slot 7, 8, or 9.
(4)
EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 Subracks
-
-
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in any of vacant slots 1 to 9.
EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 applies to a macro base station in different AC input scenarios.
Application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack The following table describes the application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-23 Application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Type
Application
Description
EPU05A-02
Macro base station with external 220 V AC input
It is a 5 U subrack and houses a maximum of five PSUs (R4850G2)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
618
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Type
Application
Description
EPU05A-04
Macro base station with external 110 V AC input
and one PMU. It distributes largeand small-capacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35 show the exteriors of EPU05A-02 and EPU05A-04 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-34 Exterior of an EPU05A-02 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, PSU2/5 circuit breaker, and PSU3 circuit breaker
(3) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(4) BAT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC1
(6) Circuit breaker for RFC2
(7) Output port for the storage battery
(8) RFC1 output port
(9) RFC2 output port
(10) LOAD0 to LOAD8 output (11) Spare fuse box ports
(12) Short-circuiting bara
(13) AC INPUT
(14) AC OUTPUT
-
-
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
619
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-35 Exterior of an EPU05A-04 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU circuit breaker
(3) AC OUTPUT1/AC OUTPUT2 circuit breaker
(4) BAT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC1
(6) Circuit breaker for RFC2
(7) Output port for the storage battery
(8) RFC1 output port
(9) RFC2 output port
(10) LOAD0 to LOAD8 (11) Spare fuse box output ports
(12) AC INPUT
(13) AC OUTPUT
-
-
-
Function An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the AC junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.
Port The following figure shows the power input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-24 and Table 4-25 list the ports in detail.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
620
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-36 Power input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Table 4-24 AC input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT (EPU05A-02)
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT (EPU05A-04)
L1, L2, N, PE
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-25 DC input and output ports and terminals on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC output ports
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
LOAD0 and LOAD1
BBU
Fusec
9x30 A
EPC4
LOAD2
FAN
LOAD3
TM_0a
LOAD4
TM_1
LOAD5
TM_2 or EMUA or EMUB
LOAD6
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD7
TMC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
621
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC output ports
DC Power Supply Unit
LOAD8
IBBSb
RFC1
RFC1
RFC2
RFC2
BAT
BAT
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
Breaker
2x125 A
OT terminal (M6)
1x250 A
OT terminal (M8)
NOTE
a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output port for the IBBS200D fan power cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output port for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: The spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement.
Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack panel to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-37 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
622
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-26 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPU05A-02)
PSU1/4
1x40 A/1 P
PSU2/5
1x40 A/1 P
PSU3
1x25 A/1 P
PSU circuit breakers (EPU05A-04)
PSU
1x100 A/2 P
AC output circuit breaker (EPU05A-02)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A/2 P
AC output circuit breaker (EPU05A-04)
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x16 A/1 P
Storage battery circuit breaker
BAT
1x125 A/2 P
RFC circuit breaker
RFC 1 and RFC 2
2x125 A/1 P
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-27 Technical specifications of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack Component
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 250 A
EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 Subrack An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). It also distributes AC and DC power. The EPU05A-03 and EPU05A-05 subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.
Applications of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 Subrack The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
623
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-28 Applications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack Type
Application
Description
EPU05A-03
Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power
EPU05A-05
Distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power
It is a 5 U subrack and houses a maximum of five PSUs (R4850G2) and one PMU 11A. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Exteriors Figure 4-38and Figure 4-39show the exteriors of the EPU05A-03 and EPU05A-05 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-38 Exterior of the EPU05A-03 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, (3) AC OUTPUT circuit (4) BAT circuit breaker PSU2/5 circuit breaker, and breaker PSU3 circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC 1
(6) Output terminal for storage batteries
(7) Output terminal for RFC 1
(8) Output terminals for LOAD 0 to LOAD 8
(9) Output terminals for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) Short-circuiting bara
(12) AC INPUT
(13) AC OUTPUT
-
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
624
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Figure 4-39 Exterior of the EPU05A-05 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU circuit breaker (3) AC OUTPUT 1 or AC OUTPUT 2 circuit breaker
(4) BAT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC (6) Output terminal for (7) Output terminal for RFC (8) LOAD 0 to LOAD 8 1 storage batteries 1 output terminals (9) Output terminals for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) AC INPUT
(12) AC OUTPUT
Function An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack provides 17 DC outputs for a distributed base station.
Terminals The following figure shows the power input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack, as shown in Table 4-29, Table 4-30. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
625
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-40 Power input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Table 4-29 AC input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT (EPU05A-03)
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT (EPU05A-05)
L1, L2, N, PE
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-30 DC input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
LOAD 0 and LOAD 1
BBU
Fusec
15x30 A
EPC 4
LOAD 2
FAN
LOAD 3
TM_0a
LOAD 4
TM_1
LOAD 5
TM_2 or EMUA or EMUB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
626
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
LOAD 6
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD 7
TMC
LOAD 8
IBBSb
RRU 0 to RRU 5
RRU
RFC 1
RFC
BAT
BAT
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
EPC 5 Breaker
1x125 A
OT terminal (M6)
1x250 A
OT terminal (M8)
NOTE
a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal connecting to the IBBS200D fan power cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal connecting to the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: The spare fuse box can provide five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses, which can be used to replace broken ones onsite.
Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack panel to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of the circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
627
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-41 Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Table 4-31 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPU05A-03)
PSU1/4
1x40 A/1 P
PSU2/5
1x40 A/1 P
PSU3
1x25 A/1 P
PSU circuit breaker (EPU05A-05)
PSU
1x100 A/2 P
AC output circuit breaker (EPU05A-03)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A/2 P
AC output circuit breakers (EPU05A-05)
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x16 A/1 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
628
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x125 A/2 P
RFC circuit breaker
RFC1
1x125 A/1 P
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack. Table 4-32 Technical specifications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack Component
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 250 A
EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 Subracks An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack houses PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 subracks can be used in separated macro base stations with different AC power inputs.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-06 subrack and an EPU05A-08 subrack. Table 4-33 Applications of an EPU05A-06 subrack and an EPU05A-08 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Model
Application
Description
EPU05A-06
Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input
EPU05A-08
Separated macro base station with an external 110 V AC power input
It is 5 U high and can house five PSUs (R4850G2) with 3000 W power of each PSU, three PDU03D-02s, and one PDU01D-01. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
629
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior Figure 4-42 and Figure 4-43 show the exteriors of EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-42 Exterior of an EPU05A-06 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(3) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(4) Output port and circuit breaker for RFC 1
(5) Output port and circuit (6) BAT output terminals breaker for RFC 2 for storage batteries
(7) Indicator for the storage battery circuit status
(8) Button switch for the storage battery circuit
(9) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals
(10) PMIU
(11) Spare fuse box
(12) AC OUTPUT port
(13) AC INPUT port
(14) Short-circuiting bar
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
630
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-43 Exterior of an EPU05A-08 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs (3) AC OUTPUT 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 circuit breaker
(4) Output port and circuit breaker for RFC 1
(5) Output port and circuit (6) BAT output terminals for (7) Indicator for the breaker for RFC 2 storage batteries storage battery circuit status
(8) Button switch for the storage battery circuit
(9) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals
(10) Power monitoring interface unit (PMIU)
(11) Spare fuse box
(12) AC OUTPUT port
(13) AC INPUT port
-
-
-
NOTE
l If a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. If the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, you must remove the short-circuiting bar. l Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 220 V AC power are gray. Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 110 V AC power are blue. l The button switch for storage battery circuit controls the power supply of the storage batteries. If the indicator for storage battery circuit status is steady off, the storage battery circuit is interrupted. If the indicator is steady on, the storage battery circuit is normal. l Before maintaining storage batteries, turn off the switch for storage battery circuit.
Function An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 distributes AC input power and DC output power. l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC power outputs (one for an SOU and one for the AC junction box on the left of a cabinet). The AC junction box provides four AC power outputs for heaters or heating films.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
631
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
– l
Provides a circuit breaker for each of five PSUs.
An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 provides 12 DC power outputs by default and can be configured with a PDU01D-01 and a PDU03D-02 to provide a maximum of 22 power outputs to meet DC power distribution requirements in a separated macro base station.
Port The following figure shows AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack. Table 4-34and Table 4-35list the specifications of AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports. Figure 4-44 AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack
Table 4-34 AC power input and output terminals on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
AC Input or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-06)
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-08)
L1, L2, N, and PE
AC OUTPUT terminal
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
632
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-35 DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack DC Power Output Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD0 and LOAD1
BBU
Fusec
9x30 A
EPC4
LOAD2
FAN
LOAD3
TM_0a
LOAD4
TM_1
LOAD5
TM_2, EMUA, or EMUB
LOAD6
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD7
TMC
LOAD8
IBBSb
RFC 1
RFC 1
Breaker
2x100 A
RFC 2
RFC 2
OT terminal (M6)
BATd
BAT
-
-
-
a: TM is customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC power output terminals for transmission equipment, supporting four DC power outputs. b: If an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power cable. If an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: A spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement. d: The BAT port in an EPU subrack does not have a protective component. The circuit breaker BAT in a battery cabinet requires 250 A current.
Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack to control DC power outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-45 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
633
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-36 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs
PSU1, PSU2, PSU3, PSU4, and PSU5
5x32 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-06)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-08)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
Circuit breakers for RFCs
RFC1 and RFC2
2x100 A
EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 Subracks An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack houses PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 subracks can be used in distributed base stations with different AC power inputs.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack. Table 4-37 Applications of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack Model
Application
Description
EPU05A-07
Distributed base station with an external 220 V AC power input
EPU05A-09
Distributed base station with an external 110 V AC power input
It is 5 U high and can house five PSUs (R4850G2) with 3000 W power of each PSU, three PDU03D-02s, and one PDU01D-01. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the exteriors of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
634
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-46 Exterior of EPU05A-07 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
(3) AC OUTPUT circuit (4) LOAD9 to LOAD14 breaker power output terminals
(5) Power output terminals (6) Indicator for the storage (7) Button switch for the (8) LOAD0 to LOAD8 for storage batteries battery circuit status storage battery circuit power output terminals (9) Power monitoring interface unit (PMIU)
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) AC OUTPUT terminal
(12) AC INPUT terminal
(13) Short-circuiting bar
-
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
635
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-47 Exterior of an EPU05A-09 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs (3) AC OUTPUT circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 breaker
(4) LOAD9 to LOAD14 power output terminals
(5) Power output terminals for storage batteries
(6) Indicator for the storage battery circuit status
(7) Button switch for the storage battery circuit
(8) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals
(9) PMIU
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) AC OUTPUT terminal
(12) AC INPUT terminal
NOTE
l If a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. If the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, you must remove the short-circuiting bar. l Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 220 V AC power are gray. Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 110 V AC power are blue. l The button switch for storage battery circuit controls the power supply of the storage batteries. If the indicator for storage battery circuit status is steady off, the storage battery circuit is interrupted. If the indicator is steady on, the storage battery circuit is normal. l Before maintaining storage batteries, turn off the switch for storage battery circuit.
Function An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 distributes AC input power and DC output power. l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC power outputs (one for an SOU and one for the AC junction box on the left of a cabinet). The AC junction box provides four AC power outputs for heaters or heating films.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
–
Provides a circuit breaker for each of five PSUs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
636
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
4 Component Description
An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 provides 16 DC power outputs by default and can be configured with a PDU01D-01 and a PDU03D-02 to provide a maximum of 26 DC power outputs to meet DC power distribution requirements in a distributed base station.
Port The following figure shows AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack. Table 4-38 and Table 4-39 list the specifications of AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports. Figure 4-48 AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack
Table 4-38 AC power input and output terminals on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
AC Input or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-07)
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-09)
L1, L2, N, and PE
AC OUTPUT terminal
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
637
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-39 DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack DC Power Output Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports
BBU
Fusec
9x30 A
EPC4
LOAD2 port
FAN
LOAD3 port
TM_0a
LOAD4 port
TM_1
LOAD5 port
TM_2, EMUA, or EMUB
LOAD6 port
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD7
TMC
LOAD8 port
IBBSb
LOAD9 to LOAD14 portsd
RRUs
Fuse
6x30 A
EPC5
BATe
BAT
-
-
-
a: TM is customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC power output terminals for transmission equipment, supporting four DC power outputs. b: If an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power cable. If an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: A spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement. d: LOAD9 to LOAD14 ports configured with EPC5 connectors supply power to RRUs. e: The BAT port in an EPU subrack does not have a protective component. The circuit breaker BAT in a battery cabinet requires 250 A current.
Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack to control DC power outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-49 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
638
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-40 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs
PSU1/2/3/4/5
5x32 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-07)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-09)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
4.3.7 ETP48150-A3 The ETP48150-A3 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in a BTS3900(Ver.C) cabinet.
Components of an ETP48150-A3 The ETP48150-A3 consists of the ETP48150-A3 subrack, PMU 01B, and PSUs (PSU4850A). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48150-A3. Figure 4-50 Components of an ETP48150-A3
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (PSU4850A)
(3) ETP48150-A3 Subrack
ETP48150-A3 Subrack The ETP48150-A3 subrack provides slots for the PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes DC power to other components. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
639
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Figure 4-51 Exterior of an ETP48150-A3 subrack
Ports The following figure shows the components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Figure 4-52 Components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack
The following table describes the components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Table 4-41 Components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Component
Connector
Remarks
(1) Power input terminals
OT terminals
Connect to the AC input power cables.
(2) Circuit breakers
-
Control the power output.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
640
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Component
Connector
Remarks
(3) Power output terminals
OT terminals
The positive pole is connected to the RTN(+) terminal on the DCDU-11A. The negative pole is connected to the NEG(-) terminal on the DCDU-11A.
4.3.8 ETP48400 The ETP48400 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in a BTS3900AL(Ver.A) cabinet.
Components of an ETP48400 The ETP48400 consists of the ETP48400 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48400. Figure 4-53 Components of an ETP48400
(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B
(2) PSU (R4850G2)
(3) ETP48400 Subrack
The following table describes the components of an ETP48400. Table 4-42 Components of an ETP48400
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Component
Description
ETP48400 subrack
Figure 4-53shows how slots are numbered in an ETP48400 subrack.
PMU 11A
It is installed in slot 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
641
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Component
Description
PSU (R4850G2)
A minimum of two PSUs must be configured. The PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots from slot 1 to slot 7.
ETP48400 Subrack The ETP48400 subrack distributes AC input power and DC output power, and provides slots for a PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and communication interfaces between the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48400 subrack. Figure 4-54 Exterior of an ETP48400 subrack
(1) Power supply terminal (2) Power supply terminal for DCDU-12C module 0 for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet
(3) Power supply terminal for the TMC11H (Ver.D)
(4) AC input wiring terminal
(5) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12C module 0
(6) Circuit breaker for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet
(7) Circuit breaker for the TMC11H (Ver.D)
(8) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12B module 2
(9) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12C module 1
(10) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12B module 3
(11) Circuit breaker for the built-in storage batteries, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T
(12) DC output ports
Functions An ETP48400 subrack can house one PMU 11A and seven PSUs (R4850G2) and provides the following DC power outputs: Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
642
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Three DC power outputs of 100 A: One power output is supplied to the DCDU-12C, and the other two power outputs are designated for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet and TMC11H (Ver.D).
l
Three DC power outputs of 200 A: One power output is supplied to the DCDU-12C, and the other two power outputs are supplied to the DCDU-12B.
l
One DC power output of 400 A: It is supplied to the built-in storage battery pack, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T.
4.3.9 ETP48100-A1 An ETP48100-A1 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in an OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.
Components of an ETP48100-A1 An ETP48100-A1 consists of the ETP48100-A1 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48100-A1. Figure 4-55 Components of an ETP48100-A1
(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B
(2) PSU (R4850G2)
(3) ETP48100-A1 Subrack
ETP48100-A1 Subrack An ETP48100-A1 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and distributes AC and DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
643
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-56 Exterior of an ETP48100-A1 subrack
Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Figure 4-57 Terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack
The following table describes the terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Table 4-43 Terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1) AC input terminal
INPUT
OT terminal
Connects to the AC input power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
644
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(2) Circuit breaker
LOAD0 or LOAD1
-
Controls the power output.
(3) DC output terminal
OUTPUT
OT terminal
The positive wire is connected to the RTN(+) terminal on the PDU10D-01. The negative wire is connected to the NEG(-) terminal on the PDU10D-01.
4.3.10 ETP48100-B1 An ETP48100-B1 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in an IMB03 cabinet.
Components of an ETP48100-B1 An ETP48100-B1 consists of the ETP48100-B1 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48100-B1. Figure 4-58 Components of an ETP48100-B1
(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B
(2) PSU (R4850G2)
(3) ETP48100-B1 Subrack
ETP48100-B1 Subrack An ETP48100-B1 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and distributes AC and DC power to other components. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
645
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Figure 4-59 Exterior of an ETP48100-B1 subrack
Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Figure 4-60 Ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack
The following table describes the ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Table 4-44 Ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1) AC input terminal
INPUT
OT terminal
Connects to the AC input power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
646
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(2) DC output port
OUTPUT
EPC5 connector
l The LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports feed power to RRUs. l The LOAD3 port feeds power to the BBU.
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an ETP48100-B1. Table 4-45 Technical specifications of an ETP48100-B1 Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC
Input voltage frequency
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
30 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode
4.3.11 PMU This section describes PMUs and types of cabinets supported by the PMUs.
PMU 11A or PMU 11B A power monitoring unit 11A/11B (PMU 11A or PMU 11B) manages the power system and battery, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets and IMS06 subrack.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. NOTE
On the lower left of a PMU 11A and a PMU 11B, there are silkscreens PMU 11A and PMU 11B, respectively.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
647
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-61 Exterior of a PMU 11A or PMU 11B
Function A PMU 11A or PMU 11B performs the following functions: l
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.
l
Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.
l
Monitors the door status and the temperature of storage batteries.
l
Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.
l
Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.
Port The following figure shows the ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Figure 4-62 Ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B
The following table describes the ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Table 4-46 Ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
1
GATE
2-pin connector
Connects to a door status sensor.
2
TEM_BAT
2-pin connector
Connects to a battery temperature sensor.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
648
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
3
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Connects to the BBU or communicates with the upper-level monitoring board.
4
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Communicates with the lower-level monitoring board.
5
COM_485
RJ45 connector
Connects to the monitoring board in the battery cabinet, and receives monitoring signals from the battery cabinet.
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Table 4-47 Indicators on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B Silksc reen
Meanin g
Color
State
Description
RUN
Running indicator
Green
Steady on
The module is performing startup, selfcheck, loading, and activation.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The PMU 11A or PMU 11B is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The PMU 11A or PMU 11B is functional but unable to communicate properly.
Steady off
The module is faulty or there is no DC power supply.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the module must be replaced.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the module.
ALM
Alarm indicator
Red
DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B. The DIP switch has eight bits, where the four least significant bits 1, 2, 3, and 4 define the monitoring address of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B, and the four most significant bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not defined but reserved for future use. ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
649
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-63 DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B
NOTE
At a site configured with two or more APM30Hs, if two PMU units are connected to one RS485 bus for the BBU, the monitoring address of the other PMU is set to 4. That is, the lower four bits of the DIP switch are set to 0010.
PMU 01B A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), BTS3900(Ver.C), APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), and IMB03 cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU 01B. Figure 4-64 Exterior of a PMU 01B
Functions A PMU 01B performs the following functions: Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
650
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
PMUs of different versions have different functions. If new functions are required, manually upgrade the PMU software version online.
l
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.
l
Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.
l
Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection, ambient humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby analog values.
l
Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.
l
Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.
Ports The following figure shows the ports and indicators on a PMU 01B. Figure 4-65 Ports and indicators on a PMU 01B
(1) PMU status indicator (2) Power test ports (3) Circuit breaker for storage batteries (4) COM port (5) COM_485 port
(6) COM_OUT port (7) COM_IN port
(8) Backplane port
The following table describes the ports and circuit breaker on a PMU 01B. Table 4-48 Ports and circuit breaker on a PMU 01B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port or Circuit Breake r
Silkscreen
Remarks
Power test ports
-48 V/+24 V and 0V
Used for measuring the PMU 01B output voltage.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
651
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port or Circuit Breake r
Silkscreen
Remarks
Circuit breaker for storage batterie s
BAT (ON and OFF)
Used for powering on and off storage batteries through the ON and OFF ports. l Insert a round stick into the ON port and hold down it for 5s to 10s. If you hear a click, the storage batteries are connected and the power-on operation is successful. l Insert a round stick into the OFF port and hold down it for 5s to 10s. If you hear a click, the storage batteries are disconnected and the power-off operation is successful.
COM port
COM
Connects to the HPMI, and receives alarm signals from the HPMI.
COM_ 485 port
COM_485
Connects to the monitoring board in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, and receives monitoring signals from the battery cabinet.
COM_ OUT port
COM_OUT
Connects to the lower-level device, such as the EMUA or EMUB, and collects alarm signals from the lower-level device.
COM_I N port
COM_IN
Connects to the BBU or upper-level device, and reports alarm signals to the BBU.
Backpl ane port
-
Connects to the connector on the backplane in the power subrack.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a PMU 01B. Table 4-49 Indicators on a PMU 01B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Silksc reen
Mean ing
Color
State
Description
RUN
Runni ng indica tor
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly. (This status does not necessarily mean that the main control board has been configured with the PMU.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
652
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silksc reen
ALM
Mean ing
Alarm indica tor
Color
Red
State
Description
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the main control board. If the PMU 01B has not communicated with the main control board for one minute, this situation is regarded as a communication failure.
Steady on or off
The module is faulty (if it is not in the power-on check state).
Steady on
The base station reports at least one of the following alarms: l Mains power supply failure alarm (including mains phase loss) l Mains power overvoltage or undervoltage alarm l Busbar overvoltage or undervoltage alarm l Charging overcurrent l Battery power-off alarm l Battery group circuit failure alarm l Ambient temperature alarm l Ambient humidity alarm l Power module alarm l Load power-off
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
NOTE
Within 3s to 5s after the PMU 01B is powered on, the ALM and RUN indicators are on for about 3s.
DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the right side of the PMU 01B panel. The DIP switch has eight bits, where the four bits 1, 2, 3, and 4 define the monitoring address of the PMU 01B, and the four bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not defined and reserved for future use. ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 01B is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
653
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-66 DIP switch on the right side of the PMU 01B panel
NOTE
At a site configured with two or more APM30Hs, if two PMU units are connected to one RS485 bus for the BBU, the monitoring address of the other PMU is set to 4. That is, the lower four bits of the DIP switch are set to 0010.
PMU (EPMU03) A power monitoring unit (PMU) (EPMU03) manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU (EPMU03). Figure 4-67 Exterior of a PMU (EPMU03)
Functions The PMU (EPMU03) performs the following functions: l Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
654
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.
l
Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection, ambient humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby analog values.
l
Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.
l
Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 serial port.
Port Figure 4-68shows the ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel and Table 4-50describes these ports. Figure 4-68 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel
Table 4-50 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
1
RS232/RS485
RJ45 connector
Active communication port
2
RS232/RS485
RJ45 connector
Standby communication port
3
COM
-
Reserved
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the PMU (EPMU03) panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
655
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-51 Indicators on the PMU (EPMU03) panel Silkscre en
Meani ng
Color
State
Remarks
RUN
Runnin g indicato r
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is running properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The PMU (EPMU03) is functional but unable to communicate properly.
Alarm indicato r
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
ALM
DIP Switch The following figure shows the DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03). Figure 4-69 DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03)
The following table describes the settings of the DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
656
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-52 Settings of the DIP switch DIP Bit
Function
Setting Rule
1 to 5
Define the communication address of the PMU.
(1) 1 to 5 correspond to bit 0 to bit 4, respectively. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. For example, if the communication address of the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set to OFF. (2) The default settings are as follows: 1 (bit 0) is set to ON. 2 (bit 1) is set to ON. 3 (bit 2) is set to OFF. 4 (bit 3) is set to OFF. 5 (bit 4) is set to OFF.
6
Selects a baud rate for communicating with the main control unit.
When 6 is set to ON, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is set to OFF, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
7 and 8
Reserved and undefined.
7 and 8 are set to OFF.
PMIU A power monitoring interface unit (PMIU) transfers monitoring signals from an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 to a CCUB. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.E), APM30H (Ver.E_A2), or APM30H (Ver.E_B~D).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMIU. Figure 4-70 Exterior of a PMIU
(1) STATE indicator
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) RJ45 port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
657
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A PMIU performs the following functions: l
Communicates with a CCUB, manages the power system, and charges and discharges batteries
l
Monitors power distribution analog signals, including DC voltage, battery current, battery circuit status, and AC SPD status.
l
Controls battery and load contactors.
l
Identifies whether pluggable modules are in position.
Port The following table describes the ports on a PMIU. Table 4-53 Port on a PMIU Silkscreen
Connector
Description
PMI
RJ45 connector
Connecting to the PMI port on the CCUB in a cabinet and reporting monitoring information about the power subrack to the CCUB.
Indicator The following table describes the indicator on a PMIU. Table 4-54 Indicator on a PMIU Silkscr een
Color
Status
Description
STATE
-
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Green
Steady on
Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the module must be replaced.
4.3.12 PSU This section describes PSUs and types of cabinets supported by the PSUs.
PSU (R4850G2) A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. A PSU (R4850G2) can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
658
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.E), APM30 (Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_A1), APM30 (Ver.E_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_B~D), APM30H (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z), and IMS06.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (R4850G2). Figure 4-71 Exterior of a PSU (R4850G2)
Function A PSU (R4850G2) performs the following functions: l
Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC and adjusts the output voltage.
l
Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overtemperature for its DC outputs.
l
Dissipates heat using its built-in fans.
l
The output power is 3000 w.
Indicator The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (R4850G2). Figure 4-72 Indicators on a PSU (R4850G2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
659
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (R4850G2). Table 4-55 Indicators on a PSU (R4850G2) Indicatora
Color
Status
Description
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
The board is functional.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The PSU is loading software online.
Steady off
The mains supply or the module is faulty.
Steady off
Yes
Steady on
An alarm triggered by an external factorb is generated.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The communication between the module and the PMU is interrupted.
Steady off
Yes
Steady on
The module is faulty or is shut down in an emergency. Locate the fault and replace the module.
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
Yellow
Red
NOTE
a: If the red indicator and green indicator are steady on and the yellow indicator is blinking, PSUs not securely installed in the slots. b: An alarm can be triggered by the following external factors: l
The rectifier generates a prewarning for power limiting due to overtemperature.
l
The rectifier generates an alarm for shutdown due to ambient overtemperature protection.
l
The rectifier generates an alarm due to AC input overvoltage or undervoltage protection.
l
The rectifier is hibernated.
PSU (PSU4850A) A power supply unit (PSU) (PSU4850A) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.C) and APM30H(Ver.C) cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (PSU4850A).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
660
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-73 Exterior of a PSU (PSU4850A)
Functions A PSU (PSU4850A) performs the following functions: l
Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes the -48 V DC power.
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 2900 w.
Indicators The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A). Figure 4-74 Indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A)
(1) Power indicator
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Protection indicator
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(3) Fault indicator
661
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A). Table 4-56 Indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A) Silkscreen
Color
State
Remarks
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
Normal
Steady off
l Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input) l No output from PSUs
(2) Protection indicator
Yellow
(3) Fault indicator
Red
Steady off
Normal
Steady on
Temperature prewarning
Steady off
l Normal l No output from PSUs due to mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input)
Steady on
l No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown, fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown l No output from PSUs due to other internal problems
PSU (EPW30-48A) A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW30-48A) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03 cabinets. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
662
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (EPW30-48A). Figure 4-75 Exterior of a PSU (EPW30-48A)
Functions A PSU (EPW30-48A) performs the following functions: l
Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes the -48 V DC power.
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 1600 w.
Indicators The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
663
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-76 Indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A)
(1) Power indicator
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A). Table 4-57 Indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A) Silkscreen
Color
State
Remarks
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
Normal
Steady off
l Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input) l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A)
(2) Protection indicator
Yellow
(3) Fault indicator
Red
Steady off
Normal
Steady on
Temperature prewarning
Steady off
l Normal l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A) due to mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
664
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Color
State
Remarks
Steady on
l No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown, fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A) due to other internal problems
PSU (GERM4815T) A power supply unit (PSU) (GERM4815T) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.
Functions A PSU (GERM4815T) performs the following functions: l
Converts 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power, and provides the DC power to the customer equipment.
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 800 w.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (GERM4815T).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
665
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-77 Exterior of a PSU (GERM4815T)
Indicator The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel. Figure 4-78 Indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel. Table 4-58 Indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel Silkscre en
Meani ng
Color
State
Remarks
RUN
Runnin g indicato r
Green
Steady on
The module is running properly.
Steady off
An error occurs during the running of the module.
Alarm indicato r
Yellow
Steady on
An output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm is generated.
Blinking
The communication is interrupted.
ALARM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
666
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscre en
FAULT
Meani ng
Fault indicato r
Color
Red
State
Remarks
Steady off
The module is running properly.
Steady on
A fan fault, output overvoltage, or external short circuit occurs.
Steady off
The module is running properly.
PSU (EPW25-24S48D) A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW25-24S48D) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC. It can be used in an IMB03 cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (EPW25-24S48D). Figure 4-79 Exterior of a PSU (EPW25-24S48D)
(1) Power indicator
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
Functions A PSU (EPW25-24S48D) performs the following functions: l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Converts +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power and provides the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
667
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 1200 w.
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D). Table 4-59 Indicators on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D) Indicator
Color
State
Meaning
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
Normal
Steady off
There is no power supply, or input fuses are damaged.
Steady off
Normal
Steady on
l The DC input or output voltage exceeds the normal range
(2) Protection indicator
Yellow
l Overtemperature occurs in the module l The module is not installed properly. (3) Fault indicator
Red
Steady off
Normal
Blinking
The fan is faulty.
4.3.13 DCDU This section describes DCDUs and types of cabinets supported by the DCDUs.
DCDU-01 A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.B).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-01. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
668
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-80 Exterior of a DCDU-01
Function A DCDU-01 has the following functions: l
Provides one -48 V DC input.
l
Provides ten -48 V DC outputs. The input of the SPARE2 port is 25 A and other nine inputs are 12 A.
l
Provides power only for the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly in a cabinet. NOTE
When a BTS3900A is configured with a DCDU-01, the SPARE2 port feeds power to the TMC11H and the maximum output power is 800 W.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
669
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-81 Terminals, ports. and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel. Table 4-60 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Description
Application Scenario
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)
It is a positive power input terminal.
l RFC (Ver.B) in a DC-powered BTS3900A (Ver.B) l RFC (Ver.B) in an AC-powered BTS3900A (Ver.B) l BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet l BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet l BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet
(2)
Circuit breakers
SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU5 to RFU0
They are ten power output circuit breakers which control power supply to the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.
(3)
DC output ports
SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU5 to RFU0
They are ten power output ports which feed power to the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
670
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Description
(4)
DC SPD alarm port
SPD ALM
It is not available.
Application Scenario
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-01. Table 4-61 Technical specifications of a DCDU-01 Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-03B A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-03B is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or OMB.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03B. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
671
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-82 Exterior of a DCDU-03B
Function A DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel. Figure 4-83 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
672
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-62 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel No.
Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
It supports a two-hole OT terminal (M6).
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)
It supports the cable with a maximum cross-sectional area of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2). The default cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in. 2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
(2)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW8
-
The DC circuit breakers control power supplies to the BBU, RRUs, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports, respectively.
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD8
Nine one-hole OT terminals (M4). The maximum cross-sectional area of the cable supported is 6 mm2(0.009 in. 2).
l The specifications of output power cables depend on power-consuming devices to be connected to. For example, the cross-sectional area of a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2).
-
It is not available.
(4)
DC SPD alarm port
SPD ALM
l There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support twohole OT terminals (M4).
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
673
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-63 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03B Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumi ng Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circui t Break er
l DBS3900
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a DBS3900
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
6x20 A
SW0 to SW5
l DBS3900 where the BBU is installed on a wall, 19-inch rack, IMB03, or OMB
LOAD6 to LOAD8
BBU and customer transmissi on equipment
3x12 A
SW6 to SW8
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
6x20 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6 to LOAD8
Reserved
3x12 A
SW6 to SW8
l BTS3900C
l OMB in a BTS3900C l BTS3900 A (Ver.B) l BTS3900 (Ver.B) l BTS3900L (Ver.B) l BTS3900 AL (Ver.A)
l Cabinet in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-03B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
674
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-64 Technical specifications of a DCDU-03B Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-03B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-03C A direct current distribution unit-03C (DCDU-03C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-03C is 1 U high and can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03C. Figure 4-84 Exterior of a DCDU-03C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
675
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel. Figure 4-85 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel. Table 4-65 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
It supports a two-hole OT terminal (M6). If a DCDU-03C is installed in a power cabinet TMC11H, the cross-sectional area of its
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
676
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No.
4 Component Description
Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Remarks
RTN(+)
input power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in. 2). If a DCDU-03C is installed in a transmission cabinet TMC11H, the cross-sectional area of its input power cable is 4 mm2(0.006 in. 2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
(2)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
-
The DC circuit breakers control power supplies to the BBU, RRUs, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD8
They support nine one-hole OT terminals (M4) and the cable with a maximum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in. 2).
l The specifications of output power cables depend on power-consuming devices to be connected to. For example, the cross-sectional area of a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2).
-
It is not available.
(4)
DC SPD alarm port
SPD ALM
l There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support twohole OT terminals (M4), as shown in the red lines in Figure 4-85.
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
677
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-66 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03C Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsum ing Device
Specific ations of the Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breake r
l BTS3900 A (Ver.B)
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.B)
LOAD0 to LOAD5
Transmis sion equipme nt
6x12 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6
BBU
1x12 A
SW6
LOAD7
Transmis sion equipme nt
1x6 A
SW7
LOAD8
Fan assembly
1x6 A
SW8
l DBS3900
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-03C. Table 4-67 Technical specifications of a DCDU-03C Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-03C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
678
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DCDU-05 A direct current distribution unit-05 (DCDU-05) is installed in an EPS30-4815AF subrack and provides -48 V DC power for RRUs and transmission equipment. A DCDU-05 can be installed in an OMB or IMB03.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-05. Figure 4-86 Exterior of a DCDU-05
Function l
Supports -48 V and 20 A DC power inputs.
l
Provides two -48 V DC power outputs (one for RRUs and another for transmission equipment).
Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel. Figure 4-87 Terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel
The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
679
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-68 Terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel No.
Terminal/Port/Circuit Breaker
Connector
(1)
Wiring terminal for the RRU power cable (12 A)
OT terminal
(2)
Wiring terminal for the power cable (4 A) of the transmission equipment
OT terminal
(3)
Circuit breaker for the RRU
-
(4)
Circuit breaker for the transmission equipment
-
DCDU-11A A direct current distribution unit-11A (DCDU-11A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.C).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-11A. Figure 4-88 Exterior of a DCDU-11A
(1) Equipotential ground points
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(2) Ground points
680
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DCDU-11A has the following functions: l
Provides one -48 V DC input of 160 A or two -48 V DC inputs of 80 A.
l
Provides ten -48 V DC outputs with a maximum of 25 A for each output.
l
Provides power to the RFUs and fan assembly in the cabinet.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel. Figure 4-89 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel
Table 4-69 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Port/ Terminal/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
Two onehole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
681
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No.
4 Component Description
Port/ Terminal/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
RTN(+)
supported is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
(2)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
-
The DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to RFUs and fan assemblies by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-90shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-70.
Figure 4-90 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
682
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11A. Table 4-70 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11A Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumin g Device
Specif icatio ns of the Circui t Break er
Circuit Breake r
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
l RFC (Ver.C) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.C) l RFC (Ver.C) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.C)
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RFU 0 to RFU 5
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6
FAN 01B
SW6
LOAD7 to LOAD9
Reserved
SW7 to SW9
l BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet l BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet l BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RFU 0 to RFU 5
LOAD6
FAN 03B
SW6
LOAD7 and LOAD8
BBU
SW7 and SW8
LOAD9
Reserved
SW9
l BTS3900 (Ver.C) l BTS3900L (Ver.C)
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11A. Table 4-71 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11A Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
683
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-11B A direct current distribution unit-11B (DCDU-11B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11B is 1 U high and can be installed in an RFC (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or OMB.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B. Figure 4-91 Front and rear views of a DCDU-11B
(1) Equipotential ground points
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(2) Ground points
684
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
A DCDU-11B uses ground points and equipotential ground points in the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: A DCDU-11B is installed on an open rack. In this scenario, an equipotential cable connects the equipotential ground point near the mounting ear on the DCDU-11B to the ground bar on the open rack. l Scenario 2: A DCDU-11B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. In this scenario, the ground points at the rear of the DCDU-11B are connected to the ground bar in the equipment room.
Function A DCDU-11B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel. Figure 4-92 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
685
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-72 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel N o.
Port/ Termina l/Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.
It is a negative power input terminal.
-
DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
RTN(+)
(2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is a positive power input terminal.
686
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port/ Termina l/Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
l Figure 4-93shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 3.3 mm2(0.005 in.2) to 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-73.
l Figure 4-94shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
687
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-93 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (matching the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports)
Figure 4-94 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (matching the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports)
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11B. Table 4-73 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11B Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumi ng Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
l DBS3900
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a DBS3900 l Wall, 19-inch rack, or IMB03 in a DBS3900 l Cabinet in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs l OMB in a BTS3900C
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6 and LOAD7
Transmissi on equipment or BBU
SW6 and SW7
LOAD8
Transmissi on equipment, EMUA, or EMUB
SW8
LOAD9
FAN 02B
SW9
l BTS3900 A (Ver.C) l BTS3900 C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
688
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumi ng Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
l BTS3900 (Ver.C)
l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs
LOAD6 to LOAD9
Reserved
l BTS3900 L (Ver.C) l BTS3900 AL (Ver.A)
SW6 to SW9
l Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11B. Table 4-74 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11B Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-11B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
689
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DCDU-11C A direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11C is 1 U high and can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C).
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-11C. Figure 4-95 Front and rear views of a DCDU-11C
(1) Equipotential ground points
(2) Ground points
NOTE
The ground points and equipotential ground points on a DCDU-11C are not used.
Function A DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
690
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-96 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel. Table 4-75 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel N o.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.
It is a negative power input terminal.
-
DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
RTN(+)
(2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is a positive power input terminal.
691
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-97shows the exterior of a tool-less female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-76.
Figure 4-97 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11C. Table 4-76 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11C Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsum ing Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
l BTS3900 A (Ver.C)
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a DBS3900 configured
LOAD0 and LOAD1
Transmis sion equipmen t
2x6 A
SW0 and SW1
LOAD2 and LOAD3
Transmis sion equipmen t
2x12 A
SW2 and SW3
l DBS3900
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
692
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Base Station Type
4 Component Description
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsum ing Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
with an APM30H (Ver.C)
LOAD4 and LOAD5
Transmis sion equipmen t
2x25 A
SW4 and SW5
LOAD6 and LOAD7
Transmis sion equipmen t or BBU
2x25 A
SW6 and SW7
LOAD8
Transmis sion equipmen t, EMUA, or EMUB
1x25 A
SW8
LOAD9
FAN 02B
1x25 A
SW9
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11C. Table 4-77 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11C Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-11C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
693
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-12A A direct current distribution unit-12A (DCDU-12A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, or BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-12A. Figure 4-98 Front and rear views of a DCDU-12A
(1) Equipotential ground points
(2) Ground points
Function A DCDU-12A provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of different indoor and outdoor macro base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
694
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-99 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A
The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A. Table 4-78 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC power input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.
It is a negative power input terminal.
Fuse block
LOAD0 to LOAD9
-
It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as RFUs and fan assemblies.
(2)
RTN(+)
It is a positive power input terminal.
The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
695
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC power output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
EPC4 connectors are used on the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. Figure 4-100shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector. The cross-sectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-79.
(4)
Spare fuse box
-
-
It contains three 30 A spare fuses.
NOTE
A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.
Figure 4-100 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12A. Table 4-79 Power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specificat ions
l BTS3900 A (Ver.D) l BTS3900 A (Ver.E)
l RFC (Ver.D) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.D) l RFC (Ver.D) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.D)
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
RFU 0 to RFU 5
10x30 A
LOAD6 port
FAN 01C
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
696
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
l BTS3012 AE (Ver.D_Z)
l RFC (Ver.E) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.E) l RFC (Ver.E) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.E) l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in a DC scenario l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in an AC scenario
LOAD7 to LOAD9 ports
Reserved
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) l BTS3900L (Ver.D) l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in a DC scenario l BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in an AC scenario l BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
RFU 0 to RFU 5
LOAD6 port
FAN 03C
LOAD7 and LOAD8 ports
BBU
LOAD9 port
Reserved
Fuse Specificat ions
10x30 A
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12A. Table 4-80 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12A Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
697
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications
Surge protection specifications of the ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-12B A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or IMS06.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear of a DCDU-12B. Figure 4-101 Front and rear of a DCDU-12B
(1) Equipotential ground points
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(2) Ground points
698
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
A DCDU-12B uses ground points and equipotential ground points in the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: A DCDU-12B is installed on an open rack. In this scenario, an equipotential cable connects the equipotential ground point near the mounting ear on the DCDU-12B to the ground bar on the open rack. l Scenario 2: A DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. In this scenario, the ground points at the rear of the DCDU-12B are connected to the ground bar in the equipment room.
Function The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of indoor and outdoor macro base stations, micro base stations, and distributed base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B. Figure 4-102 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B
The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B. Table 4-81 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC power input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). If one group of power cables are used, the maximum crosssectional area of each power cable is
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
699
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
N o.
(2)
4 Component Description
Port or Termina l
Fuse block
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
RTN(+)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2). If two groups of power cables are used, the maximum cross-sectional area of each power cable is 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
LOAD0 to LOAD9
-
It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment. The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
700
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC power output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
l Figure 4-103 shows the exterior of an EPC5 connector which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 3.3 mm2(0.005 in.2) to 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-82.
l Figure 4-104 shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector which applies to any of the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2). NOTE EPC4 and EPC5 connectors must be connected to cables onsite.
(4)
Spare fuse box
-
-
It contains three 30 A spare fuses.
NOTE
A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
701
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-103 Exterior of an EPC5 connector
Figure 4-104 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12B. Table 4-82 Power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12B Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specifi cations
DBS3900
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in a DBS3900
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
RRU
10x30 A
LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports
Transmission equipment, BBU, or RRUa
LOAD8 port
Transmission equipment or RRUa
LOAD9 port
FAN 02D/FAN 02E
LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports
RRU 0 to RRU 8
LOAD9 port
Reserved
l Wall, 19-inch rack, or IMB03 in a DBS3900
BTS3900AL (Ver.A)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10x30 A
702
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specifi cations
l BTS3900A (Ver.D)
l RFC (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs
LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports
RRU 0 to RRU 8
10x30 A
LOAD9 port
Reserved
l BTS3900A (Ver.E)
l RFC (Ver.E) in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) configured with RFUs and RRUs
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) l BTS3900L (Ver.D) l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) configured with RFUs and RRUs
a: When six or fewer RRUs are configured, connect the RRUs preferentially to ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 for power input. Ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 only supply power to the seventh to ninth RRUs when more than six RRUs are configured.
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B. Table 4-83 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
703
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of the ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-12C A direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12C is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.E), TMC11H (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), IBC10, or BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear of a DCDU-12C. Figure 4-105 Front and rear of a DCDU-12C
(1) Equipotential ground points
(2) Ground points
NOTE
The ground points and equipotential ground points on a DCDU-12C are not used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
704
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DCDU-12C provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed base stations and outdoor macro base stations.
Port or Terminal The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C. Figure 4-106 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C
The following table describes the terminals and ports on a DCDU-12C. Table 4-84 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC power input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The cross-sectional area of the cable is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) by default.
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is a positive power input terminal.
705
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(2)
Fuse block
LOAD0 to LOAD9
-
It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment. The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.
(3)
DC power output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-107 shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The cross-sectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-85.
(4)
Spare fuse box
-
-
It contains three 30 A spare fuses.
NOTE
A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.
Figure 4-107 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
706
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12C. Table 4-85 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-12C Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specif ication s
l BTS3900 A (Ver.D)
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.E) in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.D)
LOAD0 to LOAD5 and LOAD8 ports
Transmission equipment
10x30 A
LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports
Transmission equipment or BBU
LOAD9 port
FAN 02D
Equipment compartment of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
LOAD0 port
CCU
LOAD1 port
Reserved
LOAD2 and LOAD3 ports
Transmission equipment
LOAD4
Battery cabinet
LOAD5 to LOAD8 ports
BBU
LOAD9 port
HEX
LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports
RFU
LOAD9 port
FAU
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
Transmission equipment
LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports
Transmission equipment or BBU
LOAD8 port
Transmission equipment or EMUA
LOAD9 port
Reserved
l BTS3900 A (Ver.E) l DBS3900
BTS3900AL (Ver.A)
RF compartment of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in a DC scenario
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10x30 A
10x30 A
10x30 A
707
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specif ication s
DBS3900
IBC10 in a DC DBS3900
LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on 0# DCDU-12C
USU
10x30 A
LOAD2 and LOAD3 ports on 0# DCDU-12C
FAU03D
LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on 1# DCDU-12C
BBU
LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on 2# DCDU-12C
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12C. Table 4-86 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12C Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-12C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of the ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
708
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-13A A direct current distribution unit-13A (DCDU-13A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-13A is 1 U high and can be installed in an RFC (Ver.D_A) or an RFC (Ver.E_A).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-13A. Figure 4-108 Exterior of a DCDU-13A
Function A DCDU-13A has the following functions: l
Supports -48 V and 80 A DC power inputs.
l
Provides four -48 V DC power outputs for other boards or modules in the cabinet.
l
Provides surge protection of 10 kA in differential mode and 20 kA in common mode and dry contacts for reporting the surge protection failure alarm.
Port The following figure shows the terminals and ports on a DCDU-13A panel. Figure 4-109 Terminals and ports on a DCDU-13A panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
709
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Terminal/Port
Silkscree n
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
1
Dry contact output port
DC_SPD
-
Dry contact alarm output port
2
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD3
EPC4 connector (as shown in the following figure)
l The LOAD0 to LOAD3 ports on the left DCDU-13A in the cabinet provide power for the CMUEA and RFU 0 to RFU 2. l The LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A in the cabinet provide power for RFU 3 to RFU 5. The LOAD3 port is reserved.
3
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the single cable is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) and each maximum cross-sectional area of the two pairs of cables is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2). The default crosssectional area is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2).
It is a negative power input terminal. It is a positive power input terminal.
Figure 4-110 EPC4 connector
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
710
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.3.14 PDU This section describes PDUs and types of cabinets supported by the PDUs.
PDU05A-01 The power distribution unit 05A-01 (PDU05A-01) distributes AC power into the PSUs, AC service outlet unit (SOU), and heater. The PDU05A-01 must be installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an PDU05A-01, and the following table describes an PDU05A-01. Figure 4-111 Exterior of an PDU05A-01
Table 4-87 Exterior description of an PDU05A-01
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compon ent
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
AC SOU
SERVICE OUTLET 10A MAX
The AC SOU is an optional AC device. It complies with the European standard.
(2)
Decoupli ng coil
-
-
(3)
HAU circuit breaker
HEATER
The HAU circuit breaker controls the power supply to the HAU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
711
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Compon ent
Silkscreen
Description
(4)
PSU circuit breaker
PSU1/5
PSU circuit breakers control the power supply to the PSUs.
PSU3/4/7
The PSU circuit breakers are bipolar circuit breakers. The rated current of PSU1/5 and PSU2/6 is 40 A, and the rated current of the PSU3/4/7 is 63 A.
(5)
AC surge protector
-
The AC surge protector reports AC input surge protection alarms.
(6)
AC input terminal
L1
AC input terminals are used for 110 V AC duallive-wire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power inputs.
PSU2/6
L2 L3 N PE
Functions The PDU05A-01 performs the following functions: l
Provides five AC outputs. Three outputs are supplied to PSUs, one output is supplied to the heater assembly unit (HAU) after transferred by the AC junction box, and one output is supplied to the SOU.
l
Provides cord end terminals, through which the 110 V AC dual-live-wire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power can be supplied to the PDU05A-01.
l
Provides an SOU which is optional. The SOU transfers AC power to customer equipment.
Specifications of an SOU The following table lists the specifications of an SOU. Table 4-88 Specifications of an SOU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Parameter
Counter
Rated current
5A
Rated voltage
110 V AC or 220 V AC
Operating temperature
-40oC to +55oC (-40oF to 131oF)
Protection class
IP20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
712
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
PDU03D-01 The power distribution unit 03D-01 (PDU03D-01) provides -48 V DC power output ports for power distribution to a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. It is used in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the PDU03D-01, and the following table describes the PDU03D-01. Figure 4-112 PDU03D-01
Table 4-89 PDU03D-01 No.
Compon ent
Silkscreen
(1)
DC input terminals
INPUT0
INPUT1
INPUT2
(2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC output terminals
OUTPUT0
Description RTN(+)_0
It is a positive power input terminal.
NEG(-)_0
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)_1
It is a positive power input terminal.
NEG(-)_1
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)_2
It is a positive power input terminal.
NEG(-)_2
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)_0
It is a positive power output terminal.
NEG(-)_0
It is a negative power output terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
713
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No.
4 Component Description
Compon ent
Silkscreen OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
Description RTN(+)_1
It is a positive power output terminal.
NEG(-)_1
It is a negative power output terminal.
RTN(+)_2
It is a positive power output terminal.
NEG(-)_2
It is a negative power output terminal.
Function The PDU03D-01 performs the following functions: l Has three groups of transfer terminals, which can provide single-output power supply and dual-output power supply simultaneously. l Supports the maximum external DC power of one 100 A input (INPUT2) and two 200 A inputs (INPUT0 and INPUT1).
PDU10D-01 The power distributed unit-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power for all components in the OMB (Ver.C). It can be used in an OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU10D-01. Figure 4-113 Exterior of a PDU10D-01
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
714
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Functions The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions: l
Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.
l
Provides ten DC outputs, with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, and two reserved.
Ports Figure 4-114shows the ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel and Table 4-90describes these ports and terminals. Figure 4-114 Ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel
Table 4-90 Ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector and Cable
Remarks
1
DC input terminal
NEG(-)
It supports a onehole OT terminal (M6). When one group of input power cables is used, the maximum cross-sectional area of each cable is 25
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
715
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No .
4 Component Description
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector and Cable
Remarks
RTN(+)
mm2(0.039 in.2). When two groups of input power cables are used, the maximum crosssectional area of each cable is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
2
AC input terminals
L, N, and PE
They support onehole OT terminals (M4). Each cable has a maximum cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 2).
The maximum current for each power input is 30 A.
3
DC output terminals
LOAD0 to LOAD5
Figure 4-115shows the EPC5 connectors for ports LOAD0 to LOAD5. The maximum cross-sectional area of the cable is 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).
The output current is 30 A.
4
DC output terminals
LOAD6 to LOAD9
Figure 4-116shows an EPC4 connector, which applies to any one among ports LOAD6 to LOAD9. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable is 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
The output current is 30 A.
5
Spare fuse box
-
-
There are three fuses in the spare fuse box: l Two 5 A spare fuses, each used for transferring power less than 150 W. l One 30 A spare fuse, used for the 30 A output power ports on the PDU10D-01.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
716
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-115 Exterior of an EPC5 connector
Figure 4-116 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
PDU01D-01 A power distribution unit 01D-01 (PDU01D-01) can be used in an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 and be connected to an outdoor distribution module (ODM) to provide power for RRUs.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU01D-01. Figure 4-117 Exterior of a PDU01D-01
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
717
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A PDU01D-01 performs the following functions: l
Provides one -48 V DC power output.
l
Provides power for a maximum of six RRUs if being used together with an ODM.
Port The following figure shows the port on a PDU01D-01. The following table describes the port on a PDU01D-01. Figure 4-118 Port on a PDU01D-01
Table 4-91 Port on a PDU01D-01 DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD port
ODM
Circuit breaker
1x100 A
OT terminal (M6)
PDU03D-02 A power distribution unit 03D-02 (PDU03D-02) can be used in an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 to provide power for RRUs.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU03D-02.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
718
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-119 Exterior of a PDU03D-02
Function A PDU03D-02 performs the following functions: l
Provides three -48 V DC power outputs.
l
Provides power for a maximum of three RRUs.
Port The following figure shows the ports on a PDU03D-02. The following table describes the ports on a PDU03D-02. Figure 4-120 Ports on a PDU03D-02
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
719
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-92 Ports on a PDU03D-02 DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD0, LOAD1, and LOAD2 ports
RRUs
Fuse
3x30 A
EPC5 connector
4.3.15 Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet This section describes the exteriors of and ports on power distribution boxes in battery cabinets.
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is located on the upper inner right wall of the cabinet, which transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-121 Exterior of a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
720
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-93 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box No.
Silkscreen
(1)
BAT
Description RTN(+) NEG(-)
(2)
FAN/TEC
RTN(+) NEG(-)
(3)
BAT_SW0
ON OFF
(4)
BAT_SW1
ON OFF
(5)
(6)
FAN/ TEC_SW2
ON
FAN/TEC
RTN(+)
OFF
NEG(-) (7)
BAT
RTN(+) NEG(-)
Upper power terminals for storage batteries, which connect to input power cables for the storage batteries Upper power terminals for the fan or TEC, which connect to input power cables for the fan or TEC Circuit breaker for upper storage battery group, which controls power supply to the upper storage battery group Circuit breaker for lower storage battery group, which controls power supply to the lower storage battery group Circuit breaker for the fan or TEC, which controls power supply to the fan in a IBBS200D or the TEC in a IBBS200T. Lower power terminals for the fan or TEC, which connect to input power cables for the fan or TEC Lower power terminals for storage batteries, which connect to input power cables for the storage batteries
NOTE
Power can be supplied to the storage batteries, fan, or TEC from the upper or lower power terminals on a power distribution box according to cabinet configurations. Power is supplied from the lower power terminals on a power distribution box by default.
Cables The following figure shows the cables for a power distribution box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
721
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-122 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) RTN(+) power cable for the upper storage battery group
(2) Input power cable for the storage batteries. It connects to the upper terminals on a power distribution box.
(3) Input power cable for the fan or TEC. It connects to the upper terminals on a power distribution box.
(4) Input power cable for the fan or TEC. It connects to the lower terminals on a power distribution box.
(5) Input power cable for the storage batteries. It connects to the lower terminals on a power distribution box.
(6) Power transfer cable for the fan or TEC
(7) NEG(-) power cable for the lower storage battery group
(8) NEG(-) power cable for the upper storage battery group
(9) RTN(+) power cable for the lower storage battery group
-
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C) is located on the upper right inner wall of the cabinet, which controls the two storage battery groups separately and controls DC power supply to the fan or TEC.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
722
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-123 Exterior of a power distribution box
Ports The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-94 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Description
(1)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
A one-hole OT terminal (M8) supports the cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(2)
FAN/TEC
FAN/TEC power input terminal
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M4).
(3)
BAT_SW0
Circuit breaker for upper storage batteries
It controls power supply to the upper storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 160 A current.
(4)
BAT_SW1
Circuit breaker for lower storage batteries
It controls power supply to the lower storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 160 A current.
(5)
FAN/ TEC_SW
Circuit breaker for the FAN/TEC power port
The circuit breaker requires 15 A current.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
723
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Description
(6)
FAN/TEC
FAN/TEC power input terminal
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M4).
(7)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
A one-hole OT terminal (M8) supports the cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
NOTE
A power distribution box provides two groups of power input ports for the storage batteries labeled 1 and 7 and two groups of FAN/TEC power ports labeled 2 and 6. Ports to be connected depend on configuration scenarios. l When an APM30H is stacked with an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, input power cables for storage batteries and fan or TEC are connected to the upper part of the storage batteries. l When an APM30H and an IBBS200D or IBBS200T are installed side by side, input power cables for storage batteries and fan or TEC are connected to the lower part of the storage batteries.
Cables The following figure shows the cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-124 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) RTN(+) cable for upper storage batteries
(2) Power transfer cable for the TEC or (3) -48 V cable for lower fan storage batteries
(4) -48 V cable for upper storage batteries
(5) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
-
724
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.D) or IBBS200T(Ver.D) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.D) or IBBS200T(Ver.D) is located on the upper right inner wall of the cabinet, which controls the two storage battery groups separately and controls DC power supply to the fan or TEC.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-125 Exterior of a power distribution box
Port The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-95 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Description
Note
(1)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
They support one-hole OT terminals (M8) installed on cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2).
(2)
BAT_SW0
Circuit breaker for upper storage batteries
It controls power supply to the upper storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 250 A current.
(3)
FAN/ TEC_OUTPU T
Power output port for a fan or TEC
It supports EPC4 connectors and requires 30 A current.
(4)
BAT_SW1
Circuit breaker for lower storage batteries
It controls power supply to the lower storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 250 A current.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
725
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Description
Note
(5)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
They support one-hole OT terminals (M8) installed on cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2).
(6)
FAN/ TEC_INPUT
FAN/TEC power input terminal
It supports EPC4 connectors and requires 30 A current.
Wire The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-126 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) RTN(+) wire for upper storage batteries
(2) Power transfer cable for the TEC or fan
(3) NEG(-) wire for lower storage batteries
(4) NEG(-) wire for upper storage batteries
(5) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries
-
Power Distribution Boxes in an IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of an IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E), controlling power supply of two storage battery packs and DC power supply to the TEC or fan.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
726
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-127 Exterior of a power distribution box
Port The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-96 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box No.
Silkscreen
Meaning
Description
(1)
BAT ON/OFF
Storage battery circuit breakers
Controlling power supply of the storage batteries in a cabinet. A circuit breaker requires 250 A current.
(2)
FAN/TEC OUTPUT
Power output port for a fan or TEC
Connecting to an EPC4 connector and requiring fuses of 30 A current
(3)
FAN/TEC INPUT
FAN/TEC power input terminal
Connecting to an EPC4 connector and requiring fuses of 30 A current
(4)(5)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
One-hole OT terminal (M8) supporting the cable with a cross-sectional area of 50 mm2(0.078 in.2)
Cable The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
727
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-128 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) Power transfer cable for a power distribution box
(2) RTN(+) wire for upper storage batteries
(4) NEG(-) wire for lower storage batteries (5) NEG(-) wire for upper storage batteries
(3) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries -
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T The power distribution box of an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is in the middle of the cabinet. It controls the DC output, and the DC power supply to the CCU, FAN or TEC.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the power distribution box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
728
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-129 Exterior of the power distribution box
Port The following table describes the ports on the power distribution box. Table 4-97 Ports on the power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Meaning
Description
(1)
BAT(-)
Negative input pole for storage batteries
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(2)
NEG(-)
Negative input pole for the power distribution box
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(3)
-
Fuse box
It provides overcurrent protection for the cabinet.
(4)
DC INPUT
Power input port for the temperature control system
It supports an EPC4 connector and is used to supply power for the temperature control system in the cabinet.
(5)
DC OUTPUT
-
It supports an EPC4 connector and is reserved.
(6)
RTN(+)
Positive input pole for the power distribution box
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(7)
BAT(+)
Positive input pole for storage batteries
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
729
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Meaning
Description
(8)
CCU
Power input port for the CCU
EPC4 connector
(9)
-
Switch
It controls the power supply to the CCU and fan or TEC.
(10)
FAN/TEC
Power input port for a fan or TEC
EPC4 connector
Wire The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-130 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) NEG(-) cable for storage batteries in the first upper layer
(2) NEG(-) cable for storage batteriesin the second upper layer
(3) NEG(-) cable for (4) NEG(-) cable for storage batteriesin the first storage batteriesin the lower layer second lower layer
(5) RTN(+) cable for storage batteries in the second lower layer
(6) RTN(+) cable for (7) RTN(+) cable for storage batteriesin the first storage batteriesin the lower layer second upper layer
(8) RTN(+) cable for storage batteriesin the first upper layer
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS20D The power distribution box in an IBBS20D is located in the lower right part of the cabinet, which is used to control DC power to the storage batteries, CMUG, and fan in the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
730
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-131 Exterior of a power distribution box
Ports, Terminals, and Circuit Breakers The following table describes ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-98 Ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Description
Description
(1)
NEG(-)
Negative input terminal
Two terminals, each using a one-hole OT (M6) terminal and connecting to a 10 mm2power cable
RTN(+)
Positive input terminal
Two terminals, each using a one-hole OT (M6) terminal and connecting to a 10 mm2power cable
(2)
-
Switch
Controls the DC input power (80 A) to the battery cabinet
(3)
-
Ground copper bar
Used for grounding the insulation layer of a shielded cable
(4)
LOAD FUSE30A
Fuse terminal block
Connects to an EPC4 connector. The fuse protects the cabinet from overcurrent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
731
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M An Outdoor Power Module 15M (OPM15M) an Outdoor Power Module 50M (OPM50M), or an Outdoor Power Module 30M (OPM30M) is an auxiliary product specially designed for Huawei Blade Site and used to convert external AC input power into -48 V DC. For details about the OPM15M hardware, see OPM15M User Guide. For details about the OPM50M hardware, see OPM50M User Guide. For details about the OPM30M hardware, see OPM30M User Guide.
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC A DC junction box is installed in an RFC, and it converts one or two power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Exterior A DC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of an RFC. The following figure shows the exterior of a DC junction box. Figure 4-132 Exterior of a DC junction box
Function l
In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
l
In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
Interior The following figure shows the interior of a DC junction box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
732
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-133 Interior of a DC junction box
(1) Cable holes for input/ (2) One-hole input/output (3) One-hole input/output (4) Cable holes for input/ output power cables terminals (M6) terminals (M6) output power cables NOTE
In AC scenarios, input/output power cables have been installed in the DC junction box before delivery. In DC scenarios, input power cables must be installed onsite according to the following requirements: l When one group of input power cables are used, connect the cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals (M6) in the lower of the two rows indicated by illustration 3 in Figure 4-133. l When two groups of input power cables are used, connect the cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals (M6) in the two rows indicated by illustration 3 in Figure 4-133.
4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL In an AC BTS3900AL, the UTPUT2 power terminals on the PDU03D-01 are connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. A DC junction box is installed on the inner wall of an BTS3900AL DC cabinet. The following figure shows the exterior of a DC junction box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
733
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-134 Exterior of a DC junction box
4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T A DC junction box for an IBBS300D or IBBS300T converts one DC power input into two DC power outputs.
Exterior Two DC junction boxes are installed in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T. One is on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the other one is on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows a DC junction box in an IBBS300D. Figure 4-135 Exterior of a DC junction box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
734
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Functions l
Obtains power from the storage batteries in the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600A-H17B1) and converts it into two DC power outputs, which are provided for two storage packs in the battery cabinet.
l
Obtains power from the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600A-H17B1) and provides it to the fan or TEC in the battery cabinet.
Interior The following figure shows the interior of a DC junction box. Figure 4-136 Interior of a DC junction box
(1) Wiring terminals for power cables of storage batteries
(2) Wiring terminals for power cables of the fan or TEC
4.3.20 AC Junction Box When a heater or a heating film is configured, the AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film. An AC junction box can be used in a BTS3900AL, APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T.
Exterior The AC junction box in an APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T is located on the inner left wall of the cabinet. The AC junction box in a BTS3900AL cabinet is located on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows an APM30H as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
735
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-137 Exterior of the AC junction box
Function The AC junction box in a cabinet performs the following functions: l
The PDU05A-01 in a BTS3900AL cabinet feeds power into the AC junction box. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet.
l
An EPU subrack feeds power into the AC junction box in an APM30H. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet or heating film in the IBBS200D.
l
The AC junction box in the APM30H feeds power into the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or service outlet unit (SOU) in the cabinet.
l
The AC junction box in the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600AH17B1) feeds power into the AC junction box in the IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet.
Interior The following figure shows the interior of an AC junction box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
736
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-138 Interior of an AC junction box
(1) Four AC output L wiring terminals
(2) Four AC output N wiring terminals
(3) Four AC output PE wiring terminals
(4) Cable holes
(5) AC input N wiring terminal
(6) AC input L wiring terminal
4.3.21 Storage Battery Storage batteries store power and can be installed an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, or IMS06.
Exterior
NOTICE When storage batteries are not provided by Huawei, ask Huawei technical personnel to assess the model compatibility. NOTE
Storage batteries from different manufacturers differ in exteriors and technical specifications. This section uses 12 V 100 Ah, 12 V 150 Ah, and 12 V 20 Ah storage batteries as examples.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
737
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-139 Storage battery
Configuration Each battery pack consists of four storage batteries. The following table lists the storage battery configurations achieved by combining different battery packs. Table 4-99 Storage battery configurations Cabinet Type
Storage Battery Type
Battery Pack Specifications
l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B)
12 V, 100 Ah
l One battery pack (48 V, 100 Ah)
12 V, 150 Ah
l One battery pack (48 V, 150 Ah)
12 V, 20 Ah
l A single cabinet supports one battery pack. (48 V, 20 Ah)
l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C)
l Two battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 200 Ah)
l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D) l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) IBBS300D or IBBS300T
IBBS20D
l Two battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 300 Ah)
l Two cabinets supports two battery packs connected in parallel. (48 V, 40 Ah)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
738
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Cabinet Type
Storage Battery Type
Battery Pack Specifications
IBBS700D or IBBS700T
12 V, 150 Ah
l One battery pack (48 V, 150 Ah)
12 V, 100 Ah
One battery pack (48 V, 100 Ah)
l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
l Four battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 600 Ah)
l IMS06
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of storage batteries. Table 4-100 Technical specifications of storage batteries Storage Battery Type
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
12 V, 100 Ah
290 mm x 110 mm x 398 mm (11.42 in. x 4.33 in. x 15.66 in.)
≤ 34 kg (74.97 lb)
12 V, 150 Ah
l In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 in. x 22.09 in.)
60 kg (132.3 lb)
l In an IBBS700D or IBBS700T: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 in. x 20.79 in.) 12 V, 20 Ah
76 mm x 167 mm x 181 mm (2.99 in. x 6.54 in. x 7.13 in.)
6.35 kg (14 lb)
4.4 Monitoring Devices This section describes monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the monitoring devices. For specific monitoring schemes in base stations, see Monitor Management.
4.4.1 CMUA A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) mainly monitors the temperature in a cabinet as well as the temperature of the fan and heater in the cabinet. A CMUA can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.B), or IBBS200T (Ver.B). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
739
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUA. Figure 4-140 Exterior of a CMUA
Function A CMUA performs the following functions: l
Automatically adjusts the temperature of cabinets with different temperature control modes.
l
Reserves three Boolean signal input ports to support Boolean alarm detection, but does not support detection of alarms reported by devices outside the cabinet.
l
Provides an RJ45 port for connecting to an ELU to detect cabinet types.
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUA. Figure 4-141 Ports on a CMUA
The following table describes the ports on a CMUA. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
740
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-101 Ports on a CMUA No.
Port
Description
(1)
l In an RFC: TEM port
l In an RFC: connecting to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the RFC to receive RFC temperature alarms
l In an IBBS200 D or IBBS200 T: TEM_BA T port
l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the storage battery temperature sensor in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T to receive storage battery temperature alarms
COM_OUT port
Connecting to a lower-level port
(2)
l In an APM30H: connecting to the PMU l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T: connecting to the lower-level CMUA
(3)
COM_IN port
Connecting to an upper-level port l In an APM30H: connecting to the BBU l In an RFC or TMC11H: connecting to the BBU or upper-level CMUA l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the PMU or upper-level CMUA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(4)
ELU port
Connecting to an electronic label unit (ELU) to receive ELU alarms
(5)
GATE port
Connecting to a door status sensor to receive door status alarms
(6)
IN0, IN1, and IN2 ports
Boolean signal ports
(7)
SMOKE port
Connecting to a smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms
(8)
FAN_EXT port
Connecting to the outer air circulation fan in a cabinet door to receive outer air circulation fan alarms
(9)
PWR port
Port for feeding power to a CMUA
(10)
TEC port
Connecting to a TEC to receive TEC alarms
l In an APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H: reserved l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to a BAU02D, which is optionally configured
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
741
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Port
Description
(11)
l In an APM30H , TMC11H , RFC, or IBBS200 D: IFAN1 port
l In an APM30H or TMC11H: connecting to the fan in the fan assembly l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the right fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the inner air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS200 T: FAN_IN T port l In an RFC or IBBS200 D: IFAN2 port
(12)
l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the left fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the outer air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS200 T: FAN_EX T port
Indicator The two indicators on a CMUA panel indicate the status of the CMUA. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-102 Indicators on the CMUA panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with its upper-level device for more than one minute.
Steady on or off
The board is faulty (if it is not in the poweron check state).
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
ALM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
742
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Silkscr een
4 Component Description
Color
State
Meaning
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
DIP Switch On a CMUA, there are three DIP switches (SW1, SW2, and SW3), which are used to set the working mode of the CMUA based on the cabinet type. The following figure shows the positions of the DIP switches on a CMUA. Figure 4-142 Positions of the DIP switches on a CMUA (top view)
The following figure shows the DIP switch settings on CMUAs in different cabinets. Figure 4-143 DIP switch settings on CMUAs in different cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
743
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
In the preceding figure, the small red box indicates a connection to the upper jumper cap.
4.4.2 CMUE A central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) mainly monitors the temperature in a cabinet as well as the temperature of the fan and heater in the cabinet. A CMUE can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUE. Figure 4-144 Exterior of a CMUE
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUE. Figure 4-145 Ports on a CMUE
The following table describes the ports on a CMUE.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
744
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-103 Ports on a CMUE No .
Port
Description
(1)
TEMP2 port
Reserved for connecting to a temperature sensor
(2)
WATER port
Reserved for connecting to a water sensor
(3)
IFAN4 port
Reserved for connecting to the inner circulation fan in a cabinet
(4)
IFAN3 port
Reserved for connecting to the inner circulation fan in a cabinet
(5)
l In an RFC or IBBS20 0D: IFAN2 port
l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the left fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the outer air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS20 0T: FAN_E XT port (6)
l In an APM30 H, TMC11 H, RFC, or IBBS20 0D: IFAN1 port
l In an APM30H or TMC11H: connecting to the fan in the fan assembly l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the right fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the inner air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS20 0T: FAN_IN T port (7)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
TEC port
Connecting to a TEC to receive TEC alarms
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
745
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Port
Description
(8)
l In an RFC: TEM port
l In an RFC: connecting to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the RFC to receive RFC temperature alarms
l In an IBBS20 0D or IBBS20 0T: TEM_B AT port (9)
COM_OUT port
l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the storage battery temperature sensor in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T to receive storage battery temperature alarms
RS485 signal port connecting to a lower-level cascading port to receive monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the PMU l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T: connecting to the lower-level CMUE
(10 )
COM_IN port
RS485 signal port connecting to an upper-level cascading port to report monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the BBU l In an RFC or TMC11H: connecting to the BBU or upper-level CMUE l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the PMU or upperlevel CMUE
(11 )
RUN indicator
Indicating the running status of a fan
(12 )
ALM indicator
Indicating fan alarm status
(13 )
ELU port
Connecting to an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type
(14 )
GATE port
Boolean signal port connecting to a door status sensor
(15 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2 ports
Boolean signal ports
SMOKE port
Boolean signal port connecting to a smoke sensor
(16 )
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l In an APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H: reserved l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to a BAU02D if the BAU02D is configured
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
746
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Port
Description
(17 ) an d (18 )
FAN_EXT port
Connecting to the outer circulation fan in a cabinet
(19 )
PWR port
Power input port for providing DC power for the board
Indicator The two indicators on a CMUE panel indicate the status of the CMUE. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-104 Indicators on a CMUE panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check state.
Steady off
The board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
ALM
Red
DIP Switch On a CMUE, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CMUE based on the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on a CMUE. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
747
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-146 Position of the DIP switch on a CMUE
The following figure shows the DIP switch settings on CMUEs in different cabinets. Figure 4-147 DIP switch settings on CMUEs in different cabinets
NOTE
The small red box in Figure 4-147 indicates a connection to the upper jumper cap.
4.4.3 CMUEA A central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) mainly monitors the temperature in a cabinet as well as the temperature of the fan and heater in the cabinet. A CMUEA can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30 (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.D_B), RFC (Ver.D_A), TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H (Ver.D_A1), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D), or IBBS700D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUEA. Figure 4-148 Exterior of a CMUEA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
748
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUEA. Figure 4-149 Ports on a CMUEA
The following table describes the ports on a CMUEA. Table 4-105 Ports on a CMUEA No .
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
TEMP2
Reserved for connecting to a temperature sensor
(2)
WATER
Reserved for connecting to a water sensor
(3)
IFAN4
(4)
IFAN3
Reserved for connecting to the inner air circulation fan in a cabinet to receive inner air circulation fan alarms
(5)
l In an RFC: IFAN2
l In an RFC: connecting to the left fan in the fan assembly l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the outer air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms
l In an IBBS20 0T: FAN_E XT
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
749
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscreen
Description
(6)
l In an APM30 H, TMC11 H, or RFC: IFAN1
l In an APM30H or TMC11H: connecting to the fan in the fan assembly l In an RFC: connecting to the right fan in the fan assembly l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the inner air circulation fan in the cabinet or TEC to receive fan alarms
l In an IBBS20 0D or IBBS20 0T: FAN_IN T (7)
TEC
Connecting to a TEC to receive TEC alarms
(8)
l In an RFC: TEM
l In an RFC: connecting to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the RFC to receive RFC temperature alarms
l In an IBBS20 0D or IBBS20 0T: TEM_B AT (9)
COM_OUT
l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the storage battery temperature sensor to receive storage battery temperature alarms
RS485 signal port connecting to a lower-level cascading port to receive monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the PMU l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D: connecting to the lower-level CMUEA
(10 )
COM_IN
RS485 signal port connecting to an upper-level cascading port to report monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the BBU l In an RFC or TMC11H: connecting to the BBU or upper-level CMUEA l In an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D: connecting to the PMU or upper-level CMUEA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(11 )
ELU
Connecting to an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type
(12 )
GATE
Boolean signal port connecting to a door status sensor
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
750
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscreen
Description
(13 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Boolean signal ports l In an APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H: reserved l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the surge protection alarm cable for the BAU02D or ODM06D l In an IBBS700D: The IN0 port connects to the heater, and the IN1 and IN2 ports are reserved.
(14 )
SMOKE
Boolean signal port l In an APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T: connecting to the smoke sensor l In an IBBS700D: This port is not provided.
(15 ) an d (16 )
FAN_EXT
Reserved for connecting to the outer air circulation fan in a cabinet to receive outer air circulation fan alarms
(17 )
PWR
Power input port for providing DC power for the board
Indicator The two indicators on a CMUEA panel indicate the status of the CMUEA. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-106 Indicators on a CMUEA panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check state.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
ALM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
751
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Silkscr een
4 Component Description
Color
State
Meaning
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
DIP Switch On a CMUEA, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CMUEA based on the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on a CMUEA. Figure 4-150 Position of the DIP switch on a CMUEA
(1) DIP Switch
The following figure shows the DIP switch settings on CMUEAs in different cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
752
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-151 DIP switch settings on CMUEAs in different cabinets
4.4.4 CMUG The central monitoring unit type G (CMUG) monitors the temperature in the cabinet, detects power supply, and reports alarms. A CMUG can be used in an IBBS20D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUG. Figure 4-152 Exterior of a CMUG
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUG.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
753
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-153 Ports on a CMUG
The following table describes the ports on a CMUG. Table 4-107 Ports on the CMUG No .
Silkscreen on the Panel
Description
(1)
ELU
Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type
(2)
ELU_GAT E
Boolean signal port, reserved
(3)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information In an IBBS20D, this port connects to a PMU or upper-level CMUG.
(4)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information In an IBBS20D, it connects to a lower-level CMUG.
(5)
GATE
Boolean signal port connected to the door status sensor
(6)
FAN
Connects to the fan in the cabinet and receives alarm signals from the fan.
(7)
MON
Monitoring signal port, used for detecting the voltage, current, and circuit breaker status of the storage batteries and controlling the power-off of storage batteries.
(8)
HEATER
Connects to the heating film to heat the IBBS20D.
(9)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power input for the board
Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on the CMUG panel. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
754
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-108 Indicators on the CMUG panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Description
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
ALM
Red
4.4.5 CMUH A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) mainly monitors a fan module, a heater, cabinet temperature, and lower-level devices. A CMUH can be installed in an RFC (Ver.E), IBBS200D (Ver.E), or IBBS200T (Ver.E).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUH. Figure 4-154 Exterior of a CMUH
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
755
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUH. Figure 4-155 Ports on a CMUH
The following table describes the ports on a CMUH. Table 4-109 Ports on a CMUH No.
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
TEMP1
Reserved port for connecting a temperature sensor
(2)
WATER
Connecting to a water sensor
(3)
IFAN4
(4)
IFAN3
Connecting an internal circulation fan and receiving internal circulation fan alarm signals
(5)
IFAN2
(6)
IFAN1
(7)
IFAN0
(8)
TEC
Connecting the TEC in an IBBS200T and receiving TEC alarm signals
(9)
TEMP0
l Connecting the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of a cabinet to receive temperature alarm signals in an RFC. l Connecting a battery temperature sensor and receiving battery temperature alarm signals in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(10)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
D_COM0
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
756
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Description
(11)
D_COM1
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices Connecting a WIUA that is optional
(12)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information. l Connecting a lower-level CMUH or CCUB in an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T
(13)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information. l Connecting an upper-level CMUH or CCUB in an RFC l Connecting a CCUB or upper-level CMUH in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(14)
ELU
Connecting an ELU to report the cabinet type
(15)
GATE
Boolean signal port for connecting a door status sensor that is configured by default
(16)
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Boolean signal port l Reserved port in an RFC l Connecting a BAU02D or ODM06D surge protection alarm cable in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(17)
SMOKE
Boolean signal port Connecting a smoke sensor in an RFC, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T
(18)
EFAN
Connecting an external circulation fan and receiving external circulation fan alarm signals
(19)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power inputs for boards
Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on a CMUH. Table 4-110 Indicators on a CMUH
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upperlevel device properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
757
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
ALM
4 Component Description
Color
Red
Status
Meaning
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upperlevel device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
4.4.6 HEUA The Heat Exchange Unit type A (HEUA) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU. HEUA can be used in OMB cabinet.
Panel The following figure shows the HEUA panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
758
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-156 Exterior of the HEUA
(1) IntFAN
(2) ISENSOR
(3) DC_SPD
(4) AC_SPD
(5) GATE
(6) COM IN
(7) COM OUT
(8) ExtFAN
(9) DC INPUT
Function The HEUA performs the following functions: l
Provides -48 V DC to the fan assembly.
l
Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information.
l
Collects surge protection alarm information from the DCDU-03B or AC/DC converter.
l
Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Reports the collected information to the BBU through an RS485 port.
Port The following table describes the ports on the HEUA. Table 4-111 Ports on the HEUA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
IntFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the inner air circulation fan
ISENSOR
4-pin connector
Port connected to the temperature sensor
DC_SPD
8_PCB connector
Port for collecting the DC input surge protection alarm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
759
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
AC_SPD
8_PCB connector
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
GATE
8_PCB connector
Port for the door status sensor
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Port for reporting monitoring signals
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Monitoring port for the AC/DC converter
ExtFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the outer air circulation fan
DC INPUT
3V3 connector
Port for feeding -48 V DC
4.4.7 HEUB The Heat Exchange Unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU. HEUB can be used in OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a HEUB. Figure 4-157 Exterior of the HEUB
Function The HEUB performs the following functions: l
Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly, monitors the running status of fans, and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
760
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following figure shows the ports on a HEUB. Figure 4-158 Ports on a HEUB
The following table describes the ports on the HEUB. Table 4-112 Ports on the HEUB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Ports on the HEUB
(1)
ELU
RJ45 connector
Electronic label port
(2)
ExtFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the outer air circulation fan
(3)
IntFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the inner air circulation fan
(4)
TEM
4-pin connector
Port connected to the temperature sensor
(5)
AC_SPD
Bare wire
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
(6)
GATE
Bare wire
Port for the door status sensor
(7)
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Port for reporting monitoring signals
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
761
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Ports on the HEUB
(8)
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Port connected to the ETP48100-A1
(9)
PWR
3V3 connector
Port for feeding -48 V DC power
4.4.8 CMUF The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) monitors the fans and cabinet temperature. A CMUF can be used in the BTS3900AL and IBBS700T.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUF. Figure 4-159 CMUF
Ports The following figure shows the ports and indicators on a CMUF. Figure 4-160 Ports on a CMUF
The following table describes the ports on a CMUF. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
762
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-113 Description of the ports on a CMUF No.
Port
Description
(1)
WATER
Reserved port, connected to the water sensor.
(2)
FAN4
One-row 4-pin port for connecting a fan. It is a reserved port.
(3)
FAN5
(4)
FAN6
(5)
FAN8
(6)
FAN7
(7)
TEM0
Dual-row 4-pin port for connecting a fan. It is a reserved port.
l It is connected to the temperature sensor next to the storage battery in the BTS3900AL. l It is reserved in the IBBS700T.
(8)
TEM1
Connected to the temperature sensor on the front door of the cabinet.
(9)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information.
(10)
COM_485
Reserved RS485 signal port.
(11)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information.
(12)
ELU
Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type.
(13)
GATE
Boolean signal port, which is connected to the door status sensor.
(14)
IN0
Boolean signal port l It is reserved in the BTS3900AL. l It is connected to a heater and reports monitoring information in the IBBS700T.
(15)
SMOKE
Boolean signal port l In the BTS3900AL, this port is connected to the smoke sensor. l In the IBBS700T, this port is not involved.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(16)
TEC
Connected to the TEC cooler to receive alarms related to the TEC cooler.
(17)
FAN_EXT 0
Connected to the outer air circulation fan.
(18)
FAN_EXT 1
Connected to the outer air circulation fan.
(19)
FAN_IN0
Connected to the inner air circulation fan.
(20)
FAN_IN1
Connected to the inner air circulation fan.
(21)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power input for the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
763
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicators The two indicators on the CMUF panel indicate the status of the CMUF. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-114 Indicators on the CMUF Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the BBU properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
ALM
Red
DIP Switch The DIP switches on the CMUF are used to set the working mode of the CMUF according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CMUF.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
764
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-161 Positions of the DIP switches on the CMUF
(1) DIP Switch
The following figure shows the settings of the DIP switches on the CMUF in different cabinets. Figure 4-162 Settings of the DIP switches on the CMUF in different cabinets
4.4.9 CCU A cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet. A CCU can be used in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS700D, or IBBS700T cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the CCU.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
765
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-163 Exterior of the CCU
Functions A CCU performs the following functions: l
Provides four standard 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet ports for cascading and commissioning CCUs.
l
Provides three uplink RS485 ports for the main equipment to manage the CCU.
l
Provides eight downlink RS485 ports to communicate with the CMUF, FAU, HAU, PMU, EMUA, and EMUB.
l
Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and access control alarms when being connected to corresponding sensors.
Port The following figure shows the ports on the CCU panel. Figure 4-164 Exterior of the CCU panel
The following table describes the ports on the CCU panel. Table 4-115 Ports on the CCU panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Item
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
CCU cascading ports
FE_L and FE_R
The FE_R port on the upper-level CCU connects to the FE_L port on the lower-level CCU. The FE_L port on level 1 CCU is idle.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
766
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Item
Silkscreen
Description
(2)
FE cascading ports
FE0 and FE1
The FE0 port is reserved and the FE1 port is a commissioning port. NOTE l The combined serial connector and Ethernet connector cable for commissioning connects the CCU to the FE1 port on the CCU and port for the HyperTerminal tool, which is integrated in the Windows operating system. The serial port has a rate of 115,200 bit/s. l After connecting the cable, log in to the serial port using "root" as the user name and "Huawei@ccu123" as the password.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(3)
Electronic label unit (ELU) port
ELU
Used to manage the cabinet asset
(4)
Downlink COM port
D_COM0 to D_COM7
Used to manage electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 communication
(5)
Uplink COM port
U_COM0 to U_COM2
Used for the main device to manage the CCU through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 or FE communication
(6)
USB port
USB
Reserved
(7)
DC power input port
RTN(+) and NEG(-)
Used to receive -48 V DC power
(8)
Port for the cabinet lamp
LAMP
Used to supply -48 V DC power to the cabinet lamp
(9)
Boolean signal port
GATE, IN0, and IN1
Port for providing three Boolean inputs. The GATE port connects the door status sensor, the IN1 port connects the AC surge protector, and the IN0 port is reserved.
(10)
Enhanced protective RS485 port
T+T- and R +R-
Supports uplink RS485 communication.
(11)
Port for connecting the smoke sensor
SMOKE
Port for connecting the smoke sensor
(12)
Port for connecting the temperature sensor
TEM
Reserved
(13)
Indicator
RUN, ALM, and LINK
For details about the indicators' status, see Table 4-116.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
767
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicator The two indicators on the CCU panel indicate the status of the CCU. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-116 Status indicator Silksc reen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functioning properly according to the configuration.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Software is being loaded to the module, or the module is not started.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the current board.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
ALM
Red
Besides the preceding two indicators, there is another indicator indicating the status of the cascading port on the CCU. The following table describes this indicator. Table 4-117 Port indicator Silksc reen
Color
Status
Description
LINK
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated on the CCU cascading port which may be connected improperly.
Steady off
No fault.
4.4.10 CCU01D-03 A cabinet control unit 1D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet. A CCU01D-03 can be installed in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
768
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CCU01D-03. Figure 4-165 Exterior of the CCU01D-03
Functions A CCU01D-03 monitors all functions of a cabinet. It performs the following functions: l
Provides two standard Ethernet ports with the rate of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s for cascading CCU01D-03 modules.
l
Provides two uplink RS485 ports for connecting the upper- or lower-level communication ports.
l
Provides two downlink RS485 ports for managing electromechanical components.
l
Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and door status alarms when it is connected to corresponding sensors.
Port The following figure shows the ports on the CCU01D-03 panel. Figure 4-166 Ports on the CCU01D-03 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
769
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the ports on the CCU01D-03 panel. Table 4-118 Ports on the CCU01D-03 panel No .
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
TEMP2
Reserved port for connecting to the temperature sensor
(2)
WATER
Connects to the water sensor.
(3)
FAN_EXT
Connects to the outer air circulation fan to receive alarm signals from it.
(4)
FAN_INT
Connects to the inner air circulation fan to receive alarm signals from it.
(5)
TEC
Connects to the TEC to receive alarms signals from it.
(6)
PWR
Power input port for providing DC power input for the board
(7)
EXTFAN2
Reserved.
(8)
EXTFAN1
(9)
SMOKE
Boolean signal port Port for connecting to the smoke sensor in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
(10 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Boolean signal port l If a BAU02D is optionally configured, these ports connect to the BAU02D. l If an IBBS300D is not configured with a BAU02D, the IN0 port connects to a heater and the IN1 and IN2 ports are reserved.
(11 )
GATE
Boolean signal port for connecting to the door status sensor
(12 )
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, it connects to a lower-level CCU01D-03.
(13 )
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, it connects to the PMU or upper-level CCU01D-03.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(14 )
D_COM1
(15 )
D_COM0
(16 )
FE_R
Manages electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 communication
The FE_R port on the upper-level CCU01D-03 is connected to the FE_L port on the lower-level CCU01D-03. If the FE_L port on a Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
770
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscreen
Description
(17 )
FE_L
CCU01D-03 is not connected to a cable, the CCU01D-03 is the firstlevel CCU01D-03.
(18 )
RUN, ALM, and LINK
For the meanings of the indicator status, see Table 4-119and Table 4-120.
(19 )
ELU
Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type
(20 )
TEM_BAT
In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, this port is connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarms.
Indicator The two indicators on the CCU01D-03 panel indicate the status of the CCU01D-03. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-119 Status indicator description Silksc reen
Color
State
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functioning properly according to the configuration.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Data is being loaded to the board, or the board is not started.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
ALM
Red
Besides the preceding two indicators, there is another indicator indicating the status of the cascading port on the CCU01D-03. The following table describes this indicator.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
771
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-120 Port indicator description Silksc reen
Color
State
Description
LINK
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated on the CCU01D-03 cascading port which may be connected improperly.
Steady off
There is no fault.
DIP Switch On the CCU01D-03, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CCU01D-03 according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03. Figure 4-167 Position of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03
The following figure shows the settings of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03 in different cabinets. Figure 4-168 Settings of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03 in different cabinets
4.4.11 CCUB A cabinet control unit type B (CCUB) monitors a fan module, a heater, cabinet temperature, a power module, and lower-level devices. A CCUB can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
772
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CCUB. Figure 4-169 Exterior of a CCUB
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CCUB. Figure 4-170 Ports on a CCUB
The following table describes the ports on a CCUB. Table 4-121 Ports on a CCUB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Silkscr een
Description
(1)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power inputs for boards
(2)
EFAN1
Connecting an external circulation fan and receiving external circulation fan alarm signals
(3)
COM_4 85
Connecting a monitoring board in a battery cabinet and receiving alarm signals from the battery cabinet Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
773
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscr een
Description
(4)
MON00/ D_COM 0-0
l MON0-0: Connecting an environment monitoring unit in another RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
MON01/ D_COM 0-1
l MON0-1: Connecting an environment monitoring unit in another RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
MON10/ D_COM 1-0
l MON1-0: Connecting an environment unit in an RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
MON11/ D_COM 1-1
l MON1-1: Connecting an environment unit in an RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
D_COM 2
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
l D_COM0-0: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
l D_COM0-1: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
l D_COM1-0: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
l D_COM1-1: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
Connecting a WIUA that is optional (9)
D_COM 3
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices Connecting an electric lock that is optional
(10 )
COM_I N/ U_COM 0
l COM_IN: Connecting an upper-level CCUB or CMUH. If no BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) or the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) does not work as a manager, this port communicates with an upper-level cascading port for reporting monitoring information. l U_COM0: If the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) works as a manager, this port connects to the MON1 port on the BBU.
(11 )
COM_O UT/ U_COM 1
l COM_OUT: If no BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) or the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) does not work as a manager, this port communicates with a lower-level cascading port for receiving monitoring information and connecting a lower-level CMUH. l U_COM1: If the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) works as a manager, this port connects to the MON1 port on the BBU.
(12 )
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
PMI
Connecting a power monitoring interface (PMI) board and receiving monitoring signals from the power system
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
774
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscr een
Description
(13 )
ELU
Connecting an ELU to report the cabinet type
(14 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Reserved Boolean signal port
(15 )
GATE
Boolean signal port for connecting a door status sensor that is configured by default
(16 )
SMOKE
Boolean signal port
(17 )
TEMP0
Reserved temperature monitoring port
(18 )
TEM_B AT
Battery temperature sensor port for receiving temperature information about internal or external storage batteries of an APM30H
(19 )
ADDR
Address monitored by the PMU function of a CCUB. The monitored address is 3 if the DIP switch is set to 1. The monitored address is 4 if the DIP switch is set to 0.
(20 )
WATER
Reserved port for connecting a water sensor
(21 )
TEMP2
Reserved port for connecting a temperature sensor
(22 )
IFAN0
Connecting an internal circulation fan and receiving internal circulation fan alarm signals
Connecting a smoke sensor in an APM30H or TMC11H
Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on a CCUB. Table 4-122 Indicators on a CCUB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on selfcheck status.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
775
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
ALM
4 Component Description
Color
Red
Status
Meaning
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
4.4.12 WIUA A wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) is mainly used to monitor the running status of other components in the same cabinet. A WIUA can be installed in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
Applicable Version The WIUA is available in MBTS V100R011C00 and later versions.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a WIUA. Figure 4-171 Exterior of a WIUA
(1) COM_IN port
(2) SETUP indicator
(3) STATE indicator
(4) Pairing button
(5) ANT port
-
Function A WIUA provides the following functions: Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
776
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Provides one RS485 signal port for communicating with an upper-level component.
l
Provides one antenna port for connecting to an antenna and communicating with external wireless components.
l
Contains an antenna for performing wireless communication with other components in the same cabinet.
l
Provides a pairing button for pairing with a lower-level component.
l
Provides an electronic label.
The following figure shows the function of a WIUA. Figure 4-172 WIUA function
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a WIUA. Table 4-123 Indicators on a WIUA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
STATE
Red or green
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady green
The board is performing self-check or loading and activation.
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is not registered, or the communication is interrupted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
777
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
SETUP
4 Component Description
Color
Green
Status
Meaning
Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.
Steady red
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Communications are normal but an alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady off
No power is supplied or the pairing function is not enabled, and the board does not exchange data with a lower-level device.
Steady on
No data is being initialized and the pairing operation is not supported.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is performing wireless exchange with a lower-level device.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board has been enabled with the pairing function.
Port and Button The following table describes the ports and button on a WIUA. Table 4-124 Ports and button on a WIUA Silkscreen
Description
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with an upper-level cascading port and reporting monitoring information Pairing buttona
ANT
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port for connecting an external antennab
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
778
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
a: The pairing button works as follows: l
After you press the pairing button on a WIUA, the WIUA can be paired with a lower-level device if the SETUP indicator is blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s).
l
If you press the pairing button again during a pairing process, the pairing process will be interrupted and the SETUP indicator is steady off.
l
After the SETUP indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s) for 10 minutes, the pairing function is automatically disabled.
b: When the WIUA is used together with an external antenna, the external antenna must be an omnidirectional antenna with a gain of less than 3 dBi and be installed by qualified personnel.
Engineering specifications The following table lists the engineering specifications of the WIUA. Table 4-125 Engineering specifications Specifications
Remarks
Input voltage
12 V DC
Operating voltage range:9 V DC to 12 V DC
Power consumption
2W
-
Dimensions (H x W x D)
27 mm x 45 mm x 55 mm (1.06 in. x 1.77in. x 2.17 in.)
-
Weight
0.1 kg (0.22 lb)
-
Operating temperature
-40°C to +70°C
-
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
-
Altitude
-60 m to +4000 m (-196.85 ft to +13123.20 ft)
From the altitude of 1800 m (5905.51 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) each time the altitude increases by 220 m (721.78 ft).
Storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
It is recommended that the device be installed and used within one year after its delivery because of the failure rate.
Protection level
IP20
-
Item Power specifications
Equipment specifications
Environment specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
779
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.4.13 eBat An eBat is used to monitor the running status of a storage battery and report monitoring information to an upper-level WIUA through wireless communication. An eBat can be installed in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
Applicable Version The eBat is available in MBTS V100R011C00 and later versions.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an eBat. Figure 4-173 Exterior of an eBat
(1) Cable outlet
(2) Pairing button
(3) RUN/ALM indicator
Function An eBat performs the following functions: l
Monitors the voltage of a storage battery.
l
Monitors the inner resistance of a storage battery.
l
Reports monitoring information about a storage battery to a WIUA.
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on an eBat. Table 4-126 Indicators on an eBat
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN/AL M
Green
Steady off
An eBat is not powered on or is in sleep mode.
Steady on
An eBat is not paired with a WIUA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
780
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
4 Component Description
Color
Red
Orange
Status
Meaning
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
An eBat is being pairing with a WIUA.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.
Steady on
Communications are normal but a major internal battery resistance alarm is reported, and batteries need to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
A hardware sensor is faulty and communications are interrupted.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
A hardware sensor is faulty but communications are normal.
Steady on
A minor internal battery resistance alarm is reported and communications are normal.
Port and Button The following table describes the port and button on an eBat. Table 4-127 Port and button on an eBat Item
Description
Cable outlet for an eBat
Two red cables and two black cables are routed through this cable outlet and connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery. Pairing button. After an upper-level WIUA starts pairing, pressing this button can pair the WIUA and eBat.
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an eBat.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
781
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-128 Specifications of an eBat Item
Technical Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
48.5 mm x 35 mm x 17 mm (1.91 in. x 1.38 in. x 0.67 in.)
Operating voltage
11 V DC to 17 V DC
Operating temperature
-20°C to +65°C (-4°F to +149°F)
Voltage monitoring range
11 V DC to 17 V DC
Internal resistance monitoring range
1.5 mΩ to 60 mΩ
Voltage monitoring precision
2%
Internal resistance monitoring precision
0.1 mΩ
4.5 Surge Protection Devices This section describes surge protection devices and types of cabinets supported by the surge protection devices.
4.5.1 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit(SLPU), which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high. A SLPU can be used in an APM30H, TMC11H, or BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Exterior of an SLPU The following figure shows the exterior of an SLPU. Figure 4-174 Exterior of an SLPU
SLPU slot assignment rules As a mandatory module providing protection for trunk signals in APM30H or TMC11H cabinet, the SLPU is configured with a UELP or UFLP and is installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
782
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-129 SLPU slot assignment rules Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
UELP
Optional
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is preferentially configured in the descending order of priority in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.
UFLP
Optional
1
Slot 3
If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
When 16 or fewer customized alarm inputs are required, the SLPU is an optional module that provide protection for monitoring signals, the SLPU is configured with two USLP boards and is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. Table 4-130 SLPU slot assignment rules Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
USLP
Optional
2
Slot 2 and slot 3
-
4.5.2 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals A surge protection subrack can be configured with a UELP or UFLP, which provides surge protection for transmission signals. It can be used in BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Slot No. The following figure shows the slots in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
783
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-175 Slots in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals
Board Configuration The surge protection subrack for transmission signals is on the upper right of the cabinet, and can be configured with the UELP or UFLP. The following table describes the board configuration principles. Table 4-131 Board configuration principles
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
UELP
Optional
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is preferentially configured in the descending order of priority in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
784
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
UFLP
Optional
1
Slot 3
If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
4.5.3 UELP Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four channels of E1/T1 signals. It can be used in APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), or OMB(Ver.C).
Panel The following figure shows the UELP panel. Figure 4-176 UELP panel
Port The following table describes the ports on the UELP. Table 4-132 Ports on a UELP
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE
DB25 female connector
Connects to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE
DB26 female connector
Connects to the external transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
785
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DIP Switch A UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. The following figure shows the DIP switch on a UELP. Figure 4-177 DIP Switch on a UELP
The following table lists the setting of the DIP switch on a UELP. Table 4-133 Setting of the DIP switch on a UELP DIP Switch
DIP Status 1
2
3
4
S1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other status
Meaning
Not grounded Grounding
NOTE
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
4.5.4 UFLP A universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE signals. A universal FE lightning protection unit type b (UFLPb) or universal FE lightning protection unit type c (UFLPc) provides protection for two channels of FE or GE signals. A UFLP, UFLPb, or UFLPc can be installed in an APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, or OMB (Ver.C). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
786
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Panel The following figure shows the UFLP panel. Figure 4-178 UFLP panel
The following figure shows the UFLPb panel. Figure 4-179 UFLPb panel
The following figure shows the UFLPc panel. Figure 4-180 UFLPc panel
Port The following table describes ports on the UFLP. Table 4-134 Ports on the UFLP Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to the external transmission equipment.
The following table describes ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
787
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-135 Ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to the external transmission equipment.
4.5.5 USLP A universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) or universal signal lightning protection unit type c (USLPc) provides protection for dry contacts and can be installed in an APM30H, TMC11H, or BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
Panel The following figure shows the USLP2 panel. Figure 4-181 USLP2 panel
The following figure shows the USLPc panel. Figure 4-182 USLPc panel
Port The following table describes ports on the USLP2 or USLPc.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
788
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-136 Ports on the USLP2 or USLPc Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity of Ports
Description
IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3
4-pin
4
Connect to customized alarm devices.
OUT0 and OUT1
RJ45 connector
2
Connects to the EXTALM port on the UPEU or UEIU in a cabinet.
The following figure shows the mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Figure 4-183 Mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports OUT0 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
OUT1 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
IN0 1
2
3
IN1 4
1
2
3
IN2 4
1
2
3
IN3 4
1
2
3
4
The following table describes the mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Table 4-137 Mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc Input Port Silkscreen
Pin
Silkscreen
Pin
IN0
IN0.1
OUT1
OUT1.1
IN1
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Output Port
IN0.2
OUT1.2
IN0.3
OUT1.4
IN0.4
OUT1.5
IN1.1
OUT1.3
IN1.2
OUT1.6
IN1.3
OUT1.7
IN1.4
OUT1.8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
789
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Input Port
Output Port
Silkscreen
Pin
Silkscreen
Pin
IN2
IN2.1
OUT0
OUT0.1
IN3
IN2.2
OUT0.2
IN2.3
OUT0.4
IN2.4
OUT0.5
IN3.1
OUT0.3
IN3.2
OUT0.6
IN3.3
OUT0.7
IN3.4
OUT0.8
For details about the application of a USLP, see 4.5.1 SLPU.
4.5.6 GPS Surge Protector A GPS surge protector provides surge protection for a satellite receiver. It can be used in BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), OMB(Ver.C), APM30H, and TMC11H. The following figure shows the exterior of a GPS surge protector. Figure 4-184 Exterior of a GPS surge protector
(1) Type N female connection terminal
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Surge protection and grounding (3) Type N male connection terminal terminal
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
790
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.5.7 SPD An AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power in an OMB (Ver.C) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an AC surge protection box. Figure 4-185 Exterior of an AC surge protection box
(1) AC surge protection box
(2) Alarm port
(3) AC power supply ports
Port The following table describes the ports on an AC surge protection box. Table 4-138 Ports on an AC surge protection box Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Alarm port
ALARM
Bare wire
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
AC power supply port
L
Cord end terminal
AC power supply port
N PE
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
791
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.5.8 AC Surge Protection Box A lightning arrester box provides surge protection for the input AC power, it can be used in OMB.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a lightning arrester box. Figure 4-186 Exterior of a lightning arrester box
(1) Alarm port
(2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
Port The following table describes the ports on a lightning arrester box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
792
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-139 Ports on a lightning arrester box Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Alarm port
SPD ALM
2-Pin cord end terminal
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
Port for power input
L
OT terminal
Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
N PE
4.6 Temperature Control Devices This section describes temperature control devices and types of cabinets supported by the temperature control devices.
4.6.1 Fan Assembly This section describes fan assemblies and types of cabinets supported by the fan assemblies.
FAN The FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet and monitors temperature. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN which includes the fan subrack, fans, and FMUC.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
793
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-187 Exterior of a FAN
(1) Fan
(2) Fan subrack
(3) FMUC
Functions The FAN performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l
Monitors temperature.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Ports The following figure shows the ports on a FAN. Figure 4-188 Ports on a FAN
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
794
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the ports on a FAN. Table 4-140 Ports on a FAN Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
Power port
-48V
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communicatio n port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades the lower-level FMUC or lower-level EMU.
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects the BBU, upperlevel FMUC, or upperlevel GATM.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a FAN. Table 4-141 Indicators on a FAN Indicato r
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUC.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUC.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is reporting alarms.
Steady off
The module is not reporting alarms.
ALM
Red
FAN 01A A FAN 01A dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in an RFC (Ver.B) cabinet.
Exterior A FAN 01A consists of three parts: the fan subrack, fans, and the CMUA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01A. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
795
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-189 Exterior of a FAN 01A
(1) CMUA
(2) Fans
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01A. Figure 4-190 Ports on a FAN 01A
(1) COM_OUT
(2) COM_IN
(3) RUN
(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2
(7) PWR
(8) SMOKE
(9) GATE
(10) ELU
(11) ALM
(12) TEM
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUA, see 4.4.1 CMUA.
FAN 01B A FAN 01B dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in an RFC (Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior A FAN 01B consists of a fan subrack, fans, and a CMUE. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01B. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
796
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-191 Exterior of a FAN 01B
(1) CMUE
(2) Fans
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01B. Figure 4-192 Ports on a FAN 01B
(1) COM_OUT
(2) COM_IN
(3) RUN
(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2
(7) PWR
(8) SMOKE
(9) GATE
(10) ELU
(11) ALM
(12) TEMP1
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUE, see 4.4.2 CMUE.
FAN 01C A FAN 01C dissipates heat and detects temperature. It can be used in an RFC(Ver.D), RFC(Ver.D_B), or RFC(Ver.D_A).
Exterior A FAN 01C consists of the fan subrack, fans, and CMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
797
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-193 Exterior of a FAN 01C
(1) CMUEA
(2) Fans
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01C. Figure 4-194 Ports on a FAN 01C
(1) COM_OUT
(2) COM_IN
(3) RUN
(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2
(7) PWR
(8) SMOKE
(9) GATE
(10) ELU
(11) ALM
(12) TEMP1
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUEA, see 4.4.3 CMUEA.
FAN 01D A FAN 01D dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 01D can be installed in an RFC (Ver.E).
Exterior A FAN 01D consists a fan, a fan subrack, and a CMUH. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01D. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
798
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-195 Exterior of a FAN 01D
(1) CMUH
(2) Fan
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 01D. Figure 4-196 Ports on a FAN 01D
(1) RUN
(2) D_COM0
(3) D_COM1
(4) COM_OUT
(5) COM_IN
(6) ELU
(7) GATE
(8) SMOKE
(9) PWR
(10) IN2
(11) IN1
(12) IN0
(13) TEM
(14) ALM
-
For details about the ports and indicators on a CMUH, see 4.4.5 CMUH.
FAN 02A A FAN 02A dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.B) cabinets.
Exterior A FAN 02A consists of a fan subrack, fans, an HPMI, and a CMUA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02A. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
799
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-197 Exterior of a FAN 02A
(1) Fans
(2) Fan subrack
(3) CMUA
(4) HPMI
Ports on the HPMI The following figure shows the ports on the HPMI. Figure 4-198 Ports on the HPMI
The following table describes the ports on the HPMI. Table 4-142 Ports on the HPMI Silkscreen
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Description
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
PMU_DB50
Connected to the PMU.
-
-
OUT0 and OUT1
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal output.
Reserved port
Reserved port
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
800
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Description
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
FUSE
Reserved port for the fuse testing breaker
-
-
GATE
Connected to the door status sensor to receive door status alarms.
Mandatory
Reserved port
IN3 and IN4
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_BAT1
Connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarm signals.
Optional
Reserved port
SMOKE
Connected to the smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
WATER
Connected to the water sensor to receive water damage alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_HUM
Connected to the temperature and humidity sensor to receive temperature and humidity alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
NOTE
(1): Mandatory monitoring devices are installed in the cabinets before delivery, and all monitoring cables in all the cabinets are connected before delivery. The customer equipment is configured based on customer requirements, and the monitoring signal cables for the customer equipment must be connected onsite. For detailed installation procedures, see BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide.
The CMUA For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUA, see 4.4.1 CMUA.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
801
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
FAN 02B A FAN 02B dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinets.
Exterior A FAN 02B consists of a fan subrack, fans, a CMUE, and an HPMI. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02B. Figure 4-199 Exterior of a FAN 02B
(1) Fan subrack
(2) Fans
(3) CMUE
(4) HPMI
Ports on the HPMI The following figure shows the ports on the HPMI. Figure 4-200 Ports on the HPMI
The following table describes the ports on the HPMI. Table 4-143 Ports on the HPMI Silkscreen
PMU_DB50
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Description
Connected to the PMU.
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
802
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Description
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
OUT0 and OUT1
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal output.
Reserved port
Reserved port
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
FUSE
Reserved port for the fuse testing breaker
-
-
GATE
Connected to the door status sensor to receive door status alarms.
Mandatory
Reserved port
IN3 and IN4
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_BAT1
Connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarm signals.
Optional
Reserved port
SMOKE
Connected to the smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
WATER
Connected to the water sensor to receive water damage alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_HUM
Connected to the temperature and humidity sensor to receive temperature and humidity alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
803
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
Mandatory monitoring devices are installed in the cabinets before delivery, and all monitoring cables in all the cabinets are connected before delivery. The customer equipment is configured based on customer requirements, and the monitoring signal cables for the customer equipment must be connected onsite. For detailed installation procedures, see BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide.
CMUE For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUE, see 4.4.2 CMUE.
FAN 02D A FAN 02D dissipates heat and detects temperature. It can be used in an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), or TMC11H (Ver.D_A1).
Exterior A FAN 02D consists of a fan subrack, a fan, and a CMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02D. Figure 4-201 Exterior of a FAN 02D
(1) Fan subrack
(2) Fan
(3) CMUEA
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
804
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-202 Ports on a FAN 02D
(1) PWR
(2) FAN_EXT
(3) SMOKE
(4) RUN
(5) COM_IN
(6) COM_OUT
(7) ALM
(8) ELU
(9) GATE
(10)(11)(12) IN0, IN1, IN2
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on a CMUEA, see 4.4.3 CMUEA.
FAN 02E A FAN 02E dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 02E can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).
Exterior A FAN 02E consists a fan, a fan subrack, and a CCUB. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02E. Figure 4-203 Exterior of a FAN 02E
(1) CCUB
(2) Fan
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02E. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
805
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-204 Ports on a FAN 02E
(1) ALM
(2) ADDR
(3) TEM
(4) SMOKE
(5) GATE
(6) COM_OUT/ U_COM1
(7) COM_IN/ U_COM0
(8) D_COM3
(9) D_COM2
(10) COM_485
(11) FAN_EXT
(12) PWR
(13) MON0-0/ D_COM0-0
(14) MON0-1/ D_COM0-1
(15) MON1-0/ D_COM1-0
(16) MON1-1/ D_COM1-1
(17) PMI
(18) ELU
(19) IN0, IN1, and IN2
(20) TEM_BAT
(21) RUN
-
-
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on a CCUB, see 4.4.11 CCUB.
FAN 02F A FAN 02F dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 02F can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or TMC11H (Ver.C).
Exterior A FAN 02F consists a fan, a fan subrack, a HPMI, and a CMUH. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02F.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
806
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-205 Exterior of a FAN 02F
(1) Fan
(2) HPMI
(3) CMUH
(4) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02F. Figure 4-206 Ports on a FAN 02F
(1) PMU_DB50
(2) OUT0
(3) OUT1
(4) IN0
(5) IN1
(6) IN2
(7) FUSE
(8) GATE
(9) TAM_BAT1
(10) IN3
(11) IN4
(12) SMOKE
(13) WATER
(14) TEM_HUM
(15) RUN
(16) ALM
(17) D_COM0
(18) D_COM1
(19) COM_OUT
(20) COM_IN
(21) ELU
(22) GATE
(23) IN0
(24) IN1
(25) IN2
(26) SMOKE
(27) FAN_EXT
(28) PWR
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
807
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
FAN 03B The FAN 03B dissipates heat and monitors temperature. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.C) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 03B which includes the fans, fan subrack, and FMUE. Figure 4-207 Exterior of a FAN 03B
(1) Fan
(2) Fan subrack
(3) FMUE
Functions The FAN 03B performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l
Monitors the temperature of fans.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Ports The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 03B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
808
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-208 Ports on a FAN 03B
The following table describes the ports on a FAN 03B. Table 4-144 Ports on a FAN 03B Port Type
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
Power port
-48V
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communicatio n port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades the lower-level FMUE or EMU.
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects the BBU, upperlevel FMUE, or upperlevel GATM.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on the FMUE in a FAN 03B. Table 4-145 Indicators on the FMUE in a FAN 03B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Indicato r
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUE.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUE.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
809
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicato r
Color
State
Meaning
ALM
Red
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is reporting alarms.
Steady off
The module is not reporting alarms.
FAN 03C A FAN 03C dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. FAN 03C modules can be installed in BTS3900(Ver.D), BTS3900(Ver.D_A), BTS3900(Ver.D_B), BTS3012(Ver.D_Z), BTS3900L(Ver.D), and BTS3900L(Ver.D_B) cabinets.
Exterior A FAN 03C consists the fans, fan subrack, and FMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 03C. Figure 4-209 Exterior of a FAN 03C
(1) Fan
(2) Fan subrack
(3) FMUEA
Functions A FAN 03C performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from a cabinet.
l
Monitors temperature.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
810
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The FAN 03C has two port types, as shown in Figure 4-210and Figure 4-211. Figure 4-210 Ports on a FAN 03C (1)
Figure 4-211 Ports on a FAN 03C (2)
The following table describes the ports on a FAN 03C. Table 4-146 Ports on a FAN 03C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1)
Power port
-48V
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communica tion port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades a lowerlevel FMUEA, lowerlevel EMU, or lowerlevel PMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
811
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
(2)
4 Component Description
Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects a BBU or upper-level FMUEA and cascades an upper-level GATM.
Power port
PWR
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communica tion port
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades a lowerlevel FMUEA, lowerlevel EMU, or lowerlevel PMU.
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Connects a BBU or upper-level FMUEA and cascades an upper-level GATM.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a FAN 03C. Table 4-147 Indicators on a FAN 03C Indicato r
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the FAN 03C must be replaced.
ALM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
812
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Indicato r
4 Component Description
Color
Status
Meaning
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the FAN 03C.
FAU01D-01 An FAU01D-01 dissipates heat and monitors temperature. It can be used in an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet. The OMB (Ver.C) has two FAU01D-01s, located on the upper left and the lower left in an OMB. The inner air circulation fan is located on the upper left, and the outer air circulation fan is located on the lower left.
Exterior The following figure shows the FAU01D-01 exterior. Figure 4-212 FAU01D-01 exterior
(1) Barcode opening
FAU03D-01 An FAU03D-01 is a fan assembly in the RF compartment. It dissipates heat and detects temperature for a BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the FAU03D-01. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
813
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-213 Exterior of the FAU03D-01
Panel The following figure shows the FAU03D-01 panel. Figure 4-214 FAU03D-01 panel
Port The following table describes the ports on the FAU03D-01 panel. Table 4-148 Ports on the FAU03D-01 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Port
Description
(1)
TEM0
Port for connecting to the temperature sensor
(2)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information
(3)
COM_485
Port for connecting to the FAU03D-01 monitoring signal cable
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
814
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Port
Description
(4)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information
(5)
ELU
Port for connecting to the ELU to report the cabinet type
(8)
GATE
Reserved Boolean signal port
(9)
IN0
Reserved Boolean signal port
(10)
SMOKE
Reserved Boolean signal port
(11)
TEC
Reserved port for connecting to the TEC
(12)
PWR
Port for providing DC power for the FAU03D-01
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the FAU03D-01 panel. Table 4-149 Indicators on the FAU03D-01 panel No.
Silk scre en
Color
State
Meaning
(6)
RU N
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
The FAU03D-01 is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the FAU03D-01 must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the FAU03D-01.
(7)
AL M
Red
Fan Assembly (FAU03D-02) An FAU03D-02 dissipates heat from the cabinet and monitors the temperature. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
815
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior An FAU03D-02 consists of the fans, fan subrack, and FMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of the FAU03D-02. Figure 4-215 Exterior of an FAU03D-02
Functions The FAU03D-02 performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l
Monitors the temperature.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on the temperature.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Ports The following figure shows ports on the FAU03D-02.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
816
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-216 Ports on the FAU03D-02
The following table describes the ports on the FAU03D-02. Table 4-150 Ports on the FAU03D-02 Port Type
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Power supply port
PWR
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the temperature sensor at the air intake vent for BBUs to cascade the ELU through the RJ45 connector on the temperature sensor.
Communicatio n port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades the lower-level FMUEA.
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects a BBU or upperlevel FMUEA.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on the FAU03D-02. Table 4-151 Indicators on the FAU03D-02
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Indicato r
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but fails to communicate with a BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is functional and is communicating with a BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
817
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicato r
ALM
Color
Red
Status
Description
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the fan assembly needs to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the fan assembly.
OMB Fans The OMB fans enable the ventilation and heat dissipation for the cabinet. The fans consist of the inner air circulation fan and outer air circulation fan. The inner air circulation fan is installed on the top left inside the OMB, and the outer air circulation fan is installed on the bottom left outside the OMB.
Appearance l
Figure 4-217 shows the inner air circulation fan. Figure 4-217 Inner air circulation fan
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Figure 4-218 shows the outer air circulation fan.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
818
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-218 Outer air circulation fan
4.6.2 (Optional) AC Heater An AC heater ensures that the customer equipment in a cabinet works within the acceptable temperature range. It is optionally installed in the customer space in an APM30H or TMC11H.
Exterior An AC heater is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of an AC heater. Figure 4-219 Exterior of an AC heater
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an AC heater. Table 4-152 Technical specifications of an AC heater
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Counter
Specification
The temperature of the AC heater starts working
< 1oC (±6oC)
The temperature of the AC heater stops working
> 15oC (±3oC)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
819
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Counter
Specification
Rated heating power
330 W
4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film When the operating temperature is lower than the temperature specifications of storage batteries, the storage battery capacity declines. In this case, heating films are installed to ensure that the storage batteries work in a proper temperature range. Heating films are optional and can be configured in an IBBS200D or IBBS20D.
Exterior The following table lists the configurations of AC- and DC-powered heating films in different cabinets. Table 4-153 Configurations of heating films Illustration
Cabinet
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
Figure 4-220
l IBBS200D (Ver.B)
2
Two AC-powered heating films are installed on the upper and lower pallets of a cabinet.
l IBBS200D (Ver.C) l IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Figure 4-220
IBBS20D
1
One DC-powered heating film is installed on the pallet in the front door of a cabinet.
Figure 4-221
IBBS200D (Ver.E)
1
One AC-powered heating film is installed on the lower pallet of a cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
820
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-220 Exterior of a heating film (1)
Figure 4-221 Exterior of a heating film (2)
A: The 220 V AC power cable for a heating film consists of a brown L wire, a blue N wire, and a green and yellow PE wire.
B: The 110 V AC power cable for a heating film consists of a black L wire, a gray N wire, and a green PE wire.
Technical Specifications The following table lists technical specifications of an AC-powered heating film.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
821
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-154 Technical specifications of an AC-powered heating film Item
Specifications IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200D (Ver.D)
IBBS200D (Ver.E)
Dimensions
350 mm x 250 mm (13.78 in. x 9.84 in.)
526 mm x 333 mm x 28 mm (20.71 in. x 13.11 in. x 1.10 in.)
Cross-sectional area of a cable
18 AWG
l In most regions: 3x1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) l In other regions: 3x16 AWG
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film starts working
< 1°C±6°C (33.8°F±42.8°F)
< 0°C±6°C (32°F±42.8°F)
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film stops working
> 15°C±3°C (59°F±37.4°F)
> 15°C±3°C (59°F±37.4°F)
Rated heating power
100 W
280 W (maximum heating power)
Rated operating voltage
220 V AC
220 V AC or 110 V AC
The following table lists technical specifications of a DC-powered heating film. Table 4-155 Technical specifications of a DC-powered heating film
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions
195 mm x 120 mm (7.68 in. x 4.72 in.)
Cross-sectional area of a cable
22 AWG
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film starts working
< 0°C±0.5°C (32°F±32.9°F)
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film stops working
> 15°C±0.5°C (59°F±32.9°F)
Rated heating power
90 W
Rated operating voltage
-48 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
822
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T A TEC can refrigerate the air in a cabinet to ensure that it works properly when the temperature is high. It can be used in an IBBS200T or IBBS300T.
Exterior The TECs in an IBBS200T and an IBBS300T are both located on the doors of the cabinets. They have the same exterior. The following figure shows the TEC in an IBBS200T as an example. Figure 4-222 Exterior of the TEC in an IBBS200T
(1) Outer air circulation fan
(2) Inner air circulation fan
Technical Specifications The technical specifications of a TEC in an IBBS200T or IBBS300T are as follows: l
If there is a sun shield (no impact of solar radiation) and the ambient temperature is 50°C (122°F), the TEC ensures that the temperature in the cabinet is less than or equal to 40°C (104°F) when storage batteries are in float charge and less than or equal to 45°C (113°F) when the storage batteries are in boost charge.
l
If there is no sun shield and the ambient temperature is 50°C (122°F) with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2, the TEC ensures that the temperature in the cabinet is less than or equal to 45°C (113°F) when storage batteries are in float charge and less than or equal to 50°C (122°F) when the storage batteries are in boost charge.
l
When the ambient temperature is 32°C (89.6°F) and there is no temperature difference between the air intake vent at the hot side and that at the cold side of the TEC, the following conditions must be met:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
823
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
–
For Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.D cabinets, the refrigeration power of the TEC is greater than or equal to 190 W±10% and the COP is greater than or equal to 0.5.
–
For a Ver.E cabinet, the refrigeration power of the TEC is greater than or equal to 250 W±5% and the COP is greater than or equal to 0.5.
4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T A IBBS700T TEC dissipates heat for the storage batteries and ensures the normal operation in high-temperature areas. It is installed in IBBS700T cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a IBBS700T TEC. Figure 4-223 Exterior of the TEC
Technical Specifications The technical specifications of a IBBS700T TEC are as follows: l
Obtains -48 V DC power from the power distribution box in the middle of the cabinet.
l
Provides the low-voltage disconnect (LVD) function. The LVD threshold is 44 V and the leakage current is less than 5 mA after the LVD.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
824
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.6.6 HAU01A-01 An HAU01A-01 is a heater. It ensures that the components in the cabinet work in a normal temperature when the ambient temperature is lower than the operating temperature. It can be used in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS300D, IBBS200D(Ver.E), or IBBS700D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the HAU01A-01. Figure 4-224 Exterior of the HAU01A-01
Panel The following figure shows the HAU01A-01 panel. Figure 4-225 HAU01A-01 panel
Port The following table describes the ports on the HAU01A-01 panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
825
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-156 Ports on the HAU01A-01 panel No.
Silkscree n
Item
Description
(2)
COM_IN
RS485 port for communicating with the upperlevel device
Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.
(3)
COM_OU T
RS485 port for communicating with the lowerlevel device
Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.
(4)
AC_IN
AC input
The 110 V AC and 220 V AC voltages are supported.
(5)
ALM_AL L
Alarm port
Monitors Boolean alarms. Boolean alarms consist of alarms related to the heater faults, including fan faults, board hardware faults, and temperature sensor faults.
(6)
TEST
Test button
Reserved
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the HAU01A-01 panel. Table 4-157 Indicators on the HAU01A-01 panel No.
Indica tor
Color
Status
Description
(1)
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device. If the board has not communicated with the upper-level device for more than one minute, this situation is regarded as a communication failure.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
The board is not powered on.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the heater needs to be replaced.
(7)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
ALM
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
826
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly The outer air circulation assembly includes a heat exchanger core and a fan. The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. The fan dissipates heat from the cabinet. Outer air circulation assembly can be used in APM30H.
Exterior The outer air circulation assembly is installed in the door of the APM30H. The following figure shows the exterior of the outer air circulation assembly. Figure 4-226 Exterior of the outer air circulation assembly
(1) Heat exchanger core
(2) Fan
4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan The inner air circulation fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Inner air circulation fan can be used in IBBS700T. The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper part of the cabinet door. The following figure shows the exterior of the inner air circulation fan.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
827
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-227 Exterior of the inner air circulation fan
4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan The outer air circulation fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Outer air circulation fan can be used in IBBS700T. The outer air circulation fan is installed in the lower part of the cabinet door. The following figure shows the exterior of the outer air circulation fan.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
828
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-228 Exterior of the outer air circulation fan
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame The fan mounting frame contains a fan, which accelerates the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet works within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly. A fan mounting frame can be installed in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS300D (Ver.A), IBBS20D, or IBBS700D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
829
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-229 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
(1) Fan
(2) IBBS200D (Ver.B): CMUA
(2) IBBS200D (Ver.C): CMUE
(2) IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D): CMUH
The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-230 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
(1) Fan
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) CMUE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
830
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Fan mounting frames in an IBBS200D (Ver.D), an IBBS200D (Ver.E), and an IBBS300D (Ver.A) have the same exteriors. The following figure shows an IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-231 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS20D. Figure 4-232 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
831
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS700D. Figure 4-233 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
Function A fan mounting frame performs the following functions: l
The fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly.
l
The monitoring board installed in a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), or IBBS300D (Ver.A) collects the alarm signals from the door status sensor, storage battery temperature sensor, fans, and smoke sensor in the cabinet, and reports these alarm signals to the PMU through an RS485 signal cable.
Signal Cable Delivered with a Fan Exterior An IBBS200D (Ver.B), an IBBS200D (Ver.C), an IBBS200D (Ver.D), and an IBBS300D (Ver.A) have signal cables delivered with them. The following figure shows the exterior of such a signal cable.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
832
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-234 Exterior of a signal cable delivered with a fan
NOTE
The signal cable delivered with a fan feeds power into the fan and transmits signals to a monitoring board.
Description The following table describes a signal cable delivered with the fan. Table 4-158 Description Cable
A End
Color
Description
W1
A.1
Red
Connects to the positive pole of the power supply.
W2
A.2
Yello w
Imports PWM speed-adjusting signals.
W3
A.3
Blue
Exports alarm or speed signals.
W4
A.4
Black
Connects to the negative pole of the power supply.
NOTE
The color of the signal cable delivered with a fan depends on the manufacturer.
4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Heat Exchanger Core can be used in APM30H (Ver.B). The heat exchanger core is installed in the door of the APM30H. The following figure shows the exterior of the heat exchanger core.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
833
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-235 Exterior of the heat exchanger core
4.7 Environment Monitoring Device This section describes environment monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the environment monitoring devices.
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor The door status sensor can monitor the status (open or closed) of a door. It can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB, OMB (Ver.C), APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.
Exterior A door status sensor consists of a magnet and a switch. The following figures show the exteriors of the magnet of a door status sensor.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
834
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-236 Exterior of the magnet of a door status sensor
(1) Shell of the magnet
(2) Magnet
The following figure shows the exterior of the switch of a door status sensor. Figure 4-237 Exterior of the switch of a door status sensor
Installation Positions The door status sensors in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS700D, and IBBS700T are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
835
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-238 Position of the door status sensor in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
The door status sensors in the OMB and OMB (Ver.C) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the OMB (Ver.C) as an example. Figure 4-239 Position of the door status sensor in the OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
836
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The door status sensors in the APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS20D, IBBS300D, and IBBS300T, are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-240 Position of the door status sensor in the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet
4.7.2 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor can monitor the temperature. It can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A), RFC, IBBS200T, IBBS200D, IBBS300T, IBBS300D, OMB (Ver.C), IBBS700T, IBBS700D, and IMS06.
Exterior In the following figure, illustration 1 shows the exterior of the temperature sensor in an IMS06 and illustration 2 shows the exterior of the temperature sensor in other cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
837
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-241 Exteriors of temperature sensors
(1) 2-pin connector
(2) Temperature sensor
(3) OT terminal (M6)
(4) 4-pin connector
Installation Positions The following figure shows the temperature sensor in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A). Figure 4-242 Position of the temperature sensor in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
838
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS700D. Figure 4-243 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS700D
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
839
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-244 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS700T
The door status sensors in the RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), and RFC (Ver.E) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the RFC (Ver.D) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
840
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-245 Position of the temperature sensor in the RFC (Ver.D) cabinet
The temperature sensors in the IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.E) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows an IBBS200T (Ver.D) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
841
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-246 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS200T (Ver.D)
The temperature sensors in the IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.E) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows an IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
842
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-247 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS200D (Ver.D)
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS300T (Ver.A). Figure 4-248 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS300T (Ver.A)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
843
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS300D (Ver.A). Figure 4-249 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS300D (Ver.A)
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an OMB (Ver.C). Figure 4-250 Position of the temperature sensor in the OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
844
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
For cables of the temperature sensor in an OMB, see Monitoring Signal Cable for the OMB Fan Assembly.
The following figure shows the position of the temperature sensor in an IMS06. Figure 4-251 Position of the temperature sensor in the IMS06
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a temperature sensor. Table 4-159 Technical specifications of a temperature sensor Item
Specifications
Operating voltage
3.0 V DC to 5.5 V DC
Temperature measurement range
-55°C to +125°C (-67°F to 257°F)
Temperature measurement error
±2°C (±35.6°F)
4.7.3 (Optional) EMU The environment monitoring unit (EMU) monitors environment of the equipment room. It can be used in BTS3900 and BTS3900L. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
845
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The EMU monitors environment of the equipment room through the connection between the signal cable and the main equipment. The EMU performs the following functions: l
Provides detection ports for the temperature sensor, humidity sensor, smoke sensor, water sensor, infrared alarm sensor, and door status sensor, as well as the extended Boolean value, analog values, and output control value.
l
Provides communication ports RS485 and RS232 connecting to the base station.
For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see EMU User Guide.
4.7.4 (Optional) EMUA/EMUB An environment monitoring unit type A/B (EMUA/EMUB) monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. It can be used in BTS3900AL(Ver.A), APM30H and TMC11H. An EMUA/EMUB is connected to the main equipment by using a monitoring signal cable. Through the connection, the EMUA/EMUB monitors the environment of the equipment room and cabinet. An EMUA/EMUB monitors the following: l
Environment, including the temperature, humidity, water, and smoke
l
Insertion (by using infrared and door status sensors)
l
Boolean signal monitoring
For detailed structure and functions of the EMUA, see EMUA User Guide. For detailed structure and functions of the EMUB, see EMUB User Guide.
4.8 Other Devices This section describes other devices besides power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, and temperature control devices, and environment monitoring devices, and types of cabinets supported by the other devices.
4.8.1 (Optional) GATM A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) controls the RET antenna, feeds power to the TMA, reports alarms about control signals of the RET antenna, and monitors the feeding current. A GATM is installed along with the DRFU.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a GATM. Figure 4-252 Exterior of a GATM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
846
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following table describes the ports and socket on a GATM. Table 4-160 Ports and socket on a GATM Silkscreen
Connector
Description
ANT0 to ANT5
SMA female connector
Feeds power into the TMA and transmits RET control signals.
COM1
RJ45 connector
Connects the GATM to the BBU.
COM2
RJ45 connector
Provides an extended RS485 port to be cascaded with other devices.
-48 V
3V3 connector
Receives -48 V power
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a GATM. Table 4-161 Indicators on a GATM Indicator
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
On for 2s and off for 2s
The power input is normal but the communication with the BBU is abnormal.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The GATM is functional properly and communicates with the BBU properly.
Off
There is no power supply or the module is faulty.
On
The AISG link is normal.
Off
The AISG link is abnormal.
Irregularly fast blinking
There is transmission on the AISG link.
On
An overcurrent alarm about the module is generated.
Off
The module is working properly.
ACT
ALM
Green
Red
4.8.2 (Optional) WGRU A WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
847
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
signals along with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS positioning information. The WGRU is optional. It is installed in a dedicated case. Each base station can be configured with one WGRU.
Exterior Figure 4-253shows the exterior of a WGRU. Figure 4-254shows the exterior of a WGRU case. Figure 4-253 Exterior of a WGRU
Figure 4-254 Exterior of a WGRU case
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
848
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Panel There are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the WGRU, as shown in Figure 4-255. There is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear panel of the WGRU, as shown in Figure 4-256. Figure 4-255 Front panel of a WGRU
Figure 4-256 Rear panel of a WGRU
(1) Grounding bolt
Ports The following table describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. Table 4-162 Ports on the panel of the WGRU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Front panel
PPS1
RJ45 connector
Transmits PPS signals.
PPS2
RJ45 connector
Reserved.
COM1
RJ45 connector
Forwards GPS information and BBU interaction, management, and maintenance information.
COM2
RJ45 connector
Reserved.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
849
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Location
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
POWER
Two-hole male connector
Connects to the external power equipment.
ANT
Type N female connector
Connects to the GPS antenna system.
CLK1 CLK2 Rear panel
Indicators The following table describes the indicators. Table 4-163 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU Indicator
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (On for 1s and off for 1s)
The WGRU is running properly.
Steady on
There is power supply, but the WGRU is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the WGRU is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is reported, indicating a fault during the operation.
Steady on
The WGRU has resolved the positioning information.
Steady off
The WGRU fails to resolve the positioning information.
ALM
ACT
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
850
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.8.3 ELU An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting. It applies to the following cabinets: BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IBC10,APM30H series cabinets, IBBS200D series cabinets, IBBS200T series cabinets, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ELU. Figure 4-257 Exterior of an ELU
(1) Housing
(2) RJ45 port
NOTE
The ELU in a BTS3900 or BTS3900L cabinet does not have a housing.
Installation Positions The following figure shows the position of an ELU in a cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
851
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-258 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900 cabinet
Figure 4-259 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900L cabinet
The ELU in an APM30H, TMC11H, or RFC is located on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The ELU in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T is located on the inner left wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows an APM30H and an IBBS200D as examples. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
852
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-260 Positions of the ELUs in an APM30H and an IBBS200D
Figure 4-261 Position of the ELU in an OMB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
853
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-262 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900AL cabinet
Figure 4-263 Position of the ELU in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T cabinet
NOTE
l In the IBBS700D, the ELU is located above a CCU when a CCU is installed in the cabinet or on the right of the CMUEA when no CCU is installed in the cabinet. l In the IBBS700T, the ELU is located above a CCU when a CCU is installed in the cabinet or on the left of the CMUF when no CCU is installed in the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
854
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-264 Position of the ELU in an IBC10
Figure 4-265 Position of the ELU in an IBBS20D
4.8.4 (Optional) SOU A service outlet unit (SOU) transfers AC power to the customer equipment. An SOU is optionally installed in the customer space in an APM30H. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
855
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior An SOU is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of an SOU. Figure 4-266 Exterior of an SOU
(1) Input power port
(2) Breaker
(3) Socket (European standard)
An SOU applies to the four types of sockets meeting the following standards: North American standard, European standard, Universal standard, and British standard. The following figure shows the exteriors of the four types of sockets. Figure 4-267 Exteriors of different types of sockets
(1) North American standard
(2) European standard
(3) Universal standard
(4) British standard
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an SOU. Table 4-164 Technical specifications of an SOU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Counter
Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D)
482.6 mm x 91 mm x 55 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.)
Weight
1.5 kg (3.31 lb)
Input voltage range
200 V AC to 240 V AC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
856
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Counter
Specification
Maximum input current
10 A
Output voltage range
200 V AC to 240 V AC
Maximum output current
10 A
Frequency band
50 Hz or 60 Hz
Operating temperature
-40oC to +55oC
Altitude
≤ 4000m NOTE Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1oC (33.8oF) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Protection class
IP20
4.8.5 (Optional) DDF A digital distribution frame (DDF) connects the trunk cables between communication devices and transmission equipment and also connects the communication devices and external alarm cables. A DDF is optionally installed in the customer space of the BTS3900AL, APM30H, and TMC11H cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DDF. Figure 4-268 Exterior of a DDF
(1) Alarm module
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Digital distribution module
(3) Wall mounting bracket
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(4) Baffle plate
857
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DDF performs the following functions: l
Supports the installation in a 19 inches rack and on a wall, and provides attachments for the installation.
l
Supports the transfer of eight E1 cables and 16 alarm cables.
l
Supports cabling from the front to facilitate the maintenance.
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DDF. Table 4-165 Technical specifications of a DDF Counter
Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D)
44 mm x 483 mm x 59 mm (1.73 in. x 19.02 in. x 2.32 in.)
Weight
1 kg (2.20 lb)
Working frequency
2 Mbit/s
Characteristic impedance
120 ohm
Inter-wire-bundle cross noise prevention class
≥ 60 dB
Insertion loss
≤ 0.4 dB
Return loss
≥ 18 dB
4.8.6 (Optional) Filler Module A filler module is a standard plastic component, which prevents heat reflux in the empty space below the BBU and improves the heat dissipation in the cabinet. Filler modules can be installed in the customer space of an APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), TMC11H(Ver.C), BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z).
Exterior A filler module is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of a filler module. Figure 4-269 Exterior of a filler module
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
858
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A filler module is installed in the customer space below the BBU to prevent heat reflux in the empty space below the BBU. NOTE
In an APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z)the filler module is configured in the customer space by default. Before installing other modules, first remove the filler module. For details about removing a filler module, see chapter "Installing Optional Modules and Cables" in the "Installation Guide".
4.8.7 ODM06D The outdoor distribution module DC 6 (ODM06D) is a power distribution box with the surge protection function. It supplies power to and provides surge protection for outdoor RRUs.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ODM06D. Figure 4-270 Exterior of an ODM06D
Functions The ODM06D performs the following functions: l
Provides surge protection for outdoor RRUs.
l
Provides one or two power inputs and six power outputs.
l
Supports a maximum of 100 A input current.
l
Reports the surge protection failure alarm.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
859
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Structure The following figure shows the structure of an ODM06D. Figure 4-271 Structure of an ODM06D
(1) Protective plate
(2) Cover
(3) Cable connector making label
(4) Circuit breaker
(5) Surge protector
(6) Cord end terminal bar
(7) Cable clip
-
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an ODM06D. Table 4-166 Technical specifications of an ODM06D Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
369 mm x 278.5 mm x 98.5 mm (14.53 in. x 10.96 in. x 3.88 in.)
Weight
4.0 kg (8.82 lb)
4.8.8 OFD06 The outdoor fiber distribution 6 (OFD06) distributes trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The OFD06 can be installed flexibly. For example, it can be installed on an outdoor wall, pole, or tower.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an OFD06. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
860
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-272 Exterior of an OFD06
Port The following figure shows the ports and interior of an OFD06 Figure 4-273 Ports and interior of an OFD06
(1) Box
(2) Fiber optic cable distribution and storage area
(3) Fiber optic cable routed-in area
(4) Trunk fiber optic cable (connected to the indoor fiber distribution)
(5) Outdoor optical jumper (connected to RRUs)
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an OFD06. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
861
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-167 Technical specifications of an OFD06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
270 mm x 278 mm x 100 mm (10.63in. x 10.94 in. x 3.94 in.)
Weight
2.5 kg (5.51 lb)
Input (core)
1 x 12 core
Output (core)
6 x 2 core (6 RRUs)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
862
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
5 Cable Description
5
Cable Description
For cable description in 3900 series base stations, see 3900 Series Base Station Cables. 3900 Series Base Station Cables describes the cable list, cable connections, and cable functions.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
863
Hardware Description Issue
07
Date
2016-09-02
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Overview This document describes cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, and the components (including their configurations, functions, and specifications) and cables used in the cabinets. This document serves as a reference for 3900 series base station planning and deployment. The exteriors of components or cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different. NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, LTE refers to either LTE FDD or LTE TDD, and eNodeB refers to either an LTE FDD eNodeB or an LTE TDD eNodeB in this document. The "L" and "T" in RAT acronyms refer to LTE FDD and LTE TDD, respectively. For details about the LampSite solution, see DBS3900 LampSite Hardware Description.
Product Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Solution Version
Product Version
BTS3900
l SRAN8.0 and later versions l GBSS15.0 and later versions l RAN15.0 and later versions l eRAN6.0 and later versions
V100R008C00 and later versions
BTS3900A BTS3900L BTS3900AL
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Product Name
Solution Version
DBS3900
l SRAN8.0 and later versions
Product Version
l GBSS15.0 and later versions l RAN15.0 and later versions l eRAN6.0 and later versions l eRAN TDD 7.0 and later versions l SRAN8.0 and later versions
BTS3900C
l RAN15.0 and later versions
Cabinets, components, and RATs described in this document are supported by V100R008C00 and later versions, except the special cases listed in the following table. Item
Solution Version
Product Version
l Quadruple-Mode Base Station
Since SRAN8.1/GBSS15.1/ RAN15.1/eRAN6.1
V100R008C01
Since SRAN9.0/GBSS16/ RAN16.0/eRAN7.0/eRAN TDD 7.0
V100R009C00
Since SRAN10.0/ GBSS17.0/RAN17.0/ eRAN8.0
V100R010C00
Since SRAN11.0/ GBSS18.0/RAN18.0/ eRAN11.0/eRAN TDD 11.0
V100R011C00
l IBC10 l BBU3910 l Second-Level USU l APM30H(Ver.E) l TMC11H(Ver.E) l RFC(Ver.E) l IBBS200D(Ver.E) l IBBS200T(Ver.E) l BBU3910A l OPM50M l OPM15M l IBBS20D l IBBS300D(Ver.A) l IBBS300T(Ver.A) l USU3910 l IBBS20L l eBAT l WIUA Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Item
Solution Version
Product Version
l IBBS20L-E
Since SRAN11.1/ GBSS18.1/RAN18.1/ eRAN11.1/eRAN TDD 11.1
V100R011C10
Since SRAN12.0/ GBSS19.0/RAN19.0/ eRAN12.0/eRAN TDD 12.0
V100R012C00
l OPM30M l UMPTe l UBBPei l RMU3900A
Intended Audience This document is intended for: l
System engineers
l
Base station installation personnel
l
Site maintenance personnel
Organization 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description This section describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of each version. 2 3900 Series Base Stations 3900 series base stations include BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, DBS3900, and BTS3900C. 3 Cabinet Description This chapter describes information about cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, including components and engineering specifications of the cabinets. 4 Component Description Components in a cabinet can be classified into BBU, RF modules, power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, temperature control devices, environment monitoring devices, and other devices, in terms of function. 5 Cable Description For cable description in 3900 series base stations, see 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
About This Document
Convention
Description
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl +Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
About This Document
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description................................................ 1 2 3900 Series Base Stations............................................................................................................14 2.1 BTS3900....................................................................................................................................................................... 16 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900............................................................................................................ 16 2.1.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900........................................................................................................19 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900................................................. 41 2.1.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900.............................................................................................................. 57 2.1.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900........................................................................................................... 66 2.2 BTS3900L.................................................................................................................................................................... 67 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations............................................................................... 68 2.2.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900L..................................................................................................... 69 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L...............................................81 2.2.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L............................................................................................................97 2.2.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900L.......................................................................................................104 2.3 BTS3900A.................................................................................................................................................................. 105 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A.......................................................................................................................105 2.3.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900A................................................................................................... 113 2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A............................................ 176 2.3.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900A......................................................................................................... 198 2.3.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900A...................................................................................................... 218 2.4 BTS3900AL................................................................................................................................................................219 2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL.................................................................................................................... 219 2.4.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900AL................................................................................................ 221 2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A)............................. 240 2.4.4 Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A)........................................................................................ 243 2.4.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900AL....................................................................................................246 2.5 DBS3900.................................................................................................................................................................... 246 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900........................................................................................................246 2.5.2 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 (Using a BBU3900 or BBU3910)............................................................ 256 2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A.................................................................................... 307 2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910.......................................................................................................................................................................... 310 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A.............................................................................................. 344 2.5.6 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910....................................... 348 2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A..........................................................378 2.5.8 Cable Connections in a DBS3900........................................................................................................................... 380 2.6 BTS3900C.................................................................................................................................................................. 382 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C....................................................................................................................... 382 2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C............................................ 383 2.6.3 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C..........................................................................................................385 2.6.4 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900C...................................................................................................... 389
3 Cabinet Description.................................................................................................................. 391 3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description....................................................................................................................................393 3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s............................................................................................................................................ 393 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets..........................................................................................................................394 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................400 3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description................................................................................................................................. 406 3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls.......................................................................................................................................... 406 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets....................................................................................................................... 408 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 415 3.3 RFC Description......................................................................................................................................................... 421 3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC................................................................................................................................................. 421 3.3.2 Components in RFCs...............................................................................................................................................422 3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications............................................................................................................................. 429 3.4 APM30H Description................................................................................................................................................. 431 3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs............................................................................................................................................ 431 3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs.......................................................................................................................................432 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications..................................................................................................................... 445 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet..............................................................449 3.5 TMC11H Description................................................................................................................................................. 453 3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs............................................................................................................................................ 453 3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs....................................................................................................................................... 454 3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................467 3.5.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a TMC11H............................................................................................470 3.6 IBBS200D Description...............................................................................................................................................470 3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds.......................................................................................................................................... 470 3.6.2 Components in IBBS200Ds.....................................................................................................................................471 3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 479 3.7 IBBS200T Description............................................................................................................................................... 481 3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts...........................................................................................................................................481 3.7.2 Components in IBBS200Ts..................................................................................................................................... 482 3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................489 3.8 IBBS300D Description...............................................................................................................................................491 3.8.1 Exterior of an IBBS300D........................................................................................................................................ 491 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds.....................................................................................................................................492 3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 495 3.9 IBBS300T Description............................................................................................................................................... 497 3.9.1 Exterior of an IBBS300T.........................................................................................................................................497 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts..................................................................................................................................... 498 3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................501 3.10 IBBS20D Description...............................................................................................................................................502 3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D........................................................................................................................................ 502 3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D................................................................................................................................. 503 3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 505 3.11 IBBS20L Description............................................................................................................................................... 507 3.11.1 Exterior of an IBBS20L.........................................................................................................................................507 3.11.2 Ports and Indicators on an IBBS20L..................................................................................................................... 508 3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................510 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual..........................................................................................................................................511 3.12.1 Exterior.................................................................................................................................................................. 511 3.12.2 Ports and Indicators............................................................................................................................................... 512 3.12.3 Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 515 3.13 IBBS700D Description.............................................................................................................................................516 3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D...................................................................................................................................... 517 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D............................................................................................................................... 518 3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D........................................................................................................ 521 3.14 IBBS700T Description............................................................................................................................................. 523 3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T.......................................................................................................................................523 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T................................................................................................................................525 3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T.........................................................................................................528 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description............................................................................................................................ 530 3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet.....................................................................................................................530 3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 531 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications.............................................................................................................. 537 3.15.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a BTS3900AL Cabinet....................................................................... 542 3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description............................................................................................................................... 542 3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet....................................................................................................................... 542 3.16.2 Components of BTS3900C Cabinets.....................................................................................................................543 3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................. 551 3.17 OMB Description..................................................................................................................................................... 557 3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB..............................................................................................................................................557 3.17.2 Components in OMBs........................................................................................................................................... 558 3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 561 3.18 IMB03 Description................................................................................................................................................... 563 3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03........................................................................................................................................... 563 3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets........................................................................................................................... 563 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................... 566 3.19 IFS06 Description.....................................................................................................................................................567 3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06............................................................................................................................................. 567 3.19.2 Components of an IFS06....................................................................................................................................... 568 3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................... 568 3.20 INS12 Description.................................................................................................................................................... 569 3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12............................................................................................................................................ 569 3.20.2 Components of an INS12...................................................................................................................................... 570 3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications.........................................................................................................................570 3.21 IMS06 Description................................................................................................................................................... 571 3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06............................................................................................................................................. 571 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06......................................................................................................................................572 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06...............................................................................................................574 3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06............................................................................................ 575 3.22 IBC10 Description.................................................................................................................................................... 576 3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10............................................................................................................................................ 576 3.22.2 Components in IBC10s..........................................................................................................................................578 3.22.3 Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 580
4 Component Description........................................................................................................... 583 4.1 BBU............................................................................................................................................................................ 584 4.2 RF Modules................................................................................................................................................................ 584 4.3 Power Equipment....................................................................................................................................................... 584 4.3.1 EPS 01..................................................................................................................................................................... 584 4.3.2 EPS30-4815AF........................................................................................................................................................ 596 4.3.3 EPS4890.................................................................................................................................................................. 598 4.3.4 EPS24S48100DC.....................................................................................................................................................600 4.3.5 EPU03A...................................................................................................................................................................602 4.3.6 EPU05A...................................................................................................................................................................614 4.3.7 ETP48150-A3.......................................................................................................................................................... 639 4.3.8 ETP48400................................................................................................................................................................ 641 4.3.9 ETP48100-A1.......................................................................................................................................................... 643 4.3.10 ETP48100-B1........................................................................................................................................................ 645 4.3.11 PMU.......................................................................................................................................................................647 4.3.12 PSU........................................................................................................................................................................ 658 4.3.13 DCDU.................................................................................................................................................................... 668 4.3.14 PDU....................................................................................................................................................................... 711 4.3.15 Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet........................................................................................................ 720 4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M...................................................................................................................... 732 4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC.................................................................................................................................. 732 4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL....................................................................................................................... 733 4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T................................................................................................ 734 4.3.20 AC Junction Box................................................................................................................................................... 735 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
4.3.21 Storage Battery...................................................................................................................................................... 737 4.4 Monitoring Devices.................................................................................................................................................... 739 4.4.1 CMUA..................................................................................................................................................................... 739 4.4.2 CMUE......................................................................................................................................................................744 4.4.3 CMUEA...................................................................................................................................................................748 4.4.4 CMUG..................................................................................................................................................................... 753 4.4.5 CMUH..................................................................................................................................................................... 755 4.4.6 HEUA...................................................................................................................................................................... 758 4.4.7 HEUB...................................................................................................................................................................... 760 4.4.8 CMUF...................................................................................................................................................................... 762 4.4.9 CCU......................................................................................................................................................................... 765 4.4.10 CCU01D-03...........................................................................................................................................................768 4.4.11 CCUB.....................................................................................................................................................................772 4.4.12 WIUA.................................................................................................................................................................... 776 4.4.13 eBat........................................................................................................................................................................ 780 4.5 Surge Protection Devices............................................................................................................................................782 4.5.1 SLPU....................................................................................................................................................................... 782 4.5.2 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals................................................................................................783 4.5.3 UELP....................................................................................................................................................................... 785 4.5.4 UFLP....................................................................................................................................................................... 786 4.5.5 USLP....................................................................................................................................................................... 788 4.5.6 GPS Surge Protector................................................................................................................................................ 790 4.5.7 SPD.......................................................................................................................................................................... 791 4.5.8 AC Surge Protection Box........................................................................................................................................ 792 4.6 Temperature Control Devices..................................................................................................................................... 793 4.6.1 Fan Assembly.......................................................................................................................................................... 793 4.6.2 (Optional) AC Heater.............................................................................................................................................. 819 4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film.......................................................................................................................................... 820 4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T........................................................................................................................... 823 4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T...................................................................................................................................824 4.6.6 HAU01A-01............................................................................................................................................................ 825 4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly..............................................................................................................................827 4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan........................................................................................................................................ 827 4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan........................................................................................................................................828 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame............................................................................................................................................. 829 4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core............................................................................................................................................. 833 4.7 Environment Monitoring Device................................................................................................................................834 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 834 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 837 4.7.3 (Optional) EMU.......................................................................................................................................................845 4.7.4 (Optional) EMUA/EMUB....................................................................................................................................... 846 4.8 Other Devices............................................................................................................................................................. 846 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Contents
4.8.1 (Optional) GATM.................................................................................................................................................... 846 4.8.2 (Optional) WGRU................................................................................................................................................... 847 4.8.3 ELU......................................................................................................................................................................... 851 4.8.4 (Optional) SOU........................................................................................................................................................855 4.8.5 (Optional) DDF........................................................................................................................................................857 4.8.6 (Optional) Filler Module......................................................................................................................................... 858 4.8.7 ODM06D................................................................................................................................................................. 859 4.8.8 OFD06..................................................................................................................................................................... 860
5 Cable Description...................................................................................................................... 863
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
1
Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
This section describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of each version.
07 (2016-09-02) This is the seventh commercial release. Compared with Issue 06 (2016-07-30), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 06 (2016-07-30), this issue includes the following changes. Topic
Change Description
3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications
Added the heat dissipation capability of an OMB (Ver.C).
06 (2016-07-30) This is the sixth commercial release. Compared with Issue 05 (2016-06-25), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 05 (2016-06-25), this issue includes the following changes.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications
Changed cabinet weight.
l 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications l 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications l 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications
05 (2016-06-25) This is the fifth commercial release. Compared with Issue 04 (2016-04-20), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 04 (2016-04-20), this issue includes the following changes.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications
Changed descriptions of the storage environment.
l 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications l 3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications l 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications l 3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications l 3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications l 3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications l 3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications l 3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications l 3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications l 3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications l 3.12.3 Engineering Specifications l 3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D l 3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T l 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications l 3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications l 3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications l 3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications l 3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications l 3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications l 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 l 3.22.3 Engineering Specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
04 (2016-04-20) This is the fourth commercial release. Compared with Issue 03 (2016-03-07), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 03 (2016-03-07), this issue includes the following changes. Topic
Change Description
All sections
Changed some descriptions.
03 (2016-03-07) This is the third commercial release. Compared with Issue 02 (2015-12-30), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 02 (2015-12-30), this issue includes the following changes. Topic
Change Description
l 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 and its child topics
Added RRU types in notes.
l 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L and its child topics l 2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A and its child topics l 2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 and its child topics
02 (2015-12-30) This is the second commercial release. Compared with Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l
3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual
l
3.12.1 Exterior
l
3.12.2 Ports and Indicators
l
3.12.3 Engineering Specifications
Compared with Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following change. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M
Added the OPM30M.
Compared with Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
01 (2015-07-30) This is the first commercial release. This document incorporates 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of all SRAN versions and presents differential information among these versions. Versions corresponding to original 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description are as follows: l
SRAN8.0: V100R008C00
l
SRAN8.1: V100R008C01
l
SRAN9.0: V100R009C00
l
SRAN10.0: V100R010C00
l
SRAN10.1: V100R010C10
The information added before the combination of all versions is as follows: l
3.10 IBBS20D Description and its child topics
l
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS20D
l
4.4.4 CMUG
l
4.4.10 CCU01D-03
l
2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A and its child topics
l
2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A
l
2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A
l
3.8 IBBS300D Description and its child topics
l
3.9 IBBS300T Description and its child topics
l
4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T
l
4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL
l
4.8.7 ODM06D
l
4.8.8 OFD06
l
3.21 IMS06 Description
l
3.21.2 Components of an IMS06
l
3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06
l
When the BBU Is Installed in the IBC10
l
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IBC10
l
3.22 IBC10 Description and its child topics
l
Fan Assembly (FAU03D-02)
l
3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s
l
3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls
l
3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC
l
3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs
l
3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs
l
3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds
l
3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts
l
3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D
l
3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T
l
3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet
l
3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet
l
3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB
l
3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03
l
3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06
l
3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12
l
3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06
l
3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10
The modification made before the combination of all versions is as follows. Topic
Change Description
About This Document
l Modified the product versions supported by this document. l Added information about the product versions supported by each cabinet, component, and RAT.
Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
Added the application scenarios of an OMB (Ver.C) that is configured with an IBBS20D.
l 4.3.21 Storage Battery
Added information about these components used in an IBBS20D.
l 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame l 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor l 4.8.3 ELU l 4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l Outdoor AC Installation Scenario
Renamed BBU3910A BBU3910A3.
l Outdoor DC Installation Scenario l 2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A l 2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A l 2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A l 3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D Outdoor AC Installation Scenario Outdoor DC Installation Scenario l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Added RRU types that can be used in a DBS3900 (BBU3910A). Added descriptions of scenarios where the BTS3900A is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.
l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Added descriptions of scenarios where the BTS3900AL is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.
l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply l 4.3.20 AC Junction Box l 4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T
Added descriptions of scenarios where the DBS3900 is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.
Added information about these components used in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
l 4.6.6 HAU01A-01 l 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame l 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Added information about these components used in an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or IBBS20D.
l 4.8.3 ELU Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Added the application scenarios of an OMB (Ver.C) that is configured with an IBBS20D.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900
Added figures showing dimensions of cabinets.
l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D)
l Deleted descriptions of 110 V AC and 120 V AC scenarios. l Deleted descriptions of the EPU05A-04.
l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets l 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets l 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06 l 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900
Updated the description of the AC BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet.
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations
Added the description of AC scenarios for the BTS3900L (Ver.D).
l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.C)
Added the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC base station configured with RFUs and RRUs.
l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l 2.4 BTS3900AL and its child topics l 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description and its child topics l 3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs l 3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs
Updated the figure for the BTS3900AL cabinet.
l Replaced filler panels in the APM30H (Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D) with air baffles. l Added the descriptions that the APM30H and TMC11H are configured with EMUB modules.
All sections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Changed the names of all EPC6 connectors into EPC4 connectors.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Optimized the descriptions of cabinet application scenarios supported by a BTS3900.
l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900 l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs
Added the descriptions that the BTS3900 (Ver.D) and BTS3900L (Ver.D) are configured with IMS06 cabinets.
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 4.3.6 EPU05A l PMU 11A or PMU 11B l PSU (R4850G2) l DCDU-12B l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Deleted the descriptions of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a cabinet and the DCDU-12B is installed on a wall.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet
Deleted the description of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
l Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.C)
Deleted the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers, power cables, and power distribution schemes when DCDU-12B modules are installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C) 4.3.21 Storage Battery
Added precautions for using non-Huawei storage batteries.
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Modified the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables.
4.7.2 Temperature Sensor
Modified the exterior of the hole in rubber plug for a temperature sensor.
l 4.3.6 EPU05A
Added the description that components can be installed in the IMS06.
l PMU 11A or PMU 11B l PSU (R4850G2) l DCDU-12B l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet
Added the descriptions of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a cabinet and the DCDU-12B is installed on a wall.
l Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet
Added the description of scenarios in which DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B modules are installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply
Added descriptions of the scenario where the DBS3900 uses an IBC10.
DCDU-12C
Added descriptions of the IBC10.
4.8.3 ELU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900
Added figures showing dimensions of cabinets.
l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
Added the description of quadruple-mode base stations.
l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply l Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs About This Document
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Added descriptions of the LampSite solution.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Topic
Change Description
The information of base stations, cabinets, and components in the cabinets in hardware description for all 3900 series base stations is included in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
The following hardware descriptions for 3900 series base stations are included: l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900 (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900L (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900L (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900A (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900A (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description l BTS3900C (Ver.C) Hardware Description and BTS3900C WCDMA Hardware Description l DBS3900 Hardware Description
The information deleted before the combination of all versions is as follows: l
EPU03A-20
l
Components of an EPU03A-20
l
EPU03A-20 subrack
l
"Monitoring schemes" and "Customized alarm input principles for 3900 series base stations". For details about the monitoring schemes and customized alarm input principles, see chapter "Reference for Configuring the Monitoring Function" in Monitoring Management.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2
3900 Series Base Stations
About This Chapter 3900 series base stations include BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, DBS3900, and BTS3900C. 3900 series base stations are divided into the following categories: l
Indoor macro base stations: BTS3900 and BTS3900L
l
Outdoor macro base stations: BTS3900A and BTS3900AL
l
Outdoor compact mini base station: BTS3900C
l
Distributed base station: DBS3900
2.1 BTS3900 This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900. 2.2 BTS3900L This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900L. 2.3 BTS3900A This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900A. 2.4 BTS3900AL This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900AL. 2.5 DBS3900 This section describes cabinets/racks, cabinet/rack applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, and cable connections for a DBS3900. 2.6 BTS3900C Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
This section describes cabinets, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.1 BTS3900 This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900.
2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900 A BTS3900 is an indoor macro base station. Different types of base stations can be formed by BTS3900 cabinets of different versions. Huawei has enhanced cabinet design and developed various types of cabinets used for the BTS3900. For BTS3900 (Ver.D), an IMS06 can also be used to meet requirements in various aspects such as power distribution, module configuration, and user space. The following table lists the specific cabinets and subracks used by the BTS3900. Table 2-1 Cabinets and subrack used by the BTS3900 base stations Base Station
Cabinet/ Subrack
Cabinet/Subrack Description
Components of a Cabinet/Subrack
BTS3900 (Ver.B)
BTS3900 (Ver.B)
The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cabinet.
l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) l BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V) BTS3900 (Ver.C)
BTS3900 (Ver.C)
The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet.
l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), shortened to BTS3900 DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Base Station
Cabinet/ Subrack
Cabinet/Subrack Description
Components of a Cabinet/Subrack
BTS3900 (Ver.D)
BTS3900 (Ver.D)
The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cabinet.
l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), shortened to BTS3900 DC cabinet IMS06(1)
An IMS06 can be installed under a BTS3900 cabinet to provide space for storage batteries or transmission equipment.
For details, see 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06.
NOTE
(1) IMS06: Indoor Mini Subrack
The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D), and IMS06. NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet have the same exteriors as a BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet, respectively, whereas a BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet has a different exterior from a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet.
Figure 2-1 Cabinet/subrack exteriors
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D), and IMS06. NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.
Figure 2-2 Cabinet/subrack dimensions
In addition to the preceding cabinets, some other cabinets can be restructured to attain the same capabilities as the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. The following table lists the cabinets that are restructured from old versions. Table 2-2 Restructured cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Base Station
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900 (Ver.D_A)
BTS3900 (Ver.D_A)
The BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet.
For details, see Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the Cabinetin BTS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B)
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B)
The BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet.
For details, see Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the Cabinetin BTS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Base Station
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
The BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3012 cabinet.
For details, see Upgrade Scenarioin BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) Installation Guide.
2.1.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900 A BTS3900 supports different RF module configurations and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900 can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs A BTS3900 base station configured with RFUs but without RRUs is applicable to different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, and stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios of the BTS3900. Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Modul es
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
6 RFUs
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V)
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 2-3.
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (+24 V) l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V) l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets
2
Triple- and quadruple-mode base station
12 RFUs
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 2-4. The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 4, 5, and 6 in Figure 2-4.
19
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Modul es
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sta cke d cabi nets
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V)
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-5.
Triple-and quadruple-mode base station
12 RFUs
2
l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets(1) NOTE (1) It is recommended that two BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinets be stacked. If two BTS3900 AC cabinets are stacked, reduce the maximum working temperature of the cabinets to +50°C (+122°F). One of the following figures shows stacked BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V) as examples.
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-3 Single cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-4 Cabinets installed side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-5 Stacked cabinets
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs A BTS3900 base station configured with RFUs but without RRUs is applicable to different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, and stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios of the BTS3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s
Illustration
Applicable Cabinet
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
6 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-6.
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
22
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s
Illustration
Applicable Cabinet
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-7.
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 3 and 4 in Figure 2-7.
Stac ked cabi nets
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-8.
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
2
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-8.
l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets(1) NOTE (1) It is recommended that two BTS3900 DC cabinets be stacked. If two BTS3900 AC cabinets are stacked, reduce the maximum working temperature of the cabinets to +50°C (+122°F). One of the following figures shows stacked BTS3900 DC cabinets as examples.
NOTE
A BTS3900 cabinet is configured with one BBU by default and can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs whose power consumption cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-6 Single cabinet
Figure 2-7 Cabinets installed side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-8 Stacked cabinets
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the BTS3900 can have different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, stacked cabinets, or using the IMS06.
BTS3900 Configured with Only BTS3900 Cabinets The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s
Illustration
Applicable Cabinet
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
6 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-9.
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
6 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 3 and 4 in Figure 2-9.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-10.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 3 and 4 in Figure 2-10.
Stac ked cabi nets
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-11.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-11.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets l 1 BTS3900 AC cabinet +1 BTS3900 DC cabinet
Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
26
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l A BTS3900 cabinet is configured with one BBU by default and can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs whose power consumption cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion. l When cabinets are installed side by side or stacked, it is recommended that BBU 1 and BBU 0 be installed in the same cabinet. l One BTS3900 AC cabinet consists of one BTS3900 DC cabinet and one IMS06.
Figure 2-9 Single cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-10 Cabinets installed side by side
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-11 Stacked cabinets
BTS3900 Configured with BTS3900 Cabinets and an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Scenario
Num ber of BBUs
Applic ation Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
Description
1 BTS3900 AC cabinet+1 BTS3900 DC cabinet+1 IMS06
2
Triplemode base station
12 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-12.
The IMS06 is used to house 100 Ah storage batteries, which provides lowcapacity backup power.
1 BTS3900 AC cabinet+1 IMS06
2
Triplemode base station
6 RFUs
The application scenario is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-12.
The IMS06 is used to house transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked on the BTS3900 cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900 cabinet will be blocked. NOTE
When an IMS06 is configured with storage batteries, the power consumption of a BTS3900 cannot exceed 10,000 W. If the power consumption exceeds 10,000 W, large-capacity battery packs need to be added.
Figure 2-12 BTS3900 configured with BTS3900 cabinets and an IMS06
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs A BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs is applicable to various scenarios such as a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+6 RRUs
One BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V)
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-13.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V)
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-14.
Stac ked cabi nets
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-15.
For a BTS3900 (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-03B can be configured to provide power for RRUs and the DCDU-03B must be installed on a wall outside the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Figure 2-13 Single cabinet (one BBU)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-14 Cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)
Figure 2-15 Stacked cabinets (two BBUs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs A BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs is applicable to various scenarios such as a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs. Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Applicable Cabinet
Illustratio n
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+6 RRUs
One BTS3900 DC cabinet
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-16.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-17.
Stac ked cabi nets
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-18.
For a BTS3900 (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11B can be configured to provide power for RRUs and the DCDU-11B must be installed on a wall outside the BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-16 Single cabinet (one BBU)
Figure 2-17 Cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-18 Stacked cabinets (two BBUs)
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the BTS3900 can have different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, stacked cabinets, or using an IMS06.
BTS3900 Not Configured with an IMS06 The following table describes the application scenarios for a BTS3900 base station that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and is configured with RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Sce nar io
Nu mb er of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Applicable Cabinet
Illustration
Sin gle cabi net
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+6 RRUs
l One BTS3900 DC cabinet
Figure 2-19 shows the application scenario.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
6 RFUs+9 RRUs
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
Figure 2-23 shows the application scenario.
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
Figure 2-24 shows the application scenario.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
Figure 2-25 shows the application scenario.
Cab inet s inst alle d side by side
Stac ked cabi nets
l One BTS3900 AC cabinet
The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21. Two BTS3900 DC cabinets
Figure 2-22 shows the application scenario.
When a BTS3900 (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed in the BTS3900 cabinet to distribute power to RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-19 One BTS3900 DC cabinet (one BBU)
Figure 2-20 One BTS3900 DC cabinet (two BBUs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-21 One BTS3900 AC cabinet (two BBUs)
Figure 2-22 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets installed side by side (one BBU)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-23 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)
Figure 2-24 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets stacked together (one BBU)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-25 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets stacked together (two BBUs)
BTS3900 Configured with an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios where a BTS3900 base station uses an BTS3900 cabinet and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Scenario
Num ber of BBUs
Applic ation Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
Description
1 BTS3900 AC+1 IMS06
2
Tripleand quadrupl e-mode base stations
6 RFUs+9 RRUs
Figure 2-26 shows the application scenario.
An IMS06 houses 100Ah storage batteries, which provide lowcapacity backup power.
NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked on the BTS3900 cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900 cabinet will be blocked. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
When an IMS06 is configured with storage batteries, the power consumption of a BTS3900 cannot exceed 10,000 W. If the power consumption exceeds 10,000 W, large-capacity battery packs need to be added.
Figure 2-26 BTS3900 configured with an IMS06 (1 BTS3900 AC+1 IMS06)
2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.B), a BTS3900 (Ver.C), and a BTS3900 (Ver.D). Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), or BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) are the same as those in a BTS3900 (Ver.D).
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.B) which has the peak output power.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is supplied with AC power. Table 2-3 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x16 A/3 P (by default)
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x32 A/1 P (by default)
6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
110 V AC duallive-wire
1x32 A/2 P (by default)
NOTE
An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An insulation cable with two insulation layers and two wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs and is supplied with +24 V or -48 V DC power. Table 2-4 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply
Maximum Configuratio ns in a Cabinet(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)(3)
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
l 1 to 6 lowpower RFUs
2x100 A/1 P (by default)
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
l 1 BBU Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
1x160 A/1 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Maximum Configuratio ns in a Cabinet(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)(3)
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
l 4 to 6 lowpower RFUs
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 lowpower RFUs
1x63 A/1 P (by default)
l 1 BBU
NOTE
(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU. (2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides two -48 V DC power inputs to a DCDU-01 and a DCDU-03B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.B). l
The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-01 is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-4.
l
The DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-03B is powered by the external power equipment.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-5 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (99.21 lb)
(3)
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The maximum configurations in a cabinet are the full configuration of modules in the cabinet. l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.C) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is supplied with AC power.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-6 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x20 A/3 P (by default)
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P (by default)
NOTE
An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An insulation cable with two insulation layers and three wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-7 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
(3)(4)
l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2or 0.054 in.2(low smoke zero halogen)
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2or 0.054 in.2(low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 1 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
(3)(4)
l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power inputs to a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-11B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C). l
The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-11A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-7.
l
The DCDU-11B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-11B is powered by the external power equipment.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-8 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for theUpper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
(3)(4)
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for theUpper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
(3)(4)
l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
AC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-9 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
Four or five PSUs
1x40 A/3 P
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Two or three PSUs
1x25 A/3 P
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
Five PSUs
1x100 A/1 P (recommend ed)
Four PSUs
1x80 A/1 P
Three PSUs
1x63 A/1 P
220 V AC singlephase
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)
AC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs. Table 2-10 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Maximum Configurati ons in a Cabinet
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumpti
1x100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Maximum Configurati ons in a Cabinet
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
on of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumpti on of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x40 A/3 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-11 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirementsfor the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
(3)(4)
l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
l 2 BBUs
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2or 0.054 in. smoke zero halogen) 2(low
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirementsfor the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
(3)(4)
l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900 cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B, respectively. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D). l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. If the DCDU-12A obtains power from external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-11. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario when the DCDU-12B obtains power from external power equipment.
Table 2-12 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) 9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
55
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
If more than six RRUs are configured, a maximum of six power cables with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 560 W) and a maximum of three power cables with a cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 400 W) are configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.1.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900 This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900 (Ver.B), a BTS3900 (Ver.C), and a BTS3900 (Ver.D) supplied with different power. The power distribution scheme in a BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), or BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) is the same as that in a BTS3900 (Ver.D).
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.B) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.
Power Distribution Schemes in AC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V AC three-phase, or 110 V dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 AC cabinet. The EPS4890 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-27 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios
Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies +24 V DC power to a BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V). The EPS24S48100DC converts the DC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-28 Power distribution scheme in +24 V DC scenarios
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01 in a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. Figure 2-29 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-29.
l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-03B, and the DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Figure 2-30 Power distribution schemein -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.
Power Distribution Schemes in AC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC three-phase power, or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 cabinet. The ETP48150-A3 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-11A. The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to modules in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-31 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios
Power Distribution Schemes in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A in a BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to modules in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-32 Power distribution schemes in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A, and the DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-32.
l
Figure 2-33shows the power distribution schemes when the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC to a DCDU-11B that distribute the DC power to RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-33 Power distribution schemes in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.
Power Distribution Scheme in AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 2-34shows the distribution schemes in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario. The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. Figure 2-36shows the distribution schemes for the DCDU-12A. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-34 Power distribution scheme in AC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme in AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B. Figure 2-35shows the distribution schemes in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenarios. The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. Figure 2-36and Figure 2-37show the distribution schemes for the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B, respectively. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-35 Power distribution schemein AC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemein DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power for the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet and the DCDU-12A distributes the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900 cabinet. Figure 2-36 Power distribution schemein DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12A, and the DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A in this scenario is the same as that for a DCDU-12A used by a BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-36.
l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12B, and the DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.
Figure 2-37 Power distribution schemein DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
NOTE
Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 on a DCDU-12B feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 560 W, and ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 400 W.
2.1.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900 This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900, see the following sections: l
BTS3900 (Ver.B): BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cable List
l
BTS3900 (Ver.C): BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cable List
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900 (Ver.D): BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cable List
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-13 Cable connections Bas e Sta tio n
Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BT S39 00 (Ver .B)
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connection s
CPRI Cable Connection s
RF Cable Connection s
BT S39 00 (Ver .C)
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
BT S39 00 (Ver .D)
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
2.2 BTS3900L This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900L.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations The BTS3900L, an indoor macro base station, can be classified into BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D), in terms of cabinet versions. The BTS3900L cabinets can meet different site requirements for power distribution, module configuration, and space for customer equipment. The BTS3900L can use AC power when the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet is stacked upon an IMS06. The following table lists the cabinets and subrack that are used by the BTS3900L base stations. Table 2-14 Cabinets and subrack used by the BTS3900L base stations Base Station
Cabinet/ Subrack
Cabinet/Subrack Description
Components of a Cabinet/ Subrack
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
BTS3900L (Ver.B)
For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cabinet.
BTS3900L (Ver.C)
BTS3900L (Ver.C)
This cabinet uses -48 V DC power only and provides space for the RFUs, BBU, fan assembly, power equipment, and customer equipment.
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
BTS3900L (Ver.D)
This cabinet provides space for the RFUs, BBU, fan assembly, power equipment, and customer equipment. This cabinet can be divided into the following types based on the configured power equipment:
For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cabinet.
For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet.
l BTS3900L DC cabinet l BTS3900L AC cabinet IMS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The IMS06 houses power equipment. The BTS3900L base station uses AC power when a BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet is stacked upon the IMS06.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For details, see 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06.
68
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), BTS3900L (Ver.D), and IMS06. Figure 2-38 Cabinet/subrack exteriors
The BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet can be restructured to have the same capability as the BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet, as listed in the following table. Table 2-15 Restructured cabinet Base Station
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900L (Ver.D_B)
BTS3900L (Ver.D_B)
It is restructured from a BTS3900L (Ver.B).
For details, see components of a cabinet in Information to Be Known Before the Cabinet Transformationof BTS3900L Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
2.2.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900L A BTS3900L cabinet can meet different requirements for RF module configurations and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900L can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.B) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-39.
2
Triple- ,quadruple- mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 BTS3900L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.C) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-39.
2
Triple- ,quadruple- mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-40 BTS3900L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.D) can be configured with one or two BBUs.
Scenarios Where the BTS3900L Uses BTS3900L Cabinets Only The following table lists the application scenarios where the BTS3900L uses one BTS3900L cabinet only and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Cabinet Type
Num ber of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
BTS3900L DC cabinet
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-41.
2
Triple-quadruple-, mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-41.
1
Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-42.
2
Triple-quadruple-, mode base station
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-42.
BTS3900L AC cabinet
NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked upon the BTS3900L cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900L cabinet will be blocked.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-41 1 BTS3900L DC
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-42 1 BTS3900L AC (1 BTS3900L DC+1 IMS06)
Scenarios Where the BTS3900L Uses a BTS3900L Cabinet and an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios where the BTS3900L uses a BTS3900L DC cabinet and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Type
Nu mbe r of BB Us
Application Mode
Maximu m Number of RF Module s
Description
Illustration
1 BTS3900 L DC+1 IMS06
1
Single-, dual-, and triple-mode base stations
12 RFUs
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-42.
2
Triple-mode base station
12 RFUs
l A BTS3900L DC cabinet stacked on an IMS06 comprises an AC base station. l The IMS06 houses an EPU05A-02 that provides DC power for components in the BTS3900L cabinet stacked upon the IMS06.
The cabinet application is shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-42.
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.B) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-43.
2
Triple- and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-44.
When a BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-03B can be installed on a wall to distribute power to the RRUs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-43 BTS3900L with only one BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-44 BTS3900L with two BBUs
BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.C) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numb er of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-45.
2
Triple- and quadruplemode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-46.
When a BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11B can be installed on a wall to distribute power to the RRUs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-45 BTS3900L with only one BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-46 BTS3900L with two BBUs
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.D) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs
Application Mode
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Illustration
1
Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+6 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-47.
2
Triple- and quadruple-mode base stations
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-48.
When a BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUS, a DCDU-12B is installed at the third 1 U space at the bottom of a cabinet to distribute power to RRUs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-47 BTS3900L with only one BBU
Figure 2-48 BTS3900L with two BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.B), a BTS3900L (Ver.C), and a BTS3900L (Ver.D). The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) are the same as those in a BTS3900L (Ver.D).
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.B) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table. Table 2-16 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-01s.
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-01s.
(3)(4)
l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs(1) l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU. (2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-01 and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-03B. For details about the power distribution scheme, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.B). l
The DCDU-01 provides power for the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. When the DCDU-01 is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-16.
l
The DCDU-03B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-03B is powered by the external power equipment.
Table 2-17 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (99.21 lb)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.C) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table. Table 2-18 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 7 to 12 highpower RFUs
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x160 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable of the smoke zero halogen (LSZH) type is connected to two DCDU-11As.
l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs
4x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
2x100 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in. 2),two groups of DC input power cables
3x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-11A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-11A is connected to one circuit breaker.
l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 2 BBUs l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)
2x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
3x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-11A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-11A is connected to one circuit breaker.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.
l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
86
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-11A and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-11B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C). l
The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-11A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-18.
l
The DCDU-11B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-11B is powered by the external power equipment.
Table 2-19 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input Scenario The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables when the BTS3900L uses AC input power and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-20 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
Four or five PSUs
1x40 A/3 P
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Two or three PSUs
1x25 A/3 P
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
Five PSUs
1x100 A/1 P (recommend ed)
Four PSUs
1x80 A/1 P
Three PSUs
1x63 A/1 P
220 V AC singlephase
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-21 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for base stations configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 x 160 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable of the smoke zero halogen (LSZH) type is connected to two DCDU-12As.
4x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
(4)
l 7 to 12 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
(4)
l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)
2x100 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
3x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-12A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-12A is connected to one circuit breaker.
2x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack) l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
(4)
l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs
3x63 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As. One DCDU-12A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-12A is connected to one circuit breaker.
2x80 A/1 P
The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As.
l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12A and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12B. For details about the power distribution scheme, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D). l
The DCDU-12A provides power for the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. When the DCDU-12A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-21.
l
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-12B is powered by the external power equipment.
Table 2-22 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1 to 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) 9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
96
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
If more than six RRUs are configured, a maximum of six power cables with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 560 W) and a maximum of three power cables with a cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 400 W) are configured.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
2.2.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900L (Ver.B), a BTS3900L (Ver.C), and a BTS3900L (Ver.D). The power distribution scheme in a BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) is the same as that in a BTS3900L (Ver.D).
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.B) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01 in the BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Figure 2-49 Power distribution scheme for the BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The power distribution schemes are Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
the same for the DCDU-01 in a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs and a BTS3900L cabinet configured only with RFUs, as shown in Figure 2-49. l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-03B, and the DCDU-03B supplies the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Figure 2-50 Power distribution schemefor a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A in the BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-11A distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-51 Power distribution scheme for the BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A, and the DCDU-11A distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The power distribution schemes are the same for the DCDU-11A in a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs and a BTS3900L cabinet configured only with RFUs, as shown in Figure 2-51.
l
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11B, and the DCDU-11B supplies the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-52 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Power Distribution Schemein AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02 in the IMS06. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 2-53shows the power distribution schemes for the BTS3900L when the 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied. The DCDU-12A supplies power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. Figure 2-54shows the power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A. NOTE
The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC single-phase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-53 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment provides -48 V DC power for the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900L cabinet and the DCDU-12A distributes the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-54 Power distribution scheme in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l
When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12A. The DCDU-12A supplies the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A in this scenario is the same as that in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as shown in Figure 2-54.
l
The external power equipment provides -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12B and the DCDU-12B distributes the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-55 Power distribution scheme in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs
NOTE
Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 on a DCDU-12B feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 560 W, and ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 400 W.
2.2.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900L This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900L.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900L, see the following sections: l
BTS3900L (Ver.B): BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cable List
l
BTS3900L (Ver.C): BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cable List
l
BTS3900L (Ver.D): BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cable List
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900L, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-23 Cable connections Base Station
Power Cable Connection s
Monitori ng Signal Cable Connecti ons
Transmi ssion Cable Connecti ons
BBU Intercon nection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connecti ons
RF Cable Connecti ons
BTS3900 L (Ver.B)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.B)
Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.B)
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
InterBBU Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BTS3900 L (Ver.C)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.C)
Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.C)
BTS3900 L (Ver.D)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.D)
Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.D)
2.3 BTS3900A This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900A.
2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A The BTS3900A is an outdoor separated macro base station, and it can be constituted of cabinets with different functions. With the improvement in designing cabinets, Huawei has many types of cabinets applicable to a BTS3900A. These cabinets meet the requirements of power distribution, module configuration, and customer space. The following table describes the cabinets that constitute a BTS3900A. NOTE
BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), or BTS3900A (Ver.E) refer to the BTS3900A base station whose cabinets are all of Ver.B, Ver.C, Ver.D, or Ver.E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-24 Cabinets constituting a BTS3900A Base Statio n
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
BTS39 00A (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l The APM30H(1) cabinet provides power to components in it and to other cabinets in AC scenarios.
BTS39 00A (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.C), and IBBS200T (Ver.C)
BTS39 00A (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.D), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D), IBBS700D, IBBS700T, IBBS300D (Ver.A), and IBBS300T (Ver.A)
l The TMC11H(2) cabinet can serve as a power cabinet in DC scenarios or as a transmission cabinet based on the transmission space requirement.
BTS39 00A (Ver.E)
APM30H (Ver.E), TMC11H (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.E), IBBS200D (Ver.E), IBBS200T (Ver.E), IBBS300D (Ver.A), IBBS300T (Ver.A)
l The IBBS(3) cabinet is a battery cabinet that provides backup power to a site. l The RFC(4) houses RFUs.
NOTE
(1) APM30H: Advanced power module with heat exchanger (2) TMC11H: Transmission cabinet with heat exchanger (3) IBBS200T/IBBS300T/IBBS700T: Integrated battery backup system with TEC; IBBS200D/IBBS300D/ IBBS700D: Integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation (4) RFC: Radio frequency cabinet
Exteriors of Cabinets Figure 2-56and Figure 2-57list the common combinations of cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-56 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.B) or BTS3900As (Ver.C)
A: BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C) in AC scenarios B: BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C) in without backup power or in DC scenarios AC scenarios with backup power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-57 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.D)
A: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios without backup power or in DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
B: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS200D
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
C: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS300D
D: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS700D
Figure 2-58 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.E)
A: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios without backup power or in DC scenarios
B: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS200D
C: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS300D
-
Cabinets The following table lists cabinets applicable to the BTS3900A base station and the cabinet configuration for reference.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-25 APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS, and RFC series cabinets Cabinet Type
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Configuration
APM30H series cabinets
l APM30H (Ver.B)
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.B).
l APM30H (Ver.C) l APM30H (Ver.D) l APM30H(Ver.E)
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.E).
TMC11H series cabinets
l TMC11H (Ver.B) l TMC11H (Ver.C) l TMC11H (Ver.D) l TMC11H (Ver.E)
l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).
IBBS series cabinets
l IBBS700D or IBBS700T l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B) l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D) l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) l IBBS300D (Ver.A) or IBBS300T (Ver.A)
RFC series cabinets
l RFC (Ver.B) l RFC (Ver.C) l RFC (Ver.D) l RFC (Ver.E)
l For details, see 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700Dand 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T. l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E). l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Dsand 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts. l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Besides the preceding cabinets, some cabinets of earlier versions can be restructured to have the same capability as Ver.D or Ver.E cabinets, as described in the following table. Table 2-26 Reused cabinets Base Station
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Cabinet Configuration
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ C)
APM30H (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.C)
TMC11H (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.C)
IBBS200D (Ver.D_C) and IBBS200T (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.C) and IBBS200T(Ver.C)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.D_C)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.C)
APM30H (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.B)
TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.B)
IBBS200D (Ver.D_B) and IBBS200T (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.B) and IBBS200T(Ver.B)
RFC (Ver.D_B)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.B)
APM30H (Ver.D_A2)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet
For details, see APM30H (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
TMC11H (Ver.D_A2)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.A)
For details, see TMC11H (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2)
Restructured from the IBBS200T (Ver.A)
For details, see IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ B)
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ A2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
111
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Base Station
BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ A1)
BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ B~D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Cabinet Configuration
RFC (Ver.D_A)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.A)
For details, see RFC (Ver.D_A) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
APM30 (Ver.D_A1)
Restructured from the APM30 (with breathable film)
For details, see APM30 (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
TMC (Ver.D_A1)
Restructured from the TMC (with breathable film)
For details, see TMC (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
BBC (Ver.D_A1)
Restructured from the BBC
For details, see BBC (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.D_A)
Restructured from the RFC
For details, see RFC (Ver.D_A) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D)
IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D) and IBBS200T(Ver.E _B~D)
Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D), Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D), and Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.E_B~D)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Base Station
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Cabinet Configuration
BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ A2)
APM30H (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.A)
TMC11H (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.A)
IBBS200T (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the IBBS200T (Ver.A)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_A2) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
RFC (Ver.E_A2)
Restructured from the RFC (Ver.A)
APM30 (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the APM30 (with breathable film)
TMC (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the TMC (with breathable film)
BBC (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the BBC
RFC (Ver.E_A1)
Restructured from the RFC
BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z)
Restructured from the BTS3012AE
BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ A1)
BTS30 12AE (Ver.D_ Z)
For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_A1) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
For details, see BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) Installation Guide.
2.3.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900A Various cabinets can be configured for a BTS3900A to meet different requirements for RF module configurations, backup power capacity, and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900A can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site: l
A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H/TMC11H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between them.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
An APM30H can be configured with an RFC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D or IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
l
An RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
Battery cabinets are selected base on the climatic conditions and power backup requirements of the site. A site must be configured with only one type of battery cabinets. Battery cabinets of different types or versions are not allowed at a site. For example, an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T cannot co-exist at a site, and an IBBS200D (Ver.B) and an IBBS200D (Ver.C) cannot co-exist at a site.
l
During initial site construction, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RFUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with of different requirements of spacefor customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-59 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-60 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-61 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-62 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
NOTE
As shown in the preceding figure, there are two installation modes of 2 TMC11Hs + 2 RFCs: (A) and (B). In mode (A), one RFC is installed during the initial site construction, and the other RFC is installed during capacity expansion. In mode (B), two RFCs are installed during the initial site construction.
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-27 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
-48 V DC
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is the same as the number of APM30Hs and only one battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is twice the number of APM30Hs and two battery cabinets are configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-63 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-64 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-65 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-66 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
-48 V DC
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site l
A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H/TMC11H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between them.
l
An APM30H can be configured with an RFC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D or IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is above the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
l
The RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During initial site construction, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets during capacity expansion. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RFUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-67 Cabinet configurations of a site with no backup power
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-68 Cabinet configurations of a site where the number of battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-69 Cabinet configurations of a site where the number of battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-70 Cabinet configurations of a site in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
As shown in the preceding figure, there are two installation modes of 2 TMC11Hs + 2 RFCs: (A) and (B). In mode (A), one RFC is installed during the initial site construction, and the other RFC is installed during capacity expansion. In mode (B), two RFCs are installed during the initial site construction.
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
-48 V DC
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is the same as the number of APM30Hs and only one battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
The number of battery cabinets is twice the number of APM30Hs and two battery cabinets are configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-71 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-72 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-73 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-74 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-30 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RFUs
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
-48 V DC
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between them.
l
When a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T, the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 100 Ah storage batteries to avoid over current of a single battery pack during the discharging.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An IBBS200D/IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Only two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS200D cannot stack with an IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
An IBBS300D/IBBS300T can be stacked only with an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS300D/IBBS300T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Only two IBBS300Ds or two IBBS300Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS300D cannot stack with an IBBS300T.
l
An IBBS200D/IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
l
An RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left side of basic cabinets. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.
l
A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion.
Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station A single-mode or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are required. When a site is supplied with the 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-75 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-76 and Figure 2-77. NOTE
IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-76 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-77 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-78 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario with the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-79 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario with the initial configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC expanded to 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs.
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-31 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤5U
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤5U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤5U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H + 1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
≤ 20 U
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode or Quadruple-mode Base Station The principles for configuring a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.
l
When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-80 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when no backup power is required
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When one battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. NOTE
IBBS in the follwing figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Figure 2-81 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-82 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruplemode base station are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-83 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-32 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤3U
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 14 U
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤3U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
141
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
≤ 14 U
Cabinet Configuration
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤3U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 14 U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11 l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+2 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
-48 V DC
-
≤7U
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, different cabinet configurations can be used for the BTS3900A in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode scenario supplied with 110 V AC power, 220 V AC power, or -48 V DC power supply.
Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E) Maximum configuration principles for a single site l
A single BTS3900A supports a maximum of 12 RFUs.
l
Cabinets in a BTS3900A must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between the cabinets.
l
If a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T, the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 100 Ah storage batteries to prevent overcurrent of a single battery pack during the discharging.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When being stacking with a TMC11H, an IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be placed under the TMC11H. Only two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS200D cannot stack with an IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
An IBBS300D or IBBS300T can be stacked only with an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or TMC11H. When being stacking with a TMC11H, an IBBS300D or IBBS300T must be placed under the TMC11H. Only two IBBS300Ds or two IBBS300Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS300D cannot stack with an IBBS300T.
l
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
l
An RFC can be stacked only below an APM30H or TMC11H.
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H, are required during initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left side of basic cabinets. If both a battery cabinet and a transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
During initial site deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.
Configuration principles in a single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations l
In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the second.
l
A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed 1200 W.
l
If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H. NOTE
The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base station configured with two BBUs.
Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) NOTE
Cabinet configuration principles for a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) are the same as those for a base station (Ver.E+Ver.E). For details, see Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E).
Restrictions on the cabinet configurations in a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) l
If a Ver.E cabinet is installed on a Ver.D base, the cabling capability at the bottom of the Ver.E cabinet is the same as that of a Ver.D cabinet.
l
If an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a Ver.D battery cabinet, the power distribution capability of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
l
If an APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to a Ver.E battery cabinet, the power backup and monitoring capabilities of the Ver.E battery cabinet are the same as those of a Ver.D battery cabinet.
l
If an APM30H (Ver.E) is stacked on an RFC (Ver.D), the cabling capability at the bottom of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
If an APM30H (Ver.D) is stacked on an RFC (Ver.E), the cabling capability at the bottom of the RFC (Ver.E) is the same as that of an RFC (Ver.D).
Cabinet Configurations l
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-84 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power
NOTE
The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by one battery cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-85 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by one battery cabinet
l
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by two battery cabinets. Figure 2-86 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-87 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power
The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different power inputs, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-33 Cabinet configurations Power Supply
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤3U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 RFUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 12 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 12 RFUs
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 12 RFUs
Two BBUs: ≤3U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
147
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RFUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H ≤ 12 RFUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U -48 V DC
-
Single BBU: ≤ 9 U Two BBUs: ≤7U Single BBU: ≤ 20 U
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
Two BBUs: ≤ 18 U
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and six RRUs.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-88 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-89 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-90 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-91 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. NOTE
APM30Hs listed in the "Cabinet Configuration" column of the following table include the APM30H used in the BTS3900A (AC) and the extension APM30H used in the distributed base station.
Table 2-34 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
-48 V DC
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
two battery cabinets
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 20 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
When a site is supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-92 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-93 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-94 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-95 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-35 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
-48 V DC
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and six RRUs.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-96 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-97 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-98 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-99 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. NOTE
APM30Hs listed in the "Cabinet Configuration" column of the following table include the APM30H used in the BTS3900A (AC) and the extension APM30H used in the distributed base station.
Table 2-36 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 12 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤9U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 20 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
-48 V DC
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-or Quadruple-Mode BTS3900A l
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.
l
A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-100 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when no backup power is required
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-101 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-102 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with of different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-103 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-37 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by four battery cabinets
≤ 10 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
-
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
-48 V DC
≤ 21 U
2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.
Cabinet Configuration Principles l
A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
l
When a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2x60 W and three RRUs of 2x40 W.
Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station A single-mode or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. When a site is supplied with the 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-104 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-105. NOTE
IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-105 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet
When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-106 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-107 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-38 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RFUs+9 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuratio n
≤5U
≤ 16 U
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤ 16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H
Backup power provided by two battery cabinets in the initial
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
≤5U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
164
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
configuratio n
≤ 16 U
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
-48 V DC
-
≤9U
1 TMC11H + 1 RFC
≤ 20 U
2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode or Quadruple-mode Base Station The principles for configuring a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.
l
When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-108 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when no backup power is required
When one battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-109and Figure 2-110. NOTE
IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-109 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Figure 2-110 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-111 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruplemode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-112 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-39 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤3U
≤ 6 RFUs+9 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
≤3U
≤ 14 U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
169
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
≤ 14 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤3U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 14 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H -48 V DC
-
≤7U
1 TMC11H + 1 RFC
≤ 18 U
2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC
BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different cabinet configurations can be used for single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode BTS3900A base stations supplied with 110 V AC/220 V AC power and -48 V DC power.
Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E) l
A single BTS3900A supports a maximum of 6 RFUs+15 RRUs or 12 RFUs+9 RRUs.
l
If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRU specifications supported by the BTS3900A are shown in the following table.
Table 2-40 RRU specifications supported by a BTS3900A configured with RFUs and RRUs RF Module Configuration
RRU Specifications
6 RFUs+15 RRUs
6 RRUs (2x80 W)+ 9 RRUs (2x40 W)
12 RFUs+9 RRUs
9 RRUs (2x40 W)
Maximum configuration principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
l
If a Ver.D cabinet and a Ver.E cabinet are installed side by side or stacked in a base station, the base station supports a maximum of 6 RFUs+9 RRUs.
l
A maximum of six 2x60 W RRUs and three 2x40 W RRUs can be configured.
Configuration principles in a single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations l
In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the second.
l
A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed 1200 W.
l
If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H. NOTE
The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base station configured with two BBUs.
Cabinet Configurations l
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-113 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by one battery cabinet. Figure 2-114 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by one battery cabinet
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by two battery cabinets.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-115 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-116 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power
The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different power inputs, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-41 Cabinet configurations
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC
Two BBUs: ≤3U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by one battery cabinet
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by two battery cabinets
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤3U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
175
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requireme nt
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configurat ion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H ≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U -48 V DC
-
Single BBU: ≤ 8 U
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
1 TMC11H+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC
≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
Two BBUs: ≤6U Single BBU: ≤ 9 U Two BBUs: ≤7U Single BBU: ≤ 19 U Two BBUs: ≤ 17 U Single BBU: ≤ 20 U Two BBUs: ≤ 18 U
2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B), a BTS3900A (Ver.C), a BTS3900A (Ver.D), Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
and a BTS3900A (Ver.E). The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and crosssectional areas of power cables in a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.D) are the same as those in the BTS3900A (Ver.D).The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.E) are the same as those in the BTS3900A (Ver.E).
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in base stations with different power supplies and configurations. NOTE
l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-42 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-43 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 0 to 6 RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
l 1 BBU l Power of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-01 and a DCDU-03B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-01 provides power for the DCDU-03C in the TMC11H (power cabinet) and RFUs and FAN 01A in the RFC. Table 2-43 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-01.
l
The DCDU-03B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-03B.
Table 2-44 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P (by default)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-45 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in base stations with different power supplies and configurations. NOTE
l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-46 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in AC input scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A/2 P
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-47 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU l Power of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-11B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-11A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01B in the RFC. Table 2-47 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-11A.
l
The DCDU-11B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-11B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-48 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-49 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900A (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-50 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
4 or 5 PSUs
1x40 A/3 P (by default)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 or 3 PSUs
1x25 A/3 P (by default)
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
5 PSUs
1x100 A/1 P (by default)
4 PSUs
1x80 A/1 P
3 PSUs
1x63 A/1 P
5 PSUs
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4 PSUs
1x80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V AC or 120 V AC duallive-wire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
Requirements for the Input Power Cable
3 PSUs
1x63 A/2 P
cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-51 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a groupof DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs
1x100 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
187
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12A and a DCDU-12B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-12A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01C in the RFC. Table 2-51describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12A.
l
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12B.
Table 2-52 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
9 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
9 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
189
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
190
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-53 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured base station that has the peak output power.
AC Input NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-54 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC input scenario Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
4 or 5
1x40 A/3 P (by default)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 or 3
1x32 A/3 P (by default)
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
5
1x100 A/1 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/1 P
3
1x63 A/1 P
5
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V/120 V AC dual-livewire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
3
1x63 A/2 P
layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-55 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs
1x100 A/1 P
l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1 x 160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
l 0 to 2 BBUs
l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU
l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
194
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12A and a DCDU-12B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l
The DCDU-12A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01D in the RFC. Table 2-55 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12A.
l
The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12B.
Table 2-56 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
Length of the Input Power Cable
6 RRUs (power ≤ 640 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 640 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
3 RRUs (power ≤ 650 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables
9 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)
6 RRUs (power ≤ 560 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
196
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-57 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.3.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900A This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900A (Ver.B), a BTS3900A (Ver.C), a BTS3900A (Ver.D), and a BTS3900A (Ver.E) supplied with different power. The power distribution scheme of a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.D) is the same as that of the BTS3900A (Ver.D). The power distribution scheme of a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.E) is the same as that of the BTS3900A (Ver.E).
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.B) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power supply system (EPS) in the APM30H. The EPS converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-117 and Figure 2-118show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-58 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-117 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Figure 2-118 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-58 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS
Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x16 A (MCB(1))
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x100 A (MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x80 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live-wire
1x40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC 2: 1x80 A (MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2x15 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM(4): 4x5 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TM: Transmission equipment
When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-117 and Figure 2-118. The DCDU-01 distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-03C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. NOTE
If DRFUs are configured for RFCs, 12 DRFUs and two RFCs are required.
Figure 2-119 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-59 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-119 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A
Table 2-59 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB) l BBU (reserved): 1x12 A (MCB) l Reserved: 1x12 A (MCB)+1x25 A (MCB)
TMC11H
l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios -48 V DC power in a BTS3900A is directly supplied to the DCDU-01 in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet. The DCDU-01 can supply a 25 A DC input with the maximum power of 800 W to the DCDU-03C in the TMC11H, which then distributes the power to BBU, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet. Figure 2-120 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-60 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-120 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power
Table 2-60 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB) l BBU (reserved): 1x12 A (MCB) l Reserved: 1x12 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 6x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the APM30H. The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-121 and Figure 2-122 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-61 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-121 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Figure 2-122 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-61 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x20 A (MCB(1))
Heater and SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x160 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live-wire
1x63 A (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x125 A (MCB) l RFC 2: 1x125 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x15 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l TMC: 1x30 A (MCB) l BBU_0: 1x25 A (MCB) l BBU_1: 1x25 A (MCB) l TM(3): 2x5 A (FUSE(4)) l TM or TMC: 1x15 A (FUSE) l FAN or TEC(5): 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM or EMUA: 1x15 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) TM: Transmission equipment (4) FUSE: Fuse (5) TEC: Thermoelectric cooler
When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-121 and Figure 2-122. The DCDU-11A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-11C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. NOTE
If DRFUs are configured for RFCs, 12 DRFUs and two RFCs are required.
Figure 2-123 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-62 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-123 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A
Table 2-62 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB) l Reserved: 3x25 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker
TMC11H
l TM: 2x25 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB)+2x6 A (MCB) l TM or BBU: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM or EMUA: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to the RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-11A in the RFC and the DCDU-11C in the TMC. The DCDU-11A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-11C distributes power to the BBU, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. Figure 2-124 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-62 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and AC inputs in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-124 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.D) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the APM30H. The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-125 and Figure 2-126 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-63 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-125 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Figure 2-126 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-63 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase
2x40 A+1x25 A (MCB(1))
Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P(MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x125 A/2 P (MCB)
110 V AC dual-live-wire
1x100 A/2 P (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x125 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC 2: 1x125 A (MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l BBU_0: 1x30 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU_1: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM(4): 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC(5): 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS(6): 1x30 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TM: Transmission equipment (5) TMC: TMC11H (6) IBBS: Fan in the IBBS200D/IBBS700D or TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS700T
When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125 and Figure 2-126. The DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-12C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-127 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A
Table 2-64 Specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l Reserved: 3x30 A (FUSE)
TMC11H
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to the RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-12A in the RFC and the DCDU-12C in the TMC. The DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-12C distributes power to the BBU, transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-64 lists the specifications of the fuses and AC inputs in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-128 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A cabinets supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC Scenarios If 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in an APM30H. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-129 and Figure 2-130 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-65lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario is the same as that in a 220 V AC single-phase scenario, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario.
Figure 2-129 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H in a BTS3900A supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-130 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H in a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
Table 2-65 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H in an BTS3900A supplied with AC power Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
5x32 A/1 P (MCB(1))
Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P (MCB)
l RFC 1: 1x100 A (MCB) l RFC 2: 1x100 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l BBU_0: 1x30 A (FUSE(2)) l BBU_1: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM(3): 4x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse
110 V AC dual-livewire
5x32 A/1 P (MCB)
Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P (MCB)
l TMC(4): 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS(5): 1x30 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) FUSE: Fuse (3) TM: Transmission equipment (4) TMC: TMC11H (5) IBBS: Fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS300D or TEC in an IBBS200T/IBBS300T
If AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, an APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and a TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-129 and Figure 2-130. A DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in an RFC. A DCDU-12B distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in a TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for an RFC and a TMC11H. The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in an RFC and a TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-131 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in a BTS3900A supplied with AC power
Table 2-66 Specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an BTS3900A supplied with AC power Cabinet Type
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
RFC
l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l Reserved: 3x30 A (FUSE)
TMC11H
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in a -48 V DC Scenario If -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to an RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in an RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-12A in the RFC and the DCDU-12C in a TMC. A DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in an RFC. A DCDU-12C distributes power to the BBU, transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in a TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for an RFC and a TMC11H. Table 2-66 lists the specifications of the fuses and AC inputs in an RFC and a TMC11H. Figure 2-132 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.3.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900A This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900A.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900A, see the following sections: l
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.B)
l
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.C)
l
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.D)
l
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Cable List for BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900A, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. The following table lists the links to these topics. Table 2-67 Cable connections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Bas e Sta tio n
Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BT S39 00A (Ver .B)
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connection s
CPRI Cable Connection s
RF Cable Connection s
BT S39 00A (Ver .C)
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
BT S39 00A (Ver .D)
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Bas e Sta tio n
Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
BT S39 00A (Ver .E)
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Power Cable Connection s
BTS3900A (Ver.E) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s
Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
2.4 BTS3900AL This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900AL.
2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL A BTS3900AL, outdoor macro base station, supports the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, and TMC11H (Ver.D). The following table lists the cabinets supported by a BTS3900AL. Table 2-68 Cabinets supported by a BTS3900AL Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Components in a Cabinet
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, basic cabinet in a BTS3900AL, uses a heat exchanger to dissipate heat and houses the BBU, power equipment, RFUs, transmission equipment, and storage batteries. Different power equipment can be installed in BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinets to support the AC or DC power supply.
For details, see 3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets.
l The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with AC power is referred to as a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. l The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with DC power is referred to as a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Name
Cabinet Description
Components in a Cabinet
l IBBS700D or IBBS700T
The battery cabinets provide backup power for a base station.
l For details, see 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D.
l IBBS300D or IBBS300T
l For details, see 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T. l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds. l For details, see 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts.
TMC11H (Ver.D)
The TMC11H (Ver.D), transmission cabinet in a BTS3900AL, is installed when more transmission space is required to provide power supplies and installation space for transmission equipment.
For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D).
The following figure shows the exteriors of a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets. Figure 2-133 Exteriors of a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS300D (Ver.A) and an IBBS300T (Ver.A). IBBS300D (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300D and IBBS300T (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300T in this section. Figure 2-134 Exteriors of an IBBS300D and an IBBS300T
2.4.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900AL Various cabinets can be configured for a BTS3900AL to meet different requirements for RF module configurations, backup power capacity, and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900AL can be configured with RFUs or RFUs and RRUs.
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured as a single-, dual-, quadruple-, or triple-mode base station and supports different combinations of cabinets.
Cabinet Configuration Principles l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of 18 RFUs. If there are more than 18 RFUs, one or more sites need to be added.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and the two cabinets must be installed side by side with the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one TMC11H (Ver.D).
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS700D/IBBS700T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D), are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets should be positioned on the left, and the basic cabinet on the right.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station One BBU is configured in a single- or dual-mode base station. In a BTS3900AL configured with 6 to 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured and the BBU is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. In a BTS3900AL configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are configured and the BBU is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-135 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and backup power is not required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-136 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-137 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when short-term backup power is required
Figure 2-138 and Figure 2-139 show the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-138 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-139 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-69 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤ 11 U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 11 U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 22 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
Short-term backup power
≤4U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 15 U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤ 11 U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 22 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple- Mode Base Station A triple- or quadruple-mode base station can be configured with one or two BBUs. When a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with one BBU, cabinet configurations in the triple- or quadruple-mode base station are the same as those in a single- or dual-mode base station. When a triple- or quadruple- mode BTS3900AL is configured with two BBUs and 6 to 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured and the two BBUs are installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. When a triple- or quadruple- mode BTS3900AL is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are configured and the two BBUs are installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. In the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station are the same as those of a single- or dual-mode base station, which are listed in Table 2-70. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-140 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and backup power is not required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-141 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when backup power is not required
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-142 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when shortterm backup power is required
Figure 2-143 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-143 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-144 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-70 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤9U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤9U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 20 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipme nt
RF Configur ation
Cabinet Configuration
Short-term backup power
≤2U
≤ 9 RFUs
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 13 U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤9U
≤ 9 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
≤ 20 U
≤ 18 RFUs
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a 100 Ah pack of Northstar storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured as a single-, dual-, quadruple-, or triple-mode base station and supports different combinations of cabinets.
Cabinet Configuration Principles l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs and with a maximum of one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or one BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.
l
A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one TMC11H (Ver.D).
l
If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS700D/IBBS700T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D), are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets should be positioned on the left, and the basic cabinet on the right.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-145 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and no backup power is required. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-146 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-147 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when short-term backup power is required
Figure 2-148 and Figure 2-149 show the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-148 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Figure 2-149 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-71 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤ 11 U
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 11 U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Short-term backup power
≤4U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 15 U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤ 11 U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple- Mode Base Station If a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with two BBUs, both of them are installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. If a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with one BBU, a filler panel should be installed in the position illustrated by BBU 1 in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
In the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station are the same as those of a single- or dual-mode base station, which are listed in Table 2-72. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-150 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and no backup power is required. Figure 2-151 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when no backup power is required
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-152 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when shortterm backup power is required
Figure 2-153 and Figure 2-154 show the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruplemode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-153 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Figure 2-154 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS300D or IBBS300T
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-72 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
N/A
≤9U
One BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Capacity
Space for Customer Equipment
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤9U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Short-term backup power
≤2U
One BTS3900AL AC cabinet
≤ 13 U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Medium- to long-term backup power
≤9U
1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l
The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).
l
The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.
l
It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.
l
The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.
(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.
2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900AL (Ver.A) which has the peak output power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900AL. Table 2-73 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirementsf or the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
7 PSUs+1 SOU
1x63 A/3 P (recommended)
10 mm2(0.015 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU
1x40 A/3 P
4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU
1x63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P (recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
1x100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
1x80 A/1 P
6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
1x125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
1x100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/2 P (recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
1x125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
1x100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
1x80 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V AC dual-livewire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when DC power is supplied to a BTS3900AL. Table 2-74 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Power Equipme nt
Product Configurati on(1)
Minimum Requirement s for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
PDU03D01_INPUT 0
9 high-power RFUs
2x100 A/1 P (recommended )
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
6 high-power RFUs and 3 low-power RFUs
2x100 A/1 P
25 mm2or 0.039 in. 2(low smoke zero halogen)
3 high-power RFUs and 6 low-power RFUs
2x100 A/1 P
9 low-power RFUs
1x125 A/1 P
12 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
2x125 A/1 P
9 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
2x100 A/1 P
6 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
1x100 A/1 P (recommended )
PDU03D01_INPUT 1
2x63 A/1 P
2x63 A/1 P
PDU03D01_INPUT 2
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3 RRUs (≤ 560 W)
1x63 A/1 P
Transmission equipment and two BBUs
1x63 A/1 P (recommended )
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
If high-power RFUs or RRUs and low-power RFUs or RRUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.
l
Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
2.4.4 Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900AL cabinets.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL AC Cabinet When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is supplied with 220 V AC or 110 V AC power, the input AC power is distributed by the PDU05A-01 and converted into DC power by the ETP48400 in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The DC power is distributed by the DCDU-12C to components in the cabinet. After going through the PDU05A-01, the AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs: l
One AC output is connected to the junction box on the right side of the cabinet door, and divided into four AC outputs, which are then provided for the HAU01A-01.
l
Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs (R4850G2) and converted by the PSUs (R4850G2) into DC power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-12C and storage batteries.
l
One AC output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 2-155 shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL AC cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The power distribution scheme in a 220 V AC singlephase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario is the same as that in a 220 V AC three-phase power supply scenario. The difference among the power distribution schemes for the three types of power inputs resides in the configuration of short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 2-156. NOTE
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, LOAD3 and LOAD5 ports on the ETP48400 provide DC power for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-155 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
Table 2-75lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses. Table 2-75 Specifications of circuit breakers Power Distribution Device
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers or fuse
PDU05A-01
l PSU1/5: 1x40 A
-
l PSU2/6: 1x40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A l HEATER: 1x25 A l SOU: 1x10 A ETP48400
-
l DCDU-12C 0#: 1x100 A l DCDU-12C 1#: 1x200 A l Storage battery: 1x400 A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DCDU-12C 0#
-
10x30 A
DCDU-12C 1#
-
10x30 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-156 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL DC Cabinet A BTS3900AL DC cabinet is supplied with external DC power, which is distributed by the PDU03D-01 to the DCDU-12C. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. NOTE
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, INPUT1 terminals on the PDU03D-01 provide DC power for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.
Figure 2-157 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Table 2-76lists the specifications of DC output fuse. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-76 Specifications of DC Output Fuse Power Distribution Device
Specifications of DC Output Fuse
DCDU-12C 0#
10x30 A
DCDU-12C 1#
10x30 A
2.4.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900AL This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900AL.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900AL, see BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Cable List.
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900AL, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-77 Cable connections Power Cable Connectio ns
Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns
Transmissi on Cable Connectio ns
BBU Interconne ction Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
RF Cable Connectio ns
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Power Cable Connections
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
Transmissio n Cable Connections
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections
CPRI Cable Connections
RF Cable Connections
2.5 DBS3900 This section describes cabinets/racks, cabinet/rack applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, and cable connections for a DBS3900.
2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 A DBS3900 is a distributed base station, which is composed of cabinets (such as IBC10, APM30H series cabinets, TMC11H series cabinets, IBBS series cabinets, OMB series cabinets, and IMB03) and racks (such as IFS06 and INS12). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinets and Racks Huawei provides various types of cabinets and racks to meet different requirements for power distribution, module configurations, and spaces for customer equipment in a DBS3900. The following table lists cabinets and racks supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910. Table 2-78 Cabinets and racks supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 Cabinet/ Rack Type
Cabinet/Rack Name
Cabinet/Rack Description
Cabinet/Rack Configuration
APM30H( 1) series cabinets
l APM30H (Ver.B)
APM30H series cabinets supply AC power to components in the cabinet and other cabinets.
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.B).
l APM30H (Ver.C) l APM30H (Ver.D) l APM30H(Ver.E )
TMC11H( 2) series cabinets
l TMC11H (Ver.B) l TMC11H (Ver.C) l TMC11H (Ver.D) l TMC11H (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.E).
TMC11H series cabinets can be used as a power cabinet to supply DC power to components in the cabinet or can be used as a transmission cabinet to provide space for transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).
247
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet/ Rack Type
Cabinet/Rack Name
Cabinet/Rack Description
Cabinet/Rack Configuration
IBBS(3) series cabinets
l IBBS700D or IBBS700T
IBBS series cabinets are battery cabinets, providing backup power for a base station.
l For details, see 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700Dand 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T.
l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B).
l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C).
l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D).
l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E)
l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).
l IBBS300D (Ver.A) or IBBS300T (Ver.A)
l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Dsand 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts.
l IBBS20D(9) (Ver.A) l IBBS20L(10)
l For details, see 3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D. l For details, see 3.11 IBBS20L Description.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
OMB(4) series cabinets
l OMB
IMB03(5)
IMB03
l OMB (Ver.C)
OMB series cabinets are used in outdoor distributed base stations to provide AC and DC power.
For details, see 3.17.2 Components in OMBs.
An IMB03 is a mini cabinet used in an indoor distributed base station to provide AC and DC power.
For details, see 3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet/ Rack Type
Cabinet/Rack Name
Cabinet/Rack Description
Cabinet/Rack Configuration
IFS06(6)
IFS06
l An IFS06 is indoor floormounted rack, which applies to centralized RRU installation scenarios.
l For details about the components in an IFS06, see 3.19.2 Components of an IFS06.
l The combination of an IMB03 and an IFS06, which is called indoor centralized rack (ICR), can support the centralized installation of a distributed base station. 19-inch rack
IBC10(8)
l INS12(7) l 19-inch rack provided by a customer
IBC10
l For details about the components and configurations of an ICR, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
An INS12 can provide an installation space of 12 U high for 19inch wide equipment.
For details, see 3.20.2 Components of an INS12.
An IBC10 supplies DC power to components in itself and other cabinets.
For details, see 3.22.2 Components in IBC10s.
The following table lists devices supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A. Table 2-79 Devices supported by a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Device Type
Device Name
Device Introduction
Device Description
Battery cabinet
IBBS20D(9) (Ver.A) (shortened to IBBS20D in this section)
It is a directventilation battery cabinet, which provides backup power.
For details, see 3.10 IBBS20D Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Device Type
Device Name
Device Introduction
Device Description
Power backup module
l IBBS20L(10)
It is an integrated power backup module using a lithium battery, which provides backup power.
l For details about an IBBS20L, see 3.11 IBBS20L Description.
Power module
l IBBS20L-E
l OPM15M l OPM50M l OPM30M
It is an outdoor power module, which converts external input power into -48 V DC power and distributes the DC power to BBUs and RRUs.
l For details about an IBBS20L-E, see 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual. l For details about an OPM15M, see OPM15M User Guide. l For details about an OPM50M, see OPM50M User Guide. l For details about an OPM30M, see OPM30M User Guide.
NOTE
(1) APM30H: Advanced power module with heat exchanger (2) TMC11H: Transmission cabinet with heat exchanger (3) IBBS200T/IBBS300T/IBBS700T: Integrated battery backup system with TEC; IBBS200D/ IBBS300D/IBBS700D: Integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation (4) OMB is short for outdoor mini box. (5) IMB03 is short for indoor mini box 03. (6) IFS06 is short for indoor floor installation support 06. (7) INS12 is short for indoor normal support 12. (8) IBC10 is short for indoor BBU cabinet 10. (9) IBBS20D is short for integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation. (10) IBBS20L is short for integrated battery backup system with lithium batteries.
APM30H and TMC11H The following figure shows the exteriors of an APM30H series cabinet and a TMC11H series cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-158 Exteriors of an APM30H and a TMC11H
IBBS700D and IBBS700T The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS700D and an IBBS700T. Figure 2-159 Exteriors of an IBBS700D and an IBBS700T
IBBS200D and IBBS200T The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-160 Exteriors of an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T
IBBS300D and IBBS300T The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS300D (Ver.A) and an IBBS300T (Ver.A). IBBS300D (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300D and IBBS300T (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300T in this section. Figure 2-161 Exteriors of an IBBS300D and an IBBS300T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
IBBS20D The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20D. Figure 2-162 Exterior of an IBBS20D
IBBS20L and IBBS20L-E The following figures show the exteriors of an IBBS20L and an IBBS20L-E. Figure 2-163 Exterior of an IBBS20L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-164 Exterior of an IBBS20L-E
OMB and OMB (Ver.C) The following figure shows the exteriors of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C). Figure 2-165 Exteriors of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C)
IMB03, IFS06, and INS12 The following figure shows the exteriors of an IMB03, an IFS06, and an INS12.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-166 Exteriors of an IMB03, an IFS06, and an INS12
IBC10 The following figure shows the exterior of an IBC10. Figure 2-167 Exterior of an IBC10
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
2.5.2 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 (Using a BBU3900 or BBU3910) This section describes application scenarios of the DBS3900 that uses a BBU3900 or BBU3910 as well as different types of cabinets, including the outdoor installation scenarios with AC power supply, outdoor installation scenarios with DC power supply, indoor installation scenarios with AC power supply, and indoor installation scenarios with DC power supply.
Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where BBUs are installed outdoors and a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Table 2-80 BBU installation scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E)
BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to the RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E)
APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)
BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to the RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B)
The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The same configuration principles apply to the DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), which uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.
TP48600A
The BBU is installed in a TP48600A, and RRUs are installed remotely. The TP48600A supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a TP48600A
OMB
The BBU is installed in an OMB, and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB
OMB (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C), and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
Cabinet Configuration Principles for a DBS3900 The general configuration principles for a DBS3900 are as follows: l
When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.E), a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 21 RRUs. When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.D), a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 15 RRUs. When being configured with Ver.D and Ver.E cabinets, a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 15 RRUs. When being configured with an OMB, a DBS3900 supports only one RRU. When being configured with an OMB (Ver.C), a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 6 RRUs. When being configured with other cabinets, a DBS3900 supports a maximum of 12 RRUs.
l
During initial deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and the auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet, if required, are positioned on the left. During capacity expansion, unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of the original cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The configuration principles for a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an APM30H are as follows: l
An APM30H can be installed side by side with only one TMC11H or stacked on a maximum of two IBBS200Ds, IBBS200Ts, IBBS300Ds, or IBBS300Ts. (An IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T can be stacked on another cabinet of the same type.)
l
An APM30H or TMC11H can be installed on the ground or stacked on an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
l
An APM30H (Ver.D) can be installed side by side with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.
l
If both a battery cabinet and a transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
The configuration principles for a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A are as follows: l
A TP48600A can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) side by side.
l
A TP48600A can be installed together with an IBB300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T side by side.
Restrictions on the cabinet configurations in a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) l
If a Ver.E cabinet is installed on a Ver.D base, the cabling capability at the bottom of the Ver.E cabinet is the same as that of a Ver.D cabinet.
l
If an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a Ver.D battery cabinet, the power distribution capability of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
l
If an APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to a Ver.E battery cabinet, the power backup and monitoring capabilities of the Ver.E battery cabinet are the same as those of a Ver.D battery cabinet.
Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 l
When a DBS3900 is configured with an APM or TMC series cabinet and a TP48600A, the DBS3900 can be a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station. When a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB series cabinet, the DBS3900 can be only a singleor dual-mode base station.
l
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the basic cabinet.
l
When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with one BBU, the BBU is installed in the basic cabinet.
l
When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
–
If two BBUs are configured during initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H, and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
–
If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) An APM30H that is installed side by side with or stacked on a Ver.E cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 21 RRUs. The following table lists the mapping between the number of RRUs and power equipment. Table 2-81 Mapping between the number of RRUs and power equipment Number of RRUs
Power Equipment
Description
1st to 6th RRUs
EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 (LOAD9 to LOAD14 ports)
-
7th to 15th RRUs
3 PDU03D-02s
One PDU03D-02 can supply power to three RRUs.
16th to 21th RRUs
1 PDU01D-01+1 ODM
One PDU01D-01 and one ODM can be used together to supply power to six RRUs.
NOTE
For details about BBU installation in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station, see Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900. The following figures use a base station configured with two BBUs as an example.
If being installed together with a Ver.D cabinet, an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. For details about cabinet configurations, see BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D). When backup power is not required in a base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-168 Cabinet configurations when backup power is not required
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When backup power is required in a base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-169 Cabinet configurations when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-170 Cabinet configurations when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-82 Cabinet configurations Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 ODM
Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
Single BBU: ≤ 6 U
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T +1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM
≤ 21 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM
Two BBUs: ≤ 4 U APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U Single BBU: ≤ 6 U Two BBUs: ≤ 4 U
APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s/ IBBS300D s/ IBBS300T s initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) NOTE
APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.
Single- or dual-mode base station An APM30H can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H. When a base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM and an OFD must be configured. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When backup power is not required in a single- or dual-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-171 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-172 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-173 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-174 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-83 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Custom er Equipm ent
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
≤4U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Require ment
APM30H s and IBBS200 Ds/ IBBS200 Ts initially configure d on a 1:1 ratio
l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 200Ds / IBBS 200Ts / IBBS 300Ds / IBBS 300Ts initiall y config ured
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Space for Custom er Equipm ent
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 15 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤4U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤4U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 15 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
≤4U
≤ 12 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Custom er Equipm ent
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
on a 1:2 ratio l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 700Ds / IBBS 700Ts initiall y config ured on a 1:1 ratio
≤4U
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 15 U
≤ 12 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T
≤ 15 U
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
NOTE
When APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio and more than six RRUs are configured, ensure that two or more 100 Ah battery packs are configured in each IBBS200D/ IBBS200T to avoid over current of a single battery pack.
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l
If two BBUs are configured during initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H, and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
l
If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure. When backup power is not required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-175 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-176 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-177 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-178 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-84 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤2U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 13 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Require ment
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤2U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 13 U
≤ 15 RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD
l APM30 Hs and IBBS2 00Ds/ IBBS2 00Ts/ IBBS3 00Ds/ IBBS3 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:2 ratio
≤2U
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
≤ 13 U
l APM30 Hs and IBBS7 00Ds/ IBBS7 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:1 ratio
≤ 15 RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) NOTE
APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.C) are shortened to TMC11H.
Single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When backup power is not required in a single- or dual-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-179 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-180 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-181 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can be connected to a maximum of 6 RRUs with 6 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 12 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-85 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Backup Power Requir ement
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configurati on
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Ts initially configur ed on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Ts initially configur ed on a 1:2 ratio
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 16 U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
≤ 12 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 23 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H on the left, and BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H on the right.
l
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When backup power is not required in a triple-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-182 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is not required
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-183 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-184 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-86 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configuratio n
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backup power
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
APM30Hs and IBBS200D
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Power Supply
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipme nt
Carrier Configuratio n
Cabinet Configuration
s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts
≤ 21 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
BBU Installed in a TP48600A Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with one BBU. A TP48600A provides power to a maximum of 12 RRUs. When no battery cabinet is configured initially in a single- or dual-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-185 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no battery cabinet is configured initially
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-186 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-187 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a single- or dual-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-188 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-87 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
TP48600As and IBBS700Ds /IBBS700Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment, and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under BBU 0.
l
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.
When no battery cabinet is configured initially in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-189 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with 48 V 300 Ah backup power
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-190 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-191 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
When backup power is required in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-192 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is required and TP48600As and IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-88 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No battery cabinet is configured initially.
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Backup Power Requirem ent
Space for Customer Equipmen t
Carrier Configura tion
Cabinet Configuration
TP48600As and IBBS700Ds /IBBS700Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS300T/ IBBS300D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
TP48600As and IBBS300Ds /IBBS300Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio
≤5U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds
≤ 16 U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
BBU Installed in an OMB Each OMB configured in a DBS3900 can supply power only to one RRU. RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configurations of a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an OMB are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-193 Cabinet configurations of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) Each OMB configured in a DBS3900 can supply power to six RRUs. RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, U-steel, or angle steel. The cabinet configurations of a DBS3900 in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-194 Cabinet configurations of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
If OMBs are configured and backup power is required in a DBS3900, each OMB can be configured together with one or two IBBS20Ds to supply power to three RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-195 Cabinet configurations of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and backup power is required
Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied with DC power. Table 2-89 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 2-89 BBU installation scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.E)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.E) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E)
TMC11H (Ver.D)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The same configuration principles are used for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.B)
The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), which uses a TMC11H (Ver.C) as an example.
APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power
The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power
OMB
The BBU is installed in an OMB and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB
OMB (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.E), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are shortened to TMC11H.
Configuration Principles of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 For details, see Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900.
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a base station are shown in the following figure. NOTE
For details about BBU installation in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station, see Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900. The following figures use a base station configured with two BBUs as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-196 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power
The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-90 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤6U
≤ 21 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
≤ 17 U
≤ 21 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs (with three DCDUs)
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-197 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A TMC11H can be connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are listed in the following table. Table 2-91 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤9U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
≤8U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l
In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
l
In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input). Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBU is shown by BBU 0 in the following figure. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-198 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are listed in the following table. Table 2-92 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤6U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
≤ 17 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs (with three DCDUs)
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-199 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A TMC11H can be connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are listed in the following table. Table 2-93 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤9U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
≤8U
≤ 12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l
When two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured, BBU 0 is installed in the basic TMC11H, which is on the left; BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H, which is on the right.
l
When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBU is shown by BBU 0 in the following figure.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure and are listed in the following table.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-200 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power
Table 2-94 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configuration
Cabinet Configuration
-48 V DC
≤ 18 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station are shown in the following figure and table. Figure 2-201 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with +24 V DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-95 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configurati on
Cabinet Configuration
+24 V DC
≤5U
≤ 6 RRUs
1 APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure and are listed in the following table. Figure 2-202 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with +24 V DC power
Table 2-96 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply
Space for Customer Equipment
Carrier Configurati on
Cabinet Configuration
+24 V DC
≤ 10 U
≤ 12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power
BBU Installed in an OMB In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB, an OMB supplies power to three RRUs, and the RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-203 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB (Ver.C), an OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to six RRUs, and the RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure. Figure 2-204 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-97 Installation scenarios BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Reference
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an IMB03
IFS06
The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.
For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
BBU Installed in an IMB03 When external 110 V or 220 V AC power is provided, an AC/DC power device or ETP48100B1 is required to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-205 BBU installed in an IMB03 (without backup power)
The following table lists the cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 and there is no backup power. Table 2-98 Cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 (without backup power) Power Supply
Cabinet and Module Configuration
110 V/220 V
1 IMB03+1 AC/DC power device+1 RRU 1 IMB03+1 ETP48100-B1+3 RRUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 2-99 Installation scenario BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Reference
19-inch rack
19-inch racks consist of the INS12 rack provided by Huawei and the 19-inch rack provided by the customer.
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
The BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed in a 19-inch rack indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Wall
The BBU and DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed on a wall indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.
BBU Installed on a Wall
Indoor
The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power only to the RRUs and monitors only the RRUs.
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely outdoors. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.
For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Reference
IBC10
The BBU is installed in an IBC10. The DCDU-12C supplies power to the BBU.
BBU Installed in an IBC10
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station. Figure 2-206 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. A triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station can also be configured with one BBU, and the cabinet configurations in this scenario are the same as those in the preceding figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-207 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station
BBU Installed on a Wall When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-208 BBU installed on a wall
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H) When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H(Ver.E). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
(Ver.D), or APM30H(Ver.E) can be supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. The following figure shows the installation scenarios. Figure 2-209 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors
BBU Installed in an IMB03 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-210 BBU installed in an IMB03
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
BBU Installed in an IBC10 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IBC10, which supplies power to the BBU and USU (Universal Switching Unit), as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-211 BBU installed in an IBC10
2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A This section describes outdoor AC and DC scenarios for a DBS3900 using a BBU3910A.
Outdoor AC Installation Scenario This section describes the outdoor AC installation scenario of a DBS3900. This following table describes the outdoor AC installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-100 Installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A BBU Installation Position
Scenario
On a pole or wall
The BBU and OPM50M are installed on a pole or wall, RRUs are remotely installed, and the OPM50M supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
The following table describes the configurations of a base station with different requirements for backup power capacities and carrier configurations. Table 2-101 Configurations of a DBS3900 Power Supply
Back up Powe r Capac ity
Carrie r Config uratio n
Base Station Configuration
Illustration
110 V AC or 220 V AC
No backu p power
3 RRUs
1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs
Figure 2-212
6 RRUs
2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs
3 RRUs
1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs+1 IBBS20D
6 RRUs
2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs+2 IBBS20Ds
3 RRUs
1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs+2 IBBS20Ds
6 RRUs
2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs+4 IBBS20Ds
The numbe r of OPM5 0Ms must be the same as that of IBBS2 0Ds. The numbe r of IBBS2 0Ds is twice as that of OPM5 0Ms.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Figure 2-213
308
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following figure shows the application scenario of a DBS3900 when no backup power is required. Figure 2-212 Application scenario of a DBS3900 (without backup power)
The following figure shows the application scenario of a DBS3900 when backup power is required. Figure 2-213 Application scenario of a DBS3900 (with backup power)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Outdoor DC Installation Scenario This section describes the outdoor DC installation scenario of a DBS3900. This following table describes the outdoor DC installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A. Table 2-102 Installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A BBU Installation Position
Scenario
On a pole or wall
The BBU and RRUs are installed on a pole or wall. The DCDU is installed in a thirdparty cabinet to supply DC power to the BBU and RRUs.
The following table describes the configurations of a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-103 Configurations of a DBS3900 Power Supply
Base Station Configuration
Illustration
-48 V DC
l 1 BBU3910A+3 RRUs
Figure 2-214
l 1 BBU3910A+6 RRUs
Figure 2-214 Application Scenario of a DBS3900
2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 configured with different types of cabinets using a BBU3900 or BBU3910. If the Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets used by a DBS3900. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets used by a DBS3900. The following table describe the configuration of the upper-level circuit breakers when the BBU is powered by the customer equipment. Table 2-104 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V
1 x 20 A/1 P
2 x 2.5 mm2
≤ 15 m
When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 2-105 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x50 A/1 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x50 A/2 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.C). Table 2-106 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.C) Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A/2 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with +24 V DC power and using the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 2-107 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
2x100A/1P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
1x160 A/1 P
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) and having the peak power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 2-108 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
When more than six RRUs are configured, a new DCDU-11B is required.
In an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power, a heater must be installed in a TMC11H, and one more AC input must be added. The following table describes the configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the heater. Table 2-109 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a heater
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.D). Table 2-110 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x40 A/3 P
6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x100 A/2 P
When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) and having the peak output power.
AC Input NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-111 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) Power Supply
Number of PSUs
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
4 or 5
1x40 A/3 P (by default)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
2 or 3
1x25 A/3 P (by default)
Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)
5
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/2 P
3
1x63 A/2 P
5
1x100 A/2 P (by default)
4
1x80 A/2 P
3
1x63 A/2 P
220 V AC single-phase
110 V/120 V AC dual-livewire
Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) and having the peak power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 2-112 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 or 2 BBUs l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables 16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs l 12 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
2x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), four groups of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Length of the Input Power Cable
324
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
l
When more than six RRUs are configured, a new DCDU-12B is required.
When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.E) and having the peak power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.E). Table 2-113 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.E) Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/2 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/2 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35mm2(0.054 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 2 BBUs
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W) l 0 or 1 BBU
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 0 or 1 BBU
l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 2 BBUs l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W) l 0 or 1 BBU l 3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W) l 0 or 1 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
When the BBU Is Installed in the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input Table 2-114 and Table 2-115 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the OMB and OMB (Ver.C). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-114 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Table 2-115 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB (Ver.C) Power Supply
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC single-phase
1 PSU
20 A/1 P
2 PSUs
32 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC duallive-wire
1 PSU
20 A/2 P
2 PSUs
32 A/2 P
DC Input Table 2-116 and Table 2-117 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the OMB and OMB (Ver.C). Table 2-116 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A, maximum: 1x80 A (all using the level-1 magnetic blast breaker)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-117 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB (Ver.C) Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
50 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
80 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)
63 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
125 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
80 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
Length of the Input Power Cable
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
When the BBU Is Installed in the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack, or Wall This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using an IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch rack, or wall and having the peak output power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input Table 2-118 and Table 2-119 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a DBS3900 that uses an IMB03 and is supplied with AC input power. Table 2-118 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and using an EPS30-4815AF Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x10 A
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
Table 2-119 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and using an ETP48100-B1 Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 PSU
1x20 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
2 PSUs
1x32 A/1 P
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 PSU
1x20 A/2 P
2 PSUs
1x32 A/2 P
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the IMB03+IFS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-120 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06 and using an EPS4890 Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x16 A/3 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
220 V AC singlephase
1x32 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x32 A/2 P
DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the BBU is powered by the customer equipment. Table 2-121 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the BBU is powered by the customer equipment Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x20A/1P
2.5mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤15m
Table 2-122, Table 2-123, and Table 2-124 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with the IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. Table 2-122 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-03B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A/1 P, maximum: 1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-123 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-11B Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-124 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-12B Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Product Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x100 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables 16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)
Length of the Input Power Cable
2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), one group of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs l 12 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables
2x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables
4x80 A/1 P (by default)
16 mm2(0.025 in.2), four groups of DC input power cables
l 1 or 2 BBUs
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the IMB03+IFS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-125 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the IMB03+IFS06 Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
+24 V DC
2x100 A/1 P
25 mm2(0.039 in.2)
1x160 A/1 P
When the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TP48600A and having the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the AC-powered TP48600A. Table 2-126 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC three-phase
7 PSUs+1 SOU
63 A/3 P (recommended)
10 mm2(0.016 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU
40 A/3 P
4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU
63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P (recommended)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/1 P
220 V AC single-phase
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
110 V AC duallive-wire
Product Configuration
Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker
6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU
100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P (recommended)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/2 P
CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
35 mm2(0.054 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
When the BBU Is Installed in the IBC10 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the IBC10 which has the peak output power. NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A This section describes configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.
AC Input In AC power scenarios, an OPM50M is configured to provide power for the BBU and RRUs. The following table lists configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-127 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC power scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Requirement for the Circuit Breaker on Customer Equipment
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x20 A
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
100 m (328.09 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
DC Input In DC power scenarios, a DCDU-12B is configured to provide power for the BBU and RRUs. The following table lists configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables. Table 2-128 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC power scenarios Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables
l 1 BBU
Length of the Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU
l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Component Configuration(1)(4)
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)
l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)
1x100 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables
2x63 A/1 P
16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables
l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU
Length of the Input Power Cable
l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, RRU3839, or RRU3958.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W or is equal to 400 W: RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3229, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3240, RRU3961, RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3232, RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3952, RRU3259, RRU3262, RRU3952m, RRU3251, RRU3232, RRU3959, or RRU3959w.
l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953, RRU3953w, RRU3261, RRU3269, RRU3971, RRU3249, or RRU3939.
(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l
The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.
l
The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.
(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l
Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
l
Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
l
Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.
(4) The actual configurations are as follows: l
When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
l
If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.
l
When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.
2.5.6 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 This section describes the power distribution scheme for the DBS3900 in different power supply scenarios when a BBU3900 or BBU3910 is used. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets, the power distribution scheme for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets used by a DBS3900 site. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets, the power distribution scheme for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) cabinets used by a DBS3900 site.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and +24 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPS (EPS 01B or EPS 01D) or EPU (EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05) in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPS or EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other equipment. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-215 and Figure 2-216 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-129 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-215 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-216 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios
Table 2-129 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x16 A (MCB(1))
l Heater and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT(2): 1x100 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RRU: 6x20 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2x15 A (FUSE) l TEC(4): 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM(5): 4x15 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TEC: Thermoelectric cooler in an IBBS200T (5) TM: Transmission equipment
Figure 2-217 and Figure 2-218 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-130 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-217 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-218 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios
Table 2-130 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
3x20 A (MCB)
l Heater and SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1x160 A (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x63 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x15 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)
l RRU: 6x25 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x30 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x25 A (FUSE) l TEC: 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x15 A (FUSE)
When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-219 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-131 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
Transmission cabinet
l TM: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-220 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-132 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
Transmission cabinet
l TM: 2x6 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB) +5x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses +24 V DC power supply, the EPS24S48100DC in the APM30H (Ver.B) converts the +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power, which is then provided to DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, transmission equipment, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-221 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios. Table 2-133 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-222 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-134 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
TMC11H (Ver.B)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB(1)) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM(2): 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
NOTE
(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) TM: Transmission equipment
When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-223 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-135 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
TMC11H (Ver.C)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l BBU or TM: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D) This section describes the power distribution scheme fora DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) in 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).
l
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided forthe heater or heating film.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other equipment. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-224 and Figure 2-225 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-136 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-224 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-225 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 110 V AC dual-livewire scenarios
Table 2-136 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase
2x40 A+1x25 A
Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1x125 A/2 P (MCB)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x100 A
Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC: 1x125 A (MCB) l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC: 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-226 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-137 Specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
TMC11H (Ver.D) serving as a transmission cabinet
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) in 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios If 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 in a cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the DC power to other components. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
2 3900 Series Base Stations
One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other devices. NOTE
The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.
Figure 2-227 and Figure 2-228 show the power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-138 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-227 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-228 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.E) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-138 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H (Ver.E) in AC scenarios Power Supply
Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase power
2x40 A+1x25 A
Heater or SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l LOAD9 to LOAD14: 6x30 A (FUSE)
110 V AC dual-livewire power
1x100 A
l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)
l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)
l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC: 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x30 A (FUSE) l RRU (slot7): 3x30 A (FUSE) l RRU (slot 8): 3x30 A (FUSE) l RRU (slot 9): 3x30 A (FUSE)
When An APM30H (Ver.E) uses an AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to a transmission cabinet. The DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-229 Power distribution scheme for a transmission cabinet in AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in a transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-139 Specifications of the fuses in a transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
TMC11H (Ver.E) serving as a transmission cabinet
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-12B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-230 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-140 Specifications of the fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet
Specifications of the DC Output Fuse
TMC11H (Ver.D)/ TMC11H (Ver.E) serving as a power cabinet
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power by the ETP48150-A3 and distributed to other components in the OMB. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-231 Power distribution scheme for the OMB in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-141 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU&HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A
When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power by the ETP48100-A1 power equipment and distributed to other components in the OMB (Ver.C). The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Figure 2-232 Power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-142 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB (Ver.C) Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB (Ver.C)
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE(1)) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
NOTE
(1) FUSE: Fuse
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power supply, the DC power distribution box distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-233 Power distribution scheme for the OMB in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-143 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB
-48 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios. Figure 2-234 Power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-144 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB (Ver.C) Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
OMB (Ver.C)
-48 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-Inch Rack, or Wall This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch rack, or wall in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply is used, the EPS30-4815AF in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in a DBS3900 using only the IMB03 in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios. Figure 2-235 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 configured with an EPS30-4815AF in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-145 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A
When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply is used, the ETP48100-B1 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in a DBS3900 using only the IMB03 in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios. Figure 2-236 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 configured with an ETP48100-B1 in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-146 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire
l RRU: 1x30 A l SPARE: 2x30 A l BBU: 1x30 A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios When -48 V DC power supply is used, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in Figure 2-237, Figure 2-238, and Figure 2-239. Figure 2-237 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-03B is configured
Figure 2-238 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-11B is configured
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-239 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-12B is configured
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-147 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario
Power Supply
Power Equipment
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, wall, or 19-inch rack
-48 V DC
DCDU-03B
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
DCDU-11B
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l BBU or TM: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Application Scenario
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Supply
Power Equipment
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output
DCDU-12B
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 configured with IMB03+IFS06 uses +24 V DC power supply, the EPS24S48100DC in the IMB03 converts the +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power, which is then provided to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03. Figure 2-240 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 in +24 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-148 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03 in +24 V DC scenarios Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
IMB03+IFS06
+24 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TP48600A in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. When the TP48600A uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the PDU05A-03 divides the AC power and the ETP converts the AC power into DC power. Then the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to the BBU, RRUs, transmission equipment, and other components. The PDU05A-03 divided one AC input into five AC outputs. l
One AC output is connected to the AC junction box on the right inner wall of the cabinet, and divided into four AC outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.
l
Three AC outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs to DC power outputs, which are then provided to the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B, storage batteries, and other components.
l
One AC output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 2-241 shows the power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 2-242 shows the power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-03B is used. Table 2-149 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios. To support different types of power supply, the power input terminals need to be connected to different short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 2-243.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-241 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-11B is used
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-242 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-03B is used
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Table 2-149 Specifications of the circuit breakers Power Distribution Device
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
PDU05A-03
l PSU1/5: 1x40 A
-
l PSU2/6: 1x40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A l HEATER: 1x25 A l SOU: 1x10 A ETP
-
l DCDU-11C: LOAD0 (1x100 A) l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B: LOAD3 (1x200 A) and LOAD5 (1x200 A) l TMC11H (Ver.C): LOAD1 (1x100 A) and LOAD2 (1x100 A) l Storage battery: LOAD6 (1x400 A) l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200 A)
DCDU-11C
-
l CCU: LOAD0 (1x6 A) l CMUF: LOAD1 (1x6 A) l TM(1): LOAD2 (1x12 A) l EMUA or TM: LOAD3 (1x12 A) l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7 (4x25 A) l CMUF: LOAD8 (1x25 A) l IBBS: LOAD9 (1x25 A)
DCDU-11B
-
l RRUs: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6x25 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD9 (4x25 A)
DCDU-03B
-
l RRUs: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6x20 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD8 (3x12 A)
NOTE
(1) TM: Transmission equipment
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-243 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IBC10 This section describes power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the IBC10 in -48 V DC scenarios.
2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.
AC Input When AC power is supplied, the power is fed into an SPM60A for surge protection and then into an OPM50M. The OPM50M converts AC power into DC power and then supplies it to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with AC power.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-244 Power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with AC power
The following table lists specifications of fuses in the OPM50M. Table 2-150 Specifications of fuses in the OPM50M Power Supply
Specifications of a Fuse
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC duallive-wire
l BBU3910A: 1x30 A (FUSE) l RRU: 3x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE)
DC Input When DC power is supplied, it is fed into the DCDU-12B, which then provides power for the BBU, RRUs, and other devices, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-245 Power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with DC power
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
The following table lists specifications of fuses in the DCDU-12B. Table 2-151 Specifications of fuses in the DCDU-12B Power Supply
Specifications of a Fuse
-48 V DC
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)
2.5.8 Cable Connections in a DBS3900 This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cable connections in a DBS3900. For cable connections in a DBS3900, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. The following table lists the links to these topics. Table 2-152 Cable connections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
APM30 H (Ver.B) or APM30 H (Ver.C)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Transmissio n Cable Connections
Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connectio ns
CPRI Cable Connection s
APM30 H (Ver.D)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
APM30 H (Ver.E)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E)
TMC11 H (Ver.B) or TMC11 H (Ver.C)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)
TMC11 H (Ver.D)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D)
Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11 H (Ver.E)
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.E)
Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.E)
OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using an OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using an OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
381
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
TP4860 0A
Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
IBC10
Power Cable Connections in an IBC10 Used by a DBS3900
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in an IBC10 Used by a DBS3900
Transmissi on Cable Connection s
Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons
CPRI Cable Connectio ns
2.6 BTS3900C This section describes cabinets, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900C.
2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C The BTS3900C, an outdoor compact mini base station, is classified into BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C), in terms of cabinet versions. The following table lists cabinets supported by a BTS3900C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet
This cabinet is used in UMTS scenarios and consists of an OMB and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet can be supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.
For specific components of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet, see components of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet in Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC Cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cabinet
Cabinet Description
Components of a Cabinet
BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet
This cabinet is used in UMTS or multimode scenarios and consists of an OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C cabinet can be supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.
For specific components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, see components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet in Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC Cabinet.
The following figure shows the exteriors of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. Figure 2-246 Exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets
2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900C WCDMA and a BTS3900C (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C WCDMA This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900C WCDMA which has the peak output power. NOTE
l Power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900C is supplied with AC power. Table 2-153 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
10 A/1 P
2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)
≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
DC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900C is supplied with DC power. Table 2-154 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC scenarios Power Supply
Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker
Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
16 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (590.55 ft)
Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured base station which has the peak output power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
NOTE
l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
AC Scenario The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for an AC-powered BTS3900C. Table 2-155 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers
Cross-sectional Area of an Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1x20 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1x20 A/2 P
DC Scenario The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a DC-powered BTS3900C. Table 2-156 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC scenario Power Supply
Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers
Cross-sectional Area of an Input Power Cable
Length of the Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x32 A/1 P
4 mm2(0.006 in.2)
≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)
2.6.3 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900C WCDMA and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) supplied with different power.
Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C WCDMA This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the EPS30-4815AF in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. Figure 2-247 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power. Table 2-157 Specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC duallive-wire
l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A
Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied, the DC power distribution box in the cabinet distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-248 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios
The following table lists the specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-158 Specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply
Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output
-48 V DC
l RRU: 1x20 A l BBU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x12 A l FAN: 1x12 A
Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900C (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900C supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.
Power Distribution Scheme in a 110 V or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When a BTS3900C is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC, the ETP48100-A1 in the OMB converts the one AC input into two DC outputs. Figure 2-249 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power, and Table 2-159 lists the specifications of fuses in it. NOTE
When 220 V AC single-phase power is used, the live wire must be connected to a circuit breaker.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-249 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with 220 V or 110 V AC power
Table 2-159 The specifications of fuses for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power. Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Fuses
220 V AC single-phase
l RRU:1x30 A
110 V AC dual-live-wire
l BBU:1x30 A l FAN:1x30 A l SPARE:1x30 A
Power Distribution Scheme in a -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario When a BTS3900C cabinet is supplied with -48 V DC power, the PDU10D-01 in the OMB converts the one DC input into several DC outputs and distributes the DC power to modules such as the BBU, HEUB, and RRU. Figure 2-249 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power, and Table 2-160 lists the specifications of fuses in the base station.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Figure 2-250 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power
Table 2-160 Fuse specifications for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply
Specifications of DC Output Fuses
-48 V DC
l RRU:1x30 A l BBU:1x30 A l FAN:1x30 A l SPARE:1x30 A
2.6.4 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900C This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900C.
Cable List For cables in a BTS3900C, see the following sections: l
BTS3900C WCDMA: BTS3900C WCDMA Cable List
l
BTS3900C (Ver.C): BTS3900C (Ver.C) Cable List
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
2 3900 Series Base Stations
Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900C, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-161 Cable connections
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Base Station
Power Cable Connections
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections
Transmission Cable Connections
BTS3900C WCDMA
Power cable connections in a BTS3900C WCDMA
Monitoring signal cable connections in a BTS3900C WCDMA
Transmission cable connections
BTS3900C (Ver.C)
Power cable connections in a BTS3900C (Ver.C)
Monitoring signal cable connections in a BTS3900C (Ver.C)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3
Cabinet Description
About This Chapter This chapter describes information about cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, including components and engineering specifications of the cabinets. 3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description The BTS3900 cabinet applies to a BTS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900 cabinets. 3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description The BTS3900L cabinet applies to a BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900L cabinets. 3.3 RFC Description The RFC applies to a BTS3900A. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of RFCs. 3.4 APM30H Description The APM30H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of APM30Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.5 TMC11H Description The TMC11H applies to a BTS3900A, DBS3900, or BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.6 IBBS200D Description The IBBS200D applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds. 3.7 IBBS200T Description The IBBS200T applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts. 3.8 IBBS300D Description The IBBS300D applies to a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300D. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.9 IBBS300T Description An IBBS300T applies to the BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300T. 3.10 IBBS20D Description An IBBS20D applies to the DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, configuration, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20D. 3.11 IBBS20L Description An IBBS20L can be used in a DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20L. 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual IBBS20L-E provides power backup for communications devices so that power can be supplied to communications devices when no power inputs to power modules are available. This ensures normal service running and stable power supply. This manual describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of IBBS20L-E. 3.13 IBBS700D Description The IBBS700D applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700D. 3.14 IBBS700T Description The IBBSIBBS700T applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700T. 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description The BTS3900AL cabinet applies to a BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of BTS3900AL cabinets, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description There are two types of BTS3900C cabinets: BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet and BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of two types of BTS3900C cabinets. 3.17 OMB Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of OMBs. 3.18 IMB03 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IMB03s. 3.19 IFS06 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an IFS06. 3.20 INS12 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an INS12. 3.21 IMS06 Description The IMS06 applies to a BTS3900 or BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IMS06. 3.22 IBC10 Description This section describes the cabinet configuration and engineering specifications of an IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description The BTS3900 cabinet applies to a BTS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900 cabinets.
3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s The BTS3900 cabinets are vertical cabinets, which are designed in compliance with the IEC297 standard.
Exteriors The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D). NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet have the same exteriors as a BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet, respectively, whereas a BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet has a different exterior from a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Cabinet exteriors
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D). NOTE
A BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-2 Cabinet dimensions
3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900 cabinets.
Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Figure 3-3 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-1 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Filler panel (RFU)
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandatory
6
A radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..
3
FAN
Mandatory
1
A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the fan monitoring unit type C (FMUC), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel (air intake vent)
Mandatory
1
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
DCDU01
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-01 distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
7
Transmi ssion equipme nt
Optional
-
A 2 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.
8
EPS24S 48100D C
Mandatory
1
An EPS24S48100DC converts external +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
9
EPS489 0
Mandatory
1
An EPS4890 converts 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC threephase power, or 110 V AC dual-livewire power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01.
NOTE
The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.
Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet. Figure 3-4 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-2 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Filler panel (RFU)
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandatory
6
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
3
FAN 03B
Mandatory
1
A FAN 03B dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03B is configured with the fan monitoring unit type E (FMUE), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel (air intake vent)
Mandatory
1
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
DCDU11A
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-11A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
7
Transmi ssion equipme nt
Optional
-
A 3 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
8
ETP481 50-A3
Mandatory
1
An ETP48150-A3 converts 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC threephase power, or 110 V AC dual-livewire power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A.
NOTE
The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.
Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. Figure 3-5 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-3 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Filler panel (RFU)
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandatory
6
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
3
FAN 03C
Mandatory
1
A FAN 03C dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03C is configured with the fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel (air intake vent)
Mandatory
1
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
BBU
Mandatory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. If there are two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space below the DCDU-12A. The BTS3900 (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
DCDU12A
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-12A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
7
BBU
Optional
-
A 2 U customer space is reserved for a BBU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module
Optional or Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
8
DCDU12B
Optional
1
If a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed in the 1 U space to feed DC power to RRUs.
9
Transmi ssion equipme nt
Optional
-
A 1 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.
10
Filler panel
Optional
-
A filler panel is installed in each vacant slot for a PSU (R4850G2).
11
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandatory
5
A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
12
PMU 11A
Mandatory
1
A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
13
EPU05 A-02 subrack
Mandatory
1
An EPU05A-02 converts 220 V AC single-phase power or 220 V AC threephase power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12A or DCDU-12B.
NOTE
The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.
3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications BTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standard.
Input Power Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have different power input specifications. Table 3-4, Table 3-5,and Table 3-6 describe the input power specifications of the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, respectively.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 cabinet, see 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-4 Input power specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
+24 V DC
+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC
120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC dual-livewire
105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC dual-livewire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Table 3-5 Input power specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC dual-livewire
105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC dual-livewire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Table 3-6 Input power specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the dimensions and weight of BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. Table 3-7 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Cabinet
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)
900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm
≤ 138 kg (including 1 BBU and 6 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment)
BTS3900 (Ver.D)
l DC: 900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm
l DC: ≤ 138 kg (including 1 BBU and 6 RFUs and excluding the AC power supply)
l AC: 1250 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (including the IMS06; base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm)
l AC: ≤ 183 kg (including 1 BBU, 6 RFUs, and the AC power supply)
Environmental Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same environmental specifications, as provided in the following table.The following table provides the environmental specifications of BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. Table 3-8 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Specifications/Standard
Operating temperature
-20°C to +55°C Short-term operation: +50°C to +55°C NOTE Short term indicates that a base station does not work for over 15 days within a year or that a base station does not continuously work for over 72 hours.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
ETS 300 753 3.1 ≤ 7.2 bels
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications/Standard
Biological environment
l The equipment room must be well-sealed and dustproof to prevent the growth of fungus or mildew. l Ensure that animals such as rodents (rats for example), ants, winged insects, or snakes cannot enter the equipment room.
Surge Protection Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 3-9.Table 3-9 provides the surge protection specifications of BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-9 Surge protection specifications of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
DC power supply port
Surge
4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
AC power supply port
Surge current
5 kA
Compliance Standards The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table.The following table provides the compliance standards for the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-10 Compliance standards for a BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)/BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Ingress Protectio n (IP) rating
IP20
Operatin g environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protectio n
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff: Vibration Time-history method
Antiearthqua ke performa nce
ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"
YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900 complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900 is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 An eNodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10
Surge protectio n
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description The BTS3900L cabinet applies to a BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900L cabinets.
3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls The BTS3900L cabinets is vertical cabinets, which are designed in compliance with the IEC297 standard.
Exteriors The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-6 Cabinet exteriors
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D). NOTE
A BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-7 Cabinet dimensions
3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900L cabinets.
Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-8 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet. Table 3-11 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
1
Filler panel
Manda tory
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Manda tory
12
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
3
FAN
Manda tory
2
A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the FMUC, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel
Manda tory
2
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
DCDU-01
Manda tory
2
A DCDU-01 distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
6
BBU
Manda tory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
7
Cable trough
Manda tory
1
-
8
BBU
Option al
1
This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.
9
Space for customer equipment
Option al
-
This 2 U space can house the GATM or transmission equipment. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-01. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.
NOTE
The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-01 cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.
Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-9 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet. Table 3-12 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet No .
Mod ule
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
1
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
2
RFU
Mandat ory
12
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Mod ule
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
3
FAN 03B
Mandat ory
2
A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the FMUE, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel
Mandat ory
2
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
DCD U-11 A
Mandat ory
2
A DCDU-11A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
6
BBU
Mandat ory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
7
Cable trough
Mandat ory
1
-
8
BBU
Option al
1
This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.
9
Space for custo mer equip ment
Option al
-
This 2 U space can house the GATM or transmission equipment. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-11A. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.
NOTE
The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-11A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.
Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-10 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. Table 3-13 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
1
Filler panel
Optio nal
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
2
RFUs
Mand atory
12
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
3
FAN 03C
Mand atory
2
A FAN 03C dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03C is configured with the FMUEA, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.
4
Filler panel
Mand atory
2
A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.
5
DCDU-12A
Mand atory
2
A DCDU-12A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet. If the cabinet is configured with more than six RFUs, two DCDU-12A modules are required.
6
BBU
Mand atory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
7
Cable trough
Mand atory
1
-
8
BBU
Optio nal
1
This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.
9
DCDU-12B
Optio nal
1
The 1 U space can house a DCDU-12B when the BTS3900L uses DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs. This DCDU-12B distributes DC power to RRUs.
10
Space for customer equipment
Optio nal
-
The 1 U space can house a GATM or a transmission device in DC input scenarios. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-12A. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.
11
IMS06
Mand atory
1
An IMS06 is used to house an EPU05A-02.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quant ity
Remarks
12
Filler panel
Optio nal
-
A filler panel is installed in each vacant slot for a PSU (R4850G2).
13
PSU (R4850G2)
Mand atory
5
A PSU (R4850G2) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
14
PMU 11A
Mand atory
1
A PMU 11A manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
15
EPU05A-02 subrack
Mand atory
1
EPU05A-02 subracks are used in separated macro base station with different AC inputs to distribute DC power into components in a cabinet.
NOTE
The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-12A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.
3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications BTS3900L engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standards.
Input Power Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided in Table 3-14. Table 3-15 provides the input power specifications of the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L cabinet, see 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-14 Input power specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-15 Input power specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
Equipment Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets have the same dimensions and weight. Table 3-16 lists the equipment specifications of BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets. Table 3-17 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. Table 3-16 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (HxWxD)
1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm
Weight
≤ 235 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs and 12 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment)
Table 3-17 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
l DC: 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm l AC: 1950 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (with IMS06; Base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm)
Weight
l DC: ≤ 241 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs and 12 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment) l AC: ≤ 286 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs, 12 RFUs, and the AC power supply, and excluding the transmission equipment)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Environmental Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same environmental specifications, as provided in the following table. Table 3-18 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C)/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Specifications/Standard
Operating temperature
-20°C to +55°C Short-term operation: +50°C to +55°C NOTE Short term indicates that a base station does not work for over 15 days within a year or that a base station does not continuously work for over 72 hours.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
ETS 300 753 3.1 ≤ 7.2 bels l The equipment room must be wellsealed and dustproof to prevent the growth of fungus or mildew.
Biological environment
l Ensure that animals such as rodents (rats for example), ants, winged insects, or snakes cannot enter the equipment room.
Surge Protection Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 3-19. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-19 Surge protection specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C)/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Specifications
DC power supply port
Surge
4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Compliance Standards The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table. Table 3-20 Compliance standards for a BTS3900L (Ver.B)/BTS3900L (Ver.C)/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Ingress Protection (IP) rating
IP20
Operating environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protection
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
Antiearthquak e performan ce
ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900L complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900L is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 An eNodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10
Surge protection
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.3 RFC Description The RFC applies to a BTS3900A. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of RFCs.
3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RFC. The following figure shows the exterior of an RFC.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-11 Exterior of an RFC
The following figure shows the dimensions of an RFC. Figure 3-12 Dimensions of an RFC
3.3.2 Components in RFCs This section describes module and board configurations in RFCs.
Components in an RFC (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.B).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-13 Components in an RFC (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.B). Table 3-21 Components in an RFC (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
DCDU-01
Mandatory
1
A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01) distributes DC power to components in an RFC.
2
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
3
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
4
FAN 01A
Mandatory
1
A FAN 01A is configured with the fans and CMUA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
5
RFU
Mandatory
6
An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..
6
Filler panel
Optional
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
Components in an RFC (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-14 Components in an RFC (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-22 Components in an RFC (Ver.C) No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
DCDU-1 1A
Mandat ory
1
A DCDU-11A distributes ten DC power outputs to components in an RFC.
2
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
3
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
4
FAN 01B
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 01B is configured with the fans and CMUE. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUE controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
5
RFU
Mandat ory
6
RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
6
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
7
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC
Mandat ory
1
A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Components in an RFC (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-15 Components in an RFC (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.D). Table 3-23 Components in an RFC (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
DCDU-1 2B
Option al
1
A DCDU-12B provides ten DC power outputs for RRUs.
2
FAN 01C
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 01C is configured with the fans and CMUEA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
4
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
5
DCDU-1 2A
Mandat ory
1
A DCDU-12A provides ten DC power outputs for all components in an RFC.
6
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
7
RFU
Mandat ory
6
RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct VSWR detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
8
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC
Mandat ory
1
A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Components in an RFC (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-16 Components in an RFC (Ver.E)
The following table describes the components in an RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-24 Components in an RFC (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
DCDU-1 2B
Option al
1
A DCDU-12B provides ten DC power outputs for RRUs in a DC scenario.
2
FAN 01D
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 01D is configured with the fans and CMUH. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUH controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
5
DCDU-1 2A
Mandat ory
1
A DCDU-12A provides ten DC power outputs for all components in an RFC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
6
Filler panel
Option al
-
To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.
7
RFU
Mandat ory
6
RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct VSWR detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.E) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..
8
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC
Mandat ory
1
A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of RFCs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an RFC. Table 3-25 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an RFC. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-26 Equipment specifications of an RFC Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E)
≤ 107 kg (235.89 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Including six RFUs
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-27 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in an RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-28 Surge protection specifications of the ports Port
-48 V DC input power port
Specifications Surge
Surge Current
l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 us)
l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 us)
3.4 APM30H Description The APM30H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of APM30Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. NOTE
l APM30H cabinets are classified into two types: APM30H AC cabinets and APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinets. An APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinet is a TMC11H cabinet, which is described in 3.5 TMC11H Description. This section only describes an APM30H AC cabinet. l Unless otherwise specified, an APM30H cabinet mentioned in this document is an APM30H AC cabinet and a TMC11H cabinet mentioned in this document is an APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinet.
3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs The advanced power module with heat exchanger (APM30H) is used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. It is small and easy to transport. The following figure shows the exteriors of APM30Hs. Figure 3-17 Exteriors of APM30Hs
The following figure shows the dimensions of an APM30H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-18 Dimensions of an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.E), or APM30H (Ver.D)
3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs This section describes module and board configurations in APM30Hs. An APM30H houses a BBU and also provides 5 U installation space for customer equipment such as the EMUA or EMUB, AC heater, and service outlet unit (SOU), which are optional.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.B). Figure 3-19 Components in an APM30H (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.B). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-29 Components in an APM30H (Ver.B) No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
FAN 02A
Mandatory
1
A FAN 02A is configured with the fans, Hert power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), and central monitoring unit type A (CMUA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandatory
2
To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP). To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
PSU (EPW30-48 A)
Mandatory
3
A power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
6
EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrackor EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack
Mandatory
1
The EPS 01 subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet. l The EPS 01A applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPS 01B applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPS 01C applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPS 01D applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.
7
BBU
Optional
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
8
GATM
Optional
2
A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.
9
EMUA/ EMUB
Optional
1
An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) or environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
10
AC Heater
Optional
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
11
SOU
Optional
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
12
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly
Mandatory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
13
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandatory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
14
PMU 01B
Mandatory
1
A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-20 Components in an APM30H (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-30 Components in an APM30H (Ver.C) No .
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02B
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02B is configured with the fans, HPMI, and central monitoring unit type E (CMUE). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
PSU (PSU485 0A)
Mandat ory
3
A PSU converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
EPU03A -02 or EPU03A -04 Subrack or EPU03A -03 or EPU03A -05 Subrack
Mandat ory
1
The EPU subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet.
BBU
Option al
7
l The EPU03A-02 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU03A-03 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU03A-04 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU03A-05 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power. 1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
8
GATM
Option al
2
A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to the RET, and monitors the feeder current.
9
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
10
Filler module
Option al
3
A filler module is a standard plastic component with a height of 1 U. A filler module is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet. Before installing other modules, remove the filler module.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
11
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
12
SOU
Option al
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
13
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
14
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
15
PMU 01B
Mandat ory
1
A PMU 01B manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-21 Components in an APM30H (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.D). Table 3-31 Components in an APM30H (Ver.D) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulatio n Assembly
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
3
FAN 02D
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02D is configured with the fans and central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
4
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
5
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
EPU05A-0 2 or EPU05A-0 4 Subrackor EPU05A-0 3 or EPU05A-0 5 Subrack
Mandat ory
1
An EPU05A subrack distributes AC and DC power to other components in a cabinet. l The EPU05A-02 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-03 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-04 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU05A-05 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.
8
BBU
Mandat ory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
9
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
GATM
Option al
2
A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
10
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. When a GATM is configured, an EMUA or EMUB is installed below the GATM.
11
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
12
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
13
SOU
Option al
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
Components in an APM30H (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-22 Components in an APM30H (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.E). Table 3-32 Components in an APM30H (Ver.E) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
Outer Air Circulatio n Assembly
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
2
AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
3
FAN 02E
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02E is configured with fans and a cabinet control unit type B (CCUB). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
4
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
5
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
6
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
EPU05A-0 6/08 Subrackor EPU05A-0 7/09 Subrack
Mandat ory
1
An EPU05A subrack distributes AC and DC power to other components in a cabinet. l The EPU05A-06 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-07 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-08 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU05A-09 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.
8
BBU
Mandat ory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.E) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
9
GATM
Option al
2
A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.
10
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. When a GATM is configured, an EMUA or EMUB is installed below the GATM.
11
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
12
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.
13
SOU
Option al
1
An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
14
PDU03D-0 2
Option al
3
A PDU03D-02 can supply power to three RRUs. l In a BTS3900A (Ver.E) where RFUs and RRUs are configured and the number of RRUs is less than or equal to 9, PDU03D-02s are configured to supply power to the RRUs. l In a DBS3900 where an APM30H (Ver.E) is configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 7 to 15, PDU03D-02s are configured to supply power to the RRUs.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
15
PDU01D-0 1
Option al
1
A PDU01D-01 can be used together with an ODM to supply power to a maximum of 6 RRUs. l In a BTS3900A (Ver.E) where RFUs and RRUs are configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 10 to 15, PDU01D-01s are configured to supply power to the RRUs. l In a DBS3900 where an APM30H (Ver.E) is configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 16 to 21, PDU01D-01s are configured to supply power to the RRUs.
3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of APM30Hs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications An APM30H can be supplied with different power. Power equipment in the APM30H converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC input power specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-33 AC input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
Operating Voltage
220 V AC singlephase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220 V AC threephase
l Line to neutral voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 176 V AC to 290 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 346 V AC to 415 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 304 V AC to 500 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 100 V AC to 120 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 90 V AC to 135 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 180 V AC to 270 V AC
110 V AC duallive-wire
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
Operating Voltage
120 V AC duallive-wirea
l Line to neutral voltage: 120 V AC to 127 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 105 V AC to 150 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 208 V AC to 220 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 176 V AC to 260 V AC
a: APM30Hs (Ver.E), APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), APM30s (Ver.D_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.E_B~D), APM30Hs (Ver.E_A2), and APM30s (Ver.E_A1) can be supplied with 120 V AC dual-live-wire power, but APM30Hs (Ver.B) and APM30Hs (Ver.C) cannot.
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-34 Equipment specifications of an APM30H Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
≤ 68 kg (149.91 lb)
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)
≤ 90 kg (198.41 lb)
Weight
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation component (heat exchanger core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, and EPU l Excluding the BBU, customer transmission equipment, PMU, or PSU
Weight with the typical configurations l Including the cabinet, one PMU, three PSUs, and one BBU l Excluding transmission equipment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.E)
≤ 90 kg (198.41 lb)
Weight with the typical configurations l Including the cabinet, two PSUs, and one BBU l Excluding transmission equipment
Heat dissipatio n capability of a cabinet
APM30H (Ver.B)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 700 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.
-
APM30H (Ver.C)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1050 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.
-
APM30H (Ver.D)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1500 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.
-
APM30H (Ver.E)
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1800 W when the ambient temperature is 50°C.
-
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-35 Environmental specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Operating temperature
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation). If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F), a heater is required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Relative humidity
APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
5% RH to 100% RH
APM30H (Ver.B)
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W
Atmospheric pressure Noise power level
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) APM30H (Ver.C)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1050 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
APM30H (Ver.D)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1500 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
APM30H (Ver.E)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 1800 W or between 700 W and 1800 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Storage
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E). Table 3-36 Surge protection specifications of the ports Specifications
Port
AC power port
Surge
Surge Current
l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Differential mode: 30 kA (8/20 us)
l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Common mode: 30 kA (8/20 us)
3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet The equipment in a Huawei cabinet must meet the requirements for engineering specifications. The following conditions must be met when the customer equipment is installed in the following cabinets: APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/ APM30H (Ver.D_B)/APM30H (Ver.D_A2)/APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.D_B)/TMC11H (Ver.D_A2)/TMC (Ver.D_A1), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z), and BTS3900AL (Ver.A): l
Dimension requirements Figure 3-23 shows the dimension requirements.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
–
The width is 19 inch.
–
The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right is less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 250 mm (9.84 in.).
–
The cabling space in front of the front panel is less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
l
3 Cabinet Description
Heat dissipation requirements –
If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.
–
If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.
Temperature requirements Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common areas and high-temperature areas. Figure 3-24 lists the detailed requirements.
Figure 3-23 Dimension requirements and heat dissipation requirements
(1) Equipment using natural ventilation
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out from (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from left to right front to rear
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-24 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment
NOTE
l Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows: l
Common areas: The highest ambient temperature is equal to or less than 40oC.
l
High-temperature areas: The highest ambient temperature exceeds 40oC.
l The following description illustrates the preceding figure using common areas as an example. If the operating temperature of the customer equipment ranges from -15oC to 60oC, the customer equipment meets requirements; if the operating temperature ranges from -5oC to 60oC, the customer equipment does not meet requirements.
The customer equipment to be installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, or TMC11H (Ver.A) must meet the following requirements: l
Dimension requirements Figure 3-25 shows the dimension requirements.
l
l Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
–
The width is 19 inch.
–
The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right is less than or equal to 310 mm (12.20 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 280 mm (11.02 in.).
–
The cabling space in front of the front panel is less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.).
Heat dissipation requirements –
If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.
–
If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.
Temperature requirements Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common areas and high-temperature areas. Figure 3-26 lists the detailed requirements. Figure 3-25 Dimension requirements and heat dissipation requirements
(1) Equipment using natural ventilation
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out from (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from left to right front to rear
Figure 3-26 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
l Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows: l
Common areas: The highest ambient temperature is equal to or less than 40oC.
l
High-temperature areas: The highest ambient temperature exceeds 40oC.
l The following description illustrates the preceding figure using common areas as an example. If the operating temperature of the customer equipment ranges from -15oC to 60oC, the customer equipment meets requirements; if the operating temperature ranges from -5oC to 60oC, the customer equipment does not meet requirements.
3.5 TMC11H Description The TMC11H applies to a BTS3900A, DBS3900, or BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment.
3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs The transmission cabinet of 11 U high with heat exchanger (TMC11H) is used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. It supplies DC power to the distributed or separated macro base station in outdoor scenarios. The following figure shows the exteriors of TMC11Hs. Figure 3-27 Exteriors of TMC11Hs
The following figure shows the dimensions of an TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-28 Dimensions of an TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.E),or TMC11H (Ver.D)
3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs This section describes module and board configurations in TMC11Hs.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.B): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-29 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.B).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-37 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B) No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
FAN 02A
Mandatory
1
A FAN 02A is configured with the fans, HPMI, and CMUA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
4.5.1 SLPU
Mandatory
2
To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP). To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.
3
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
456
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
DCDU-03Bo r DCDU-03C
Mandatory
1
A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) or direct current distribution unit-03C (DCDU-03C) distributes DC power to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03C.
5
BBU3900
Optional
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
EMUA/ EMUB
Optional
1
An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) or environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
8
AC Heater
Optional
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
9
4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core
Mandatory
1
A heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust.
10
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandatory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.C): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.C) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.C) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-30 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-38 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C) No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02B
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02B is configured with the fans, HPMI, and CMUE. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
DCDU-1 1Bor DCDU-1 1C
Mandat ory
1
A direct current distribution unit-11B (DCDU-11B) or direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-11B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-11C.
5
BBU390 0
Option al
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module /Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
7
4.7.4 (Optiona l) EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
8
Filler module
Option al
5
A filler module is a standard plastic component with a height of 1 U. A filler module is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
9
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
10
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
11
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.D): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.D) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.D) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-31 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-39 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02D
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02D is configured with the fans and central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
DCDU-1 2Bor DCDU-1 2C
Mandat ory
1
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) or direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12C.
5
BBU390 0
Option al
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
7
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
8
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
9
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
10
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
11
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.E): l
One type of TMC11H (Ver.E) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.
l
The other type of TMC11H (Ver.E) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-32 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-40 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E) No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
1
FAN 02E
Mandat ory
1
A FAN 02E is configured with fans and a cabinet control unit type B (CCUB). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
2
SLPU
Mandat ory
2
l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
DCDU-1 2Bor DCDU-1 2C
Mandat ory
1
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) or direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12C.
5
BBU
Option al
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.E) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net
Description
7
EMUA/ EMUB
Option al
1
An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.
8
Air baffle
Mandat ory
5
An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.
9
AC Heater
Option al
1
An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.
10
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y
Mandat ory
1
An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
11
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.
3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of a TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-41 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of a TMC11H. Table 3-42 Equipment specifications of a TMC11H Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
TMC11H (Ver.B)
≤ 57 kg (125.66 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation assembly (heat dissipation core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, DCDU, and cables l Excluding transmission equipment
TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
≤ 47 kg (103.62 lb)
Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation assembly (heat dissipation core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, DCDU, and cables l Excluding transmission equipment
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of a TMC11H.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-43 Environmental specifications Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Operating temperatur e
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
-40°C to +50°C (-40°C to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation). If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F), a heater is required.
Relative humidity Atmospher ic pressure Noise power level
5% RH to 100% RH 70 kPa to 106 kPa
TMC11H (Ver.B)
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
TMC11H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.D)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1050 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
TMC11H (Ver.E)
l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 1800 W or between 700 W and 1800 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)
Storage
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
469
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in a TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E). Table 3-44 Surge protection specifications of the ports Port
-48 V DC input power port
Specifications Surge
Surge Current
l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 us)
l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)
l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 us)
3.5.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a TMC11H Customer equipment in TMC11Hs must meet the specifications. Customer equipment in TMC11Hs must meet the same specifications with the customer equipment an APM30H. For details, see 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet.
3.6 IBBS200D Description The IBBS200D applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds.
3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds The integrated battery backup system with direct cooling (IBBS200D) applies to outdoor scenarios and uses fans to dissipate heat from the cabinet. The IBBS200D also can provide backup power for the APM30H. The following figure shows the exteriors of IBBS200Ds. Figure 3-33 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS200D. Figure 3-34 Dimensions of an IBBS200D
3.6.2 Components in IBBS200Ds This section describes module and board configurations in IBBS200Ds.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-35 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B). Table 3-45 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandatory
2
Fans are installed on the front door of a cabinet, dissipating heat from the cabinet.
2
4.4.1 CMUA
Mandatory
1
A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandatory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandatory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandatory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
8
Heating Film
Optional
2
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-36 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). Table 3-46 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame is installed on the front door of a cabinet, and configured with a fan and a CMUE.
2
4.4.2 CMUE
Mandat ory
1
A central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandat ory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
8
Heating Film
Optiona l
2
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
475
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-37 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D). Table 3-47 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.
2
4.4.3 CMUEA
Mandat ory
1
A CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
476
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
Power Distribution Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
Heating Film
Optiona l
2
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
8
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandat ory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
477
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-38 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E). Table 3-48 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.
2
CMUH
Mandat ory
1
A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
478
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Component
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
eBat
Optiona l
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandat ory
2
Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
8
Heating Film
Optiona l
1
IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.
9
Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film
Mandat ory
1
A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.
10
WIUA
Optiona l
1
A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.
3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
479
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an IBBS200D. Table 3-49 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS200D. Table 3-50 Equipment specifications of an IBBS200D Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
IBBS200 D (Ver.B), IBBS200 D (Ver.C), IBBS200 D (Ver.D), or IBBS200 D (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
-
IBBS200 D (Ver.B)
≤ 50 kg (110.23 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
IBBS200 D (Ver.C), IBBS200 D (Ver.D), or IBBS200 D (Ver.E)
≤ 40 kg (88.18 lb)
Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.E). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
480
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-51 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-40°C to +45°C (-40°F to 113°F) (1120 W/m2 solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise power level
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.7 IBBS200T Description The IBBS200T applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts.
3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts The integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T) applies to outdoor scenarios. The IBBS200T can provide backup power for the APM30H. The following figure shows the exteriors of IBBS200Ts. Figure 3-39 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
481
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS200T. Figure 3-40 Dimensions of an IBBS200T
3.7.2 Components in IBBS200Ts This section describes module and board configurations in IBBS200Ts.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). Figure 3-41 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
482
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). Table 3-52 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) No.
Module/ Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandatory
1
A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in hightemperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
4.4.1 CMUA
Mandatory
1
A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandatory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandatory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandatory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distribution Box
Mandatory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
483
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-42 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 3-53 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandat ory
1
A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
4.4.2 CMUE
Mandat ory
1
A CMUE controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
484
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
Power Distributi on Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and two storage battery packs in an IBBS200T.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.D). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
485
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-43 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). Table 3-54 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandat ory
1
A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
4.4.3 CMUEA
Mandat ory
1
A CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
486
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
Power Distributi on Box
Mandat ory
1
A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
6
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.E). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
487
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-44 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E)
The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E). Table 3-55 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC in an IBBS200T
Mandat ory
1
A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
CMUH
Mandat ory
1
A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.
3
4.8.3 ELU
Mandat ory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
488
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
4
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).
5
eBat
Optiona l
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.
6
Power Distributi on Box
Mandat ory
2
Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
7
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
8
WIUA
Optiona l
1
A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.
3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an IBBS200T. Table 3-56 Input power specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
489
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS200T. Table 3-57 Equipment specifications of an IBBS200T Item
Cabinet
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensio ns (H x W x D)
IBBS200 T (Ver.B), IBBS200 T (Ver.C), IBBS200 T (Ver.D), or IBBS200 T (Ver.E)
l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)
Excluding the protective cover for the TEC
IBBS200 T (Ver.B)
≤ 70 kg (154.32 lb)
Weight
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
IBBS200 T (Ver.C), IBBS200 T (Ver.D), or IBBS200 T (Ver.E)
≤ 45 kg (99.21 lb)
Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.E). Table 3-58 Environmental specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
490
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Noise power level
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban areas) l ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 7.6 bels@+25°C (77°F)
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.8 IBBS300D Description The IBBS300D applies to a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300D.
3.8.1 Exterior of an IBBS300D An IBBS300D is a direct-ventilation outdoor battery cabinet using fans for forcible heat dissipation. It is used with an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power for the cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS300D. Figure 3-45 Exterior of an IBBS300D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
491
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS300D. Figure 3-46 Dimensions of an IBBS300D
3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS300D. The following figure shows the components in IBBS300Ds. NOTE
An IBBS300D can be configured with a BAU02D or with eBats and a WIUA to intelligently manage storage batteries, as shown by illustrations a and b in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
492
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-47 Components in IBBS300Ds
a: Scenario where a BAU02D is configured
b: Scenario where eBats and a WIUA are configured
The following table describes the components in an IBBS300D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
493
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-59 Components in an IBBS300D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
1
Fan mounting frame
Mandat ory
1
A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.
2
CCU01D-0 3
Mandat ory
1
A cabinet control unit type 01D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the temperature in a cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies an electronic label.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
An AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.
5
Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 150 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 x 22.09 in.).
6
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
7
DC Junction Box
Mandat ory
2
A DC junction box is installed on the inner left wall and a DC junction box is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. They transfer and distribute power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.
8
Circuit breaker
Mandat ory
1
A circuit breaker is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. It connects or disconnects the positive wire of the storage battery power cable.
9
HAU01A-0 1
Optional
1
The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) ensures that storage batteries in the cabinet stay and work within an acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. This allows the storage batteries to work properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
494
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
10
BAU02D
Optional
1
The battery alarm unit type 02D (BAU02D) checks whether all storage batteries are properly installed and connected. It is required if an IBBS300D is used together with Ver.D cabinets.
11
eBat
Optional
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a WIUA to intelligently manage the storage battery. It is required if an IBBS300D is used together with Ver.E cabinets.
12
WIUA
Optional
1
A WIUA is used with eBats together to intelligently manage storage batteries. It is required if an IBBS300D is used together with Ver.E cabinets.
NOTE
A battery temperature sensor is configured in a cabinet by default. For details about the position of a battery temperature sensor in a cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS300D, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS300D supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS300D. Table 3-60 Input power specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS300D. Table 3-61 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimension s (H x W x D)
l Cabinet (without a base): 700 mm x 600 mm x 750 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 29.53 in.)
-
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight
≤ 40 kg (88.18 lb)
Excluding the storage batteries and base
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS300D. Table 3-62 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperatur e
-40°C to +40°C (-40°F to 104°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F)a, a heater is required.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage/ transportati on temperatur e
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperaturecontrolled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
IP34
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
496
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Noise
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
a: The temperature at which a heater is required is specified as the local average lowest temperature of each day in the coldest month of the year.
3.9 IBBS300T Description An IBBS300T applies to the BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300T.
3.9.1 Exterior of an IBBS300T The IBBS300T is an outdoor battery cabinet with a Thermal Electric Cooler (TEC). It is used with an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power for the cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS300T. Figure 3-48 Exterior of an IBBS300T
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS300T. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
497
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-49 Dimensions of an IBBS300T
3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS300T. The following figure shows the components in an IBBS300T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
498
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-50 Components in an IBBS300T
a: Scenario where the BAU02D is configured
b: Scenario where the eBat and WIUA are configured
The following table describes the components in an IBBS300T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
499
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-63 Components in an IBBS300T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Compone nt
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
TEC
Mandat ory
1
A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) ensures the normal operation of an IBBS300T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
2
CCU01D03
Mandat ory
1
A cabinet control unit type 01D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the temperature in a cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies an electronic label.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
4
Storage Battery
Mandat ory
8
12 V 150 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 x 22.09 in.).
5
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
6
DC Junction Box
Mandat ory
2
A DC junction box is installed on the inner left wall and a DC junction box is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. They transfer and distribute power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.
7
Circuit breaker
Mandat ory
1
A circuit breaker is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. It connects or disconnects the positive wire of the storage battery power cable.
8
BAU02D
Optiona l
1
The battery alarm unit type 02D (BAU02D) checks whether all storage batteries are properly installed and connected.
9
eBat
Optiona l
8
An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.
10
WIUA
Optiona l
1
A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
500
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
A battery temperature sensor is configured in a cabinet by default. For details about the position of a battery temperature sensor in a cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS300T, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS300T supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS300T. Table 3-64 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS300T. Table 3-65 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D)
l Cabinet (without a base): 700 mm x 600 mm x 750 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 29.53 in.)
Excluding the protective cover for the TEC
l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight
≤ 50 kg (110.23 lb)
Excluding the storage batteries and base
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS300T. Table 3-66 Environmental specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperature
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
501
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage/ transportation temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class
IP55
-
Noise
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban areas) l ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 7.6 bels@+25°C (77°F)
3.10 IBBS20D Description An IBBS20D applies to the DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, configuration, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20D.
3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D An IBBS20D, an integrated battery backup system with direct cooling, uses fans to dissipate heat from the cabinet. It can be used together with the RRU, BBU3910A, OPM50M, OMB (Ver.C), and IMB03 to provide backup power.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
502
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-51 Exterior of an IBBS20D
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS20D. Figure 3-52 Dimensions of an IBBS20D
3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS20D. The following figure shows components in an IBBS20D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
503
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-53 Components in an IBBS20D
The following table describes the components in an IBBS20D. Table 3-67 Components in an IBBS20D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Compone nt
Option al/ Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
1
Fan
Mandat ory
1
The fan is located on the front door of the cabinet. It promotes the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet works within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly.
2
Storage battery
Mandat ory
4
12 V 20 Ah storage batteries provide shortduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 76 mm x 166 mm x 181 mm (2.99 in. x 6.58 x 7.13 in.).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
504
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Compone nt
Option al/ Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
3
Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
4
ELU
Mandat ory
1
An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
5
CMUG
Mandat ory
1
The central monitoring unit type G (CMUG) monitors the temperature in the cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the electronic label.
6
Power Distributio n Box in an IBBS20D
Mandat ory
1
The power distribution box is installed in the lower part of the inner right wall of the cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the fan and storage batteries in the cabinet.
7
(Optional) Heating Film
Optional
1
The heating film ensures that the storage batteries in the cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the environmental temperature is low. This allows the batteries to work properly.
3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS20D, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS20D supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-68 Input power specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
505
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-69 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimension s (H x W x D)
400 mm x 240 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 9.45 in. x 11.81 in.)
-
Weight
≤ 15 kg (33.07 lb)
Excluding storage batteries
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-70 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperatur e
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
l If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F)a, a heater is required. l 16 Ah lead storage batteries are required when the temperature ranges from 40°C (104°F) to 50°C (122°F).
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperaturecontrolled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
IP34
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
506
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Noise
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)
a: The temperature at which a heater is required is specified as the local average lowest temperature of each day in the coldest month of the year.
3.11 IBBS20L Description An IBBS20L can be used in a DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20L.
3.11.1 Exterior of an IBBS20L An IBBS20L is an integrated power backup module using a lithium battery. It is used together with the RRU, BBU3910A, and OPM50M and provides backup power for them.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20L. Figure 3-54 Exterior of an IBBS20L
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
507
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS20L. Figure 3-55 Dimensions of an IBBS20L
3.11.2 Ports and Indicators on an IBBS20L This section describes ports and indicators on an IBBS20L. The ports include those at the bottom of the IBBS20L and those in the cabling cavity of the IBBS20L. The following figure shows the ports on an IBBS20L.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
508
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-56 Ports on an IBBS20L
The following table describes the ports and indicators on an IBBS20L. Table 3-71 Ports and indicators on an IBBS20L Item
Silkscreen
Description
(1) Indicato rs
RUN
l Steady off: There is no power supply. l Steady on: The module is powered on. The module is performing startup, self-check, loading, or activation, or no software is loaded. l Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s): The module is registered, or the communication is normal. l Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s): The module is not registered, or the communication is interrupted.
ALM
l Steady off: There is no fault. l Steady on: An alarm is generated, and the module needs to be replaced. l Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s): An alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the module.
(2) Ports in Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BAT
Circuit breaker controlling the power to an IBBS20L
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
509
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Silkscreen
Description
the cabling cavity
RTN(+) INPUT
DC power input ports connecting to upper-level power equipment (for example, OPM50M)
NEG(-) INPUT NEG(-) OUTPUT RTN(+) OUTPUT
DC power output ports connecting to a lower-level IBBS20L
COM_IN
RS485 signal port connecting to a PMU or OPM and reporting monitoring information
EXT_IN
Signal monitoring port monitoring one channel of CAN signals between IBBS20Ls. It communicates with and reports monitoring information to the upper-level IBBS20L.
EXT_OUT
Signal monitoring port monitoring one channel of CAN signals between IBBS20Ls. It communicates with and receives monitoring information from the lower-level IBBS20L.
3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS20L, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IBBS20L supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-72 Input power specifications Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-73 Equipment specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
400 mm x 120 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 4.72 in. x 11.81 in.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
510
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Weight
19 kg (41.90 lb)
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-74 Environmental specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)
Storage
l -40°C to 40°C (-40°F to 104°F): An IBBS20L is charged every 12 months and has a lifespan of 3 years. l 40°C to 60°C (104°F to 140°F): An IBBS20L is charged every four months and has a lifespan of 1 year. ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Protection class
IP65
Noise
An IBBS20L uses natural ventilation and does not generate noises.
3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual IBBS20L-E provides power backup for communications devices so that power can be supplied to communications devices when no power inputs to power modules are available. This ensures normal service running and stable power supply. This manual describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of IBBS20L-E.
3.12.1 Exterior IBBS20L-E is a power backup module integrated with lithium batteries. It provides power backup for RRUs, BBUs, and OPM30M. The following figure shows the IBBS20L-E exterior. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
511
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-57 IBBS20L-E exterior
3.12.2 Ports and Indicators This chapter describes the physical ports, communications ports, and indicators on IBBS20LE. The following figure shows the physical ports on IBBS20L-E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
512
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-58 Physical ports on IBBS20L-E
The following figure shows the communications ports on IBBS20L-E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
513
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-59 Communications ports on IBBS20L-E
Table 3-75 Communications ports on IBBS20L-E Communications Port
Communications Protocol
Function
COM_IN and COM_OUT
CAN2.0 protocol
Communicates with power modules or cascaded lithium battery modules.
Table 3-76 Pins of the COM_IN and COM_OUT ports Pin
Signal Name
Signal Description
1 to 4
None
None
5
BMS_ON+
In-position signal of lithium battery modules
6
None
None
7
BMS_ON-
In-position signal of lithium battery modules
8
CANH
CAN data transmission/ reception H
9
CANL
CAN data transmission/ reception L
The following table describes the indicators on IBBS20L-E. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
514
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-77 Indicators on IBBS20L-E Indicator Name
Color
Status
Description
Run indicator
Green
Steady off
There is no power supply, or IBBS20LE is faulty.
Blinking at 0.5 Hz
IBBS20L-E is communicating properly.
Blinking at 4 Hz
IBBS20L-E is communicating abnormally.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No fault occurs.
Steady on
The module is faulty.
Alarm indicator
Fault indicator
Yellow
Red
3.12.3 Engineering Specifications This chapter describes the power input specifications, physical specifications, and environmental specifications of IBBS20L-E.
Power Input Specifications IBBS20L-E supports - 48 V DC power input. The following table describes the power input specifications of IBBS20L-E. Table 3-78 Power input specifications Input Power
Rated Voltage
–48 V DC
–38.4 V DC to –57 V DC
Physical Specifications The following table provides the physical specifications of IBBS20L-E.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
515
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-79 Physical specifications Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
400 mm x 120 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 4.72 in. x 11.81 in.)
Weight
18 kg (39.69 lb)
Environmental Specifications The following table provides the environmental specifications of IBBS20L-E. Table 3-80 Environmental Specifications Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
–40°C to +50°C (–40°F to +113°F) (with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Altitude
0 m to 4,000 m (0 ft. to 13123.2 ft.)
Storage environment
l –40°C to +40°C (–40°F to +104°F): Recharge the module every 12 months. The total storage duration cannot exceed three years. l 40°C to 60°C (104°F to 140°F): Recharge the module every four months. The total storage duration cannot exceed one year. ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Ingress protection rating
IP65
Noise
Natural heat dissipation is adopted and no noise is generated.
3.13 IBBS700D Description The IBBS700D applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
516
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D The IBBS700D is an outdoor battery cabinet that uses fans to dissipate heat. It can be used with the APM30H (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS700D. Figure 3-60 Exterior of the IBBS700D
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the IBBS700D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
517
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-61 Dimensions of the IBBS700D
3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D This section describes module and board configurations in the IBBS700D cabinet. The following figure shows the interior of the IBBS700D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
518
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-62 Components of IBBS700D
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D. Table 3-81 Components in the IBBS700D
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame
Mandat ory
1
The fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the lower middle part in the front door of the cabinet.
2
CMUEA
Mandat ory
1
The central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
519
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet
Description
3
ELU(1)
Mandat ory
1
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
5
CCU
-(2)
1
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages devices.
6
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
The AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.
7
HAU01A-0 1
Optional
1
The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) is a heater. It functions in the low-temperature environment to provide the suitable storage and operating temperature for the storage batteries.
8
Storage batteries(3)
Mandat ory
16
Storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.21 x 20.79 in.).
9
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
10
Power Distributio n Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Mandat ory
1
The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.
4
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
520
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
l (1) When a CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "4." When no CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "3." l (2) When the IBBS700D cabinet is used with an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet, no CCU is required. When the IBBS700D cabinet is used with a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) or TP48600A-H17B1 cabinet, a CCU is required. l (3) The storage batteries provide current of 300 Ah, 450 Ah, or 600 Ah for a single cabinet and provide current of 150 Ah or 300 Ah for each one in a cabinet combination. l A battery temperature sensor is configured in the cabinet by default. For details about the position of the battery temperature sensor in the cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS700D, including the electrical specifications, equipment specifications, and environment specifications.
Electrical Specifications The following table describes the electrical specifications of the IBBS700D. Table 3-82 Electrical specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Input voltage range
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Rated voltage: -48 V DC
Maximum capacity of the storage batteries
600 Ah
-
Equipment Specifications The following table describes the equipment specifications of the IBBS700D. Table 3-83 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Cabinet (without the base): 1725 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (67.91 in. x 30.31 in. x 29.53 in.)
-
Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 30.31 in. x 27.56 in.) Cabinet weight
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
≤ 110 kg (242.55 lb)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Not including the storage batteries and base
521
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Battery weight
12 V 150 Ah storage battery: 60 kg (132.30 lb)(1)
The total capacity can be expanded to 48 V 600 Ah (by connecting four 48 V 150 Ah battery packs in parallel)
Installation and maintenance
l Installation mode: installed on the ground
-
l Maintenance mode: maintained from the front l Cooling method: natural ventilation
NOTE
(1) Storage batteries from different manufacturers have different specifications. The preceding specifications are from the commonly used storage batteries.
Environment Specifications The following table describes the environment specifications of the IBBS700D that can be used outdoors. Table 3-84 Environment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperature
-40°C to +45°C (-40°F to +113°F)
When the cabinet works under -20°C (1), a heater needs to be configured.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.20 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.40 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage and transportation temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
522
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Protection class
IP34
-
Noise Sound Power Level
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) l ≤ 6.1bels@+25°C l ≤ 6.7bels@+45°C
NOTE
(1) The operating temperature for configuring a heater refers to the average of the local lowest temperatures for a month in a year.
3.14 IBBS700T Description The IBBSIBBS700T applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700T.
3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T The IBBS700T is an outdoor battery cabinet with a thermal electric cooler (TEC). It can be used with the APM30H (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
523
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-63 Exterior of the IBBS700T
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
524
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-64 Dimensions of the IBBS700T
3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T This section describes module and board configurations in the IBBS700T cabinet. The following figure shows the interior of the IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
525
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-65 Components of IBBS700T
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700T. Table 3-85 Components in the IBBS700T
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
1
4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan
Mandat ory
1
The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper part of the front door. It dissipates heat for the storage batteries.
2
4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T
Mandat ory
1
The TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS700T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat for the storage batteries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
526
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No .
Module
Option al or Manda tory
Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet
Description
3
4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan
Mandat ory
1
The outer air circulation fan is installed in the lower part of the front door. It dissipates heat for the TEC.
4
CMUF
Mandat ory
1
The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
5
ELU(1)
Mandat ory
1
The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
7
CCU
-(2)
1
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages devices.
8
4.3.20 AC Junction Box
Mandat ory
1
The AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.
9
(3)
Mandat ory
16
Storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.21 x 20.79 in.).
10
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
11
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T
Mandat ory
1
The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.
6
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
527
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
l (1) When a CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "6." When no CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "5." l (2) When the IBBS700T cabinet is used with an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet, no CCU is required. When the IBBS700T cabinet is used with a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) or TP48600A-H17B1 cabinet, a CCU is required. l (3) The storage batteries provide current of 300 Ah, 450 Ah, or 600 Ah for a single cabinet and provide current of 150 Ah or 300 Ah for each one in a cabinet combination. l A battery temperature sensor is configured in the cabinet by default. For details about the position of the battery temperature sensor in the cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS700T, including the electrical specifications, equipment specifications, and environment specifications.
Electrical Specifications The following table describes the electrical specifications of the IBBS700T. Table 3-86 Electrical specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Input voltage range
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Rated voltage: -48 V DC
Maximum capacity of the storage batteries
600 Ah
-
Equipment Specifications The following table describes the equipment specifications of the IBBS700T. Table 3-87 Equipment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Without the base: 1725 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (67.91 in. x 30.31 in. x 29.53 in.)
-
Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 30.31 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
≤ 150 kg (330.75 lb)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Not including the storage batteries and base
528
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Battery weight
12 V 150 Ah storage battery: 60 kg (132.30 lb)(1)
The total capacity can be expanded to 48 V 600 Ah (by connecting four 48 V 150 Ah battery packs in parallel)
Installation and maintenance
l Installation mode: installed on the ground
-
l Maintenance mode: maintained from the front l Cooling device: TEC
NOTE
(1) Storage batteries from different manufacturers have different specifications. The preceding specifications are from the commonly used storage batteries.
Environment Specifications The following table describes the environment specifications of the IBBS700T that can be used outdoors. Table 3-88 Environment specifications Item
Specifications
Remarks
Operating temperature
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F)
When the cabinet works under -20°C (1), a heater needs to be configured.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
-
Altitude
0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.20 ft)
Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.40 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Storage and transportation temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
529
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Remarks
Dustproof and waterproof
IP55
-
Noise Sound Power Level
-
Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) l ≤ 6.6bels@+25°C l ≤ 7.6bels@+45°C
NOTE
(1) The operating temperature for configuring a heater refers to the average of the local lowest temperatures for a month in a year.
3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description The BTS3900AL cabinet applies to a BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of BTS3900AL cabinets, and specifications of configured customer equipment.
3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet This section describes the exterior and dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet. The following figure shows the exterior of a BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 3-66 Exterior of a BTS3900AL cabinet
The following figure shows the dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
530
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-67 Dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet
3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900AL cabinets.
Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
531
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-68 Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet
The following table lists the components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Table 3-89 Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ETP48 400
Mandato ry
1
The embedded telecommunication power 48400 (ETP48400) converts AC power into DC power and distributes the DC power to other components in the cabinet. The ETP48400 consists of the ETP48400 subrack, PMU, and PSUs.
2
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandato ry
7
The power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
3
CCU
Mandato ry
1
The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment and manages other components in the cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
532
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
ELU
Mandato ry
1
The electronic label unit (ELU) automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the inner right wall of the equipment compartment.
5
Surge protecti on area for transmi ssion signals
Mandato ry
1
The universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) can be installed in the surge protection area for transmission signals.
6
Door Status Sensor
Mandato ry
1
The door status sensor is installed on the cabinet door to monitor whether the cabinet door is open.
7 and 12
DCDU12C
Mandato ry
2
The direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) provides ten DC power outputs. The upper DCDU-12C provides power for components such as the BBU, CCU, and central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) in a cabinet. The lower DCDU-12C provides power for the RFUs and FAU.
8
PMU 11A
Mandato ry
1
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
9
BBU
Mandato ry
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
10
DCDU03B, DCDU11B, or DCDU12B
Optional
2
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. When only one DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is required, it is preferentially installed in the left slot.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
533
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
11
4.3.21 Storage Battery
Optional
4
When a base station requires short-term backup power, one storage battery pack (including four storage batteries) is configured. 12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 290 mm x 110 mm x 398 mm (11.42 in. x 4.33 x 15.67 in.).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
13
FAU03 D-01
Mandato ry
1
The fan assembly unit 03D-01 (FAU03D-01), a fan assembly in the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF controls the temperature and detects Boolean alarms.
14
RFU
Mandato ry
9
The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description.
15
PDU05 A-01
Mandato ry
1
The power distribution unit 05A-01 (PDU05A-01) distributes AC power to the ETP48400, AC service outlet unit (SOU), and HAU01A-01.
16
Temper ature sensor
Mandato ry
3
The temperature sensors are installed in the device compartment, RF compartment, and the front door of a cabinet to monitor the temperature in the cabinet.
17
AC SOU
Optional
1
The service outlet unit 01A-01 (SOU01A-01) transfers AC power to customer equipment. The SOU01A-01 is installed in the PDU05A-01 of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
18
CMUF
Mandato ry
1
The CMUF controls the heat exchanger, adjusts the fan speed, and controls the temperature in the cabinet.
19
HAU01 A-01
Optional
2
The heat assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. It can be installed in the cabinet door.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
534
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mb er
Compo nent
Option al or Mandat ory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
20
GPS surge protect or
Optional
1
The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It can be installed in a designated position on the inner left wall of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.
21
HEX
Mandato ry
1
The heat exchanger (HEX) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range. It consists of the inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, and heat exchanger core.
Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet The BTS3900AL DC cabinet has the same type of door as the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Figure 3-69 Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet
The following table lists the components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
535
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-90 Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Nu mbe r
Compon ent
Option al or Manda tory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
Filler panel
Mandat ory
1
The filler panel is exclusively used for cabinets and cannot be disassembled or replaced.
2
CCU
Mandat ory
1
The CCU monitors the operating environment and manages other components in the cabinet.
3
ELU
Mandat ory
1
The ELU automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the inner right wall of the equipment compartment.
4
Surge protectio n area for transmiss ion signals
Mandat ory
1
The UELP or UFLP can be installed in the surge protection area for transmission signals.
5
Door status sensor
Mandat ory
1
The door status sensor is installed on the cabinet door to monitor whether the cabinet door is open.
6 and 9
DCDU-1 2C
Mandat ory
2
The DCDU-12C provides ten DC power outputs. The upper DCDU-12C provides power for components such as the BBU, CCU, and CMUF in a cabinet. The lower DCDU-12C provides power for the RFUs and FAU.
7
BBU
Mandat ory
2
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
8
DCDU-0 3B, DCDU-11 B, or DCDU-1 2B
Optiona l
2
The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. When only one DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is required, it is preferentially installed in the left slot.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Nu mbe r
Compon ent
Option al or Manda tory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
10
FAU03D01
Mandat ory
1
The FAU, a fan assembly for the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF controls the temperature, detects the Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
11
RFU
Mandat ory
9
The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description.
12
PDU03D01
Mandat ory
1
The PDU03D-01 provides DC power for the DCDU-12C and BusBar.
13
Temperat ure sensor
Mandat ory
3
The temperature sensors are installed in the device compartment, RF compartment, and the front door of a cabinet to monitor the temperature in the cabinet.
14
GPS surge protector
Optiona l
1
The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It can be installed in a designated position on the inner left wall of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.
3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications BTS3900AL engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standards.
Input Power Specifications The following table lists the input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900AL cabinet, see 2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-91 Input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Input Power
Voltage Range
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
537
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Input Power
Voltage Range
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC three-phase
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC
120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC duallive-wire
105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC duallive-wire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. Table 3-92 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
1925 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (with the base) Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm
Weight
≤ 556 kg (full configuration, with the base and full configuration of storage batteries, and without transmission devices)
Heat dissipation capability of the cabinet
2200 W @ 50°C
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. Table 3-93 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation and without storage batteries). If the operating temperature is below -20°C, an AC heater assembly unit (HAU) is required. l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation and storage batteries). If the operating temperature is below -20°C, an AC HAU is required.
Relative humidity
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
5% RH to 100% RH
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
538
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
l When the output power of an RF module is lower than or equal to 80 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) standard. – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C l When the output power of an RF module is higher than 80 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban) standard. – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C
Surge Protection Specifications Table 3-94 lists the surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-94 Surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
AC input power port
Surge current
30 kA
Compliance Standards The following table lists the compliance standards for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
539
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-95 Compliance standards for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Ingress Protectio n (IP) rating
IP55
Operating environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protection
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method
Antiearthquak e performa nce
ETSI EN 300019-1-4: "Earthquake"
YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
540
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900AL complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900AL is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 An eNodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
541
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
3 Cabinet Description
Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10
Surge protection
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.15.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a BTS3900AL Cabinet Customer equipment in BTS3900AL cabinets must meet the specifications. Customer equipment in BTS3900AL cabinets must meet the same specifications with the customer equipment an APM30H. For details, see 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet.
3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description There are two types of BTS3900C cabinets: BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet and BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of two types of BTS3900C cabinets.
3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet This section describes the exteriors and dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets. The following figure shows the exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
542
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-70 Exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets
The following figure shows the dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets. Figure 3-71 Dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets
3.16.2 Components of BTS3900C Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900C AC cabinets and BTS3900C DC cabinets.
Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
543
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-72 Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Table 3-96 Components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ELU
Mandatory
1
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
2
PMU 11A
Mandatory
1
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
3
HEUB
Mandatory
1
The heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
4
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandatory
2
A PSU converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
544
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
6
FAU01D -01
Mandatory
2
An FAU dissipates heat from the cabinet. It includes an inner air circulation fan and an outer air circulation fan, which are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.
7
PDU10D -01
Mandatory
1
The PDU10D-01 is a DC power distribution unit, supplying -48 V DC power to components in a cabinet.
8
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
9
RRUa
Mandatory
1
A remote radio unit (RRU) processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
10
SPD
Mandatory
1
The surge protective device (SPD) provides surge protection for AC input power.
11
ETP481 00-A1
Mandatory
1
The embedded telecommunication power ETP48100-A1 system converts AC power into DC power.
a: A BTS3900C (Ver.C) supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3808, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3806, and RRU3926.
Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
545
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-73 Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet. Table 3-97 Components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ELU
Mandatory
1
The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
2
HEUB
Mandatory
1
The HEUB provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
3
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
546
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
4
FAU01D -01
Mandatory
2
An FAU dissipates heat from the cabinet. It includes an inner air circulation fan and an outer air circulation fan, which are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.
5
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
6
RRUa
Mandatory
1
An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
7
PDU10D -01
Mandatory
1
The PDU10D-01 provides -48 V DC power for the components in a cabinet.
a: A BTS3900C (Ver.C) supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3808, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3806, and RRU3926.
Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet. Figure 3-74 Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
547
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet. Table 3-98 Components in a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
2
HEUA
Mandatory
1
The HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
3
EPS30-4815AF
Mandatory
1
AnEPS30-4815 AF converts AC power into DC power, and distributes the DC power.
4
AC OMB
Mandatory
1
-
5
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
548
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
6
RRUa
Mandatory
1
An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
7
AC surge protection box
Mandatory
1
The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for AC input power.
a: A BTS3900C WCDMA supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, and RRU3801C.
Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet. Figure 3-75 Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet
The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
549
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-99 Components in a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
2
HEUA
Mandatory
1
The HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
3
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
1
The DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC power outputs.
4
DC OMB
Mandatory
1
-
5
RRU subrack
Mandatory
1
An RRU subrack houses an RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
550
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Component
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
6
RRUa
Mandatory
1
An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.
a: A BTS3900C WCDMA supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, and RRU3801C.
3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications BTS3900C engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, surge protection specifications, and compliance standards.
Input Power Specifications The BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided in the following table. NOTE
For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900C cabinet, see 2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.
Table 3-100 Input power specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA /BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase
176 V AC to 290 V AC
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC dual-livewire
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Equipment Specifications Table 3-101 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. Table 3-102 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
551
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-101 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
600 mm x 400 mm x 390 mm l OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm l RRU subrack: 600 mm x 160 mm x 390 mm l AC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)
Weight
l DC cabinet: ≤ 26 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)
Table 3-102 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Specifications
Dimensions (HxWxD)
600 mm x 420 mm x 430 mm l OMB (Ver.C): 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm l RRU subrack: 600 mm x 180 mm x 430 mm l AC cabinet: ≤ 32 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)
Weight
l DC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU) Heat dissipation capability of the cabinet
650 W @ 50°C
Environmental Specifications Table 3-103 lists environment specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. Table 3-104 lists environment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. Table 3-103 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
l With solar radiation: -40°C to +45°C l Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
552
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Noise sound power level
ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C
Table 3-104 Environmental specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-33°C to +50°C
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Noise sound power level
l When the heat consumption of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) is lower than or equal to 300 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) standard. – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C l When the heat consumption of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) is higher than 300 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban) standard. – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C
Surge Protection Specifications Table 3-105 lists the surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. Table 3-106 lists the surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-105 Surge protection specifications for ports on a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
DC power port
Surge current
15 kA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
553
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
AC power port
Surge current
30 kA
Table 3-106 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Port
Surge Protection Mode
Surge Protection Specifications
DC power port
Surge current
20 kA
AC power port
Surge current
30 kA
Compliance Standards The BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table. Table 3-107 Compliance standards for a BTS3900C WCDMA/BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item
Standard
Security standards
l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Ingress Protection (IP) rating
IP55
Operating environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
554
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Shockpro of protection
IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method
Antiearthquak e performan ce
ETSI EN 300019-1-4: "Earthquake"
Noise
l ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural)
YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
l ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
555
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
EMC
NOTE The BTS3900C complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900C is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.
A multimode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 A NodeB has been certified by European standards. It meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
556
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Standard
Surge protection
l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1:General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3:Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4:Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE):Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers l YD 2324-2011 Lightning protection requirements and test methods for Radio Base Stations (RBSs) l GB/T 50689-2011 Code for design of lightning protection and earthing engineering for telecommunication bureaus (stations)
3.17 OMB Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of OMBs.
3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB This section describes the exteriors and dimensions of outdoor mini boxes (OMBs). The following figure shows the exteriors of OMBs. Figure 3-76 Exteriors of OMBs
The following figure shows the dimensions of OMBs. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
557
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-77 Dimensions of OMBs
3.17.2 Components in OMBs This section describes module and board configurations in OMBs.
Components in OMBs The following figure shows the components in OMBs, including an AC OMB and a DC OMB. Figure 3-78 Components in OMBs
The following table lists the components in an OMB.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
558
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-108 Components in an OMB No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximu m Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
HEUA
Mandatory
1
An HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The OMB supports the BBU3900.
3
AC surge protecti on box
Mandatory
1
An AC surge protection box provides surge protection for AC input power.
4
EPS304815AF
Mandatory
1
An EPS30-4815AF converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
5
DCDU03B
Mandatory
1
A DCDU-03B distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
Components in OMBs (Ver.C) The following shows the components in OMBs (Ver.C), including an AC OMB (Ver.C) and a DC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
559
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-79 Components in OMBs (Ver.C)
The following table lists the components in an OMB (Ver.C). Table 3-109 Components in an OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximu m Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
1
ELU
Mandatory
1
An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
2
PMU 11A
Mandatory
1
A PMU 11A manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
3
HEUB
Mandatory
1
An HEUB provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
4
PSU (R4850 G2)
Mandatory
2
A PSU converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
560
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Compo nent
Optional/ Mandator y
Maximu m Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
5
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The OMB (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
6
FAU01 D-01
Mandatory
2
Fans dissipate heat from the cabinet. They are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.
7
PDU10 D-01
Mandatory
1
A PDU10D-01 is a DC power distribution unit, supplying -48 V DC power to other components in a cabinet.
8
SPD
Mandatory
1
An SPD provides surge protection for AC input power.
9
ETP48 100-A1
Mandatory
1
An embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external AC input power into DC power.
3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C), such as dimensions, weight, ambient temperature, and relative humidity.
Engineering Specifications of an OMB The following table lists the engineering specifications of an OMB. Table 3-110 Engineering specifications of an OMB Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 15.35 in.)
Weight
AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg (55.12 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 22.5 kg (49.60 lb)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
561
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Ambient temperature
Without solar radiation: -40oC to 50oC (-40oF to 122oF) Short-term operation: 50oC to 55oC (122oF to 131oF) NOTE Short-term operation indicates that the continuous operation time does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated operation time within a year does not exceed 15 days.
Dustproof and waterproof
IP55
Installation mode
On a pole or wall
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Engineering Specifications of an OMB (Ver.C) The following table lists the engineering specifications of an OMB (Ver.C). Table 3-111 Engineering specifications of an OMB (Ver.C) Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Cabinet: 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 16.93 in.)
Weight
AC OMB: ≤ 30 kg (66.14 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 21 kg (46.30 lb)
Ambient temperature
-33oC to 50oC (-27.4oF to 122oF) NOTE The lower temperature alarm threshold is -33oC (-27.4oF).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Heat dissipation capability
The maximum heat dissipation capability is 650 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC (122oF).
Dustproof and waterproof
IP55
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
562
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Installation mode
On a pole or wall
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.18 IMB03 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IMB03s.
3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor mini box 03 (IMB03). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an IMB03. Figure 3-80 Exterior and dimensions of an IMB03
3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets This section describes the configurations of modules or boards in an IMB03. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
563
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Independent IMB03 Cabinets When the IMB03 is installed independently, the IMB03 can be supplied with AC or DC power. The following figure shows the components in IMB03 cabinets. Figure 3-81 Components in IMB03 cabinets
The following table describes the components in IMB03 cabinets. Table 3-112 Components in IMB03 cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabinet
No.
Componen t
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
AC IMB03
1
EPS30-4815 AFor ETP48100B1
Mandatory
1
An EPS30-4815 AF or ETP48100B1 converts 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
564
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Cabinet
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Componen t
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IMB03 supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
DC IMB03
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
1
DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B
Mandatory
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
A DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.
565
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Cabinet
3 Cabinet Description
No.
Componen t
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Descriptio n
2
BBU
Mandatory
1
A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IMB03 supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
IMB03+IFS06 When the IMB03 is installed on an IFS06, the components in an AC IMB03 or a DC IMB03 can be configured according to the instructions in DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IMB03, such as dimensions, weight, and ambient temperature. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an IMB03. Table 3-113 Engineering Specifications of an IMB03
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x 16.73 in. x 7.09 in.)
Weight
10 kg (22.05 lb)
Ambient temperature
-20oC to 50oC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
566
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.19 IFS06 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an IFS06.
3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor floor installation support 06 (IFS06). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an IFS06. Figure 3-82 Exterior and dimensions of an IFS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
567
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.19.2 Components of an IFS06 This section describes components of an IFS06. The following figure shows the exterior of an IFS06. Figure 3-83 Components of an IFS06
(1) Cable tray
(2) Ground bar 2
(3) Rear foot
(4) Front foot
(5) Adjustable beam
(6) Ground bar 1
(7) Main frame
-
3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IFS06, such as dimensions and weight. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an IFS06. Table 3-114 Engineering specifications of an IFS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
1730 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm (68.11 in. x 23.62 in. x 23.62 in.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Weight
45 kg (99.21 lb)
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.20 INS12 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an INS12.
3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor open rack 12 (INS12). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an INS12. Figure 3-84 Exterior and dimensions of an INS12
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
569
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
3.20.2 Components of an INS12 This section describes components of an INS12. The following figure shows the components of an INS12. Figure 3-85 Components of an INS12
(1) Left frame
(2) Bottom beam assembly
(3) Right frame
(4) Top beam
3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an INS12, such as dimensions, weight, and space for customer equipment. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an INS12. Table 3-115 Engineering specifications of an INS12
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
700 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)
Weight
12 kg (26.46 lb)
Space for customer equipment (H x W x D)
533.4 mm x 482.60 mm x 370 mm (21 in. x 19 in. x 14.57 in.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
570
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.21 IMS06 Description The IMS06 applies to a BTS3900 or BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IMS06.
3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06 An IMS06 is small and easy to transport. It applies to indoor scenarios and provides 6 U installation space.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IMS06. Figure 3-86 Exterior of an IMS06
Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IMS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
571
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-87 Dimensions of an IMS06
3.21.2 Components of an IMS06 This section describes module and board configurations in an IMS06. Based on the cabinet stacked with an IMS06 and the function of the IMS06, there are four configuration types for an IMS06, as shown in the following figure. Figure 3-88 IMS06 configurations
Configuration type a: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides power supply to RRUs installed remotely in the scenario where RFUs and RRUs are configured. Configuration type b: The IMS06 distributes DC power. Configuration type a+c: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides additional space for installing transmission equipment. Configuration type a+d: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides short-duration backup power for a base station.
The following table describes the configurations in an IMS06. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-116 IMS06 configurations No.
Module/ Board
Option al/ Mandat ory
Maxim um Quantit y Config ured in a Single Subrac k
Description
1
DCDU-12B
Optional
1
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) provides -48 V DC power for other components. When the site is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed to provide DC power to RRUs.
2
Filler panel
Optional
3
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots in an EPU05A-02 subrack.
3
PMU 11A
Mandato ry
1
A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU11A) manages the power system and battery, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.
4
PSU (R4850G2)
Mandato ry
5
A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.
5
EPU05A-02 subrack
Mandato ry
1
An EPU05A-02 subrack is used in separated macro base stations with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power inputs. It distributes the DC power.
6
Storage battery
Optional
One pack (four)
Storage batteries must be configured for a site that requires short-term backup power. IMS06 support 48V 100Ah storage battery. The IMS06 provides the following dimensions (H x W x D) for installing storage batteries: 288.5 mm x 470 mm x 396 mm (11.36 in. x 18.50 in. x 15.59 in.).
7
Transmission equipment
Optional
2
The IMS06 provides additional space for installing the transmission equipment. The total power consumption of the transmission equipment in a single IMS06 must be less than or equal to 350 W. For the specifications of the transmission equipment, see 3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
573
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
NOTE
If the storage batteries are installed, a temperature sensor is required to monitor the temperature of these storage batteries. For the installation position of a temperature sensor, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.
3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 This section describes the engineering specifications of an IMS06, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.
Input Power Specifications An IMS06 can be supplied with different AC input power. Power equipment in the cabinet converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC input power specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-117 Input power specifications of an IMS06 Power Supply
Rated Voltage
Operating Voltage
220 V AC singlephase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220 V AC threephase
l Line to neutral voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC
l Line to neutral voltage: 176 V AC to 290 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 346 V AC to 415 V AC
l Phase-to-phase voltage: 304 V AC to 500 V AC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-118 Equipment specifications of an IMS06 Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
350 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (13.78 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72 in.)
Weight
≤ 21 kg (empty subrack)
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-119 Environmental specifications of an IMS06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Noise
Meeting the ETS 300 753 3.1 standard Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
574
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Item
Specifications
Storage
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations" NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06 The customer equipment installed in Huawei cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering specifications.
Dimensions l
The width is 19 inch.
l
The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right cannot exceed 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 250 mm (9.84 in.).
l
When the front of the customer equipment aligns with the mounting bar of the IMS06, the routing space must not exceed 100 mm (3.94 in.). NOTE
When the front of the customer equipment exceeds the mounting bar of the IMS06, the routing space is reduced by the exceeding distance.
The following figure shows the dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for the customer equipment.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
575
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-89 Dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for the customer equipment
(1) Customer equipment using natural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment supporting heat dissipation from left to right
(3) Customer equipment supporting heat dissipation from front to rear
Heat Dissipation Requirements l
If the customer equipment houses built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.
l
If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.
Temperature Requirements The temperature requirements for the customer equipment in IMS06 is -20 °C to +55 °C.
3.22 IBC10 Description This section describes the cabinet configuration and engineering specifications of an IBC10.
3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor BBU cabinet 10 (IBC10). The following figure shows the exterior of an IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
576
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-90 Exterior of an IBC10
The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
577
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-91 Dimensions of an IBC10
3.22.2 Components in IBC10s This section describes module and board configurations in DC IBC10s.
Components in a DC IBC10 The following figure shows the components in a DC IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
578
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Figure 3-92 Components in a DC IBC10
The following table describes the components in a DC IBC10.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
579
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-120 Components in a DC IBC10 No.
Modul e
Optio nal or Mand atory
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Remarks
1
Firstlevel USU
Option al
2
A first-level USU connects multiple BBUs to exchange data among the BBUs. For details, see USU3900 Hardware Description or USU3910 Hardware Description.
2
Tempera ture sensor at the air intake vent of the BBU
Manda tory
2
A temperature sensor monitors the temperature at the air intake vent of the BBU.
3
ELU
Manda tory
1
An ELU automatically reports the cabinet type.
4
BBU
Option al
10
A BBU processes baseband signals. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IBC10 supports the BBU3900.
5
DCDU12C
Manda tory
3
A DCDU-12C provides DC power for other components in a cabinet. DCDU-12C modules are numbered 0#, 1#, and 2# from the top down.
6
FAU03 D
Manda tory
2
A DC cabinet can be configured with two fan assemblies. A fan assembly is configured with one FMUEA and three fans. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the FMUEA monitors the fans and reports alarms.
7
Secondlevel USU
Option al
1
A second-level USU manages first-level USUs. For details, see USU3900 Hardware Description or USU3910 Hardware Description.
3.22.3 Engineering Specifications IBC10 engineering specifications include power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that an IBC10 needs to comply with.
Power Supply The following table lists input power supported by an IBC10. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
580
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Table 3-121 Input power for an IBC10 Input Power
Voltage Range
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Equipment Specifications The following table lists dimensions and the weight of an IBC10. Table 3-122 Equipment specifications of an IBC10 Cabinet Name
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
IBC10 DC
2,000 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm (78.74 in. x 23.62 in. x 23.62 in.)
≤ 105 kg (excluding USU and BBU)
Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environment specifications of an IBC10. Table 3-123 Environment specifications of an IBC10 Item
Specifications
Operating temperature
-5°C to +50°C
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
Atmospheric pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of an IBC10. NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications pertain to the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.
Table 3-124 Surge protection specifications of the ports on an IBC10
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Specifications
DC power port
Differential mode
2 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Common mode
4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
581
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3 Cabinet Description
Standards The following table lists the standards that an IBC10 needs to comply with. Table 3-125 Standards for an IBC10 Item
Standard
Security standard
l IEC 60950-1: 2005 (2nd Edition) + A1: 2009
Protectio n rating
IP20
Operatin g environm ent
ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1
Storage environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"
l EN 60950-1: 2006 + A11: 2009 + A1: 2010 + A12: 2011
NOTE l The validity period is one year. l The product can function properly within the validity period if the storage environment meets the preceding standards.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Transport ation environm ent
ETSI EN300019-1-2 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"
Antiseismic protectio n
l IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff: Vibration -Time-history method
Earthqua ke
ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"
Noise
ETS 300 753 3.1
l YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
582
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4
Component Description
About This Chapter Components in a cabinet can be classified into BBU, RF modules, power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, temperature control devices, environment monitoring devices, and other devices, in terms of function. 4.1 BBU The BBU is used to process baseband signals in 3900 series base stations. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. 4.2 RF Modules In 3900 series base stations, an RFU or RRU can be configured to meet RF module configuration requirements in different scenarios. 4.3 Power Equipment This section describes all types of power equipment and types of cabinets supported by the power equipment. 4.4 Monitoring Devices This section describes monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the monitoring devices. For specific monitoring schemes in base stations, see Monitor Management. 4.5 Surge Protection Devices This section describes surge protection devices and types of cabinets supported by the surge protection devices. 4.6 Temperature Control Devices This section describes temperature control devices and types of cabinets supported by the temperature control devices. 4.7 Environment Monitoring Device This section describes environment monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the environment monitoring devices. 4.8 Other Devices This section describes other devices besides power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, and temperature control devices, and environment monitoring devices, and types of cabinets supported by the other devices. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
583
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.1 BBU The BBU is used to process baseband signals in 3900 series base stations. For details, see BBU Hardware Description.
4.2 RF Modules In 3900 series base stations, an RFU or RRU can be configured to meet RF module configuration requirements in different scenarios. l
For details about the RFU hardware, see RFU Hardware Description.
l
For details about the RRU hardware, see the related manual of RRU hardware description, such as RRU3926 Hardware Description.
4.3 Power Equipment This section describes all types of power equipment and types of cabinets supported by the power equipment.
4.3.1 EPS 01 An EPS 01 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power, it can be used in an APM30H(Ver.B) cabinet. The EPS 01 is classified into four types: EPS 01A, EPS 01B, EPS 01C, and EPS 01D. An EPS 01A or EPS 01C applies to a separated macro base station, and an EPS 01B or EPS 01D applies to a distributed base station.
Components of an EPS 01 An EPS 01 consists of an EPS 01 subrack, a PMU 01B, and PSUs (EPW30-48A).
Components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C The following figure shows the components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
584
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-1 Components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)
(3) EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrack
Components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D The following figure shows the components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D. Figure 4-2 Components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)
(3) EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack
EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrack An EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes AC or DC power to other components. An EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack applies to the separated macro base station in different AC input scenarios.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table lists the types and applications of EPS 01A and EPS 01C subracks.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
585
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-1 Types and applications of EPS 01A and EPS 01C subracks Subrack
Application
Remarks
EPS 01A
Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input
EPS 01C
Separated macro base station with external 110 V AC input
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (EPW30-48A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 show the exteriors of an EPS 01A subrack and an EPS 01C subrack, respectively. Figure 4-3 Exterior of an EPS 01A subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) Short-circuiting bara
(6) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(7) Circuit breaker (8) Circuit breaker for (9) Circuit breaker for storage batteries RFC 1 for RFC 2
(11) Fuses
(12) DC output ports
(13) Output port for RFC 1
(16) Circuit breaker (17) Spare fuse box (18) Extraction tool for lithium batteriesb
(4) AC surge protector
(5) Circuit breakers for PSUs (10) TMC circuit breaker
(14) Output port for (15) Output port RFC 2 for storage batteries -
-
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed. b: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
586
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-4 Exterior of an EPS 01C subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) AC surge protector
(6) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(7) Circuit breaker for (8) Circuit breaker RFC 1 for RFC 2
(4) Circuit breakers (5) AC OUTPUT for PSUs circuit breaker (9) TMC circuit breaker
(10) Fuses
(11) DC output ports (12) Output port for RFC 1
(13) Output port for (14) Output port (15) Circuit breaker RFC 2 for storage batteries for lithium batteriesa
(16) Spare fuse box
-
(17) Extraction tool
-
-
NOTE
a: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Functions The EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
The EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
The EPS 01A or EPS 01C provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
587
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The following figure shows the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack. Table 4-2and Table 4-3list the specifications of the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack. Figure 4-5 Input terminals and output terminals on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Table 4-2 AC input terminals and output terminals on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack AC Input Terminal or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Table 4-3 DC output terminals or ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
TMC
TMC
Breaker
1x25 A
LOAD0
Fan
Fuse
1x15 A
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
LOAD1 and LOAD2
BBU
2x15 A
LOAD3
IBBSa
1x15 A
One of the LOAD4 to LOAD7 ports
TMb
4x5 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
588
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
NAc
RFC 1
Breaker
1x80 A
NAc
RFC 2
Power series 120 connector
NAc
BAT
1x100 A
NOTE
l a: IBBS is the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. When an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD3 is the DC output port for the fan power cable in the IBBS200D. When an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD3 is the DC output port for the TEC power cable in the IBBS200T. l b: TM is the customer transmission equipment. The LOAD4 to LOAD7 ports are DC output ports for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. l c: Power ports for RFC 1, RFC 2, and storage batteries are the connectors from the EPS subrack, and there is no silkscreen for them on the panels.
Circuit Breaker There are multiple circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack to control DC outputs. Figure 4-6shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-4lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
589
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-6 Circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Table 4-4 Circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPS 01A
PSU
3x16 A
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPS 01C
PSU
1x40 A
AC output circuit breaker
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x100 A
RFC circuit breaker
RFC 1 and RFC 2
2x80 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
590
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x25 A
EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes AC and DC power. An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.
Applications of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack The following table lists the applications of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Table 4-5 Applications of the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack Type
Application
Description
EPS 01B
Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power
EPS 01D
Distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (EPW30-48A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.
Exteriors Figure 4-7and Figure 4-8show the exteriors of the EPS 01B and EPS 01D subracks, respectively.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
591
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-7 Exterior of the EPS 01B subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) Short-circuiting bar(1) (4) AC surge protector
(5) PSU circuit breaker
(6) AC OUTPUT circuit (7) TMC circuit breaker (8) Circuit breaker for breaker storage batteries
(9) Breakers
(10) Fuses
(11) DC output terminals (12) Output terminal for storage batteries
(13) Circuit breaker for lithium batteries(2)
(14) Spare fuse box
(15) Extraction tool
-
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed. b: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
592
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-8 Exterior of the EPS 01D subrack
(1) AC OUTPUT
(2) AC INPUT
(3) AC surge protector
(5) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(6) TMC circuit breaker (7) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(8) Breakers
(9) Fuses
(10) DC output terminals (11) Output terminal for storage batteries
(12) Circuit breaker for lithium batteriesa
(13) Spare fuse box
(14) Extraction tool
-
-
(4) PSU circuit breaker
NOTE
a: The circuit breaker for the lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.
Function An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
The EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack provides 16 DC outputs for a distributed base station.
Figure 4-9shows the input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Table 4-6and Table 4-7list the specifications of the input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
593
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-9 Input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Table 4-6 AC input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-7 DC output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
LOAD 8 to LOAD 13
RRU
Breaker
6x20 A
TMC
TMC
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
LOAD 0
FAN
LOAD 1 and LOAD 2
BBU
2x15 A
LOAD 3
IBBS
1x15 A
LOAD 4 to LOAD 7
TM
4x5 A
-
BAT
1x25 A Fuse
Breaker
1x15 A
1x100 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Power series 120 connector (gray)
594
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack to control the DC outputs. Figure 4-10shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-8lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 4-10 Circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Table 4-8 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPS 01B)
PSU
3x16 A
PSU circuit breaker (EPS 01D)
PSU
1x40 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
595
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
AC output circuit breaker
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x100 A
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x25 A
4.3.2 EPS30-4815AF An EPS30-4815AF converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in IMB03 and OMB cabinets.
Components of an EPS30-4815AF An EPS30-4815AF consists of the EPS30-4815AF subrack, DCDU-05, PMU (EPMU03), and PSUs (GERM4815T). The following figure shows the components of an EPS30-4815AF. Figure 4-11 Components of an EPS30-4815AF
(1) DCDU-05
(2) PSU (GERM4815T)
(3) PMU (EPMU03)
(4) EPS30-4815AF Subrack
EPS30-4815AF Subrack An EPS30-4815AF subrack houses the PMU (EPMU03), PSUs (GERM4815T), and DCDU-05 and distributes AC and DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Figure 4-12 Exterior of an EPS30-4815AF subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
596
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Figure 4-13 Ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack
The following table describes the ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Table 4-9 Ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1) AC input port
INPUT
C13 connector
AC power input port
(2) Power input port for the BBU and fan
LOAD1
H4 connector
Input port (10 A) for the BBU and HEUA
(3) Power input port for the DCDU-05
LOAD2
H4 connector
Input port (20 A) for the transmission equipment
(4) Power input port for the storage batteries
BATT
H4 connector
Input port (20 A) for the storage batteries
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an EPS30-4815AF.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
597
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-10 Technical specifications of an EPS30-4815AF Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC 110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Input voltage frequency
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode
4.3.3 EPS4890 An EPS4890 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B) and IMB03(ICR scenario) cabinets.
Components of an EPS4890 An EPS4890 consists of the EPS4890 subrack, PMU 01B, and PSUs (EPW30-48A). The following figure shows the components of an EPS4890. Figure 4-14 Components of an EPS4890
(1) PMU 01B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(3) EPS4890 Subrack
598
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
EPS4890 Subrack An EPS4890 subrack houses the PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS4890 subrack. Figure 4-15 Exterior of an EPS4890 subrack
Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack. Figure 4-16 Terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack
The following table describes the terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack. Table 4-11 Terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Terminal/Circuit Breaker
Remarks
(1) Power input terminals
Connects to the AC input power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
599
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Terminal/Circuit Breaker
Remarks
(2) Circuit breakers for the storage batteries
Controls power supply to the storage batteries.
(3) Power input terminal for the storage batteries
The BAT(-) terminal connects to the negative poles of the storage batteries, and the BAT(+) terminal connects to the positive poles of the storage batteries.
(4) Power output terminals
LOAD1(-) and LOAD2(-) wiring terminals connect to NEG(-) power cables, and RTN(+) wiring terminals connect to RTN(+) power cables.
4.3.4 EPS24S48100DC An EPS24S48100DC converts +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03(ICR scenario) cabinets.
Components of an EPS24S48100DC An EPS24S48100DC consists of the EPS24S48100DC subrack and PSUs (EPW25-24S48D). The following figure shows the components of an EPS24S48100DC. Figure 4-17 Components of an EPS24S48100DC
(1) PSU (EPW25-24S48D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) EPS24S48100DC Subrack
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
600
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
EPS24S48100DC Subrack An EPS24S48100DC subrack houses the PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS24S48100DC subrack. Figure 4-18 Exterior of an EPS24S48100DC subrack
Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack. Figure 4-19 Ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack
The following table describes the ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
601
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-12 Ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack Port or Terminal
Silkscre en
Conne ctor
Remarks
(1) Power input terminals
DC INPUT
OT terminal
The + wiring terminal connects to the +24 V power cable, and the - wiring terminal connects to the +24 V RTN cable.
(2) Alarm port
ALM
Cord end terminal
Connects to the PSU monitoring signal cable.
(3) In-position signal port
PRESEN T
RJ45 connect or
Connects to the PSU in-position signal cable.
(4) Power output terminals
DC OUTPU T
OT terminal
The LOAD(-) terminal connects to the -48 V power cable, and the RTN(+) terminal connects to the -48 V RTN cable.
4.3.5 EPU03A An EPU03A converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power, it can be used in an APM30H(Ver.C) cabinet. The EPU03A is classified into four types: EPU03A-02, EPU03A-03, EPU03A-04, and EPU03A-05. An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 applies to a separated macro base station, and an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 applies to a distributed base station.
Components of an EPU03A An EPU03A consists of an EPU03A subrack, a PMU 01B, and PSUs (PSU4850A).
Components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 The following figure shows the components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
602
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-20 Components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (PSU4850A)
(3) EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 Subrack
Components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 The following figure describes the components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05. Figure 4-21 Components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (PSU4850A)
(3) EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack
EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 Subrack An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes AC or DC power to other components. An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack applies to a separated macro base station in different AC input scenarios.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table lists the types and applications of EPU03A-02 and EPU03A-04 subracks. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
603
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-13 Types and applications of EPU03A-02 and EPU03A-04 subracks Subrack
Application
Remarks
EPU03A-02
Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input
EPU03A-04
Separated macro base station with external 110 V AC input
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (PSU4850A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-22 and Figure 4-23 show the exteriors of an EPU03A-02 subrack and an EPU03A-04 subrack, respectively. Figure 4-22 Exterior of an EPU03A-02 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT (3) Circuit breakers for (4) AC OUTPUT PSU 1 to PSU 3 circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(6) TMC circuit breaker
(7) BBU_0 circuit (8) BBU_1 circuit breaker breaker
(9) RFC 1 circuit breaker
(10) RFC 2 circuit breaker
(11) Extraction tool (12) Spare fuse box
(13) Output port for storage batteries
(14) Output port for RFC 2
(15) Output port for RFC 1
(16) DC output ports
(18) AC surge protector
(19) Short-circuiting bara
-
(17) Fuses
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU03A-02 subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPU03A-02 subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
604
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-23 Exterior of an EPU03A-04 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT
(3) Circuit breaker for the PSU
(4) AC OUTPUT1 circuit breaker
(5) AC OUTPUT2 circuit breaker
(6) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(7) TMC circuit breaker
(8) BBU_0 circuit (9) BBU_1 circuit breaker breaker
(10) RFC 1 circuit breaker
(11) RFC 2 circuit breaker
(12) Extraction tool (13) Spare fuse box
(16) Output port for (17) DC output RFC 1 ports
(18) Fuses
(14) Output port for storage batteries
(15) Output port for RFC 2
(19) AC surge protector
-
Functions An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.
Ports The following figure shows the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack. Table 4-14and Table 4-15list the specifications of the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
605
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-24 Input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Table 4-14 AC input terminals and output terminals on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack AC Input Terminal or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Table 4-15 DC output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specification s of the Protector
Connector
TMC
TMC
Breaker
1x30 A
BBU_0 and BBU_1
BBU
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
LOAD0 and LOAD1
TMa
LOAD2
TMa
LOAD3
Fan or TECb
LOAD4
TM or EMUA or EMUBc
LOAD5
Fand
2x25 A Fuse
2x5 A 4x15 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
606
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal or Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specification s of the Protector
Connector
NAe
RFC 1 and RFC 2
Breaker
2x125 A
Power series 120 connector (blue) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)
1x160 A
Power series 175 connector (gray) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in. 2)
BAT
NOTE
a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. The LOAD0, LOAD1, LOAD2, and LOAD4 ports are DC output ports for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When an IBBS200D is configured, the LOAD3 port is the DC output port for the fan power cable in the IBBS200D. When an IBBS200T is configured, the LOAD3 port is the DC output port for the TEC power cable in the IBBS200T. c: When an EMUA or EMUB is configured, the LOAD4 port is the DC output port for the EMUA or EMUB. When no EMUA or EMUB is configured, the LOAD4 port can supply power to the transmission equipment. d: The LOAD5 port is the DC output port for the fan assembly in the APM30H. e: Power ports for RFC 1, RFC 2, and storage batteries are the connectors from the EPU subrack, and there is no silkscreen for them on the panels.
Circuit Breaker There are multiple circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack to control DC outputs. Figure 4-25shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-16lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
607
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-25 Circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Table 4-16 Circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPU03A-02
PSU 1 to PSU 3
3x20 A
Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPU03A-04
PSUs
1x63 A
AC output circuit breaker in the EPU03A-02
AC OUTPUT
1x15 A
AC output circuit breaker in the EPU03A-04
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x15 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
608
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x160 A
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x30 A
BBU circuit breaker
BBU_0 and BBU_1
2x25 A
RFC circuit breaker
RFC 1 and RFC 2
2x125 A
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack. Table 4-17 Technical specifications of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack Power Supply
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 150 A
EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes AC or DC power to components in the cabinet. An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.
Applications of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack The following table describes the applications of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. Table 4-18 Applications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Type
Application
Description
EPU03A-03
Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power
EPU03A-05
Distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power
It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (PSU4850A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
609
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exteriors Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27 show the exteriors of the EPU03A-03 and EPU03A-05 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-26 Exterior of the EPU03A-03 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT
(3) Circuit breakers for PSU 1 to PSU 3
(4) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for storage batteries
(6) TMC circuit breaker
(7) BBU_0 circuit breaker (8) BBU_1 circuit breaker
(9) Circuit breakers for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(10) Extraction tool
(11) Spare fuse box
(12) Output terminal for storage batteries
(13) DC output terminals
(14) Fuses
(15) AC surge protector
(16) Short-circuiting bara
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
610
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-27 Exterior of the EPU03A-05 subrack
(1) AC INPUT
(2) AC OUTPUT
(3) PSU circuit breaker
(4) AC OUTPUT 1 circuit breaker
(5) AC OUTPUT 2 circuit (6) Circuit breaker for (7) TMC circuit breaker breaker storage batteries
(8) BBU_0 circuit breaker
(9) BBU_1 circuit breaker (10) Circuit breakers for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(11) Extraction tool
(12) Spare fuse box
(13) Output terminal for storage batteries
(15) Fuses
(16) AC surge protector
(14) DC output terminals
Function An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack provides 16 DC outputs for a distributed base station.
Terminals The following figure shows the power input and output terminals on an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. For details, see Table 4-19 and Table 4-20.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
611
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-28 Power input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Table 4-19 AC input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-20 DC input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
RRU 0 to RRU 5
RRU
Breaker
6x25 A
TMC
TMC
1x30 A
Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
BBU_0 and BBU_1
BBU
2x25 A
LOAD 0 and LOAD 1
TM
LOAD 2
TM
LOAD 3
TEC/FAN (battery cabinet)
Fusea
2x5 A 4x15 A
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
612
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
LOAD 4
EMUA or EMUB
LOAD 5
FAN
-
BAT
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
Breaker
1x160 A
Power series 175 connector (gray) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in. 2)
NOTE
a: The spare fuse box can provide 5 A and 15 A fuses, which can be used to replace broken ones onsite.
Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 4-29 Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
613
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPU03A-03)
PSU1 to PSU3
3x20 A
PSU circuit breaker (EPU03A-05)
PSU
1x63 A
AC output circuit breaker (EPU03A-03)
AC OUTPUT
1x15 A
AC output circuit breakers (EPU03A-05)
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x15 A
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x160 A
TMC circuit breaker
TMC
1x30 A
BBU circuit breakers
BBU_0 and BBU_1
2x25 A
RRU circuit breakers
RRU0 to RRU5
6x25 A
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. Table 4-22 Technical specifications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack Component
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 150 A
4.3.6 EPU05A An EPU05A converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. EPU05A types include EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, EPU05A-05, EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, and EPU05A-09. The EPU05A-02, EPU05A-04, EPU05A-06, and EPU05A-08 can be used in macro base stations, and the EPU05A-03, EPU05A-05, EPU05A-07, and EPU05A-09 can be used in distributed base stations. The EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, and EPU05A-05 can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets, APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, and BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, or IMS06s. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
614
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, and EPU05A-09 can be used in APM30Hs (Ver.E).
Components in an EPU05A An EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05 consists of an EPU05A subrack, a PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). An EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 consists of an EPU05A subrack, PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01.
Components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04. Figure 4-30 Components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PMU 11A
It is always installed in slot 0.
(2)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(3)
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots.
(4)
EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack
-
Components of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
615
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-31 Components of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PMU 11A
It is always installed in slot 0.
(2)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(3)
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots.
(4)
EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
-
Components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
616
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-32 Components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(2)
PDU01D-01
It is optional and can be installed in slot 6.
(3)
PDU03D-02
It is optional and can be installed in slot 7, 8, or 9.
(4)
EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 Subracks
-
-
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in any of vacant slots 1 to 9.
Components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
617
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-33 Components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09
No.
Component
Description
(1)
PSU (R4850G2)
The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.
(2)
PDU01D-01
It is optional and can be installed in slot 6.
(3)
PDU03D-02
It is optional and can be installed in slot 7, 8, or 9.
(4)
EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 Subracks
-
-
Filler panel
Filler panels must be installed in any of vacant slots 1 to 9.
EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 applies to a macro base station in different AC input scenarios.
Application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack The following table describes the application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-23 Application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Type
Application
Description
EPU05A-02
Macro base station with external 220 V AC input
It is a 5 U subrack and houses a maximum of five PSUs (R4850G2)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
618
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Type
Application
Description
EPU05A-04
Macro base station with external 110 V AC input
and one PMU. It distributes largeand small-capacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35 show the exteriors of EPU05A-02 and EPU05A-04 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-34 Exterior of an EPU05A-02 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, PSU2/5 circuit breaker, and PSU3 circuit breaker
(3) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(4) BAT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC1
(6) Circuit breaker for RFC2
(7) Output port for the storage battery
(8) RFC1 output port
(9) RFC2 output port
(10) LOAD0 to LOAD8 output (11) Spare fuse box ports
(12) Short-circuiting bara
(13) AC INPUT
(14) AC OUTPUT
-
-
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
619
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-35 Exterior of an EPU05A-04 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU circuit breaker
(3) AC OUTPUT1/AC OUTPUT2 circuit breaker
(4) BAT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC1
(6) Circuit breaker for RFC2
(7) Output port for the storage battery
(8) RFC1 output port
(9) RFC2 output port
(10) LOAD0 to LOAD8 (11) Spare fuse box output ports
(12) AC INPUT
(13) AC OUTPUT
-
-
-
Function An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the AC junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.
Port The following figure shows the power input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-24 and Table 4-25 list the ports in detail.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
620
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-36 Power input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Table 4-24 AC input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT (EPU05A-02)
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT (EPU05A-04)
L1, L2, N, PE
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-25 DC input and output ports and terminals on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC output ports
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
LOAD0 and LOAD1
BBU
Fusec
9x30 A
EPC4
LOAD2
FAN
LOAD3
TM_0a
LOAD4
TM_1
LOAD5
TM_2 or EMUA or EMUB
LOAD6
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD7
TMC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
621
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC output ports
DC Power Supply Unit
LOAD8
IBBSb
RFC1
RFC1
RFC2
RFC2
BAT
BAT
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
Breaker
2x125 A
OT terminal (M6)
1x250 A
OT terminal (M8)
NOTE
a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output port for the IBBS200D fan power cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output port for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: The spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement.
Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack panel to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-37 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
622
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-26 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen on the Panel
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPU05A-02)
PSU1/4
1x40 A/1 P
PSU2/5
1x40 A/1 P
PSU3
1x25 A/1 P
PSU circuit breakers (EPU05A-04)
PSU
1x100 A/2 P
AC output circuit breaker (EPU05A-02)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A/2 P
AC output circuit breaker (EPU05A-04)
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x16 A/1 P
Storage battery circuit breaker
BAT
1x125 A/2 P
RFC circuit breaker
RFC 1 and RFC 2
2x125 A/1 P
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-27 Technical specifications of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack Component
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 250 A
EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 Subrack An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). It also distributes AC and DC power. The EPU05A-03 and EPU05A-05 subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.
Applications of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 Subrack The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
623
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-28 Applications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack Type
Application
Description
EPU05A-03
Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power
EPU05A-05
Distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power
It is a 5 U subrack and houses a maximum of five PSUs (R4850G2) and one PMU 11A. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Exteriors Figure 4-38and Figure 4-39show the exteriors of the EPU05A-03 and EPU05A-05 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-38 Exterior of the EPU05A-03 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, (3) AC OUTPUT circuit (4) BAT circuit breaker PSU2/5 circuit breaker, and breaker PSU3 circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC 1
(6) Output terminal for storage batteries
(7) Output terminal for RFC 1
(8) Output terminals for LOAD 0 to LOAD 8
(9) Output terminals for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) Short-circuiting bara
(12) AC INPUT
(13) AC OUTPUT
-
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
624
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.
Figure 4-39 Exterior of the EPU05A-05 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) PSU circuit breaker (3) AC OUTPUT 1 or AC OUTPUT 2 circuit breaker
(4) BAT circuit breaker
(5) Circuit breaker for RFC (6) Output terminal for (7) Output terminal for RFC (8) LOAD 0 to LOAD 8 1 storage batteries 1 output terminals (9) Output terminals for RRU 0 to RRU 5
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) AC INPUT
(12) AC OUTPUT
Function An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 distributes AC and DC power. l
l
An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack provides 17 DC outputs for a distributed base station.
Terminals The following figure shows the power input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack, as shown in Table 4-29, Table 4-30. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
625
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-40 Power input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Table 4-29 AC input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT (EPU05A-03)
L1, L2, L3, N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT (EPU05A-05)
L1, L2, N, PE
AC OUTPUT
L1, N1, L2, N2
Table 4-30 DC input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
LOAD 0 and LOAD 1
BBU
Fusec
15x30 A
EPC 4
LOAD 2
FAN
LOAD 3
TM_0a
LOAD 4
TM_1
LOAD 5
TM_2 or EMUA or EMUB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
626
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DC Output Terminal
DC Power Supply Unit
LOAD 6
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD 7
TMC
LOAD 8
IBBSb
RRU 0 to RRU 5
RRU
RFC 1
RFC
BAT
BAT
Protector
Protector Specification
Connector
EPC 5 Breaker
1x125 A
OT terminal (M6)
1x250 A
OT terminal (M8)
NOTE
a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal connecting to the IBBS200D fan power cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal connecting to the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: The spare fuse box can provide five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses, which can be used to replace broken ones onsite.
Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack panel to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of the circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
627
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-41 Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Table 4-31 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
PSU circuit breakers (EPU05A-03)
PSU1/4
1x40 A/1 P
PSU2/5
1x40 A/1 P
PSU3
1x25 A/1 P
PSU circuit breaker (EPU05A-05)
PSU
1x100 A/2 P
AC output circuit breaker (EPU05A-03)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A/2 P
AC output circuit breakers (EPU05A-05)
AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2
2x16 A/1 P
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
628
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirement for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breaker for storage batteries
BAT
1x125 A/2 P
RFC circuit breaker
RFC1
1x125 A/1 P
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack. Table 4-32 Technical specifications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack Component
Specifications
Output voltage
-44 V DC to -58 V DC
Rated voltage
-53.5 V DC
Output current
0 A to 250 A
EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 Subracks An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack houses PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 subracks can be used in separated macro base stations with different AC power inputs.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-06 subrack and an EPU05A-08 subrack. Table 4-33 Applications of an EPU05A-06 subrack and an EPU05A-08 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Model
Application
Description
EPU05A-06
Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input
EPU05A-08
Separated macro base station with an external 110 V AC power input
It is 5 U high and can house five PSUs (R4850G2) with 3000 W power of each PSU, three PDU03D-02s, and one PDU01D-01. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
629
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior Figure 4-42 and Figure 4-43 show the exteriors of EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-42 Exterior of an EPU05A-06 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(3) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker
(4) Output port and circuit breaker for RFC 1
(5) Output port and circuit (6) BAT output terminals breaker for RFC 2 for storage batteries
(7) Indicator for the storage battery circuit status
(8) Button switch for the storage battery circuit
(9) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals
(10) PMIU
(11) Spare fuse box
(12) AC OUTPUT port
(13) AC INPUT port
(14) Short-circuiting bar
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
630
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-43 Exterior of an EPU05A-08 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs (3) AC OUTPUT 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 circuit breaker
(4) Output port and circuit breaker for RFC 1
(5) Output port and circuit (6) BAT output terminals for (7) Indicator for the breaker for RFC 2 storage batteries storage battery circuit status
(8) Button switch for the storage battery circuit
(9) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals
(10) Power monitoring interface unit (PMIU)
(11) Spare fuse box
(12) AC OUTPUT port
(13) AC INPUT port
-
-
-
NOTE
l If a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. If the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, you must remove the short-circuiting bar. l Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 220 V AC power are gray. Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 110 V AC power are blue. l The button switch for storage battery circuit controls the power supply of the storage batteries. If the indicator for storage battery circuit status is steady off, the storage battery circuit is interrupted. If the indicator is steady on, the storage battery circuit is normal. l Before maintaining storage batteries, turn off the switch for storage battery circuit.
Function An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 distributes AC input power and DC output power. l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC power outputs (one for an SOU and one for the AC junction box on the left of a cabinet). The AC junction box provides four AC power outputs for heaters or heating films.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
631
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
– l
Provides a circuit breaker for each of five PSUs.
An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 provides 12 DC power outputs by default and can be configured with a PDU01D-01 and a PDU03D-02 to provide a maximum of 22 power outputs to meet DC power distribution requirements in a separated macro base station.
Port The following figure shows AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack. Table 4-34and Table 4-35list the specifications of AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports. Figure 4-44 AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack
Table 4-34 AC power input and output terminals on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
AC Input or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-06)
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-08)
L1, L2, N, and PE
AC OUTPUT terminal
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
632
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-35 DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack DC Power Output Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD0 and LOAD1
BBU
Fusec
9x30 A
EPC4
LOAD2
FAN
LOAD3
TM_0a
LOAD4
TM_1
LOAD5
TM_2, EMUA, or EMUB
LOAD6
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD7
TMC
LOAD8
IBBSb
RFC 1
RFC 1
Breaker
2x100 A
RFC 2
RFC 2
OT terminal (M6)
BATd
BAT
-
-
-
a: TM is customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC power output terminals for transmission equipment, supporting four DC power outputs. b: If an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power cable. If an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: A spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement. d: The BAT port in an EPU subrack does not have a protective component. The circuit breaker BAT in a battery cabinet requires 250 A current.
Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack to control DC power outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-45 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
633
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-36 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs
PSU1, PSU2, PSU3, PSU4, and PSU5
5x32 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-06)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-08)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
Circuit breakers for RFCs
RFC1 and RFC2
2x100 A
EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 Subracks An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack houses PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 subracks can be used in distributed base stations with different AC power inputs.
Types and Applications of Subracks The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack. Table 4-37 Applications of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack Model
Application
Description
EPU05A-07
Distributed base station with an external 220 V AC power input
EPU05A-09
Distributed base station with an external 110 V AC power input
It is 5 U high and can house five PSUs (R4850G2) with 3000 W power of each PSU, three PDU03D-02s, and one PDU01D-01. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.
Exterior Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the exteriors of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
634
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-46 Exterior of EPU05A-07 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
(3) AC OUTPUT circuit (4) LOAD9 to LOAD14 breaker power output terminals
(5) Power output terminals (6) Indicator for the storage (7) Button switch for the (8) LOAD0 to LOAD8 for storage batteries battery circuit status storage battery circuit power output terminals (9) Power monitoring interface unit (PMIU)
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) AC OUTPUT terminal
(12) AC INPUT terminal
(13) Short-circuiting bar
-
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
635
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-47 Exterior of an EPU05A-09 subrack
(1) AC surge protector
(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs (3) AC OUTPUT circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 breaker
(4) LOAD9 to LOAD14 power output terminals
(5) Power output terminals for storage batteries
(6) Indicator for the storage battery circuit status
(7) Button switch for the storage battery circuit
(8) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals
(9) PMIU
(10) Spare fuse box
(11) AC OUTPUT terminal
(12) AC INPUT terminal
NOTE
l If a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. If the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, you must remove the short-circuiting bar. l Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 220 V AC power are gray. Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 110 V AC power are blue. l The button switch for storage battery circuit controls the power supply of the storage batteries. If the indicator for storage battery circuit status is steady off, the storage battery circuit is interrupted. If the indicator is steady on, the storage battery circuit is normal. l Before maintaining storage batteries, turn off the switch for storage battery circuit.
Function An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 distributes AC input power and DC output power. l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –
Provides two AC power outputs (one for an SOU and one for the AC junction box on the left of a cabinet). The AC junction box provides four AC power outputs for heaters or heating films.
–
Reports AC input surge protection alarms.
–
Provides a circuit breaker for each of five PSUs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
636
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
l
4 Component Description
An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 provides 16 DC power outputs by default and can be configured with a PDU01D-01 and a PDU03D-02 to provide a maximum of 26 DC power outputs to meet DC power distribution requirements in a distributed base station.
Port The following figure shows AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack. Table 4-38 and Table 4-39 list the specifications of AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports. Figure 4-48 AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack
Table 4-38 AC power input and output terminals on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
AC Input or Output Terminal
Wiring Terminal
Connector
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-07)
L1, L2, L3, and N
OT terminal (M6)
AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-09)
L1, L2, N, and PE
AC OUTPUT terminal
L1, N1, L2, and N2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
637
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-39 DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack DC Power Output Port
DC Power Supply Unit
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports
BBU
Fusec
9x30 A
EPC4
LOAD2 port
FAN
LOAD3 port
TM_0a
LOAD4 port
TM_1
LOAD5 port
TM_2, EMUA, or EMUB
LOAD6 port
TM_3 or BBU
LOAD7
TMC
LOAD8 port
IBBSb
LOAD9 to LOAD14 portsd
RRUs
Fuse
6x30 A
EPC5
BATe
BAT
-
-
-
a: TM is customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC power output terminals for transmission equipment, supporting four DC power outputs. b: If an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power cable. If an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: A spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement. d: LOAD9 to LOAD14 ports configured with EPC5 connectors supply power to RRUs. e: The BAT port in an EPU subrack does not have a protective component. The circuit breaker BAT in a battery cabinet requires 250 A current.
Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack to control DC power outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-49 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
638
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-40 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Requirements for the Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers for PSUs
PSU1/2/3/4/5
5x32 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-07)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-09)
AC OUTPUT
1x16 A
4.3.7 ETP48150-A3 The ETP48150-A3 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in a BTS3900(Ver.C) cabinet.
Components of an ETP48150-A3 The ETP48150-A3 consists of the ETP48150-A3 subrack, PMU 01B, and PSUs (PSU4850A). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48150-A3. Figure 4-50 Components of an ETP48150-A3
(1) PMU 01B
(2) PSU (PSU4850A)
(3) ETP48150-A3 Subrack
ETP48150-A3 Subrack The ETP48150-A3 subrack provides slots for the PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes DC power to other components. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
639
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Figure 4-51 Exterior of an ETP48150-A3 subrack
Ports The following figure shows the components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Figure 4-52 Components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack
The following table describes the components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Table 4-41 Components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Component
Connector
Remarks
(1) Power input terminals
OT terminals
Connect to the AC input power cables.
(2) Circuit breakers
-
Control the power output.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
640
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Component
Connector
Remarks
(3) Power output terminals
OT terminals
The positive pole is connected to the RTN(+) terminal on the DCDU-11A. The negative pole is connected to the NEG(-) terminal on the DCDU-11A.
4.3.8 ETP48400 The ETP48400 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in a BTS3900AL(Ver.A) cabinet.
Components of an ETP48400 The ETP48400 consists of the ETP48400 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48400. Figure 4-53 Components of an ETP48400
(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B
(2) PSU (R4850G2)
(3) ETP48400 Subrack
The following table describes the components of an ETP48400. Table 4-42 Components of an ETP48400
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Component
Description
ETP48400 subrack
Figure 4-53shows how slots are numbered in an ETP48400 subrack.
PMU 11A
It is installed in slot 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
641
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Component
Description
PSU (R4850G2)
A minimum of two PSUs must be configured. The PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots from slot 1 to slot 7.
ETP48400 Subrack The ETP48400 subrack distributes AC input power and DC output power, and provides slots for a PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and communication interfaces between the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48400 subrack. Figure 4-54 Exterior of an ETP48400 subrack
(1) Power supply terminal (2) Power supply terminal for DCDU-12C module 0 for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet
(3) Power supply terminal for the TMC11H (Ver.D)
(4) AC input wiring terminal
(5) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12C module 0
(6) Circuit breaker for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet
(7) Circuit breaker for the TMC11H (Ver.D)
(8) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12B module 2
(9) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12C module 1
(10) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12B module 3
(11) Circuit breaker for the built-in storage batteries, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T
(12) DC output ports
Functions An ETP48400 subrack can house one PMU 11A and seven PSUs (R4850G2) and provides the following DC power outputs: Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
642
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Three DC power outputs of 100 A: One power output is supplied to the DCDU-12C, and the other two power outputs are designated for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet and TMC11H (Ver.D).
l
Three DC power outputs of 200 A: One power output is supplied to the DCDU-12C, and the other two power outputs are supplied to the DCDU-12B.
l
One DC power output of 400 A: It is supplied to the built-in storage battery pack, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T.
4.3.9 ETP48100-A1 An ETP48100-A1 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in an OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.
Components of an ETP48100-A1 An ETP48100-A1 consists of the ETP48100-A1 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48100-A1. Figure 4-55 Components of an ETP48100-A1
(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B
(2) PSU (R4850G2)
(3) ETP48100-A1 Subrack
ETP48100-A1 Subrack An ETP48100-A1 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and distributes AC and DC power to other components.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
643
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-56 Exterior of an ETP48100-A1 subrack
Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Figure 4-57 Terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack
The following table describes the terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Table 4-43 Terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1) AC input terminal
INPUT
OT terminal
Connects to the AC input power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
644
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(2) Circuit breaker
LOAD0 or LOAD1
-
Controls the power output.
(3) DC output terminal
OUTPUT
OT terminal
The positive wire is connected to the RTN(+) terminal on the PDU10D-01. The negative wire is connected to the NEG(-) terminal on the PDU10D-01.
4.3.10 ETP48100-B1 An ETP48100-B1 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in an IMB03 cabinet.
Components of an ETP48100-B1 An ETP48100-B1 consists of the ETP48100-B1 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48100-B1. Figure 4-58 Components of an ETP48100-B1
(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B
(2) PSU (R4850G2)
(3) ETP48100-B1 Subrack
ETP48100-B1 Subrack An ETP48100-B1 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and distributes AC and DC power to other components. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
645
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Figure 4-59 Exterior of an ETP48100-B1 subrack
Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Figure 4-60 Ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack
The following table describes the ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Table 4-44 Ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1) AC input terminal
INPUT
OT terminal
Connects to the AC input power cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
646
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(2) DC output port
OUTPUT
EPC5 connector
l The LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports feed power to RRUs. l The LOAD3 port feeds power to the BBU.
Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an ETP48100-B1. Table 4-45 Technical specifications of an ETP48100-B1 Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC
Input voltage frequency
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
30 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode
4.3.11 PMU This section describes PMUs and types of cabinets supported by the PMUs.
PMU 11A or PMU 11B A power monitoring unit 11A/11B (PMU 11A or PMU 11B) manages the power system and battery, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets and IMS06 subrack.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. NOTE
On the lower left of a PMU 11A and a PMU 11B, there are silkscreens PMU 11A and PMU 11B, respectively.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
647
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-61 Exterior of a PMU 11A or PMU 11B
Function A PMU 11A or PMU 11B performs the following functions: l
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.
l
Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.
l
Monitors the door status and the temperature of storage batteries.
l
Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.
l
Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.
Port The following figure shows the ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Figure 4-62 Ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B
The following table describes the ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Table 4-46 Ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
1
GATE
2-pin connector
Connects to a door status sensor.
2
TEM_BAT
2-pin connector
Connects to a battery temperature sensor.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
648
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
3
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Connects to the BBU or communicates with the upper-level monitoring board.
4
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Communicates with the lower-level monitoring board.
5
COM_485
RJ45 connector
Connects to the monitoring board in the battery cabinet, and receives monitoring signals from the battery cabinet.
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Table 4-47 Indicators on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B Silksc reen
Meanin g
Color
State
Description
RUN
Running indicator
Green
Steady on
The module is performing startup, selfcheck, loading, and activation.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The PMU 11A or PMU 11B is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The PMU 11A or PMU 11B is functional but unable to communicate properly.
Steady off
The module is faulty or there is no DC power supply.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the module must be replaced.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the module.
ALM
Alarm indicator
Red
DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B. The DIP switch has eight bits, where the four least significant bits 1, 2, 3, and 4 define the monitoring address of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B, and the four most significant bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not defined but reserved for future use. ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in the following figure. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
649
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-63 DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B
NOTE
At a site configured with two or more APM30Hs, if two PMU units are connected to one RS485 bus for the BBU, the monitoring address of the other PMU is set to 4. That is, the lower four bits of the DIP switch are set to 0010.
PMU 01B A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), BTS3900(Ver.C), APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), and IMB03 cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU 01B. Figure 4-64 Exterior of a PMU 01B
Functions A PMU 01B performs the following functions: Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
650
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
PMUs of different versions have different functions. If new functions are required, manually upgrade the PMU software version online.
l
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.
l
Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.
l
Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection, ambient humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby analog values.
l
Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.
l
Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.
Ports The following figure shows the ports and indicators on a PMU 01B. Figure 4-65 Ports and indicators on a PMU 01B
(1) PMU status indicator (2) Power test ports (3) Circuit breaker for storage batteries (4) COM port (5) COM_485 port
(6) COM_OUT port (7) COM_IN port
(8) Backplane port
The following table describes the ports and circuit breaker on a PMU 01B. Table 4-48 Ports and circuit breaker on a PMU 01B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port or Circuit Breake r
Silkscreen
Remarks
Power test ports
-48 V/+24 V and 0V
Used for measuring the PMU 01B output voltage.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
651
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port or Circuit Breake r
Silkscreen
Remarks
Circuit breaker for storage batterie s
BAT (ON and OFF)
Used for powering on and off storage batteries through the ON and OFF ports. l Insert a round stick into the ON port and hold down it for 5s to 10s. If you hear a click, the storage batteries are connected and the power-on operation is successful. l Insert a round stick into the OFF port and hold down it for 5s to 10s. If you hear a click, the storage batteries are disconnected and the power-off operation is successful.
COM port
COM
Connects to the HPMI, and receives alarm signals from the HPMI.
COM_ 485 port
COM_485
Connects to the monitoring board in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, and receives monitoring signals from the battery cabinet.
COM_ OUT port
COM_OUT
Connects to the lower-level device, such as the EMUA or EMUB, and collects alarm signals from the lower-level device.
COM_I N port
COM_IN
Connects to the BBU or upper-level device, and reports alarm signals to the BBU.
Backpl ane port
-
Connects to the connector on the backplane in the power subrack.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a PMU 01B. Table 4-49 Indicators on a PMU 01B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Silksc reen
Mean ing
Color
State
Description
RUN
Runni ng indica tor
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly. (This status does not necessarily mean that the main control board has been configured with the PMU.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
652
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silksc reen
ALM
Mean ing
Alarm indica tor
Color
Red
State
Description
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the main control board. If the PMU 01B has not communicated with the main control board for one minute, this situation is regarded as a communication failure.
Steady on or off
The module is faulty (if it is not in the power-on check state).
Steady on
The base station reports at least one of the following alarms: l Mains power supply failure alarm (including mains phase loss) l Mains power overvoltage or undervoltage alarm l Busbar overvoltage or undervoltage alarm l Charging overcurrent l Battery power-off alarm l Battery group circuit failure alarm l Ambient temperature alarm l Ambient humidity alarm l Power module alarm l Load power-off
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
NOTE
Within 3s to 5s after the PMU 01B is powered on, the ALM and RUN indicators are on for about 3s.
DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the right side of the PMU 01B panel. The DIP switch has eight bits, where the four bits 1, 2, 3, and 4 define the monitoring address of the PMU 01B, and the four bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not defined and reserved for future use. ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 01B is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
653
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-66 DIP switch on the right side of the PMU 01B panel
NOTE
At a site configured with two or more APM30Hs, if two PMU units are connected to one RS485 bus for the BBU, the monitoring address of the other PMU is set to 4. That is, the lower four bits of the DIP switch are set to 0010.
PMU (EPMU03) A power monitoring unit (PMU) (EPMU03) manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU (EPMU03). Figure 4-67 Exterior of a PMU (EPMU03)
Functions The PMU (EPMU03) performs the following functions: l Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
654
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.
l
Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection, ambient humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby analog values.
l
Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.
l
Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 serial port.
Port Figure 4-68shows the ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel and Table 4-50describes these ports. Figure 4-68 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel
Table 4-50 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
1
RS232/RS485
RJ45 connector
Active communication port
2
RS232/RS485
RJ45 connector
Standby communication port
3
COM
-
Reserved
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the PMU (EPMU03) panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
655
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-51 Indicators on the PMU (EPMU03) panel Silkscre en
Meani ng
Color
State
Remarks
RUN
Runnin g indicato r
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is running properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The PMU (EPMU03) is functional but unable to communicate properly.
Alarm indicato r
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
ALM
DIP Switch The following figure shows the DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03). Figure 4-69 DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03)
The following table describes the settings of the DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
656
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-52 Settings of the DIP switch DIP Bit
Function
Setting Rule
1 to 5
Define the communication address of the PMU.
(1) 1 to 5 correspond to bit 0 to bit 4, respectively. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. For example, if the communication address of the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set to OFF. (2) The default settings are as follows: 1 (bit 0) is set to ON. 2 (bit 1) is set to ON. 3 (bit 2) is set to OFF. 4 (bit 3) is set to OFF. 5 (bit 4) is set to OFF.
6
Selects a baud rate for communicating with the main control unit.
When 6 is set to ON, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is set to OFF, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
7 and 8
Reserved and undefined.
7 and 8 are set to OFF.
PMIU A power monitoring interface unit (PMIU) transfers monitoring signals from an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 to a CCUB. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.E), APM30H (Ver.E_A2), or APM30H (Ver.E_B~D).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMIU. Figure 4-70 Exterior of a PMIU
(1) STATE indicator
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) RJ45 port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
657
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A PMIU performs the following functions: l
Communicates with a CCUB, manages the power system, and charges and discharges batteries
l
Monitors power distribution analog signals, including DC voltage, battery current, battery circuit status, and AC SPD status.
l
Controls battery and load contactors.
l
Identifies whether pluggable modules are in position.
Port The following table describes the ports on a PMIU. Table 4-53 Port on a PMIU Silkscreen
Connector
Description
PMI
RJ45 connector
Connecting to the PMI port on the CCUB in a cabinet and reporting monitoring information about the power subrack to the CCUB.
Indicator The following table describes the indicator on a PMIU. Table 4-54 Indicator on a PMIU Silkscr een
Color
Status
Description
STATE
-
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Green
Steady on
Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the module must be replaced.
4.3.12 PSU This section describes PSUs and types of cabinets supported by the PSUs.
PSU (R4850G2) A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. A PSU (R4850G2) can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
658
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.E), APM30 (Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_A1), APM30 (Ver.E_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_B~D), APM30H (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z), and IMS06.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (R4850G2). Figure 4-71 Exterior of a PSU (R4850G2)
Function A PSU (R4850G2) performs the following functions: l
Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC and adjusts the output voltage.
l
Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overtemperature for its DC outputs.
l
Dissipates heat using its built-in fans.
l
The output power is 3000 w.
Indicator The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (R4850G2). Figure 4-72 Indicators on a PSU (R4850G2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
659
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (R4850G2). Table 4-55 Indicators on a PSU (R4850G2) Indicatora
Color
Status
Description
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
The board is functional.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The PSU is loading software online.
Steady off
The mains supply or the module is faulty.
Steady off
Yes
Steady on
An alarm triggered by an external factorb is generated.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The communication between the module and the PMU is interrupted.
Steady off
Yes
Steady on
The module is faulty or is shut down in an emergency. Locate the fault and replace the module.
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
Yellow
Red
NOTE
a: If the red indicator and green indicator are steady on and the yellow indicator is blinking, PSUs not securely installed in the slots. b: An alarm can be triggered by the following external factors: l
The rectifier generates a prewarning for power limiting due to overtemperature.
l
The rectifier generates an alarm for shutdown due to ambient overtemperature protection.
l
The rectifier generates an alarm due to AC input overvoltage or undervoltage protection.
l
The rectifier is hibernated.
PSU (PSU4850A) A power supply unit (PSU) (PSU4850A) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.C) and APM30H(Ver.C) cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (PSU4850A).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
660
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-73 Exterior of a PSU (PSU4850A)
Functions A PSU (PSU4850A) performs the following functions: l
Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes the -48 V DC power.
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 2900 w.
Indicators The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A). Figure 4-74 Indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A)
(1) Power indicator
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Protection indicator
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(3) Fault indicator
661
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A). Table 4-56 Indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A) Silkscreen
Color
State
Remarks
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
Normal
Steady off
l Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input) l No output from PSUs
(2) Protection indicator
Yellow
(3) Fault indicator
Red
Steady off
Normal
Steady on
Temperature prewarning
Steady off
l Normal l No output from PSUs due to mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input)
Steady on
l No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown, fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown l No output from PSUs due to other internal problems
PSU (EPW30-48A) A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW30-48A) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03 cabinets. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
662
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (EPW30-48A). Figure 4-75 Exterior of a PSU (EPW30-48A)
Functions A PSU (EPW30-48A) performs the following functions: l
Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes the -48 V DC power.
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 1600 w.
Indicators The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
663
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-76 Indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A)
(1) Power indicator
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A). Table 4-57 Indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A) Silkscreen
Color
State
Remarks
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
Normal
Steady off
l Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input) l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A)
(2) Protection indicator
Yellow
(3) Fault indicator
Red
Steady off
Normal
Steady on
Temperature prewarning
Steady off
l Normal l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A) due to mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
664
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Color
State
Remarks
Steady on
l No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown, fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A) due to other internal problems
PSU (GERM4815T) A power supply unit (PSU) (GERM4815T) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.
Functions A PSU (GERM4815T) performs the following functions: l
Converts 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power, and provides the DC power to the customer equipment.
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 800 w.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (GERM4815T).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
665
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-77 Exterior of a PSU (GERM4815T)
Indicator The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel. Figure 4-78 Indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel
The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel. Table 4-58 Indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel Silkscre en
Meani ng
Color
State
Remarks
RUN
Runnin g indicato r
Green
Steady on
The module is running properly.
Steady off
An error occurs during the running of the module.
Alarm indicato r
Yellow
Steady on
An output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm is generated.
Blinking
The communication is interrupted.
ALARM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
666
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscre en
FAULT
Meani ng
Fault indicato r
Color
Red
State
Remarks
Steady off
The module is running properly.
Steady on
A fan fault, output overvoltage, or external short circuit occurs.
Steady off
The module is running properly.
PSU (EPW25-24S48D) A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW25-24S48D) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC. It can be used in an IMB03 cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (EPW25-24S48D). Figure 4-79 Exterior of a PSU (EPW25-24S48D)
(1) Power indicator
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
Functions A PSU (EPW25-24S48D) performs the following functions: l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Converts +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power and provides the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
667
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
l
The output power is 1200 w.
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D). Table 4-59 Indicators on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D) Indicator
Color
State
Meaning
(1) Power indicator
Green
Steady on
Normal
Steady off
There is no power supply, or input fuses are damaged.
Steady off
Normal
Steady on
l The DC input or output voltage exceeds the normal range
(2) Protection indicator
Yellow
l Overtemperature occurs in the module l The module is not installed properly. (3) Fault indicator
Red
Steady off
Normal
Blinking
The fan is faulty.
4.3.13 DCDU This section describes DCDUs and types of cabinets supported by the DCDUs.
DCDU-01 A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.B).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-01. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
668
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-80 Exterior of a DCDU-01
Function A DCDU-01 has the following functions: l
Provides one -48 V DC input.
l
Provides ten -48 V DC outputs. The input of the SPARE2 port is 25 A and other nine inputs are 12 A.
l
Provides power only for the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly in a cabinet. NOTE
When a BTS3900A is configured with a DCDU-01, the SPARE2 port feeds power to the TMC11H and the maximum output power is 800 W.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
669
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-81 Terminals, ports. and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel. Table 4-60 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Description
Application Scenario
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)
It is a positive power input terminal.
l RFC (Ver.B) in a DC-powered BTS3900A (Ver.B) l RFC (Ver.B) in an AC-powered BTS3900A (Ver.B) l BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet l BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet l BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet
(2)
Circuit breakers
SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU5 to RFU0
They are ten power output circuit breakers which control power supply to the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.
(3)
DC output ports
SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU5 to RFU0
They are ten power output ports which feed power to the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
670
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Description
(4)
DC SPD alarm port
SPD ALM
It is not available.
Application Scenario
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-01. Table 4-61 Technical specifications of a DCDU-01 Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-03B A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-03B is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or OMB.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03B. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
671
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-82 Exterior of a DCDU-03B
Function A DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel. Figure 4-83 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
672
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-62 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel No.
Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
It supports a two-hole OT terminal (M6).
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)
It supports the cable with a maximum cross-sectional area of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2). The default cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in. 2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
(2)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW8
-
The DC circuit breakers control power supplies to the BBU, RRUs, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports, respectively.
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD8
Nine one-hole OT terminals (M4). The maximum cross-sectional area of the cable supported is 6 mm2(0.009 in. 2).
l The specifications of output power cables depend on power-consuming devices to be connected to. For example, the cross-sectional area of a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2).
-
It is not available.
(4)
DC SPD alarm port
SPD ALM
l There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support twohole OT terminals (M4).
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
673
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-63 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03B Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumi ng Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circui t Break er
l DBS3900
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a DBS3900
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
6x20 A
SW0 to SW5
l DBS3900 where the BBU is installed on a wall, 19-inch rack, IMB03, or OMB
LOAD6 to LOAD8
BBU and customer transmissi on equipment
3x12 A
SW6 to SW8
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
6x20 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6 to LOAD8
Reserved
3x12 A
SW6 to SW8
l BTS3900C
l OMB in a BTS3900C l BTS3900 A (Ver.B) l BTS3900 (Ver.B) l BTS3900L (Ver.B) l BTS3900 AL (Ver.A)
l Cabinet in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-03B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
674
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-64 Technical specifications of a DCDU-03B Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-03B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-03C A direct current distribution unit-03C (DCDU-03C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-03C is 1 U high and can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03C. Figure 4-84 Exterior of a DCDU-03C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
675
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel. Figure 4-85 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel. Table 4-65 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
It supports a two-hole OT terminal (M6). If a DCDU-03C is installed in a power cabinet TMC11H, the cross-sectional area of its
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
676
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No.
4 Component Description
Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Remarks
RTN(+)
input power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in. 2). If a DCDU-03C is installed in a transmission cabinet TMC11H, the cross-sectional area of its input power cable is 4 mm2(0.006 in. 2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
(2)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
-
The DC circuit breakers control power supplies to the BBU, RRUs, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD8
They support nine one-hole OT terminals (M4) and the cable with a maximum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in. 2).
l The specifications of output power cables depend on power-consuming devices to be connected to. For example, the cross-sectional area of a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2).
-
It is not available.
(4)
DC SPD alarm port
SPD ALM
l There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support twohole OT terminals (M4), as shown in the red lines in Figure 4-85.
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
677
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-66 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03C Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsum ing Device
Specific ations of the Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breake r
l BTS3900 A (Ver.B)
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.B)
LOAD0 to LOAD5
Transmis sion equipme nt
6x12 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6
BBU
1x12 A
SW6
LOAD7
Transmis sion equipme nt
1x6 A
SW7
LOAD8
Fan assembly
1x6 A
SW8
l DBS3900
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-03C. Table 4-67 Technical specifications of a DCDU-03C Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-03C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
678
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DCDU-05 A direct current distribution unit-05 (DCDU-05) is installed in an EPS30-4815AF subrack and provides -48 V DC power for RRUs and transmission equipment. A DCDU-05 can be installed in an OMB or IMB03.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-05. Figure 4-86 Exterior of a DCDU-05
Function l
Supports -48 V and 20 A DC power inputs.
l
Provides two -48 V DC power outputs (one for RRUs and another for transmission equipment).
Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel. Figure 4-87 Terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel
The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
679
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-68 Terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel No.
Terminal/Port/Circuit Breaker
Connector
(1)
Wiring terminal for the RRU power cable (12 A)
OT terminal
(2)
Wiring terminal for the power cable (4 A) of the transmission equipment
OT terminal
(3)
Circuit breaker for the RRU
-
(4)
Circuit breaker for the transmission equipment
-
DCDU-11A A direct current distribution unit-11A (DCDU-11A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.C).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-11A. Figure 4-88 Exterior of a DCDU-11A
(1) Equipotential ground points
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(2) Ground points
680
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DCDU-11A has the following functions: l
Provides one -48 V DC input of 160 A or two -48 V DC inputs of 80 A.
l
Provides ten -48 V DC outputs with a maximum of 25 A for each output.
l
Provides power to the RFUs and fan assembly in the cabinet.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel. Figure 4-89 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel
Table 4-69 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Port/ Terminal/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
Two onehole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
681
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No.
4 Component Description
Port/ Terminal/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
RTN(+)
supported is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
(2)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
-
The DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to RFUs and fan assemblies by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-90shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-70.
Figure 4-90 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
682
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11A. Table 4-70 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11A Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumin g Device
Specif icatio ns of the Circui t Break er
Circuit Breake r
BTS3900A (Ver.C)
l RFC (Ver.C) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.C) l RFC (Ver.C) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.C)
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RFU 0 to RFU 5
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6
FAN 01B
SW6
LOAD7 to LOAD9
Reserved
SW7 to SW9
l BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet l BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet l BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RFU 0 to RFU 5
LOAD6
FAN 03B
SW6
LOAD7 and LOAD8
BBU
SW7 and SW8
LOAD9
Reserved
SW9
l BTS3900 (Ver.C) l BTS3900L (Ver.C)
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11A. Table 4-71 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11A Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
683
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-11B A direct current distribution unit-11B (DCDU-11B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11B is 1 U high and can be installed in an RFC (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or OMB.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B. Figure 4-91 Front and rear views of a DCDU-11B
(1) Equipotential ground points
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(2) Ground points
684
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
A DCDU-11B uses ground points and equipotential ground points in the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: A DCDU-11B is installed on an open rack. In this scenario, an equipotential cable connects the equipotential ground point near the mounting ear on the DCDU-11B to the ground bar on the open rack. l Scenario 2: A DCDU-11B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. In this scenario, the ground points at the rear of the DCDU-11B are connected to the ground bar in the equipment room.
Function A DCDU-11B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel. Figure 4-92 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
685
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-72 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel N o.
Port/ Termina l/Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.
It is a negative power input terminal.
-
DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
RTN(+)
(2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is a positive power input terminal.
686
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port/ Termina l/Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
l Figure 4-93shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 3.3 mm2(0.005 in.2) to 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-73.
l Figure 4-94shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
687
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-93 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (matching the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports)
Figure 4-94 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (matching the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports)
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11B. Table 4-73 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11B Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumi ng Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
l DBS3900
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a DBS3900 l Wall, 19-inch rack, or IMB03 in a DBS3900 l Cabinet in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs l OMB in a BTS3900C
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
LOAD6 and LOAD7
Transmissi on equipment or BBU
SW6 and SW7
LOAD8
Transmissi on equipment, EMUA, or EMUB
SW8
LOAD9
FAN 02B
SW9
l BTS3900 A (Ver.C) l BTS3900 C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
688
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsumi ng Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
l BTS3900 (Ver.C)
l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs
LOAD0 to LOAD5
RRU 0 to RRU 5
10x25 A
SW0 to SW5
l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs
LOAD6 to LOAD9
Reserved
l BTS3900 L (Ver.C) l BTS3900 AL (Ver.A)
SW6 to SW9
l Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11B. Table 4-74 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11B Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-11B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
689
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DCDU-11C A direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11C is 1 U high and can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C).
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-11C. Figure 4-95 Front and rear views of a DCDU-11C
(1) Equipotential ground points
(2) Ground points
NOTE
The ground points and equipotential ground points on a DCDU-11C are not used.
Function A DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.
Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
690
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-96 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel
The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel. Table 4-75 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel N o.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.
It is a negative power input terminal.
-
DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.
RTN(+)
(2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Circuit breakers
SW0 to SW9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is a positive power input terminal.
691
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-97shows the exterior of a tool-less female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-76.
Figure 4-97 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11C. Table 4-76 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11C Base Station Type
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsum ing Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
l BTS3900 A (Ver.C)
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a DBS3900 configured
LOAD0 and LOAD1
Transmis sion equipmen t
2x6 A
SW0 and SW1
LOAD2 and LOAD3
Transmis sion equipmen t
2x12 A
SW2 and SW3
l DBS3900
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
692
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Base Station Type
4 Component Description
Application Scenario
DC Output Port
PowerConsum ing Device
Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r
Circuit Breake r
with an APM30H (Ver.C)
LOAD4 and LOAD5
Transmis sion equipmen t
2x25 A
SW4 and SW5
LOAD6 and LOAD7
Transmis sion equipmen t or BBU
2x25 A
SW6 and SW7
LOAD8
Transmis sion equipmen t, EMUA, or EMUB
1x25 A
SW8
LOAD9
FAN 02B
1x25 A
SW9
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11C. Table 4-77 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11C Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-11C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
693
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-12A A direct current distribution unit-12A (DCDU-12A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, or BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-12A. Figure 4-98 Front and rear views of a DCDU-12A
(1) Equipotential ground points
(2) Ground points
Function A DCDU-12A provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of different indoor and outdoor macro base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
694
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-99 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A
The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A. Table 4-78 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC power input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.
It is a negative power input terminal.
Fuse block
LOAD0 to LOAD9
-
It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as RFUs and fan assemblies.
(2)
RTN(+)
It is a positive power input terminal.
The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
695
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC power output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
EPC4 connectors are used on the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. Figure 4-100shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector. The cross-sectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-79.
(4)
Spare fuse box
-
-
It contains three 30 A spare fuses.
NOTE
A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.
Figure 4-100 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12A. Table 4-79 Power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specificat ions
l BTS3900 A (Ver.D) l BTS3900 A (Ver.E)
l RFC (Ver.D) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.D) l RFC (Ver.D) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.D)
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
RFU 0 to RFU 5
10x30 A
LOAD6 port
FAN 01C
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
696
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
l BTS3012 AE (Ver.D_Z)
l RFC (Ver.E) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.E) l RFC (Ver.E) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.E) l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in a DC scenario l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in an AC scenario
LOAD7 to LOAD9 ports
Reserved
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) l BTS3900L (Ver.D) l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in a DC scenario l BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in an AC scenario l BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
RFU 0 to RFU 5
LOAD6 port
FAN 03C
LOAD7 and LOAD8 ports
BBU
LOAD9 port
Reserved
Fuse Specificat ions
10x30 A
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12A. Table 4-80 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12A Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
697
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications
Surge protection specifications of the ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-12B A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or IMS06.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear of a DCDU-12B. Figure 4-101 Front and rear of a DCDU-12B
(1) Equipotential ground points
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(2) Ground points
698
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
A DCDU-12B uses ground points and equipotential ground points in the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: A DCDU-12B is installed on an open rack. In this scenario, an equipotential cable connects the equipotential ground point near the mounting ear on the DCDU-12B to the ground bar on the open rack. l Scenario 2: A DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. In this scenario, the ground points at the rear of the DCDU-12B are connected to the ground bar in the equipment room.
Function The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of indoor and outdoor macro base stations, micro base stations, and distributed base stations.
Port The following figure shows the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B. Figure 4-102 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B
The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B. Table 4-81 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC power input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). If one group of power cables are used, the maximum crosssectional area of each power cable is
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
699
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
N o.
(2)
4 Component Description
Port or Termina l
Fuse block
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
RTN(+)
35 mm2(0.054 in.2). If two groups of power cables are used, the maximum cross-sectional area of each power cable is 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
LOAD0 to LOAD9
-
It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment. The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
700
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(3)
DC power output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
l Figure 4-103 shows the exterior of an EPC5 connector which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 3.3 mm2(0.005 in.2) to 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-82.
l Figure 4-104 shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector which applies to any of the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2). NOTE EPC4 and EPC5 connectors must be connected to cables onsite.
(4)
Spare fuse box
-
-
It contains three 30 A spare fuses.
NOTE
A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
701
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-103 Exterior of an EPC5 connector
Figure 4-104 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12B. Table 4-82 Power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12B Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specifi cations
DBS3900
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in a DBS3900
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
RRU
10x30 A
LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports
Transmission equipment, BBU, or RRUa
LOAD8 port
Transmission equipment or RRUa
LOAD9 port
FAN 02D/FAN 02E
LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports
RRU 0 to RRU 8
LOAD9 port
Reserved
l Wall, 19-inch rack, or IMB03 in a DBS3900
BTS3900AL (Ver.A)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10x30 A
702
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specifi cations
l BTS3900A (Ver.D)
l RFC (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs
LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports
RRU 0 to RRU 8
10x30 A
LOAD9 port
Reserved
l BTS3900A (Ver.E)
l RFC (Ver.E) in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) configured with RFUs and RRUs
l BTS3900 (Ver.D) l BTS3900L (Ver.D) l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)
l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) configured with RFUs and RRUs
a: When six or fewer RRUs are configured, connect the RRUs preferentially to ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 for power input. Ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 only supply power to the seventh to ninth RRUs when more than six RRUs are configured.
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B. Table 4-83 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
703
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of the ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-12C A direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12C is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.E), TMC11H (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), IBC10, or BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear of a DCDU-12C. Figure 4-105 Front and rear of a DCDU-12C
(1) Equipotential ground points
(2) Ground points
NOTE
The ground points and equipotential ground points on a DCDU-12C are not used.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
704
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DCDU-12C provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed base stations and outdoor macro base stations.
Port or Terminal The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C. Figure 4-106 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C
The following table describes the terminals and ports on a DCDU-12C. Table 4-84 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(1)
DC power input terminals
NEG(-)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The cross-sectional area of the cable is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) by default.
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
It is a positive power input terminal.
705
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
N o.
Port or Termina l
Silkscreen
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
(2)
Fuse block
LOAD0 to LOAD9
-
It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment. The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.
(3)
DC power output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD9
Figure 4-107 shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The cross-sectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-85.
(4)
Spare fuse box
-
-
It contains three 30 A spare fuses.
NOTE
A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.
Figure 4-107 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
706
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12C. Table 4-85 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-12C Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specif ication s
l BTS3900 A (Ver.D)
l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.E) in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.D)
LOAD0 to LOAD5 and LOAD8 ports
Transmission equipment
10x30 A
LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports
Transmission equipment or BBU
LOAD9 port
FAN 02D
Equipment compartment of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
LOAD0 port
CCU
LOAD1 port
Reserved
LOAD2 and LOAD3 ports
Transmission equipment
LOAD4
Battery cabinet
LOAD5 to LOAD8 ports
BBU
LOAD9 port
HEX
LOAD0 to LOAD8 ports
RFU
LOAD9 port
FAU
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports
Transmission equipment
LOAD6 and LOAD7 ports
Transmission equipment or BBU
LOAD8 port
Transmission equipment or EMUA
LOAD9 port
Reserved
l BTS3900 A (Ver.E) l DBS3900
BTS3900AL (Ver.A)
RF compartment of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in a DC scenario
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10x30 A
10x30 A
10x30 A
707
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Base Station
Application Scenario
DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Fuse Specif ication s
DBS3900
IBC10 in a DC DBS3900
LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on 0# DCDU-12C
USU
10x30 A
LOAD2 and LOAD3 ports on 0# DCDU-12C
FAU03D
LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on 1# DCDU-12C
BBU
LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on 2# DCDU-12C
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12C. Table 4-86 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12C Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
A DCDU-12C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)
Input voltage and current
Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 160 A
Surge protection specifications of the ports
Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
708
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Item
Specifications Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)
DCDU-13A A direct current distribution unit-13A (DCDU-13A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-13A is 1 U high and can be installed in an RFC (Ver.D_A) or an RFC (Ver.E_A).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-13A. Figure 4-108 Exterior of a DCDU-13A
Function A DCDU-13A has the following functions: l
Supports -48 V and 80 A DC power inputs.
l
Provides four -48 V DC power outputs for other boards or modules in the cabinet.
l
Provides surge protection of 10 kA in differential mode and 20 kA in common mode and dry contacts for reporting the surge protection failure alarm.
Port The following figure shows the terminals and ports on a DCDU-13A panel. Figure 4-109 Terminals and ports on a DCDU-13A panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
709
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Terminal/Port
Silkscree n
Matched Connector and Cable
Description
1
Dry contact output port
DC_SPD
-
Dry contact alarm output port
2
DC output ports
LOAD0 to LOAD3
EPC4 connector (as shown in the following figure)
l The LOAD0 to LOAD3 ports on the left DCDU-13A in the cabinet provide power for the CMUEA and RFU 0 to RFU 2. l The LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A in the cabinet provide power for RFU 3 to RFU 5. The LOAD3 port is reserved.
3
DC input terminals
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the single cable is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) and each maximum cross-sectional area of the two pairs of cables is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2). The default crosssectional area is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2).
It is a negative power input terminal. It is a positive power input terminal.
Figure 4-110 EPC4 connector
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
710
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.3.14 PDU This section describes PDUs and types of cabinets supported by the PDUs.
PDU05A-01 The power distribution unit 05A-01 (PDU05A-01) distributes AC power into the PSUs, AC service outlet unit (SOU), and heater. The PDU05A-01 must be installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an PDU05A-01, and the following table describes an PDU05A-01. Figure 4-111 Exterior of an PDU05A-01
Table 4-87 Exterior description of an PDU05A-01
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Compon ent
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
AC SOU
SERVICE OUTLET 10A MAX
The AC SOU is an optional AC device. It complies with the European standard.
(2)
Decoupli ng coil
-
-
(3)
HAU circuit breaker
HEATER
The HAU circuit breaker controls the power supply to the HAU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
711
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Compon ent
Silkscreen
Description
(4)
PSU circuit breaker
PSU1/5
PSU circuit breakers control the power supply to the PSUs.
PSU3/4/7
The PSU circuit breakers are bipolar circuit breakers. The rated current of PSU1/5 and PSU2/6 is 40 A, and the rated current of the PSU3/4/7 is 63 A.
(5)
AC surge protector
-
The AC surge protector reports AC input surge protection alarms.
(6)
AC input terminal
L1
AC input terminals are used for 110 V AC duallive-wire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power inputs.
PSU2/6
L2 L3 N PE
Functions The PDU05A-01 performs the following functions: l
Provides five AC outputs. Three outputs are supplied to PSUs, one output is supplied to the heater assembly unit (HAU) after transferred by the AC junction box, and one output is supplied to the SOU.
l
Provides cord end terminals, through which the 110 V AC dual-live-wire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power can be supplied to the PDU05A-01.
l
Provides an SOU which is optional. The SOU transfers AC power to customer equipment.
Specifications of an SOU The following table lists the specifications of an SOU. Table 4-88 Specifications of an SOU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Parameter
Counter
Rated current
5A
Rated voltage
110 V AC or 220 V AC
Operating temperature
-40oC to +55oC (-40oF to 131oF)
Protection class
IP20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
712
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
PDU03D-01 The power distribution unit 03D-01 (PDU03D-01) provides -48 V DC power output ports for power distribution to a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. It is used in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the PDU03D-01, and the following table describes the PDU03D-01. Figure 4-112 PDU03D-01
Table 4-89 PDU03D-01 No.
Compon ent
Silkscreen
(1)
DC input terminals
INPUT0
INPUT1
INPUT2
(2)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
DC output terminals
OUTPUT0
Description RTN(+)_0
It is a positive power input terminal.
NEG(-)_0
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)_1
It is a positive power input terminal.
NEG(-)_1
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)_2
It is a positive power input terminal.
NEG(-)_2
It is a negative power input terminal.
RTN(+)_0
It is a positive power output terminal.
NEG(-)_0
It is a negative power output terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
713
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No.
4 Component Description
Compon ent
Silkscreen OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
Description RTN(+)_1
It is a positive power output terminal.
NEG(-)_1
It is a negative power output terminal.
RTN(+)_2
It is a positive power output terminal.
NEG(-)_2
It is a negative power output terminal.
Function The PDU03D-01 performs the following functions: l Has three groups of transfer terminals, which can provide single-output power supply and dual-output power supply simultaneously. l Supports the maximum external DC power of one 100 A input (INPUT2) and two 200 A inputs (INPUT0 and INPUT1).
PDU10D-01 The power distributed unit-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power for all components in the OMB (Ver.C). It can be used in an OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU10D-01. Figure 4-113 Exterior of a PDU10D-01
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
714
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Functions The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions: l
Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.
l
Provides ten DC outputs, with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, and two reserved.
Ports Figure 4-114shows the ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel and Table 4-90describes these ports and terminals. Figure 4-114 Ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel
Table 4-90 Ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector and Cable
Remarks
1
DC input terminal
NEG(-)
It supports a onehole OT terminal (M6). When one group of input power cables is used, the maximum cross-sectional area of each cable is 25
It is a negative power input terminal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
715
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
No .
4 Component Description
Port or Terminal
Silkscreen
Connector and Cable
Remarks
RTN(+)
mm2(0.039 in.2). When two groups of input power cables are used, the maximum crosssectional area of each cable is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2).
It is a positive power input terminal.
2
AC input terminals
L, N, and PE
They support onehole OT terminals (M4). Each cable has a maximum cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 2).
The maximum current for each power input is 30 A.
3
DC output terminals
LOAD0 to LOAD5
Figure 4-115shows the EPC5 connectors for ports LOAD0 to LOAD5. The maximum cross-sectional area of the cable is 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).
The output current is 30 A.
4
DC output terminals
LOAD6 to LOAD9
Figure 4-116shows an EPC4 connector, which applies to any one among ports LOAD6 to LOAD9. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable is 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).
The output current is 30 A.
5
Spare fuse box
-
-
There are three fuses in the spare fuse box: l Two 5 A spare fuses, each used for transferring power less than 150 W. l One 30 A spare fuse, used for the 30 A output power ports on the PDU10D-01.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
716
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-115 Exterior of an EPC5 connector
Figure 4-116 Exterior of an EPC4 connector
PDU01D-01 A power distribution unit 01D-01 (PDU01D-01) can be used in an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 and be connected to an outdoor distribution module (ODM) to provide power for RRUs.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU01D-01. Figure 4-117 Exterior of a PDU01D-01
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
717
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A PDU01D-01 performs the following functions: l
Provides one -48 V DC power output.
l
Provides power for a maximum of six RRUs if being used together with an ODM.
Port The following figure shows the port on a PDU01D-01. The following table describes the port on a PDU01D-01. Figure 4-118 Port on a PDU01D-01
Table 4-91 Port on a PDU01D-01 DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD port
ODM
Circuit breaker
1x100 A
OT terminal (M6)
PDU03D-02 A power distribution unit 03D-02 (PDU03D-02) can be used in an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 to provide power for RRUs.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU03D-02.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
718
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-119 Exterior of a PDU03D-02
Function A PDU03D-02 performs the following functions: l
Provides three -48 V DC power outputs.
l
Provides power for a maximum of three RRUs.
Port The following figure shows the ports on a PDU03D-02. The following table describes the ports on a PDU03D-02. Figure 4-120 Ports on a PDU03D-02
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
719
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-92 Ports on a PDU03D-02 DC Power Output Port
PowerConsuming Device
Protector
Specifications of the Protector
Connector
LOAD0, LOAD1, and LOAD2 ports
RRUs
Fuse
3x30 A
EPC5 connector
4.3.15 Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet This section describes the exteriors of and ports on power distribution boxes in battery cabinets.
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is located on the upper inner right wall of the cabinet, which transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-121 Exterior of a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
720
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-93 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box No.
Silkscreen
(1)
BAT
Description RTN(+) NEG(-)
(2)
FAN/TEC
RTN(+) NEG(-)
(3)
BAT_SW0
ON OFF
(4)
BAT_SW1
ON OFF
(5)
(6)
FAN/ TEC_SW2
ON
FAN/TEC
RTN(+)
OFF
NEG(-) (7)
BAT
RTN(+) NEG(-)
Upper power terminals for storage batteries, which connect to input power cables for the storage batteries Upper power terminals for the fan or TEC, which connect to input power cables for the fan or TEC Circuit breaker for upper storage battery group, which controls power supply to the upper storage battery group Circuit breaker for lower storage battery group, which controls power supply to the lower storage battery group Circuit breaker for the fan or TEC, which controls power supply to the fan in a IBBS200D or the TEC in a IBBS200T. Lower power terminals for the fan or TEC, which connect to input power cables for the fan or TEC Lower power terminals for storage batteries, which connect to input power cables for the storage batteries
NOTE
Power can be supplied to the storage batteries, fan, or TEC from the upper or lower power terminals on a power distribution box according to cabinet configurations. Power is supplied from the lower power terminals on a power distribution box by default.
Cables The following figure shows the cables for a power distribution box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
721
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-122 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) RTN(+) power cable for the upper storage battery group
(2) Input power cable for the storage batteries. It connects to the upper terminals on a power distribution box.
(3) Input power cable for the fan or TEC. It connects to the upper terminals on a power distribution box.
(4) Input power cable for the fan or TEC. It connects to the lower terminals on a power distribution box.
(5) Input power cable for the storage batteries. It connects to the lower terminals on a power distribution box.
(6) Power transfer cable for the fan or TEC
(7) NEG(-) power cable for the lower storage battery group
(8) NEG(-) power cable for the upper storage battery group
(9) RTN(+) power cable for the lower storage battery group
-
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C) is located on the upper right inner wall of the cabinet, which controls the two storage battery groups separately and controls DC power supply to the fan or TEC.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
722
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-123 Exterior of a power distribution box
Ports The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-94 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Description
(1)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
A one-hole OT terminal (M8) supports the cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(2)
FAN/TEC
FAN/TEC power input terminal
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M4).
(3)
BAT_SW0
Circuit breaker for upper storage batteries
It controls power supply to the upper storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 160 A current.
(4)
BAT_SW1
Circuit breaker for lower storage batteries
It controls power supply to the lower storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 160 A current.
(5)
FAN/ TEC_SW
Circuit breaker for the FAN/TEC power port
The circuit breaker requires 15 A current.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
723
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Terminal or Circuit Breaker
Description
(6)
FAN/TEC
FAN/TEC power input terminal
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M4).
(7)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
A one-hole OT terminal (M8) supports the cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
NOTE
A power distribution box provides two groups of power input ports for the storage batteries labeled 1 and 7 and two groups of FAN/TEC power ports labeled 2 and 6. Ports to be connected depend on configuration scenarios. l When an APM30H is stacked with an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, input power cables for storage batteries and fan or TEC are connected to the upper part of the storage batteries. l When an APM30H and an IBBS200D or IBBS200T are installed side by side, input power cables for storage batteries and fan or TEC are connected to the lower part of the storage batteries.
Cables The following figure shows the cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-124 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) RTN(+) cable for upper storage batteries
(2) Power transfer cable for the TEC or (3) -48 V cable for lower fan storage batteries
(4) -48 V cable for upper storage batteries
(5) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
-
724
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.D) or IBBS200T(Ver.D) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.D) or IBBS200T(Ver.D) is located on the upper right inner wall of the cabinet, which controls the two storage battery groups separately and controls DC power supply to the fan or TEC.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-125 Exterior of a power distribution box
Port The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-95 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Description
Note
(1)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
They support one-hole OT terminals (M8) installed on cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2).
(2)
BAT_SW0
Circuit breaker for upper storage batteries
It controls power supply to the upper storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 250 A current.
(3)
FAN/ TEC_OUTPU T
Power output port for a fan or TEC
It supports EPC4 connectors and requires 30 A current.
(4)
BAT_SW1
Circuit breaker for lower storage batteries
It controls power supply to the lower storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 250 A current.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
725
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Description
Note
(5)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
They support one-hole OT terminals (M8) installed on cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2).
(6)
FAN/ TEC_INPUT
FAN/TEC power input terminal
It supports EPC4 connectors and requires 30 A current.
Wire The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-126 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) RTN(+) wire for upper storage batteries
(2) Power transfer cable for the TEC or fan
(3) NEG(-) wire for lower storage batteries
(4) NEG(-) wire for upper storage batteries
(5) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries
-
Power Distribution Boxes in an IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of an IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E), controlling power supply of two storage battery packs and DC power supply to the TEC or fan.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
726
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-127 Exterior of a power distribution box
Port The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-96 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box No.
Silkscreen
Meaning
Description
(1)
BAT ON/OFF
Storage battery circuit breakers
Controlling power supply of the storage batteries in a cabinet. A circuit breaker requires 250 A current.
(2)
FAN/TEC OUTPUT
Power output port for a fan or TEC
Connecting to an EPC4 connector and requiring fuses of 30 A current
(3)
FAN/TEC INPUT
FAN/TEC power input terminal
Connecting to an EPC4 connector and requiring fuses of 30 A current
(4)(5)
BAT
Power input terminals for storage batteries
One-hole OT terminal (M8) supporting the cable with a cross-sectional area of 50 mm2(0.078 in.2)
Cable The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
727
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-128 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) Power transfer cable for a power distribution box
(2) RTN(+) wire for upper storage batteries
(4) NEG(-) wire for lower storage batteries (5) NEG(-) wire for upper storage batteries
(3) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries -
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T The power distribution box of an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is in the middle of the cabinet. It controls the DC output, and the DC power supply to the CCU, FAN or TEC.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the power distribution box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
728
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-129 Exterior of the power distribution box
Port The following table describes the ports on the power distribution box. Table 4-97 Ports on the power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Meaning
Description
(1)
BAT(-)
Negative input pole for storage batteries
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(2)
NEG(-)
Negative input pole for the power distribution box
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(3)
-
Fuse box
It provides overcurrent protection for the cabinet.
(4)
DC INPUT
Power input port for the temperature control system
It supports an EPC4 connector and is used to supply power for the temperature control system in the cabinet.
(5)
DC OUTPUT
-
It supports an EPC4 connector and is reserved.
(6)
RTN(+)
Positive input pole for the power distribution box
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
(7)
BAT(+)
Positive input pole for storage batteries
It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
729
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Meaning
Description
(8)
CCU
Power input port for the CCU
EPC4 connector
(9)
-
Switch
It controls the power supply to the CCU and fan or TEC.
(10)
FAN/TEC
Power input port for a fan or TEC
EPC4 connector
Wire The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-130 Cables for a power distribution box
(1) NEG(-) cable for storage batteries in the first upper layer
(2) NEG(-) cable for storage batteriesin the second upper layer
(3) NEG(-) cable for (4) NEG(-) cable for storage batteriesin the first storage batteriesin the lower layer second lower layer
(5) RTN(+) cable for storage batteries in the second lower layer
(6) RTN(+) cable for (7) RTN(+) cable for storage batteriesin the first storage batteriesin the lower layer second upper layer
(8) RTN(+) cable for storage batteriesin the first upper layer
Power Distribution Box in an IBBS20D The power distribution box in an IBBS20D is located in the lower right part of the cabinet, which is used to control DC power to the storage batteries, CMUG, and fan in the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
730
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-131 Exterior of a power distribution box
Ports, Terminals, and Circuit Breakers The following table describes ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-98 Ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a power distribution box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Description
Description
(1)
NEG(-)
Negative input terminal
Two terminals, each using a one-hole OT (M6) terminal and connecting to a 10 mm2power cable
RTN(+)
Positive input terminal
Two terminals, each using a one-hole OT (M6) terminal and connecting to a 10 mm2power cable
(2)
-
Switch
Controls the DC input power (80 A) to the battery cabinet
(3)
-
Ground copper bar
Used for grounding the insulation layer of a shielded cable
(4)
LOAD FUSE30A
Fuse terminal block
Connects to an EPC4 connector. The fuse protects the cabinet from overcurrent.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
731
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M An Outdoor Power Module 15M (OPM15M) an Outdoor Power Module 50M (OPM50M), or an Outdoor Power Module 30M (OPM30M) is an auxiliary product specially designed for Huawei Blade Site and used to convert external AC input power into -48 V DC. For details about the OPM15M hardware, see OPM15M User Guide. For details about the OPM50M hardware, see OPM50M User Guide. For details about the OPM30M hardware, see OPM30M User Guide.
4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC A DC junction box is installed in an RFC, and it converts one or two power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Exterior A DC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of an RFC. The following figure shows the exterior of a DC junction box. Figure 4-132 Exterior of a DC junction box
Function l
In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
l
In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.
Interior The following figure shows the interior of a DC junction box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
732
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-133 Interior of a DC junction box
(1) Cable holes for input/ (2) One-hole input/output (3) One-hole input/output (4) Cable holes for input/ output power cables terminals (M6) terminals (M6) output power cables NOTE
In AC scenarios, input/output power cables have been installed in the DC junction box before delivery. In DC scenarios, input power cables must be installed onsite according to the following requirements: l When one group of input power cables are used, connect the cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals (M6) in the lower of the two rows indicated by illustration 3 in Figure 4-133. l When two groups of input power cables are used, connect the cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals (M6) in the two rows indicated by illustration 3 in Figure 4-133.
4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL In an AC BTS3900AL, the UTPUT2 power terminals on the PDU03D-01 are connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B. A DC junction box is installed on the inner wall of an BTS3900AL DC cabinet. The following figure shows the exterior of a DC junction box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
733
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-134 Exterior of a DC junction box
4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T A DC junction box for an IBBS300D or IBBS300T converts one DC power input into two DC power outputs.
Exterior Two DC junction boxes are installed in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T. One is on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the other one is on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows a DC junction box in an IBBS300D. Figure 4-135 Exterior of a DC junction box
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
734
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Functions l
Obtains power from the storage batteries in the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600A-H17B1) and converts it into two DC power outputs, which are provided for two storage packs in the battery cabinet.
l
Obtains power from the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600A-H17B1) and provides it to the fan or TEC in the battery cabinet.
Interior The following figure shows the interior of a DC junction box. Figure 4-136 Interior of a DC junction box
(1) Wiring terminals for power cables of storage batteries
(2) Wiring terminals for power cables of the fan or TEC
4.3.20 AC Junction Box When a heater or a heating film is configured, the AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film. An AC junction box can be used in a BTS3900AL, APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T.
Exterior The AC junction box in an APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T is located on the inner left wall of the cabinet. The AC junction box in a BTS3900AL cabinet is located on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows an APM30H as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
735
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-137 Exterior of the AC junction box
Function The AC junction box in a cabinet performs the following functions: l
The PDU05A-01 in a BTS3900AL cabinet feeds power into the AC junction box. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet.
l
An EPU subrack feeds power into the AC junction box in an APM30H. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet or heating film in the IBBS200D.
l
The AC junction box in the APM30H feeds power into the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or service outlet unit (SOU) in the cabinet.
l
The AC junction box in the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600AH17B1) feeds power into the AC junction box in the IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet.
Interior The following figure shows the interior of an AC junction box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
736
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-138 Interior of an AC junction box
(1) Four AC output L wiring terminals
(2) Four AC output N wiring terminals
(3) Four AC output PE wiring terminals
(4) Cable holes
(5) AC input N wiring terminal
(6) AC input L wiring terminal
4.3.21 Storage Battery Storage batteries store power and can be installed an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, or IMS06.
Exterior
NOTICE When storage batteries are not provided by Huawei, ask Huawei technical personnel to assess the model compatibility. NOTE
Storage batteries from different manufacturers differ in exteriors and technical specifications. This section uses 12 V 100 Ah, 12 V 150 Ah, and 12 V 20 Ah storage batteries as examples.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
737
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-139 Storage battery
Configuration Each battery pack consists of four storage batteries. The following table lists the storage battery configurations achieved by combining different battery packs. Table 4-99 Storage battery configurations Cabinet Type
Storage Battery Type
Battery Pack Specifications
l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B)
12 V, 100 Ah
l One battery pack (48 V, 100 Ah)
12 V, 150 Ah
l One battery pack (48 V, 150 Ah)
12 V, 20 Ah
l A single cabinet supports one battery pack. (48 V, 20 Ah)
l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C)
l Two battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 200 Ah)
l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D) l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) IBBS300D or IBBS300T
IBBS20D
l Two battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 300 Ah)
l Two cabinets supports two battery packs connected in parallel. (48 V, 40 Ah)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
738
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Cabinet Type
Storage Battery Type
Battery Pack Specifications
IBBS700D or IBBS700T
12 V, 150 Ah
l One battery pack (48 V, 150 Ah)
12 V, 100 Ah
One battery pack (48 V, 100 Ah)
l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
l Four battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 600 Ah)
l IMS06
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of storage batteries. Table 4-100 Technical specifications of storage batteries Storage Battery Type
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
12 V, 100 Ah
290 mm x 110 mm x 398 mm (11.42 in. x 4.33 in. x 15.66 in.)
≤ 34 kg (74.97 lb)
12 V, 150 Ah
l In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 in. x 22.09 in.)
60 kg (132.3 lb)
l In an IBBS700D or IBBS700T: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 in. x 20.79 in.) 12 V, 20 Ah
76 mm x 167 mm x 181 mm (2.99 in. x 6.54 in. x 7.13 in.)
6.35 kg (14 lb)
4.4 Monitoring Devices This section describes monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the monitoring devices. For specific monitoring schemes in base stations, see Monitor Management.
4.4.1 CMUA A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) mainly monitors the temperature in a cabinet as well as the temperature of the fan and heater in the cabinet. A CMUA can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.B), or IBBS200T (Ver.B). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
739
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUA. Figure 4-140 Exterior of a CMUA
Function A CMUA performs the following functions: l
Automatically adjusts the temperature of cabinets with different temperature control modes.
l
Reserves three Boolean signal input ports to support Boolean alarm detection, but does not support detection of alarms reported by devices outside the cabinet.
l
Provides an RJ45 port for connecting to an ELU to detect cabinet types.
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUA. Figure 4-141 Ports on a CMUA
The following table describes the ports on a CMUA. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
740
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-101 Ports on a CMUA No.
Port
Description
(1)
l In an RFC: TEM port
l In an RFC: connecting to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the RFC to receive RFC temperature alarms
l In an IBBS200 D or IBBS200 T: TEM_BA T port
l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the storage battery temperature sensor in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T to receive storage battery temperature alarms
COM_OUT port
Connecting to a lower-level port
(2)
l In an APM30H: connecting to the PMU l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T: connecting to the lower-level CMUA
(3)
COM_IN port
Connecting to an upper-level port l In an APM30H: connecting to the BBU l In an RFC or TMC11H: connecting to the BBU or upper-level CMUA l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the PMU or upper-level CMUA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(4)
ELU port
Connecting to an electronic label unit (ELU) to receive ELU alarms
(5)
GATE port
Connecting to a door status sensor to receive door status alarms
(6)
IN0, IN1, and IN2 ports
Boolean signal ports
(7)
SMOKE port
Connecting to a smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms
(8)
FAN_EXT port
Connecting to the outer air circulation fan in a cabinet door to receive outer air circulation fan alarms
(9)
PWR port
Port for feeding power to a CMUA
(10)
TEC port
Connecting to a TEC to receive TEC alarms
l In an APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H: reserved l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to a BAU02D, which is optionally configured
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
741
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Port
Description
(11)
l In an APM30H , TMC11H , RFC, or IBBS200 D: IFAN1 port
l In an APM30H or TMC11H: connecting to the fan in the fan assembly l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the right fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the inner air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS200 T: FAN_IN T port l In an RFC or IBBS200 D: IFAN2 port
(12)
l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the left fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the outer air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS200 T: FAN_EX T port
Indicator The two indicators on a CMUA panel indicate the status of the CMUA. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-102 Indicators on the CMUA panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with its upper-level device for more than one minute.
Steady on or off
The board is faulty (if it is not in the poweron check state).
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
ALM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
742
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Silkscr een
4 Component Description
Color
State
Meaning
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
DIP Switch On a CMUA, there are three DIP switches (SW1, SW2, and SW3), which are used to set the working mode of the CMUA based on the cabinet type. The following figure shows the positions of the DIP switches on a CMUA. Figure 4-142 Positions of the DIP switches on a CMUA (top view)
The following figure shows the DIP switch settings on CMUAs in different cabinets. Figure 4-143 DIP switch settings on CMUAs in different cabinets
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
743
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
In the preceding figure, the small red box indicates a connection to the upper jumper cap.
4.4.2 CMUE A central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) mainly monitors the temperature in a cabinet as well as the temperature of the fan and heater in the cabinet. A CMUE can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200T (Ver.C).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUE. Figure 4-144 Exterior of a CMUE
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUE. Figure 4-145 Ports on a CMUE
The following table describes the ports on a CMUE.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
744
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-103 Ports on a CMUE No .
Port
Description
(1)
TEMP2 port
Reserved for connecting to a temperature sensor
(2)
WATER port
Reserved for connecting to a water sensor
(3)
IFAN4 port
Reserved for connecting to the inner circulation fan in a cabinet
(4)
IFAN3 port
Reserved for connecting to the inner circulation fan in a cabinet
(5)
l In an RFC or IBBS20 0D: IFAN2 port
l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the left fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the outer air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS20 0T: FAN_E XT port (6)
l In an APM30 H, TMC11 H, RFC, or IBBS20 0D: IFAN1 port
l In an APM30H or TMC11H: connecting to the fan in the fan assembly l In an RFC or IBBS200D: connecting to the right fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the inner air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms from the IBBS200T
l In an IBBS20 0T: FAN_IN T port (7)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
TEC port
Connecting to a TEC to receive TEC alarms
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
745
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Port
Description
(8)
l In an RFC: TEM port
l In an RFC: connecting to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the RFC to receive RFC temperature alarms
l In an IBBS20 0D or IBBS20 0T: TEM_B AT port (9)
COM_OUT port
l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the storage battery temperature sensor in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T to receive storage battery temperature alarms
RS485 signal port connecting to a lower-level cascading port to receive monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the PMU l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T: connecting to the lower-level CMUE
(10 )
COM_IN port
RS485 signal port connecting to an upper-level cascading port to report monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the BBU l In an RFC or TMC11H: connecting to the BBU or upper-level CMUE l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the PMU or upperlevel CMUE
(11 )
RUN indicator
Indicating the running status of a fan
(12 )
ALM indicator
Indicating fan alarm status
(13 )
ELU port
Connecting to an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type
(14 )
GATE port
Boolean signal port connecting to a door status sensor
(15 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2 ports
Boolean signal ports
SMOKE port
Boolean signal port connecting to a smoke sensor
(16 )
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
l In an APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H: reserved l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to a BAU02D if the BAU02D is configured
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
746
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Port
Description
(17 ) an d (18 )
FAN_EXT port
Connecting to the outer circulation fan in a cabinet
(19 )
PWR port
Power input port for providing DC power for the board
Indicator The two indicators on a CMUE panel indicate the status of the CMUE. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-104 Indicators on a CMUE panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check state.
Steady off
The board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
ALM
Red
DIP Switch On a CMUE, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CMUE based on the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on a CMUE. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
747
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-146 Position of the DIP switch on a CMUE
The following figure shows the DIP switch settings on CMUEs in different cabinets. Figure 4-147 DIP switch settings on CMUEs in different cabinets
NOTE
The small red box in Figure 4-147 indicates a connection to the upper jumper cap.
4.4.3 CMUEA A central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) mainly monitors the temperature in a cabinet as well as the temperature of the fan and heater in the cabinet. A CMUEA can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30 (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.D_B), RFC (Ver.D_A), TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H (Ver.D_A1), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D), or IBBS700D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUEA. Figure 4-148 Exterior of a CMUEA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
748
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUEA. Figure 4-149 Ports on a CMUEA
The following table describes the ports on a CMUEA. Table 4-105 Ports on a CMUEA No .
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
TEMP2
Reserved for connecting to a temperature sensor
(2)
WATER
Reserved for connecting to a water sensor
(3)
IFAN4
(4)
IFAN3
Reserved for connecting to the inner air circulation fan in a cabinet to receive inner air circulation fan alarms
(5)
l In an RFC: IFAN2
l In an RFC: connecting to the left fan in the fan assembly l In an IBBS200T: connecting to the outer air circulation fan in the TEC to receive fan alarms
l In an IBBS20 0T: FAN_E XT
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
749
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscreen
Description
(6)
l In an APM30 H, TMC11 H, or RFC: IFAN1
l In an APM30H or TMC11H: connecting to the fan in the fan assembly l In an RFC: connecting to the right fan in the fan assembly l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the inner air circulation fan in the cabinet or TEC to receive fan alarms
l In an IBBS20 0D or IBBS20 0T: FAN_IN T (7)
TEC
Connecting to a TEC to receive TEC alarms
(8)
l In an RFC: TEM
l In an RFC: connecting to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the RFC to receive RFC temperature alarms
l In an IBBS20 0D or IBBS20 0T: TEM_B AT (9)
COM_OUT
l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the storage battery temperature sensor to receive storage battery temperature alarms
RS485 signal port connecting to a lower-level cascading port to receive monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the PMU l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D: connecting to the lower-level CMUEA
(10 )
COM_IN
RS485 signal port connecting to an upper-level cascading port to report monitoring information l In an APM30H: connecting to the BBU l In an RFC or TMC11H: connecting to the BBU or upper-level CMUEA l In an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D: connecting to the PMU or upper-level CMUEA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(11 )
ELU
Connecting to an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type
(12 )
GATE
Boolean signal port connecting to a door status sensor
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
750
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscreen
Description
(13 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Boolean signal ports l In an APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H: reserved l In an IBBS200D or IBBS200T: connecting to the surge protection alarm cable for the BAU02D or ODM06D l In an IBBS700D: The IN0 port connects to the heater, and the IN1 and IN2 ports are reserved.
(14 )
SMOKE
Boolean signal port l In an APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T: connecting to the smoke sensor l In an IBBS700D: This port is not provided.
(15 ) an d (16 )
FAN_EXT
Reserved for connecting to the outer air circulation fan in a cabinet to receive outer air circulation fan alarms
(17 )
PWR
Power input port for providing DC power for the board
Indicator The two indicators on a CMUEA panel indicate the status of the CMUEA. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-106 Indicators on a CMUEA panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check state.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
ALM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
751
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Silkscr een
4 Component Description
Color
State
Meaning
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
DIP Switch On a CMUEA, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CMUEA based on the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on a CMUEA. Figure 4-150 Position of the DIP switch on a CMUEA
(1) DIP Switch
The following figure shows the DIP switch settings on CMUEAs in different cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
752
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-151 DIP switch settings on CMUEAs in different cabinets
4.4.4 CMUG The central monitoring unit type G (CMUG) monitors the temperature in the cabinet, detects power supply, and reports alarms. A CMUG can be used in an IBBS20D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUG. Figure 4-152 Exterior of a CMUG
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUG.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
753
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-153 Ports on a CMUG
The following table describes the ports on a CMUG. Table 4-107 Ports on the CMUG No .
Silkscreen on the Panel
Description
(1)
ELU
Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type
(2)
ELU_GAT E
Boolean signal port, reserved
(3)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information In an IBBS20D, this port connects to a PMU or upper-level CMUG.
(4)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information In an IBBS20D, it connects to a lower-level CMUG.
(5)
GATE
Boolean signal port connected to the door status sensor
(6)
FAN
Connects to the fan in the cabinet and receives alarm signals from the fan.
(7)
MON
Monitoring signal port, used for detecting the voltage, current, and circuit breaker status of the storage batteries and controlling the power-off of storage batteries.
(8)
HEATER
Connects to the heating film to heat the IBBS20D.
(9)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power input for the board
Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on the CMUG panel. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
754
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-108 Indicators on the CMUG panel Silkscr een
Color
State
Description
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
ALM
Red
4.4.5 CMUH A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) mainly monitors a fan module, a heater, cabinet temperature, and lower-level devices. A CMUH can be installed in an RFC (Ver.E), IBBS200D (Ver.E), or IBBS200T (Ver.E).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUH. Figure 4-154 Exterior of a CMUH
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
755
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUH. Figure 4-155 Ports on a CMUH
The following table describes the ports on a CMUH. Table 4-109 Ports on a CMUH No.
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
TEMP1
Reserved port for connecting a temperature sensor
(2)
WATER
Connecting to a water sensor
(3)
IFAN4
(4)
IFAN3
Connecting an internal circulation fan and receiving internal circulation fan alarm signals
(5)
IFAN2
(6)
IFAN1
(7)
IFAN0
(8)
TEC
Connecting the TEC in an IBBS200T and receiving TEC alarm signals
(9)
TEMP0
l Connecting the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of a cabinet to receive temperature alarm signals in an RFC. l Connecting a battery temperature sensor and receiving battery temperature alarm signals in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(10)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
D_COM0
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
756
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Description
(11)
D_COM1
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices Connecting a WIUA that is optional
(12)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information. l Connecting a lower-level CMUH or CCUB in an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T
(13)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information. l Connecting an upper-level CMUH or CCUB in an RFC l Connecting a CCUB or upper-level CMUH in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(14)
ELU
Connecting an ELU to report the cabinet type
(15)
GATE
Boolean signal port for connecting a door status sensor that is configured by default
(16)
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Boolean signal port l Reserved port in an RFC l Connecting a BAU02D or ODM06D surge protection alarm cable in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
(17)
SMOKE
Boolean signal port Connecting a smoke sensor in an RFC, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T
(18)
EFAN
Connecting an external circulation fan and receiving external circulation fan alarm signals
(19)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power inputs for boards
Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on a CMUH. Table 4-110 Indicators on a CMUH
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upperlevel device properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
757
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
ALM
4 Component Description
Color
Red
Status
Meaning
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upperlevel device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
4.4.6 HEUA The Heat Exchange Unit type A (HEUA) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU. HEUA can be used in OMB cabinet.
Panel The following figure shows the HEUA panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
758
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-156 Exterior of the HEUA
(1) IntFAN
(2) ISENSOR
(3) DC_SPD
(4) AC_SPD
(5) GATE
(6) COM IN
(7) COM OUT
(8) ExtFAN
(9) DC INPUT
Function The HEUA performs the following functions: l
Provides -48 V DC to the fan assembly.
l
Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information.
l
Collects surge protection alarm information from the DCDU-03B or AC/DC converter.
l
Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Reports the collected information to the BBU through an RS485 port.
Port The following table describes the ports on the HEUA. Table 4-111 Ports on the HEUA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
IntFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the inner air circulation fan
ISENSOR
4-pin connector
Port connected to the temperature sensor
DC_SPD
8_PCB connector
Port for collecting the DC input surge protection alarm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
759
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
AC_SPD
8_PCB connector
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
GATE
8_PCB connector
Port for the door status sensor
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Port for reporting monitoring signals
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Monitoring port for the AC/DC converter
ExtFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the outer air circulation fan
DC INPUT
3V3 connector
Port for feeding -48 V DC
4.4.7 HEUB The Heat Exchange Unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU. HEUB can be used in OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a HEUB. Figure 4-157 Exterior of the HEUB
Function The HEUB performs the following functions: l
Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly, monitors the running status of fans, and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
760
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following figure shows the ports on a HEUB. Figure 4-158 Ports on a HEUB
The following table describes the ports on the HEUB. Table 4-112 Ports on the HEUB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Ports on the HEUB
(1)
ELU
RJ45 connector
Electronic label port
(2)
ExtFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the outer air circulation fan
(3)
IntFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the inner air circulation fan
(4)
TEM
4-pin connector
Port connected to the temperature sensor
(5)
AC_SPD
Bare wire
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
(6)
GATE
Bare wire
Port for the door status sensor
(7)
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Port for reporting monitoring signals
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
761
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Ports on the HEUB
(8)
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Port connected to the ETP48100-A1
(9)
PWR
3V3 connector
Port for feeding -48 V DC power
4.4.8 CMUF The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) monitors the fans and cabinet temperature. A CMUF can be used in the BTS3900AL and IBBS700T.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUF. Figure 4-159 CMUF
Ports The following figure shows the ports and indicators on a CMUF. Figure 4-160 Ports on a CMUF
The following table describes the ports on a CMUF. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
762
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-113 Description of the ports on a CMUF No.
Port
Description
(1)
WATER
Reserved port, connected to the water sensor.
(2)
FAN4
One-row 4-pin port for connecting a fan. It is a reserved port.
(3)
FAN5
(4)
FAN6
(5)
FAN8
(6)
FAN7
(7)
TEM0
Dual-row 4-pin port for connecting a fan. It is a reserved port.
l It is connected to the temperature sensor next to the storage battery in the BTS3900AL. l It is reserved in the IBBS700T.
(8)
TEM1
Connected to the temperature sensor on the front door of the cabinet.
(9)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information.
(10)
COM_485
Reserved RS485 signal port.
(11)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information.
(12)
ELU
Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type.
(13)
GATE
Boolean signal port, which is connected to the door status sensor.
(14)
IN0
Boolean signal port l It is reserved in the BTS3900AL. l It is connected to a heater and reports monitoring information in the IBBS700T.
(15)
SMOKE
Boolean signal port l In the BTS3900AL, this port is connected to the smoke sensor. l In the IBBS700T, this port is not involved.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(16)
TEC
Connected to the TEC cooler to receive alarms related to the TEC cooler.
(17)
FAN_EXT 0
Connected to the outer air circulation fan.
(18)
FAN_EXT 1
Connected to the outer air circulation fan.
(19)
FAN_IN0
Connected to the inner air circulation fan.
(20)
FAN_IN1
Connected to the inner air circulation fan.
(21)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power input for the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
763
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicators The two indicators on the CMUF panel indicate the status of the CMUF. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-114 Indicators on the CMUF Silkscr een
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the BBU properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
ALM
Red
DIP Switch The DIP switches on the CMUF are used to set the working mode of the CMUF according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CMUF.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
764
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-161 Positions of the DIP switches on the CMUF
(1) DIP Switch
The following figure shows the settings of the DIP switches on the CMUF in different cabinets. Figure 4-162 Settings of the DIP switches on the CMUF in different cabinets
4.4.9 CCU A cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet. A CCU can be used in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS700D, or IBBS700T cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the CCU.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
765
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-163 Exterior of the CCU
Functions A CCU performs the following functions: l
Provides four standard 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet ports for cascading and commissioning CCUs.
l
Provides three uplink RS485 ports for the main equipment to manage the CCU.
l
Provides eight downlink RS485 ports to communicate with the CMUF, FAU, HAU, PMU, EMUA, and EMUB.
l
Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and access control alarms when being connected to corresponding sensors.
Port The following figure shows the ports on the CCU panel. Figure 4-164 Exterior of the CCU panel
The following table describes the ports on the CCU panel. Table 4-115 Ports on the CCU panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Item
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
CCU cascading ports
FE_L and FE_R
The FE_R port on the upper-level CCU connects to the FE_L port on the lower-level CCU. The FE_L port on level 1 CCU is idle.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
766
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Item
Silkscreen
Description
(2)
FE cascading ports
FE0 and FE1
The FE0 port is reserved and the FE1 port is a commissioning port. NOTE l The combined serial connector and Ethernet connector cable for commissioning connects the CCU to the FE1 port on the CCU and port for the HyperTerminal tool, which is integrated in the Windows operating system. The serial port has a rate of 115,200 bit/s. l After connecting the cable, log in to the serial port using "root" as the user name and "Huawei@ccu123" as the password.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(3)
Electronic label unit (ELU) port
ELU
Used to manage the cabinet asset
(4)
Downlink COM port
D_COM0 to D_COM7
Used to manage electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 communication
(5)
Uplink COM port
U_COM0 to U_COM2
Used for the main device to manage the CCU through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 or FE communication
(6)
USB port
USB
Reserved
(7)
DC power input port
RTN(+) and NEG(-)
Used to receive -48 V DC power
(8)
Port for the cabinet lamp
LAMP
Used to supply -48 V DC power to the cabinet lamp
(9)
Boolean signal port
GATE, IN0, and IN1
Port for providing three Boolean inputs. The GATE port connects the door status sensor, the IN1 port connects the AC surge protector, and the IN0 port is reserved.
(10)
Enhanced protective RS485 port
T+T- and R +R-
Supports uplink RS485 communication.
(11)
Port for connecting the smoke sensor
SMOKE
Port for connecting the smoke sensor
(12)
Port for connecting the temperature sensor
TEM
Reserved
(13)
Indicator
RUN, ALM, and LINK
For details about the indicators' status, see Table 4-116.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
767
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicator The two indicators on the CCU panel indicate the status of the CCU. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-116 Status indicator Silksc reen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functioning properly according to the configuration.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Software is being loaded to the module, or the module is not started.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the current board.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
ALM
Red
Besides the preceding two indicators, there is another indicator indicating the status of the cascading port on the CCU. The following table describes this indicator. Table 4-117 Port indicator Silksc reen
Color
Status
Description
LINK
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated on the CCU cascading port which may be connected improperly.
Steady off
No fault.
4.4.10 CCU01D-03 A cabinet control unit 1D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet. A CCU01D-03 can be installed in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
768
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CCU01D-03. Figure 4-165 Exterior of the CCU01D-03
Functions A CCU01D-03 monitors all functions of a cabinet. It performs the following functions: l
Provides two standard Ethernet ports with the rate of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s for cascading CCU01D-03 modules.
l
Provides two uplink RS485 ports for connecting the upper- or lower-level communication ports.
l
Provides two downlink RS485 ports for managing electromechanical components.
l
Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and door status alarms when it is connected to corresponding sensors.
Port The following figure shows the ports on the CCU01D-03 panel. Figure 4-166 Ports on the CCU01D-03 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
769
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the ports on the CCU01D-03 panel. Table 4-118 Ports on the CCU01D-03 panel No .
Silkscreen
Description
(1)
TEMP2
Reserved port for connecting to the temperature sensor
(2)
WATER
Connects to the water sensor.
(3)
FAN_EXT
Connects to the outer air circulation fan to receive alarm signals from it.
(4)
FAN_INT
Connects to the inner air circulation fan to receive alarm signals from it.
(5)
TEC
Connects to the TEC to receive alarms signals from it.
(6)
PWR
Power input port for providing DC power input for the board
(7)
EXTFAN2
Reserved.
(8)
EXTFAN1
(9)
SMOKE
Boolean signal port Port for connecting to the smoke sensor in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
(10 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Boolean signal port l If a BAU02D is optionally configured, these ports connect to the BAU02D. l If an IBBS300D is not configured with a BAU02D, the IN0 port connects to a heater and the IN1 and IN2 ports are reserved.
(11 )
GATE
Boolean signal port for connecting to the door status sensor
(12 )
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, it connects to a lower-level CCU01D-03.
(13 )
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, it connects to the PMU or upper-level CCU01D-03.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(14 )
D_COM1
(15 )
D_COM0
(16 )
FE_R
Manages electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 communication
The FE_R port on the upper-level CCU01D-03 is connected to the FE_L port on the lower-level CCU01D-03. If the FE_L port on a Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
770
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscreen
Description
(17 )
FE_L
CCU01D-03 is not connected to a cable, the CCU01D-03 is the firstlevel CCU01D-03.
(18 )
RUN, ALM, and LINK
For the meanings of the indicator status, see Table 4-119and Table 4-120.
(19 )
ELU
Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type
(20 )
TEM_BAT
In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, this port is connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarms.
Indicator The two indicators on the CCU01D-03 panel indicate the status of the CCU01D-03. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-119 Status indicator description Silksc reen
Color
State
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functioning properly according to the configuration.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Data is being loaded to the board, or the board is not started.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board needs to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
ALM
Red
Besides the preceding two indicators, there is another indicator indicating the status of the cascading port on the CCU01D-03. The following table describes this indicator.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
771
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-120 Port indicator description Silksc reen
Color
State
Description
LINK
Red
Steady on
An alarm is generated on the CCU01D-03 cascading port which may be connected improperly.
Steady off
There is no fault.
DIP Switch On the CCU01D-03, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CCU01D-03 according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03. Figure 4-167 Position of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03
The following figure shows the settings of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03 in different cabinets. Figure 4-168 Settings of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03 in different cabinets
4.4.11 CCUB A cabinet control unit type B (CCUB) monitors a fan module, a heater, cabinet temperature, a power module, and lower-level devices. A CCUB can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
772
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CCUB. Figure 4-169 Exterior of a CCUB
Port The following figure shows the ports on a CCUB. Figure 4-170 Ports on a CCUB
The following table describes the ports on a CCUB. Table 4-121 Ports on a CCUB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No .
Silkscr een
Description
(1)
PWR
Power input port providing DC power inputs for boards
(2)
EFAN1
Connecting an external circulation fan and receiving external circulation fan alarm signals
(3)
COM_4 85
Connecting a monitoring board in a battery cabinet and receiving alarm signals from the battery cabinet Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
773
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscr een
Description
(4)
MON00/ D_COM 0-0
l MON0-0: Connecting an environment monitoring unit in another RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
MON01/ D_COM 0-1
l MON0-1: Connecting an environment monitoring unit in another RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
MON10/ D_COM 1-0
l MON1-0: Connecting an environment unit in an RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
MON11/ D_COM 1-1
l MON1-1: Connecting an environment unit in an RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H
D_COM 2
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
l D_COM0-0: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
l D_COM0-1: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
l D_COM1-0: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
l D_COM1-1: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices
Connecting a WIUA that is optional (9)
D_COM 3
Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices Connecting an electric lock that is optional
(10 )
COM_I N/ U_COM 0
l COM_IN: Connecting an upper-level CCUB or CMUH. If no BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) or the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) does not work as a manager, this port communicates with an upper-level cascading port for reporting monitoring information. l U_COM0: If the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) works as a manager, this port connects to the MON1 port on the BBU.
(11 )
COM_O UT/ U_COM 1
l COM_OUT: If no BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) or the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) does not work as a manager, this port communicates with a lower-level cascading port for receiving monitoring information and connecting a lower-level CMUH. l U_COM1: If the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) works as a manager, this port connects to the MON1 port on the BBU.
(12 )
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
PMI
Connecting a power monitoring interface (PMI) board and receiving monitoring signals from the power system
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
774
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No .
Silkscr een
Description
(13 )
ELU
Connecting an ELU to report the cabinet type
(14 )
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Reserved Boolean signal port
(15 )
GATE
Boolean signal port for connecting a door status sensor that is configured by default
(16 )
SMOKE
Boolean signal port
(17 )
TEMP0
Reserved temperature monitoring port
(18 )
TEM_B AT
Battery temperature sensor port for receiving temperature information about internal or external storage batteries of an APM30H
(19 )
ADDR
Address monitored by the PMU function of a CCUB. The monitored address is 3 if the DIP switch is set to 1. The monitored address is 4 if the DIP switch is set to 0.
(20 )
WATER
Reserved port for connecting a water sensor
(21 )
TEMP2
Reserved port for connecting a temperature sensor
(22 )
IFAN0
Connecting an internal circulation fan and receiving internal circulation fan alarm signals
Connecting a smoke sensor in an APM30H or TMC11H
Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on a CCUB. Table 4-122 Indicators on a CCUB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on selfcheck status.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
775
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
ALM
4 Component Description
Color
Red
Status
Meaning
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.
4.4.12 WIUA A wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) is mainly used to monitor the running status of other components in the same cabinet. A WIUA can be installed in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
Applicable Version The WIUA is available in MBTS V100R011C00 and later versions.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a WIUA. Figure 4-171 Exterior of a WIUA
(1) COM_IN port
(2) SETUP indicator
(3) STATE indicator
(4) Pairing button
(5) ANT port
-
Function A WIUA provides the following functions: Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
776
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
l
Provides one RS485 signal port for communicating with an upper-level component.
l
Provides one antenna port for connecting to an antenna and communicating with external wireless components.
l
Contains an antenna for performing wireless communication with other components in the same cabinet.
l
Provides a pairing button for pairing with a lower-level component.
l
Provides an electronic label.
The following figure shows the function of a WIUA. Figure 4-172 WIUA function
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a WIUA. Table 4-123 Indicators on a WIUA
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
STATE
Red or green
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Steady green
The board is performing self-check or loading and activation.
Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is not registered, or the communication is interrupted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
777
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
SETUP
4 Component Description
Color
Green
Status
Meaning
Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.
Steady red
An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Communications are normal but an alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.
Steady off
No power is supplied or the pairing function is not enabled, and the board does not exchange data with a lower-level device.
Steady on
No data is being initialized and the pairing operation is not supported.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is performing wireless exchange with a lower-level device.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board has been enabled with the pairing function.
Port and Button The following table describes the ports and button on a WIUA. Table 4-124 Ports and button on a WIUA Silkscreen
Description
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with an upper-level cascading port and reporting monitoring information Pairing buttona
ANT
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Port for connecting an external antennab
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
778
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
a: The pairing button works as follows: l
After you press the pairing button on a WIUA, the WIUA can be paired with a lower-level device if the SETUP indicator is blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s).
l
If you press the pairing button again during a pairing process, the pairing process will be interrupted and the SETUP indicator is steady off.
l
After the SETUP indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s) for 10 minutes, the pairing function is automatically disabled.
b: When the WIUA is used together with an external antenna, the external antenna must be an omnidirectional antenna with a gain of less than 3 dBi and be installed by qualified personnel.
Engineering specifications The following table lists the engineering specifications of the WIUA. Table 4-125 Engineering specifications Specifications
Remarks
Input voltage
12 V DC
Operating voltage range:9 V DC to 12 V DC
Power consumption
2W
-
Dimensions (H x W x D)
27 mm x 45 mm x 55 mm (1.06 in. x 1.77in. x 2.17 in.)
-
Weight
0.1 kg (0.22 lb)
-
Operating temperature
-40°C to +70°C
-
Relative humidity
5% RH to 95% RH
-
Altitude
-60 m to +4000 m (-196.85 ft to +13123.20 ft)
From the altitude of 1800 m (5905.51 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) each time the altitude increases by 220 m (721.78 ft).
Storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
It is recommended that the device be installed and used within one year after its delivery because of the failure rate.
Protection level
IP20
-
Item Power specifications
Equipment specifications
Environment specifications
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
779
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.4.13 eBat An eBat is used to monitor the running status of a storage battery and report monitoring information to an upper-level WIUA through wireless communication. An eBat can be installed in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.
Applicable Version The eBat is available in MBTS V100R011C00 and later versions.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an eBat. Figure 4-173 Exterior of an eBat
(1) Cable outlet
(2) Pairing button
(3) RUN/ALM indicator
Function An eBat performs the following functions: l
Monitors the voltage of a storage battery.
l
Monitors the inner resistance of a storage battery.
l
Reports monitoring information about a storage battery to a WIUA.
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on an eBat. Table 4-126 Indicators on an eBat
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN/AL M
Green
Steady off
An eBat is not powered on or is in sleep mode.
Steady on
An eBat is not paired with a WIUA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
780
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Label
4 Component Description
Color
Red
Orange
Status
Meaning
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
An eBat is being pairing with a WIUA.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.
Steady on
Communications are normal but a major internal battery resistance alarm is reported, and batteries need to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
A hardware sensor is faulty and communications are interrupted.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
A hardware sensor is faulty but communications are normal.
Steady on
A minor internal battery resistance alarm is reported and communications are normal.
Port and Button The following table describes the port and button on an eBat. Table 4-127 Port and button on an eBat Item
Description
Cable outlet for an eBat
Two red cables and two black cables are routed through this cable outlet and connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery. Pairing button. After an upper-level WIUA starts pairing, pressing this button can pair the WIUA and eBat.
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an eBat.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
781
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-128 Specifications of an eBat Item
Technical Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
48.5 mm x 35 mm x 17 mm (1.91 in. x 1.38 in. x 0.67 in.)
Operating voltage
11 V DC to 17 V DC
Operating temperature
-20°C to +65°C (-4°F to +149°F)
Voltage monitoring range
11 V DC to 17 V DC
Internal resistance monitoring range
1.5 mΩ to 60 mΩ
Voltage monitoring precision
2%
Internal resistance monitoring precision
0.1 mΩ
4.5 Surge Protection Devices This section describes surge protection devices and types of cabinets supported by the surge protection devices.
4.5.1 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit(SLPU), which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high. A SLPU can be used in an APM30H, TMC11H, or BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Exterior of an SLPU The following figure shows the exterior of an SLPU. Figure 4-174 Exterior of an SLPU
SLPU slot assignment rules As a mandatory module providing protection for trunk signals in APM30H or TMC11H cabinet, the SLPU is configured with a UELP or UFLP and is installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
782
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-129 SLPU slot assignment rules Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
UELP
Optional
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is preferentially configured in the descending order of priority in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.
UFLP
Optional
1
Slot 3
If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
When 16 or fewer customized alarm inputs are required, the SLPU is an optional module that provide protection for monitoring signals, the SLPU is configured with two USLP boards and is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. Table 4-130 SLPU slot assignment rules Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
USLP
Optional
2
Slot 2 and slot 3
-
4.5.2 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals A surge protection subrack can be configured with a UELP or UFLP, which provides surge protection for transmission signals. It can be used in BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Slot No. The following figure shows the slots in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
783
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-175 Slots in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals
Board Configuration The surge protection subrack for transmission signals is on the upper right of the cabinet, and can be configured with the UELP or UFLP. The following table describes the board configuration principles. Table 4-131 Board configuration principles
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
UELP
Optional
4
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is preferentially configured in the descending order of priority in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
784
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Board
Optional or Mandatory
Maximum Quantity
Slot
Restriction
UFLP
Optional
1
Slot 3
If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
4.5.3 UELP Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four channels of E1/T1 signals. It can be used in APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), or OMB(Ver.C).
Panel The following figure shows the UELP panel. Figure 4-176 UELP panel
Port The following table describes the ports on the UELP. Table 4-132 Ports on a UELP
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE
DB25 female connector
Connects to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE
DB26 female connector
Connects to the external transmission equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
785
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
DIP Switch A UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. The following figure shows the DIP switch on a UELP. Figure 4-177 DIP Switch on a UELP
The following table lists the setting of the DIP switch on a UELP. Table 4-133 Setting of the DIP switch on a UELP DIP Switch
DIP Status 1
2
3
4
S1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other status
Meaning
Not grounded Grounding
NOTE
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
4.5.4 UFLP A universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE signals. A universal FE lightning protection unit type b (UFLPb) or universal FE lightning protection unit type c (UFLPc) provides protection for two channels of FE or GE signals. A UFLP, UFLPb, or UFLPc can be installed in an APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, or OMB (Ver.C). Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
786
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Panel The following figure shows the UFLP panel. Figure 4-178 UFLP panel
The following figure shows the UFLPb panel. Figure 4-179 UFLPb panel
The following figure shows the UFLPc panel. Figure 4-180 UFLPc panel
Port The following table describes ports on the UFLP. Table 4-134 Ports on the UFLP Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to the external transmission equipment.
The following table describes ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
787
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-135 Ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to a transmission board of the base station.
OUTSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connects to the external transmission equipment.
4.5.5 USLP A universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) or universal signal lightning protection unit type c (USLPc) provides protection for dry contacts and can be installed in an APM30H, TMC11H, or BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
Panel The following figure shows the USLP2 panel. Figure 4-181 USLP2 panel
The following figure shows the USLPc panel. Figure 4-182 USLPc panel
Port The following table describes ports on the USLP2 or USLPc.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
788
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-136 Ports on the USLP2 or USLPc Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity of Ports
Description
IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3
4-pin
4
Connect to customized alarm devices.
OUT0 and OUT1
RJ45 connector
2
Connects to the EXTALM port on the UPEU or UEIU in a cabinet.
The following figure shows the mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Figure 4-183 Mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports OUT0 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
OUT1 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
IN0 1
2
3
IN1 4
1
2
3
IN2 4
1
2
3
IN3 4
1
2
3
4
The following table describes the mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Table 4-137 Mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc Input Port Silkscreen
Pin
Silkscreen
Pin
IN0
IN0.1
OUT1
OUT1.1
IN1
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Output Port
IN0.2
OUT1.2
IN0.3
OUT1.4
IN0.4
OUT1.5
IN1.1
OUT1.3
IN1.2
OUT1.6
IN1.3
OUT1.7
IN1.4
OUT1.8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
789
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Input Port
Output Port
Silkscreen
Pin
Silkscreen
Pin
IN2
IN2.1
OUT0
OUT0.1
IN3
IN2.2
OUT0.2
IN2.3
OUT0.4
IN2.4
OUT0.5
IN3.1
OUT0.3
IN3.2
OUT0.6
IN3.3
OUT0.7
IN3.4
OUT0.8
For details about the application of a USLP, see 4.5.1 SLPU.
4.5.6 GPS Surge Protector A GPS surge protector provides surge protection for a satellite receiver. It can be used in BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), OMB(Ver.C), APM30H, and TMC11H. The following figure shows the exterior of a GPS surge protector. Figure 4-184 Exterior of a GPS surge protector
(1) Type N female connection terminal
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Surge protection and grounding (3) Type N male connection terminal terminal
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
790
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.5.7 SPD An AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power in an OMB (Ver.C) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an AC surge protection box. Figure 4-185 Exterior of an AC surge protection box
(1) AC surge protection box
(2) Alarm port
(3) AC power supply ports
Port The following table describes the ports on an AC surge protection box. Table 4-138 Ports on an AC surge protection box Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Alarm port
ALARM
Bare wire
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
AC power supply port
L
Cord end terminal
AC power supply port
N PE
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
791
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.5.8 AC Surge Protection Box A lightning arrester box provides surge protection for the input AC power, it can be used in OMB.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a lightning arrester box. Figure 4-186 Exterior of a lightning arrester box
(1) Alarm port
(2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
Port The following table describes the ports on a lightning arrester box.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
792
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-139 Ports on a lightning arrester box Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Alarm port
SPD ALM
2-Pin cord end terminal
Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm
Port for power input
L
OT terminal
Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
N PE
4.6 Temperature Control Devices This section describes temperature control devices and types of cabinets supported by the temperature control devices.
4.6.1 Fan Assembly This section describes fan assemblies and types of cabinets supported by the fan assemblies.
FAN The FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet and monitors temperature. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN which includes the fan subrack, fans, and FMUC.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
793
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-187 Exterior of a FAN
(1) Fan
(2) Fan subrack
(3) FMUC
Functions The FAN performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l
Monitors temperature.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Ports The following figure shows the ports on a FAN. Figure 4-188 Ports on a FAN
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
794
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following table describes the ports on a FAN. Table 4-140 Ports on a FAN Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
Power port
-48V
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communicatio n port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades the lower-level FMUC or lower-level EMU.
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects the BBU, upperlevel FMUC, or upperlevel GATM.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a FAN. Table 4-141 Indicators on a FAN Indicato r
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUC.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUC.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is reporting alarms.
Steady off
The module is not reporting alarms.
ALM
Red
FAN 01A A FAN 01A dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in an RFC (Ver.B) cabinet.
Exterior A FAN 01A consists of three parts: the fan subrack, fans, and the CMUA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01A. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
795
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-189 Exterior of a FAN 01A
(1) CMUA
(2) Fans
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01A. Figure 4-190 Ports on a FAN 01A
(1) COM_OUT
(2) COM_IN
(3) RUN
(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2
(7) PWR
(8) SMOKE
(9) GATE
(10) ELU
(11) ALM
(12) TEM
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUA, see 4.4.1 CMUA.
FAN 01B A FAN 01B dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in an RFC (Ver.C) cabinet.
Exterior A FAN 01B consists of a fan subrack, fans, and a CMUE. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01B. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
796
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-191 Exterior of a FAN 01B
(1) CMUE
(2) Fans
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01B. Figure 4-192 Ports on a FAN 01B
(1) COM_OUT
(2) COM_IN
(3) RUN
(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2
(7) PWR
(8) SMOKE
(9) GATE
(10) ELU
(11) ALM
(12) TEMP1
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUE, see 4.4.2 CMUE.
FAN 01C A FAN 01C dissipates heat and detects temperature. It can be used in an RFC(Ver.D), RFC(Ver.D_B), or RFC(Ver.D_A).
Exterior A FAN 01C consists of the fan subrack, fans, and CMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01C.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
797
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-193 Exterior of a FAN 01C
(1) CMUEA
(2) Fans
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01C. Figure 4-194 Ports on a FAN 01C
(1) COM_OUT
(2) COM_IN
(3) RUN
(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2
(7) PWR
(8) SMOKE
(9) GATE
(10) ELU
(11) ALM
(12) TEMP1
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUEA, see 4.4.3 CMUEA.
FAN 01D A FAN 01D dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 01D can be installed in an RFC (Ver.E).
Exterior A FAN 01D consists a fan, a fan subrack, and a CMUH. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01D. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
798
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-195 Exterior of a FAN 01D
(1) CMUH
(2) Fan
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 01D. Figure 4-196 Ports on a FAN 01D
(1) RUN
(2) D_COM0
(3) D_COM1
(4) COM_OUT
(5) COM_IN
(6) ELU
(7) GATE
(8) SMOKE
(9) PWR
(10) IN2
(11) IN1
(12) IN0
(13) TEM
(14) ALM
-
For details about the ports and indicators on a CMUH, see 4.4.5 CMUH.
FAN 02A A FAN 02A dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.B) cabinets.
Exterior A FAN 02A consists of a fan subrack, fans, an HPMI, and a CMUA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02A. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
799
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-197 Exterior of a FAN 02A
(1) Fans
(2) Fan subrack
(3) CMUA
(4) HPMI
Ports on the HPMI The following figure shows the ports on the HPMI. Figure 4-198 Ports on the HPMI
The following table describes the ports on the HPMI. Table 4-142 Ports on the HPMI Silkscreen
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Description
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
PMU_DB50
Connected to the PMU.
-
-
OUT0 and OUT1
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal output.
Reserved port
Reserved port
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
800
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Description
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
FUSE
Reserved port for the fuse testing breaker
-
-
GATE
Connected to the door status sensor to receive door status alarms.
Mandatory
Reserved port
IN3 and IN4
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_BAT1
Connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarm signals.
Optional
Reserved port
SMOKE
Connected to the smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
WATER
Connected to the water sensor to receive water damage alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_HUM
Connected to the temperature and humidity sensor to receive temperature and humidity alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
NOTE
(1): Mandatory monitoring devices are installed in the cabinets before delivery, and all monitoring cables in all the cabinets are connected before delivery. The customer equipment is configured based on customer requirements, and the monitoring signal cables for the customer equipment must be connected onsite. For detailed installation procedures, see BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide.
The CMUA For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUA, see 4.4.1 CMUA.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
801
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
FAN 02B A FAN 02B dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinets.
Exterior A FAN 02B consists of a fan subrack, fans, a CMUE, and an HPMI. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02B. Figure 4-199 Exterior of a FAN 02B
(1) Fan subrack
(2) Fans
(3) CMUE
(4) HPMI
Ports on the HPMI The following figure shows the ports on the HPMI. Figure 4-200 Ports on the HPMI
The following table describes the ports on the HPMI. Table 4-143 Ports on the HPMI Silkscreen
PMU_DB50
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Description
Connected to the PMU.
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
802
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Description
Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H
TMC11H
OUT0 and OUT1
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal output.
Reserved port
Reserved port
IN0, IN1, and IN2
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
FUSE
Reserved port for the fuse testing breaker
-
-
GATE
Connected to the door status sensor to receive door status alarms.
Mandatory
Reserved port
IN3 and IN4
Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_BAT1
Connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarm signals.
Optional
Reserved port
SMOKE
Connected to the smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
WATER
Connected to the water sensor to receive water damage alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
TEM_HUM
Connected to the temperature and humidity sensor to receive temperature and humidity alarms.
Reserved port
Reserved port
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
803
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
Mandatory monitoring devices are installed in the cabinets before delivery, and all monitoring cables in all the cabinets are connected before delivery. The customer equipment is configured based on customer requirements, and the monitoring signal cables for the customer equipment must be connected onsite. For detailed installation procedures, see BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide.
CMUE For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUE, see 4.4.2 CMUE.
FAN 02D A FAN 02D dissipates heat and detects temperature. It can be used in an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), or TMC11H (Ver.D_A1).
Exterior A FAN 02D consists of a fan subrack, a fan, and a CMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02D. Figure 4-201 Exterior of a FAN 02D
(1) Fan subrack
(2) Fan
(3) CMUEA
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02D.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
804
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-202 Ports on a FAN 02D
(1) PWR
(2) FAN_EXT
(3) SMOKE
(4) RUN
(5) COM_IN
(6) COM_OUT
(7) ALM
(8) ELU
(9) GATE
(10)(11)(12) IN0, IN1, IN2
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on a CMUEA, see 4.4.3 CMUEA.
FAN 02E A FAN 02E dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 02E can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).
Exterior A FAN 02E consists a fan, a fan subrack, and a CCUB. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02E. Figure 4-203 Exterior of a FAN 02E
(1) CCUB
(2) Fan
(3) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02E. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
805
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-204 Ports on a FAN 02E
(1) ALM
(2) ADDR
(3) TEM
(4) SMOKE
(5) GATE
(6) COM_OUT/ U_COM1
(7) COM_IN/ U_COM0
(8) D_COM3
(9) D_COM2
(10) COM_485
(11) FAN_EXT
(12) PWR
(13) MON0-0/ D_COM0-0
(14) MON0-1/ D_COM0-1
(15) MON1-0/ D_COM1-0
(16) MON1-1/ D_COM1-1
(17) PMI
(18) ELU
(19) IN0, IN1, and IN2
(20) TEM_BAT
(21) RUN
-
-
-
-
For details about the ports and indicators on a CCUB, see 4.4.11 CCUB.
FAN 02F A FAN 02F dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 02F can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or TMC11H (Ver.C).
Exterior A FAN 02F consists a fan, a fan subrack, a HPMI, and a CMUH. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02F.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
806
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-205 Exterior of a FAN 02F
(1) Fan
(2) HPMI
(3) CMUH
(4) Fan subrack
Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02F. Figure 4-206 Ports on a FAN 02F
(1) PMU_DB50
(2) OUT0
(3) OUT1
(4) IN0
(5) IN1
(6) IN2
(7) FUSE
(8) GATE
(9) TAM_BAT1
(10) IN3
(11) IN4
(12) SMOKE
(13) WATER
(14) TEM_HUM
(15) RUN
(16) ALM
(17) D_COM0
(18) D_COM1
(19) COM_OUT
(20) COM_IN
(21) ELU
(22) GATE
(23) IN0
(24) IN1
(25) IN2
(26) SMOKE
(27) FAN_EXT
(28) PWR
-
-
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
807
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
FAN 03B The FAN 03B dissipates heat and monitors temperature. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.C) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 03B which includes the fans, fan subrack, and FMUE. Figure 4-207 Exterior of a FAN 03B
(1) Fan
(2) Fan subrack
(3) FMUE
Functions The FAN 03B performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l
Monitors the temperature of fans.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Ports The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 03B.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
808
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-208 Ports on a FAN 03B
The following table describes the ports on a FAN 03B. Table 4-144 Ports on a FAN 03B Port Type
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
Power port
-48V
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communicatio n port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades the lower-level FMUE or EMU.
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects the BBU, upperlevel FMUE, or upperlevel GATM.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on the FMUE in a FAN 03B. Table 4-145 Indicators on the FMUE in a FAN 03B
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Indicato r
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUE.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUE.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
809
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicato r
Color
State
Meaning
ALM
Red
On for 1s and off for 1s
The module is reporting alarms.
Steady off
The module is not reporting alarms.
FAN 03C A FAN 03C dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. FAN 03C modules can be installed in BTS3900(Ver.D), BTS3900(Ver.D_A), BTS3900(Ver.D_B), BTS3012(Ver.D_Z), BTS3900L(Ver.D), and BTS3900L(Ver.D_B) cabinets.
Exterior A FAN 03C consists the fans, fan subrack, and FMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 03C. Figure 4-209 Exterior of a FAN 03C
(1) Fan
(2) Fan subrack
(3) FMUEA
Functions A FAN 03C performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from a cabinet.
l
Monitors temperature.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
810
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Ports The FAN 03C has two port types, as shown in Figure 4-210and Figure 4-211. Figure 4-210 Ports on a FAN 03C (1)
Figure 4-211 Ports on a FAN 03C (2)
The following table describes the ports on a FAN 03C. Table 4-146 Ports on a FAN 03C
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
(1)
Power port
-48V
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communica tion port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades a lowerlevel FMUEA, lowerlevel EMU, or lowerlevel PMU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
811
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Item
(2)
4 Component Description
Port
Silkscreen
Connector
Remarks
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects a BBU or upper-level FMUEA and cascades an upper-level GATM.
Power port
PWR
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the ELU.
Communica tion port
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades a lowerlevel FMUEA, lowerlevel EMU, or lowerlevel PMU.
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Connects a BBU or upper-level FMUEA and cascades an upper-level GATM.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a FAN 03C. Table 4-147 Indicators on a FAN 03C Indicato r
Color
Status
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the FAN 03C must be replaced.
ALM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
812
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Indicato r
4 Component Description
Color
Status
Meaning
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the FAN 03C.
FAU01D-01 An FAU01D-01 dissipates heat and monitors temperature. It can be used in an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet. The OMB (Ver.C) has two FAU01D-01s, located on the upper left and the lower left in an OMB. The inner air circulation fan is located on the upper left, and the outer air circulation fan is located on the lower left.
Exterior The following figure shows the FAU01D-01 exterior. Figure 4-212 FAU01D-01 exterior
(1) Barcode opening
FAU03D-01 An FAU03D-01 is a fan assembly in the RF compartment. It dissipates heat and detects temperature for a BTS3900AL(Ver.A).
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the FAU03D-01. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
813
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-213 Exterior of the FAU03D-01
Panel The following figure shows the FAU03D-01 panel. Figure 4-214 FAU03D-01 panel
Port The following table describes the ports on the FAU03D-01 panel. Table 4-148 Ports on the FAU03D-01 panel
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
No.
Port
Description
(1)
TEM0
Port for connecting to the temperature sensor
(2)
COM_OUT
RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information
(3)
COM_485
Port for connecting to the FAU03D-01 monitoring signal cable
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
814
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
No.
Port
Description
(4)
COM_IN
RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information
(5)
ELU
Port for connecting to the ELU to report the cabinet type
(8)
GATE
Reserved Boolean signal port
(9)
IN0
Reserved Boolean signal port
(10)
SMOKE
Reserved Boolean signal port
(11)
TEC
Reserved port for connecting to the TEC
(12)
PWR
Port for providing DC power for the FAU03D-01
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the FAU03D-01 panel. Table 4-149 Indicators on the FAU03D-01 panel No.
Silk scre en
Color
State
Meaning
(6)
RU N
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
The FAU03D-01 is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the FAU03D-01 must be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the FAU03D-01.
(7)
AL M
Red
Fan Assembly (FAU03D-02) An FAU03D-02 dissipates heat from the cabinet and monitors the temperature. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
815
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior An FAU03D-02 consists of the fans, fan subrack, and FMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of the FAU03D-02. Figure 4-215 Exterior of an FAU03D-02
Functions The FAU03D-02 performs the following functions: l
Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.
l
Monitors the temperature.
l
Adjusts fan speed based on the temperature.
l
Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.
Ports The following figure shows ports on the FAU03D-02.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
816
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-216 Ports on the FAU03D-02
The following table describes the ports on the FAU03D-02. Table 4-150 Ports on the FAU03D-02 Port Type
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Power supply port
PWR
3V3 connector
Supports -48 V DC power input.
Sensor port
SENSOR
RJ45 connector
Connects the temperature sensor at the air intake vent for BBUs to cascade the ELU through the RJ45 connector on the temperature sensor.
Communicatio n port
COM OUT
RJ45 connector
Cascades the lower-level FMUEA.
COM IN
RJ45 connector
Connects a BBU or upperlevel FMUEA.
Indicators The following table describes the indicators on the FAU03D-02. Table 4-151 Indicators on the FAU03D-02
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Indicato r
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The module is functional but fails to communicate with a BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The module is functional and is communicating with a BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
817
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Indicato r
ALM
Color
Red
Status
Description
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the fan assembly needs to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the fan assembly.
OMB Fans The OMB fans enable the ventilation and heat dissipation for the cabinet. The fans consist of the inner air circulation fan and outer air circulation fan. The inner air circulation fan is installed on the top left inside the OMB, and the outer air circulation fan is installed on the bottom left outside the OMB.
Appearance l
Figure 4-217 shows the inner air circulation fan. Figure 4-217 Inner air circulation fan
l
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Figure 4-218 shows the outer air circulation fan.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
818
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-218 Outer air circulation fan
4.6.2 (Optional) AC Heater An AC heater ensures that the customer equipment in a cabinet works within the acceptable temperature range. It is optionally installed in the customer space in an APM30H or TMC11H.
Exterior An AC heater is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of an AC heater. Figure 4-219 Exterior of an AC heater
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an AC heater. Table 4-152 Technical specifications of an AC heater
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Counter
Specification
The temperature of the AC heater starts working
< 1oC (±6oC)
The temperature of the AC heater stops working
> 15oC (±3oC)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
819
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Counter
Specification
Rated heating power
330 W
4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film When the operating temperature is lower than the temperature specifications of storage batteries, the storage battery capacity declines. In this case, heating films are installed to ensure that the storage batteries work in a proper temperature range. Heating films are optional and can be configured in an IBBS200D or IBBS20D.
Exterior The following table lists the configurations of AC- and DC-powered heating films in different cabinets. Table 4-153 Configurations of heating films Illustration
Cabinet
Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet
Description
Figure 4-220
l IBBS200D (Ver.B)
2
Two AC-powered heating films are installed on the upper and lower pallets of a cabinet.
l IBBS200D (Ver.C) l IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Figure 4-220
IBBS20D
1
One DC-powered heating film is installed on the pallet in the front door of a cabinet.
Figure 4-221
IBBS200D (Ver.E)
1
One AC-powered heating film is installed on the lower pallet of a cabinet.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
820
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-220 Exterior of a heating film (1)
Figure 4-221 Exterior of a heating film (2)
A: The 220 V AC power cable for a heating film consists of a brown L wire, a blue N wire, and a green and yellow PE wire.
B: The 110 V AC power cable for a heating film consists of a black L wire, a gray N wire, and a green PE wire.
Technical Specifications The following table lists technical specifications of an AC-powered heating film.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
821
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-154 Technical specifications of an AC-powered heating film Item
Specifications IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200D (Ver.D)
IBBS200D (Ver.E)
Dimensions
350 mm x 250 mm (13.78 in. x 9.84 in.)
526 mm x 333 mm x 28 mm (20.71 in. x 13.11 in. x 1.10 in.)
Cross-sectional area of a cable
18 AWG
l In most regions: 3x1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) l In other regions: 3x16 AWG
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film starts working
< 1°C±6°C (33.8°F±42.8°F)
< 0°C±6°C (32°F±42.8°F)
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film stops working
> 15°C±3°C (59°F±37.4°F)
> 15°C±3°C (59°F±37.4°F)
Rated heating power
100 W
280 W (maximum heating power)
Rated operating voltage
220 V AC
220 V AC or 110 V AC
The following table lists technical specifications of a DC-powered heating film. Table 4-155 Technical specifications of a DC-powered heating film
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions
195 mm x 120 mm (7.68 in. x 4.72 in.)
Cross-sectional area of a cable
22 AWG
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film starts working
< 0°C±0.5°C (32°F±32.9°F)
Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film stops working
> 15°C±0.5°C (59°F±32.9°F)
Rated heating power
90 W
Rated operating voltage
-48 V DC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
822
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T A TEC can refrigerate the air in a cabinet to ensure that it works properly when the temperature is high. It can be used in an IBBS200T or IBBS300T.
Exterior The TECs in an IBBS200T and an IBBS300T are both located on the doors of the cabinets. They have the same exterior. The following figure shows the TEC in an IBBS200T as an example. Figure 4-222 Exterior of the TEC in an IBBS200T
(1) Outer air circulation fan
(2) Inner air circulation fan
Technical Specifications The technical specifications of a TEC in an IBBS200T or IBBS300T are as follows: l
If there is a sun shield (no impact of solar radiation) and the ambient temperature is 50°C (122°F), the TEC ensures that the temperature in the cabinet is less than or equal to 40°C (104°F) when storage batteries are in float charge and less than or equal to 45°C (113°F) when the storage batteries are in boost charge.
l
If there is no sun shield and the ambient temperature is 50°C (122°F) with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2, the TEC ensures that the temperature in the cabinet is less than or equal to 45°C (113°F) when storage batteries are in float charge and less than or equal to 50°C (122°F) when the storage batteries are in boost charge.
l
When the ambient temperature is 32°C (89.6°F) and there is no temperature difference between the air intake vent at the hot side and that at the cold side of the TEC, the following conditions must be met:
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
823
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
–
For Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.D cabinets, the refrigeration power of the TEC is greater than or equal to 190 W±10% and the COP is greater than or equal to 0.5.
–
For a Ver.E cabinet, the refrigeration power of the TEC is greater than or equal to 250 W±5% and the COP is greater than or equal to 0.5.
4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T A IBBS700T TEC dissipates heat for the storage batteries and ensures the normal operation in high-temperature areas. It is installed in IBBS700T cabinet.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a IBBS700T TEC. Figure 4-223 Exterior of the TEC
Technical Specifications The technical specifications of a IBBS700T TEC are as follows: l
Obtains -48 V DC power from the power distribution box in the middle of the cabinet.
l
Provides the low-voltage disconnect (LVD) function. The LVD threshold is 44 V and the leakage current is less than 5 mA after the LVD.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
824
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.6.6 HAU01A-01 An HAU01A-01 is a heater. It ensures that the components in the cabinet work in a normal temperature when the ambient temperature is lower than the operating temperature. It can be used in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS300D, IBBS200D(Ver.E), or IBBS700D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the HAU01A-01. Figure 4-224 Exterior of the HAU01A-01
Panel The following figure shows the HAU01A-01 panel. Figure 4-225 HAU01A-01 panel
Port The following table describes the ports on the HAU01A-01 panel.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
825
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-156 Ports on the HAU01A-01 panel No.
Silkscree n
Item
Description
(2)
COM_IN
RS485 port for communicating with the upperlevel device
Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.
(3)
COM_OU T
RS485 port for communicating with the lowerlevel device
Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.
(4)
AC_IN
AC input
The 110 V AC and 220 V AC voltages are supported.
(5)
ALM_AL L
Alarm port
Monitors Boolean alarms. Boolean alarms consist of alarms related to the heater faults, including fan faults, board hardware faults, and temperature sensor faults.
(6)
TEST
Test button
Reserved
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the HAU01A-01 panel. Table 4-157 Indicators on the HAU01A-01 panel No.
Indica tor
Color
Status
Description
(1)
RUN
Green
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device. If the board has not communicated with the upper-level device for more than one minute, this situation is regarded as a communication failure.
Steady on
The board is in the power-on self-check status.
Steady off
The board is not powered on.
Steady off
No alarm is generated.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the heater needs to be replaced.
(7)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
ALM
Red
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
826
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly The outer air circulation assembly includes a heat exchanger core and a fan. The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. The fan dissipates heat from the cabinet. Outer air circulation assembly can be used in APM30H.
Exterior The outer air circulation assembly is installed in the door of the APM30H. The following figure shows the exterior of the outer air circulation assembly. Figure 4-226 Exterior of the outer air circulation assembly
(1) Heat exchanger core
(2) Fan
4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan The inner air circulation fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Inner air circulation fan can be used in IBBS700T. The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper part of the cabinet door. The following figure shows the exterior of the inner air circulation fan.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
827
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-227 Exterior of the inner air circulation fan
4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan The outer air circulation fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Outer air circulation fan can be used in IBBS700T. The outer air circulation fan is installed in the lower part of the cabinet door. The following figure shows the exterior of the outer air circulation fan.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
828
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-228 Exterior of the outer air circulation fan
4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame The fan mounting frame contains a fan, which accelerates the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet works within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly. A fan mounting frame can be installed in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS300D (Ver.A), IBBS20D, or IBBS700D.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D).
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
829
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-229 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
(1) Fan
(2) IBBS200D (Ver.B): CMUA
(2) IBBS200D (Ver.C): CMUE
(2) IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D): CMUH
The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-230 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
(1) Fan
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) CMUE
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
830
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Fan mounting frames in an IBBS200D (Ver.D), an IBBS200D (Ver.E), and an IBBS300D (Ver.A) have the same exteriors. The following figure shows an IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-231 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS20D. Figure 4-232 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
831
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS700D. Figure 4-233 Exterior of a fan mounting frame
Function A fan mounting frame performs the following functions: l
The fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly.
l
The monitoring board installed in a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), or IBBS300D (Ver.A) collects the alarm signals from the door status sensor, storage battery temperature sensor, fans, and smoke sensor in the cabinet, and reports these alarm signals to the PMU through an RS485 signal cable.
Signal Cable Delivered with a Fan Exterior An IBBS200D (Ver.B), an IBBS200D (Ver.C), an IBBS200D (Ver.D), and an IBBS300D (Ver.A) have signal cables delivered with them. The following figure shows the exterior of such a signal cable.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
832
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-234 Exterior of a signal cable delivered with a fan
NOTE
The signal cable delivered with a fan feeds power into the fan and transmits signals to a monitoring board.
Description The following table describes a signal cable delivered with the fan. Table 4-158 Description Cable
A End
Color
Description
W1
A.1
Red
Connects to the positive pole of the power supply.
W2
A.2
Yello w
Imports PWM speed-adjusting signals.
W3
A.3
Blue
Exports alarm or speed signals.
W4
A.4
Black
Connects to the negative pole of the power supply.
NOTE
The color of the signal cable delivered with a fan depends on the manufacturer.
4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Heat Exchanger Core can be used in APM30H (Ver.B). The heat exchanger core is installed in the door of the APM30H. The following figure shows the exterior of the heat exchanger core.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
833
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-235 Exterior of the heat exchanger core
4.7 Environment Monitoring Device This section describes environment monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the environment monitoring devices.
4.7.1 Door Status Sensor The door status sensor can monitor the status (open or closed) of a door. It can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB, OMB (Ver.C), APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.
Exterior A door status sensor consists of a magnet and a switch. The following figures show the exteriors of the magnet of a door status sensor.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
834
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-236 Exterior of the magnet of a door status sensor
(1) Shell of the magnet
(2) Magnet
The following figure shows the exterior of the switch of a door status sensor. Figure 4-237 Exterior of the switch of a door status sensor
Installation Positions The door status sensors in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS700D, and IBBS700T are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
835
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-238 Position of the door status sensor in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
The door status sensors in the OMB and OMB (Ver.C) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the OMB (Ver.C) as an example. Figure 4-239 Position of the door status sensor in the OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
836
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The door status sensors in the APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS20D, IBBS300D, and IBBS300T, are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-240 Position of the door status sensor in the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet
4.7.2 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor can monitor the temperature. It can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A), RFC, IBBS200T, IBBS200D, IBBS300T, IBBS300D, OMB (Ver.C), IBBS700T, IBBS700D, and IMS06.
Exterior In the following figure, illustration 1 shows the exterior of the temperature sensor in an IMS06 and illustration 2 shows the exterior of the temperature sensor in other cabinets.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
837
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-241 Exteriors of temperature sensors
(1) 2-pin connector
(2) Temperature sensor
(3) OT terminal (M6)
(4) 4-pin connector
Installation Positions The following figure shows the temperature sensor in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A). Figure 4-242 Position of the temperature sensor in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
838
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS700D. Figure 4-243 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS700D
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS700T.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
839
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-244 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS700T
The door status sensors in the RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), and RFC (Ver.E) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the RFC (Ver.D) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
840
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-245 Position of the temperature sensor in the RFC (Ver.D) cabinet
The temperature sensors in the IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.E) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows an IBBS200T (Ver.D) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
841
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-246 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS200T (Ver.D)
The temperature sensors in the IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.E) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows an IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
842
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-247 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS200D (Ver.D)
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS300T (Ver.A). Figure 4-248 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS300T (Ver.A)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
843
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS300D (Ver.A). Figure 4-249 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS300D (Ver.A)
The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an OMB (Ver.C). Figure 4-250 Position of the temperature sensor in the OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
844
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
NOTE
For cables of the temperature sensor in an OMB, see Monitoring Signal Cable for the OMB Fan Assembly.
The following figure shows the position of the temperature sensor in an IMS06. Figure 4-251 Position of the temperature sensor in the IMS06
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a temperature sensor. Table 4-159 Technical specifications of a temperature sensor Item
Specifications
Operating voltage
3.0 V DC to 5.5 V DC
Temperature measurement range
-55°C to +125°C (-67°F to 257°F)
Temperature measurement error
±2°C (±35.6°F)
4.7.3 (Optional) EMU The environment monitoring unit (EMU) monitors environment of the equipment room. It can be used in BTS3900 and BTS3900L. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
845
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
The EMU monitors environment of the equipment room through the connection between the signal cable and the main equipment. The EMU performs the following functions: l
Provides detection ports for the temperature sensor, humidity sensor, smoke sensor, water sensor, infrared alarm sensor, and door status sensor, as well as the extended Boolean value, analog values, and output control value.
l
Provides communication ports RS485 and RS232 connecting to the base station.
For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see EMU User Guide.
4.7.4 (Optional) EMUA/EMUB An environment monitoring unit type A/B (EMUA/EMUB) monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. It can be used in BTS3900AL(Ver.A), APM30H and TMC11H. An EMUA/EMUB is connected to the main equipment by using a monitoring signal cable. Through the connection, the EMUA/EMUB monitors the environment of the equipment room and cabinet. An EMUA/EMUB monitors the following: l
Environment, including the temperature, humidity, water, and smoke
l
Insertion (by using infrared and door status sensors)
l
Boolean signal monitoring
For detailed structure and functions of the EMUA, see EMUA User Guide. For detailed structure and functions of the EMUB, see EMUB User Guide.
4.8 Other Devices This section describes other devices besides power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, and temperature control devices, and environment monitoring devices, and types of cabinets supported by the other devices.
4.8.1 (Optional) GATM A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) controls the RET antenna, feeds power to the TMA, reports alarms about control signals of the RET antenna, and monitors the feeding current. A GATM is installed along with the DRFU.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a GATM. Figure 4-252 Exterior of a GATM
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
846
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Port The following table describes the ports and socket on a GATM. Table 4-160 Ports and socket on a GATM Silkscreen
Connector
Description
ANT0 to ANT5
SMA female connector
Feeds power into the TMA and transmits RET control signals.
COM1
RJ45 connector
Connects the GATM to the BBU.
COM2
RJ45 connector
Provides an extended RS485 port to be cascaded with other devices.
-48 V
3V3 connector
Receives -48 V power
Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a GATM. Table 4-161 Indicators on a GATM Indicator
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
On for 2s and off for 2s
The power input is normal but the communication with the BBU is abnormal.
On for 1s and off for 1s
The GATM is functional properly and communicates with the BBU properly.
Off
There is no power supply or the module is faulty.
On
The AISG link is normal.
Off
The AISG link is abnormal.
Irregularly fast blinking
There is transmission on the AISG link.
On
An overcurrent alarm about the module is generated.
Off
The module is working properly.
ACT
ALM
Green
Red
4.8.2 (Optional) WGRU A WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
847
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
signals along with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS positioning information. The WGRU is optional. It is installed in a dedicated case. Each base station can be configured with one WGRU.
Exterior Figure 4-253shows the exterior of a WGRU. Figure 4-254shows the exterior of a WGRU case. Figure 4-253 Exterior of a WGRU
Figure 4-254 Exterior of a WGRU case
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
848
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Panel There are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the WGRU, as shown in Figure 4-255. There is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear panel of the WGRU, as shown in Figure 4-256. Figure 4-255 Front panel of a WGRU
Figure 4-256 Rear panel of a WGRU
(1) Grounding bolt
Ports The following table describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. Table 4-162 Ports on the panel of the WGRU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Front panel
PPS1
RJ45 connector
Transmits PPS signals.
PPS2
RJ45 connector
Reserved.
COM1
RJ45 connector
Forwards GPS information and BBU interaction, management, and maintenance information.
COM2
RJ45 connector
Reserved.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
849
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
Location
4 Component Description
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
POWER
Two-hole male connector
Connects to the external power equipment.
ANT
Type N female connector
Connects to the GPS antenna system.
CLK1 CLK2 Rear panel
Indicators The following table describes the indicators. Table 4-163 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU Indicator
Color
State
Meaning
RUN
Green
Blinking (On for 1s and off for 1s)
The WGRU is running properly.
Steady on
There is power supply, but the WGRU is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the WGRU is faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is reported.
Steady on
An alarm is reported, indicating a fault during the operation.
Steady on
The WGRU has resolved the positioning information.
Steady off
The WGRU fails to resolve the positioning information.
ALM
ACT
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Red
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
850
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
4.8.3 ELU An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting. It applies to the following cabinets: BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IBC10,APM30H series cabinets, IBBS200D series cabinets, IBBS200T series cabinets, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ELU. Figure 4-257 Exterior of an ELU
(1) Housing
(2) RJ45 port
NOTE
The ELU in a BTS3900 or BTS3900L cabinet does not have a housing.
Installation Positions The following figure shows the position of an ELU in a cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
851
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-258 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900 cabinet
Figure 4-259 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900L cabinet
The ELU in an APM30H, TMC11H, or RFC is located on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The ELU in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T is located on the inner left wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows an APM30H and an IBBS200D as examples. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
852
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-260 Positions of the ELUs in an APM30H and an IBBS200D
Figure 4-261 Position of the ELU in an OMB
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
853
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-262 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900AL cabinet
Figure 4-263 Position of the ELU in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T cabinet
NOTE
l In the IBBS700D, the ELU is located above a CCU when a CCU is installed in the cabinet or on the right of the CMUEA when no CCU is installed in the cabinet. l In the IBBS700T, the ELU is located above a CCU when a CCU is installed in the cabinet or on the left of the CMUF when no CCU is installed in the cabinet.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
854
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-264 Position of the ELU in an IBC10
Figure 4-265 Position of the ELU in an IBBS20D
4.8.4 (Optional) SOU A service outlet unit (SOU) transfers AC power to the customer equipment. An SOU is optionally installed in the customer space in an APM30H. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
855
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Exterior An SOU is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of an SOU. Figure 4-266 Exterior of an SOU
(1) Input power port
(2) Breaker
(3) Socket (European standard)
An SOU applies to the four types of sockets meeting the following standards: North American standard, European standard, Universal standard, and British standard. The following figure shows the exteriors of the four types of sockets. Figure 4-267 Exteriors of different types of sockets
(1) North American standard
(2) European standard
(3) Universal standard
(4) British standard
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an SOU. Table 4-164 Technical specifications of an SOU
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Counter
Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D)
482.6 mm x 91 mm x 55 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.)
Weight
1.5 kg (3.31 lb)
Input voltage range
200 V AC to 240 V AC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
856
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Counter
Specification
Maximum input current
10 A
Output voltage range
200 V AC to 240 V AC
Maximum output current
10 A
Frequency band
50 Hz or 60 Hz
Operating temperature
-40oC to +55oC
Altitude
≤ 4000m NOTE Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1oC (33.8oF) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).
Protection class
IP20
4.8.5 (Optional) DDF A digital distribution frame (DDF) connects the trunk cables between communication devices and transmission equipment and also connects the communication devices and external alarm cables. A DDF is optionally installed in the customer space of the BTS3900AL, APM30H, and TMC11H cabinets.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DDF. Figure 4-268 Exterior of a DDF
(1) Alarm module
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
(2) Digital distribution module
(3) Wall mounting bracket
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
(4) Baffle plate
857
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A DDF performs the following functions: l
Supports the installation in a 19 inches rack and on a wall, and provides attachments for the installation.
l
Supports the transfer of eight E1 cables and 16 alarm cables.
l
Supports cabling from the front to facilitate the maintenance.
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DDF. Table 4-165 Technical specifications of a DDF Counter
Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D)
44 mm x 483 mm x 59 mm (1.73 in. x 19.02 in. x 2.32 in.)
Weight
1 kg (2.20 lb)
Working frequency
2 Mbit/s
Characteristic impedance
120 ohm
Inter-wire-bundle cross noise prevention class
≥ 60 dB
Insertion loss
≤ 0.4 dB
Return loss
≥ 18 dB
4.8.6 (Optional) Filler Module A filler module is a standard plastic component, which prevents heat reflux in the empty space below the BBU and improves the heat dissipation in the cabinet. Filler modules can be installed in the customer space of an APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), TMC11H(Ver.C), BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z).
Exterior A filler module is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of a filler module. Figure 4-269 Exterior of a filler module
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
858
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Function A filler module is installed in the customer space below the BBU to prevent heat reflux in the empty space below the BBU. NOTE
In an APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z)the filler module is configured in the customer space by default. Before installing other modules, first remove the filler module. For details about removing a filler module, see chapter "Installing Optional Modules and Cables" in the "Installation Guide".
4.8.7 ODM06D The outdoor distribution module DC 6 (ODM06D) is a power distribution box with the surge protection function. It supplies power to and provides surge protection for outdoor RRUs.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ODM06D. Figure 4-270 Exterior of an ODM06D
Functions The ODM06D performs the following functions: l
Provides surge protection for outdoor RRUs.
l
Provides one or two power inputs and six power outputs.
l
Supports a maximum of 100 A input current.
l
Reports the surge protection failure alarm.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
859
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Structure The following figure shows the structure of an ODM06D. Figure 4-271 Structure of an ODM06D
(1) Protective plate
(2) Cover
(3) Cable connector making label
(4) Circuit breaker
(5) Surge protector
(6) Cord end terminal bar
(7) Cable clip
-
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an ODM06D. Table 4-166 Technical specifications of an ODM06D Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
369 mm x 278.5 mm x 98.5 mm (14.53 in. x 10.96 in. x 3.88 in.)
Weight
4.0 kg (8.82 lb)
4.8.8 OFD06 The outdoor fiber distribution 6 (OFD06) distributes trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The OFD06 can be installed flexibly. For example, it can be installed on an outdoor wall, pole, or tower.
Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an OFD06. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
860
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Figure 4-272 Exterior of an OFD06
Port The following figure shows the ports and interior of an OFD06 Figure 4-273 Ports and interior of an OFD06
(1) Box
(2) Fiber optic cable distribution and storage area
(3) Fiber optic cable routed-in area
(4) Trunk fiber optic cable (connected to the indoor fiber distribution)
(5) Outdoor optical jumper (connected to RRUs)
Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an OFD06. Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
861
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
4 Component Description
Table 4-167 Technical specifications of an OFD06
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
270 mm x 278 mm x 100 mm (10.63in. x 10.94 in. x 3.94 in.)
Weight
2.5 kg (5.51 lb)
Input (core)
1 x 12 core
Output (core)
6 x 2 core (6 RRUs)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
862
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
5 Cable Description
5
Cable Description
For cable description in 3900 series base stations, see 3900 Series Base Station Cables. 3900 Series Base Station Cables describes the cable list, cable connections, and cable functions.
Issue 07 (2016-09-02)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
863
Related Documents
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description(07)(pdf)-en.pdf
October 2019 19
3900
December 2019 13
Base Station 2009 Review
December 2019 13
Base Station Distribution Sketches
May 2020 13
Huawei Base Station 3703
May 2020 6
Base Station Subsystem
June 2020 8More Documents from ""
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description(07)(pdf)-en.pdf
October 2019 19
New Microsoft Office Word Document.docx
December 2019 10
Occupational Stress.docx
December 2019 10
Proiect Cerinte.doc
May 2020 3
Engro Foods
June 2020 8